]> code.delx.au - gnu-emacs/blob - doc/lispintro/emacs-lisp-intro.texi
e80e6cf35af9370c8d364bd2d8e4195f162bd4de
[gnu-emacs] / doc / lispintro / emacs-lisp-intro.texi
1 \input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*-
2 @comment %**start of header
3 @setfilename ../../info/eintr
4 @c setfilename emacs-lisp-intro.info
5 @c sethtmlfilename emacs-lisp-intro.html
6 @settitle Programming in Emacs Lisp
7 @syncodeindex vr cp
8 @syncodeindex fn cp
9 @finalout
10
11 @c ---------
12 @c <<<< For hard copy printing, this file is now
13 @c set for smallbook, which works for all sizes
14 @c of paper, and with Postscript figures >>>>
15 @set smallbook
16 @ifset smallbook
17 @smallbook
18 @clear largebook
19 @end ifset
20 @set print-postscript-figures
21 @c set largebook
22 @c clear print-postscript-figures
23 @c ---------
24
25 @comment %**end of header
26
27 @c per rms and peterb, use 10pt fonts for the main text, mostly to
28 @c save on paper cost.
29 @c Do this inside @tex for now, so current makeinfo does not complain.
30 @tex
31 @ifset smallbook
32 @fonttextsize 10
33
34 @end ifset
35 \global\hbadness=6666 % don't worry about not-too-underfull boxes
36 @end tex
37
38 @set edition-number 3.10
39 @set update-date 28 October 2009
40
41 @ignore
42 ## Summary of shell commands to create various output formats:
43
44 pushd /usr/local/src/emacs/lispintro/
45 ## pushd /u/intro/
46
47 ## Info output
48 makeinfo --paragraph-indent=0 --verbose emacs-lisp-intro.texi
49
50 ## ;; (progn (when (bufferp (get-buffer "*info*")) (kill-buffer "*info*")) (info "/usr/local/src/emacs/info/eintr"))
51
52 ## DVI output
53 texi2dvi emacs-lisp-intro.texi
54
55 ## xdvi -margins 24pt -topmargin 4pt -offsets 24pt -geometry 760x1140 -s 5 -useTeXpages -mousemode 1 emacs-lisp-intro.dvi &
56
57 ## HTML output
58 makeinfo --html --no-split --verbose emacs-lisp-intro.texi
59
60 ## galeon emacs-lisp-intro.html
61
62 ## Plain text output
63 makeinfo --fill-column=70 --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
64 --verbose --no-headers --output=emacs-lisp-intro.txt emacs-lisp-intro.texi
65
66 popd
67
68 # as user `root'
69 # insert thumbdrive
70 mtusb # mount -v -t ext3 /dev/sda /mnt
71 cp -v /u/intro/emacs-lisp-intro.texi /mnt/backup/intro/emacs-lisp-intro.texi
72 umtusb # umount -v /mnt
73 # remove thumbdrive
74
75 ## Other shell commands
76
77 pushd /usr/local/src/emacs/lispintro/
78 ## pushd /u/intro/
79
80 ## PDF
81 texi2dvi --pdf emacs-lisp-intro.texi
82 # xpdf emacs-lisp-intro.pdf &
83
84 ## DocBook -- note file extension
85 makeinfo --docbook --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
86 --verbose --output=emacs-lisp-intro.docbook emacs-lisp-intro.texi
87
88 ## XML with a Texinfo DTD -- note file extension
89 makeinfo --xml --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
90 --verbose --output=emacs-lisp-intro.texinfoxml emacs-lisp-intro.texi
91
92 ## PostScript (needs DVI)
93 # gv emacs-lisp-intro.ps &
94 # Create DVI if we lack it
95 # texi2dvi emacs-lisp-intro.texi
96 dvips emacs-lisp-intro.dvi -o emacs-lisp-intro.ps
97
98 ## RTF (needs HTML)
99 # Use OpenOffice to view RTF
100 # Create HTML if we lack it
101 # makeinfo --no-split --html emacs-lisp-intro.texi
102 /usr/local/src/html2rtf.pl emacs-lisp-intro.html
103
104 ## LaTeX (needs RTF)
105 /usr/bin/rtf2latex emacs-lisp-intro.rtf
106
107 popd
108
109 @end ignore
110
111 @c ================ Included Figures ================
112
113 @c Set print-postscript-figures if you print PostScript figures.
114 @c If you clear this, the ten figures will be printed as ASCII diagrams.
115 @c (This is not relevant to Info, since Info only handles ASCII.)
116 @c Your site may require editing changes to print PostScript; in this
117 @c case, search for `print-postscript-figures' and make appropriate changes.
118
119 @c ================ How to Create an Info file ================
120
121 @c If you have `makeinfo' installed, run the following command
122
123 @c makeinfo emacs-lisp-intro.texi
124
125 @c or, if you want a single, large Info file, and no paragraph indents:
126 @c makeinfo --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 --verbose emacs-lisp-intro.texi
127
128 @c After creating the Info file, edit your Info `dir' file, if the
129 @c `dircategory' section below does not enable your system to
130 @c install the manual automatically.
131 @c (The `dir' file is often in the `/usr/local/share/info/' directory.)
132
133 @c ================ How to Create an HTML file ================
134
135 @c To convert to HTML format
136 @c makeinfo --html --no-split --verbose emacs-lisp-intro.texi
137
138 @c ================ How to Print a Book in Various Sizes ================
139
140 @c This book can be printed in any of three different sizes.
141 @c In the above header, set @-commands appropriately.
142
143 @c 7 by 9.25 inches:
144 @c @smallbook
145 @c @clear largebook
146
147 @c 8.5 by 11 inches:
148 @c @c smallbook
149 @c @set largebook
150
151 @c European A4 size paper:
152 @c @c smallbook
153 @c @afourpaper
154 @c @set largebook
155
156 @c ================ How to Typeset and Print ================
157
158 @c If you do not include PostScript figures, run either of the
159 @c following command sequences, or similar commands suited to your
160 @c system:
161
162 @c texi2dvi emacs-lisp-intro.texi
163 @c lpr -d emacs-lisp-intro.dvi
164
165 @c or else:
166
167 @c tex emacs-lisp-intro.texi
168 @c texindex emacs-lisp-intro.??
169 @c tex emacs-lisp-intro.texi
170 @c lpr -d emacs-lisp-intro.dvi
171
172 @c If you include the PostScript figures, and you have old software,
173 @c you may need to convert the .dvi file to a .ps file before
174 @c printing. Run either of the following command sequences, or one
175 @c similar:
176 @c
177 @c dvips -f < emacs-lisp-intro.dvi > emacs-lisp-intro.ps
178 @c
179 @c or else:
180 @c
181 @c postscript -p < emacs-lisp-intro.dvi > emacs-lisp-intro.ps
182 @c
183
184 @c (Note: if you edit the book so as to change the length of the
185 @c table of contents, you may have to change the value of `pageno' below.)
186
187 @c ================ End of Formatting Sections ================
188
189 @c For next or subsequent edition:
190 @c create function using with-output-to-temp-buffer
191 @c create a major mode, with keymaps
192 @c run an asynchronous process, like grep or diff
193
194 @c For 8.5 by 11 inch format: do not use such a small amount of
195 @c whitespace between paragraphs as smallbook format
196 @ifset largebook
197 @tex
198 \global\parskip 6pt plus 1pt
199 @end tex
200 @end ifset
201
202 @c For all sized formats: print within-book cross
203 @c reference with ``...'' rather than [...]
204
205 @c This works with the texinfo.tex file, version 2003-05-04.08,
206 @c in the Texinfo version 4.6 of the 2003 Jun 13 distribution.
207
208 @tex
209 \if \xrefprintnodename
210 \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{\unskip, ``#1''}
211 \else
212 \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{ ``#1''}
213 \fi
214 % \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{, ``#1''}
215 @end tex
216
217 @c ----------------------------------------------------
218
219 @dircategory Emacs
220 @direntry
221 * Emacs Lisp Intro: (eintr).
222 A simple introduction to Emacs Lisp programming.
223 @end direntry
224
225 @copying
226 This is an @cite{Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp}, for
227 people who are not programmers.
228 @sp 1
229 Edition @value{edition-number}, @value{update-date}
230 @sp 1
231 Copyright @copyright{} 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1997, 2001,
232 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011
233 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
234 @sp 1
235
236 @iftex
237 Published by the:@*
238
239 GNU Press, @hfill @uref{http://www.gnupress.org}@*
240 a division of the @hfill General: @email{press@@gnu.org}@*
241 Free Software Foundation, Inc. @hfill Orders:@w{ } @email{sales@@gnu.org}@*
242 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor @hfill Tel: +1 (617) 542-5942@*
243 Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA @hfill Fax: +1 (617) 542-2652@*
244 @end iftex
245
246 @ifnottex
247 Published by the:
248
249 @example
250 GNU Press, Website: http://www.gnupress.org
251 a division of the General: press@@gnu.org
252 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Orders: sales@@gnu.org
253 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor Tel: +1 (617) 542-5942
254 Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Fax: +1 (617) 542-2652
255 @end example
256 @end ifnottex
257
258 @sp 1
259 @c Printed copies are available for $30 each.@*
260 ISBN 1-882114-43-4
261
262 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
263 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
264 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; there
265 being no Invariant Section, with the Front-Cover Texts being ``A GNU
266 Manual'', and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of
267 the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free
268 Documentation License''.
269
270 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have the freedom to
271 copy and modify this GNU manual. Buying copies from the FSF
272 supports it in developing GNU and promoting software freedom.''
273 @end copying
274
275 @c half title; two lines here, so do not use `shorttitlepage'
276 @tex
277 {\begingroup%
278 \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{An Introduction to}%
279 \endgroup}%
280 {\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 0.25in \chaprm%
281 \centerline{Programming in Emacs Lisp}%
282 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
283 @end tex
284
285 @titlepage
286 @sp 6
287 @center @titlefont{An Introduction to}
288 @sp 2
289 @center @titlefont{Programming in Emacs Lisp}
290 @sp 2
291 @center Revised Third Edition
292 @sp 4
293 @center by Robert J. Chassell
294
295 @page
296 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
297 @insertcopying
298 @end titlepage
299
300 @iftex
301 @headings off
302 @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thischapter
303 @oddheading @thissection @| @| @thispage
304 @end iftex
305
306 @ifnothtml
307 @c Keep T.O.C. short by tightening up for largebook
308 @ifset largebook
309 @tex
310 \global\parskip 2pt plus 1pt
311 \global\advance\baselineskip by -1pt
312 @end tex
313 @end ifset
314 @end ifnothtml
315
316 @shortcontents
317 @contents
318
319 @ifnottex
320 @node Top, Preface, (dir), (dir)
321 @top An Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp
322
323 @insertcopying
324
325 This master menu first lists each chapter and index; then it lists
326 every node in every chapter.
327 @end ifnottex
328
329 @c >>>> Set pageno appropriately <<<<
330
331 @c The first page of the Preface is a roman numeral; it is the first
332 @c right handed page after the Table of Contents; hence the following
333 @c setting must be for an odd negative number.
334
335 @c iftex
336 @c global@pageno = -11
337 @c end iftex
338
339 @menu
340 * Preface:: What to look for.
341 * List Processing:: What is Lisp?
342 * Practicing Evaluation:: Running several programs.
343 * Writing Defuns:: How to write function definitions.
344 * Buffer Walk Through:: Exploring a few buffer-related functions.
345 * More Complex:: A few, even more complex functions.
346 * Narrowing & Widening:: Restricting your and Emacs attention to
347 a region.
348 * car cdr & cons:: Fundamental functions in Lisp.
349 * Cutting & Storing Text:: Removing text and saving it.
350 * List Implementation:: How lists are implemented in the computer.
351 * Yanking:: Pasting stored text.
352 * Loops & Recursion:: How to repeat a process.
353 * Regexp Search:: Regular expression searches.
354 * Counting Words:: A review of repetition and regexps.
355 * Words in a defun:: Counting words in a @code{defun}.
356 * Readying a Graph:: A prototype graph printing function.
357 * Emacs Initialization:: How to write a @file{.emacs} file.
358 * Debugging:: How to run the Emacs Lisp debuggers.
359 * Conclusion:: Now you have the basics.
360 * the-the:: An appendix: how to find reduplicated words.
361 * Kill Ring:: An appendix: how the kill ring works.
362 * Full Graph:: How to create a graph with labelled axes.
363 * Free Software and Free Manuals::
364 * GNU Free Documentation License::
365 * Index::
366 * About the Author::
367
368 @detailmenu
369 --- The Detailed Node Listing ---
370
371 Preface
372
373 * Why:: Why learn Emacs Lisp?
374 * On Reading this Text:: Read, gain familiarity, pick up habits....
375 * Who You Are:: For whom this is written.
376 * Lisp History::
377 * Note for Novices:: You can read this as a novice.
378 * Thank You::
379
380 List Processing
381
382 * Lisp Lists:: What are lists?
383 * Run a Program:: Any list in Lisp is a program ready to run.
384 * Making Errors:: Generating an error message.
385 * Names & Definitions:: Names of symbols and function definitions.
386 * Lisp Interpreter:: What the Lisp interpreter does.
387 * Evaluation:: Running a program.
388 * Variables:: Returning a value from a variable.
389 * Arguments:: Passing information to a function.
390 * set & setq:: Setting the value of a variable.
391 * Summary:: The major points.
392 * Error Message Exercises::
393
394 Lisp Lists
395
396 * Numbers Lists:: List have numbers, other lists, in them.
397 * Lisp Atoms:: Elemental entities.
398 * Whitespace in Lists:: Formatting lists to be readable.
399 * Typing Lists:: How GNU Emacs helps you type lists.
400
401 The Lisp Interpreter
402
403 * Complications:: Variables, Special forms, Lists within.
404 * Byte Compiling:: Specially processing code for speed.
405
406 Evaluation
407
408 * How the Interpreter Acts:: Returns and Side Effects...
409 * Evaluating Inner Lists:: Lists within lists...
410
411 Variables
412
413 * fill-column Example::
414 * Void Function:: The error message for a symbol
415 without a function.
416 * Void Variable:: The error message for a symbol without a value.
417
418 Arguments
419
420 * Data types:: Types of data passed to a function.
421 * Args as Variable or List:: An argument can be the value
422 of a variable or list.
423 * Variable Number of Arguments:: Some functions may take a
424 variable number of arguments.
425 * Wrong Type of Argument:: Passing an argument of the wrong type
426 to a function.
427 * message:: A useful function for sending messages.
428
429 Setting the Value of a Variable
430
431 * Using set:: Setting values.
432 * Using setq:: Setting a quoted value.
433 * Counting:: Using @code{setq} to count.
434
435 Practicing Evaluation
436
437 * How to Evaluate:: Typing editing commands or @kbd{C-x C-e}
438 causes evaluation.
439 * Buffer Names:: Buffers and files are different.
440 * Getting Buffers:: Getting a buffer itself, not merely its name.
441 * Switching Buffers:: How to change to another buffer.
442 * Buffer Size & Locations:: Where point is located and the size of
443 the buffer.
444 * Evaluation Exercise::
445
446 How To Write Function Definitions
447
448 * Primitive Functions::
449 * defun:: The @code{defun} special form.
450 * Install:: Install a function definition.
451 * Interactive:: Making a function interactive.
452 * Interactive Options:: Different options for @code{interactive}.
453 * Permanent Installation:: Installing code permanently.
454 * let:: Creating and initializing local variables.
455 * if:: What if?
456 * else:: If--then--else expressions.
457 * Truth & Falsehood:: What Lisp considers false and true.
458 * save-excursion:: Keeping track of point, mark, and buffer.
459 * Review::
460 * defun Exercises::
461
462 Install a Function Definition
463
464 * Effect of installation::
465 * Change a defun:: How to change a function definition.
466
467 Make a Function Interactive
468
469 * Interactive multiply-by-seven:: An overview.
470 * multiply-by-seven in detail:: The interactive version.
471
472 @code{let}
473
474 * Prevent confusion::
475 * Parts of let Expression::
476 * Sample let Expression::
477 * Uninitialized let Variables::
478
479 The @code{if} Special Form
480
481 * if in more detail::
482 * type-of-animal in detail:: An example of an @code{if} expression.
483
484 Truth and Falsehood in Emacs Lisp
485
486 * nil explained:: @code{nil} has two meanings.
487
488 @code{save-excursion}
489
490 * Point and mark:: A review of various locations.
491 * Template for save-excursion::
492
493 A Few Buffer--Related Functions
494
495 * Finding More:: How to find more information.
496 * simplified-beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
497 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
498 * mark-whole-buffer:: Almost the same as @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
499 * append-to-buffer:: Uses @code{save-excursion} and
500 @code{insert-buffer-substring}.
501 * Buffer Related Review:: Review.
502 * Buffer Exercises::
503
504 The Definition of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
505
506 * mark-whole-buffer overview::
507 * Body of mark-whole-buffer:: Only three lines of code.
508
509 The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}
510
511 * append-to-buffer overview::
512 * append interactive:: A two part interactive expression.
513 * append-to-buffer body:: Incorporates a @code{let} expression.
514 * append save-excursion:: How the @code{save-excursion} works.
515
516 A Few More Complex Functions
517
518 * copy-to-buffer:: With @code{set-buffer}, @code{get-buffer-create}.
519 * insert-buffer:: Read-only, and with @code{or}.
520 * beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
521 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
522 * Second Buffer Related Review::
523 * optional Exercise::
524
525 The Definition of @code{insert-buffer}
526
527 * insert-buffer code::
528 * insert-buffer interactive:: When you can read, but not write.
529 * insert-buffer body:: The body has an @code{or} and a @code{let}.
530 * if & or:: Using an @code{if} instead of an @code{or}.
531 * Insert or:: How the @code{or} expression works.
532 * Insert let:: Two @code{save-excursion} expressions.
533 * New insert-buffer::
534
535 The Interactive Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
536
537 * Read-only buffer:: When a buffer cannot be modified.
538 * b for interactive:: An existing buffer or else its name.
539
540 Complete Definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
541
542 * Optional Arguments::
543 * beginning-of-buffer opt arg:: Example with optional argument.
544 * beginning-of-buffer complete::
545
546 @code{beginning-of-buffer} with an Argument
547
548 * Disentangle beginning-of-buffer::
549 * Large buffer case::
550 * Small buffer case::
551
552 Narrowing and Widening
553
554 * Narrowing advantages:: The advantages of narrowing
555 * save-restriction:: The @code{save-restriction} special form.
556 * what-line:: The number of the line that point is on.
557 * narrow Exercise::
558
559 @code{car}, @code{cdr}, @code{cons}: Fundamental Functions
560
561 * Strange Names:: An historical aside: why the strange names?
562 * car & cdr:: Functions for extracting part of a list.
563 * cons:: Constructing a list.
564 * nthcdr:: Calling @code{cdr} repeatedly.
565 * nth::
566 * setcar:: Changing the first element of a list.
567 * setcdr:: Changing the rest of a list.
568 * cons Exercise::
569
570 @code{cons}
571
572 * Build a list::
573 * length:: How to find the length of a list.
574
575 Cutting and Storing Text
576
577 * Storing Text:: Text is stored in a list.
578 * zap-to-char:: Cutting out text up to a character.
579 * kill-region:: Cutting text out of a region.
580 * copy-region-as-kill:: A definition for copying text.
581 * Digression into C:: Minor note on C programming language macros.
582 * defvar:: How to give a variable an initial value.
583 * cons & search-fwd Review::
584 * search Exercises::
585
586 @code{zap-to-char}
587
588 * Complete zap-to-char:: The complete implementation.
589 * zap-to-char interactive:: A three part interactive expression.
590 * zap-to-char body:: A short overview.
591 * search-forward:: How to search for a string.
592 * progn:: The @code{progn} special form.
593 * Summing up zap-to-char:: Using @code{point} and @code{search-forward}.
594
595 @code{kill-region}
596
597 * Complete kill-region:: The function definition.
598 * condition-case:: Dealing with a problem.
599 * Lisp macro::
600
601 @code{copy-region-as-kill}
602
603 * Complete copy-region-as-kill:: The complete function definition.
604 * copy-region-as-kill body:: The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}.
605
606 The Body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}
607
608 * last-command & this-command::
609 * kill-append function::
610 * kill-new function::
611
612 Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
613
614 * See variable current value::
615 * defvar and asterisk::
616
617 How Lists are Implemented
618
619 * Lists diagrammed::
620 * Symbols as Chest:: Exploring a powerful metaphor.
621 * List Exercise::
622
623 Yanking Text Back
624
625 * Kill Ring Overview::
626 * kill-ring-yank-pointer:: The kill ring is a list.
627 * yank nthcdr Exercises:: The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
628
629 Loops and Recursion
630
631 * while:: Causing a stretch of code to repeat.
632 * dolist dotimes::
633 * Recursion:: Causing a function to call itself.
634 * Looping exercise::
635
636 @code{while}
637
638 * Looping with while:: Repeat so long as test returns true.
639 * Loop Example:: A @code{while} loop that uses a list.
640 * print-elements-of-list:: Uses @code{while}, @code{car}, @code{cdr}.
641 * Incrementing Loop:: A loop with an incrementing counter.
642 * Incrementing Loop Details::
643 * Decrementing Loop:: A loop with a decrementing counter.
644
645 Details of an Incrementing Loop
646
647 * Incrementing Example:: Counting pebbles in a triangle.
648 * Inc Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
649 * Inc Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
650
651 Loop with a Decrementing Counter
652
653 * Decrementing Example:: More pebbles on the beach.
654 * Dec Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
655 * Dec Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
656
657 Save your time: @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
658
659 * dolist::
660 * dotimes::
661
662 Recursion
663
664 * Building Robots:: Same model, different serial number ...
665 * Recursive Definition Parts:: Walk until you stop ...
666 * Recursion with list:: Using a list as the test whether to recurse.
667 * Recursive triangle function::
668 * Recursion with cond::
669 * Recursive Patterns:: Often used templates.
670 * No Deferment:: Don't store up work ...
671 * No deferment solution::
672
673 Recursion in Place of a Counter
674
675 * Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2::
676 * Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4::
677
678 Recursive Patterns
679
680 * Every::
681 * Accumulate::
682 * Keep::
683
684 Regular Expression Searches
685
686 * sentence-end:: The regular expression for @code{sentence-end}.
687 * re-search-forward:: Very similar to @code{search-forward}.
688 * forward-sentence:: A straightforward example of regexp search.
689 * forward-paragraph:: A somewhat complex example.
690 * etags:: How to create your own @file{TAGS} table.
691 * Regexp Review::
692 * re-search Exercises::
693
694 @code{forward-sentence}
695
696 * Complete forward-sentence::
697 * fwd-sentence while loops:: Two @code{while} loops.
698 * fwd-sentence re-search:: A regular expression search.
699
700 @code{forward-paragraph}: a Goldmine of Functions
701
702 * forward-paragraph in brief:: Key parts of the function definition.
703 * fwd-para let:: The @code{let*} expression.
704 * fwd-para while:: The forward motion @code{while} loop.
705
706 Counting: Repetition and Regexps
707 @set COUNT-WORDS count-words-example
708 @c Length of variable name chosen so that things still line up when expanded.
709
710 * Why Count Words::
711 * @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: Use a regexp, but find a problem.
712 * recursive-count-words:: Start with case of no words in region.
713 * Counting Exercise::
714
715 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} Function
716
717 * Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: The definition using a @code{while} loop.
718 * Whitespace Bug:: The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
719
720 Counting Words in a @code{defun}
721
722 * Divide and Conquer::
723 * Words and Symbols:: What to count?
724 * Syntax:: What constitutes a word or symbol?
725 * count-words-in-defun:: Very like @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
726 * Several defuns:: Counting several defuns in a file.
727 * Find a File:: Do you want to look at a file?
728 * lengths-list-file:: A list of the lengths of many definitions.
729 * Several files:: Counting in definitions in different files.
730 * Several files recursively:: Recursively counting in different files.
731 * Prepare the data:: Prepare the data for display in a graph.
732
733 Count Words in @code{defuns} in Different Files
734
735 * lengths-list-many-files:: Return a list of the lengths of defuns.
736 * append:: Attach one list to another.
737
738 Prepare the Data for Display in a Graph
739
740 * Data for Display in Detail::
741 * Sorting:: Sorting lists.
742 * Files List:: Making a list of files.
743 * Counting function definitions::
744
745 Readying a Graph
746
747 * Columns of a graph::
748 * graph-body-print:: How to print the body of a graph.
749 * recursive-graph-body-print::
750 * Printed Axes::
751 * Line Graph Exercise::
752
753 Your @file{.emacs} File
754
755 * Default Configuration::
756 * Site-wide Init:: You can write site-wide init files.
757 * defcustom:: Emacs will write code for you.
758 * Beginning a .emacs File:: How to write a @code{.emacs file}.
759 * Text and Auto-fill:: Automatically wrap lines.
760 * Mail Aliases:: Use abbreviations for email addresses.
761 * Indent Tabs Mode:: Don't use tabs with @TeX{}
762 * Keybindings:: Create some personal keybindings.
763 * Keymaps:: More about key binding.
764 * Loading Files:: Load (i.e., evaluate) files automatically.
765 * Autoload:: Make functions available.
766 * Simple Extension:: Define a function; bind it to a key.
767 * X11 Colors:: Colors in X.
768 * Miscellaneous::
769 * Mode Line:: How to customize your mode line.
770
771 Debugging
772
773 * debug:: How to use the built-in debugger.
774 * debug-on-entry:: Start debugging when you call a function.
775 * debug-on-quit:: Start debugging when you quit with @kbd{C-g}.
776 * edebug:: How to use Edebug, a source level debugger.
777 * Debugging Exercises::
778
779 Handling the Kill Ring
780
781 * What the Kill Ring Does::
782 * current-kill::
783 * yank:: Paste a copy of a clipped element.
784 * yank-pop:: Insert element pointed to.
785 * ring file::
786
787 The @code{current-kill} Function
788
789 * Code for current-kill::
790 * Understanding current-kill::
791
792 @code{current-kill} in Outline
793
794 * Body of current-kill::
795 * Digression concerning error:: How to mislead humans, but not computers.
796 * Determining the Element::
797
798 A Graph with Labelled Axes
799
800 * Labelled Example::
801 * print-graph Varlist:: @code{let} expression in @code{print-graph}.
802 * print-Y-axis:: Print a label for the vertical axis.
803 * print-X-axis:: Print a horizontal label.
804 * Print Whole Graph:: The function to print a complete graph.
805
806 The @code{print-Y-axis} Function
807
808 * print-Y-axis in Detail::
809 * Height of label:: What height for the Y axis?
810 * Compute a Remainder:: How to compute the remainder of a division.
811 * Y Axis Element:: Construct a line for the Y axis.
812 * Y-axis-column:: Generate a list of Y axis labels.
813 * print-Y-axis Penultimate:: A not quite final version.
814
815 The @code{print-X-axis} Function
816
817 * Similarities differences:: Much like @code{print-Y-axis}, but not exactly.
818 * X Axis Tic Marks:: Create tic marks for the horizontal axis.
819
820 Printing the Whole Graph
821
822 * The final version:: A few changes.
823 * Test print-graph:: Run a short test.
824 * Graphing words in defuns:: Executing the final code.
825 * lambda:: How to write an anonymous function.
826 * mapcar:: Apply a function to elements of a list.
827 * Another Bug:: Yet another bug @dots{} most insidious.
828 * Final printed graph:: The graph itself!
829
830 @end detailmenu
831 @end menu
832
833 @node Preface, List Processing, Top, Top
834 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
835 @unnumbered Preface
836
837 Most of the GNU Emacs integrated environment is written in the programming
838 language called Emacs Lisp. The code written in this programming
839 language is the software---the sets of instructions---that tell the
840 computer what to do when you give it commands. Emacs is designed so
841 that you can write new code in Emacs Lisp and easily install it as an
842 extension to the editor.
843
844 (GNU Emacs is sometimes called an ``extensible editor'', but it does
845 much more than provide editing capabilities. It is better to refer to
846 Emacs as an ``extensible computing environment''. However, that
847 phrase is quite a mouthful. It is easier to refer to Emacs simply as
848 an editor. Moreover, everything you do in Emacs---find the Mayan date
849 and phases of the moon, simplify polynomials, debug code, manage
850 files, read letters, write books---all these activities are kinds of
851 editing in the most general sense of the word.)
852
853 @menu
854 * Why:: Why learn Emacs Lisp?
855 * On Reading this Text:: Read, gain familiarity, pick up habits....
856 * Who You Are:: For whom this is written.
857 * Lisp History::
858 * Note for Novices:: You can read this as a novice.
859 * Thank You::
860 @end menu
861
862 @node Why, On Reading this Text, Preface, Preface
863 @ifnottex
864 @unnumberedsec Why Study Emacs Lisp?
865 @end ifnottex
866
867 Although Emacs Lisp is usually thought of in association only with Emacs,
868 it is a full computer programming language. You can use Emacs Lisp as
869 you would any other programming language.
870
871 Perhaps you want to understand programming; perhaps you want to extend
872 Emacs; or perhaps you want to become a programmer. This introduction to
873 Emacs Lisp is designed to get you started: to guide you in learning the
874 fundamentals of programming, and more importantly, to show you how you
875 can teach yourself to go further.
876
877 @node On Reading this Text, Who You Are, Why, Preface
878 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
879 @unnumberedsec On Reading this Text
880
881 All through this document, you will see little sample programs you can
882 run inside of Emacs. If you read this document in Info inside of GNU
883 Emacs, you can run the programs as they appear. (This is easy to do and
884 is explained when the examples are presented.) Alternatively, you can
885 read this introduction as a printed book while sitting beside a computer
886 running Emacs. (This is what I like to do; I like printed books.) If
887 you don't have a running Emacs beside you, you can still read this book,
888 but in this case, it is best to treat it as a novel or as a travel guide
889 to a country not yet visited: interesting, but not the same as being
890 there.
891
892 Much of this introduction is dedicated to walk-throughs or guided tours
893 of code used in GNU Emacs. These tours are designed for two purposes:
894 first, to give you familiarity with real, working code (code you use
895 every day); and, second, to give you familiarity with the way Emacs
896 works. It is interesting to see how a working environment is
897 implemented.
898 Also, I
899 hope that you will pick up the habit of browsing through source code.
900 You can learn from it and mine it for ideas. Having GNU Emacs is like
901 having a dragon's cave of treasures.
902
903 In addition to learning about Emacs as an editor and Emacs Lisp as a
904 programming language, the examples and guided tours will give you an
905 opportunity to get acquainted with Emacs as a Lisp programming
906 environment. GNU Emacs supports programming and provides tools that
907 you will want to become comfortable using, such as @kbd{M-.} (the key
908 which invokes the @code{find-tag} command). You will also learn about
909 buffers and other objects that are part of the environment.
910 Learning about these features of Emacs is like learning new routes
911 around your home town.
912
913 @ignore
914 In addition, I have written several programs as extended examples.
915 Although these are examples, the programs are real. I use them.
916 Other people use them. You may use them. Beyond the fragments of
917 programs used for illustrations, there is very little in here that is
918 `just for teaching purposes'; what you see is used. This is a great
919 advantage of Emacs Lisp: it is easy to learn to use it for work.
920 @end ignore
921
922 Finally, I hope to convey some of the skills for using Emacs to
923 learn aspects of programming that you don't know. You can often use
924 Emacs to help you understand what puzzles you or to find out how to do
925 something new. This self-reliance is not only a pleasure, but an
926 advantage.
927
928 @node Who You Are, Lisp History, On Reading this Text, Preface
929 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
930 @unnumberedsec For Whom This is Written
931
932 This text is written as an elementary introduction for people who are
933 not programmers. If you are a programmer, you may not be satisfied with
934 this primer. The reason is that you may have become expert at reading
935 reference manuals and be put off by the way this text is organized.
936
937 An expert programmer who reviewed this text said to me:
938
939 @quotation
940 @i{I prefer to learn from reference manuals. I ``dive into'' each
941 paragraph, and ``come up for air'' between paragraphs.}
942
943 @i{When I get to the end of a paragraph, I assume that that subject is
944 done, finished, that I know everything I need (with the
945 possible exception of the case when the next paragraph starts talking
946 about it in more detail). I expect that a well written reference manual
947 will not have a lot of redundancy, and that it will have excellent
948 pointers to the (one) place where the information I want is.}
949 @end quotation
950
951 This introduction is not written for this person!
952
953 Firstly, I try to say everything at least three times: first, to
954 introduce it; second, to show it in context; and third, to show it in a
955 different context, or to review it.
956
957 Secondly, I hardly ever put all the information about a subject in one
958 place, much less in one paragraph. To my way of thinking, that imposes
959 too heavy a burden on the reader. Instead I try to explain only what
960 you need to know at the time. (Sometimes I include a little extra
961 information so you won't be surprised later when the additional
962 information is formally introduced.)
963
964 When you read this text, you are not expected to learn everything the
965 first time. Frequently, you need only make, as it were, a `nodding
966 acquaintance' with some of the items mentioned. My hope is that I have
967 structured the text and given you enough hints that you will be alert to
968 what is important, and concentrate on it.
969
970 You will need to ``dive into'' some paragraphs; there is no other way
971 to read them. But I have tried to keep down the number of such
972 paragraphs. This book is intended as an approachable hill, rather than
973 as a daunting mountain.
974
975 This introduction to @cite{Programming in Emacs Lisp} has a companion
976 document,
977 @iftex
978 @cite{The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
979 @end iftex
980 @ifnottex
981 @ref{Top, , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual, elisp, The GNU
982 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
983 @end ifnottex
984 The reference manual has more detail than this introduction. In the
985 reference manual, all the information about one topic is concentrated
986 in one place. You should turn to it if you are like the programmer
987 quoted above. And, of course, after you have read this
988 @cite{Introduction}, you will find the @cite{Reference Manual} useful
989 when you are writing your own programs.
990
991 @node Lisp History, Note for Novices, Who You Are, Preface
992 @unnumberedsec Lisp History
993 @cindex Lisp history
994
995 Lisp was first developed in the late 1950s at the Massachusetts
996 Institute of Technology for research in artificial intelligence. The
997 great power of the Lisp language makes it superior for other purposes as
998 well, such as writing editor commands and integrated environments.
999
1000 @cindex Maclisp
1001 @cindex Common Lisp
1002 GNU Emacs Lisp is largely inspired by Maclisp, which was written at MIT
1003 in the 1960s. It is somewhat inspired by Common Lisp, which became a
1004 standard in the 1980s. However, Emacs Lisp is much simpler than Common
1005 Lisp. (The standard Emacs distribution contains an optional extensions
1006 file, @file{cl.el}, that adds many Common Lisp features to Emacs Lisp.)
1007
1008 @node Note for Novices, Thank You, Lisp History, Preface
1009 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1010 @unnumberedsec A Note for Novices
1011
1012 If you don't know GNU Emacs, you can still read this document
1013 profitably. However, I recommend you learn Emacs, if only to learn to
1014 move around your computer screen. You can teach yourself how to use
1015 Emacs with the on-line tutorial. To use it, type @kbd{C-h t}. (This
1016 means you press and release the @key{CTRL} key and the @kbd{h} at the
1017 same time, and then press and release @kbd{t}.)
1018
1019 Also, I often refer to one of Emacs' standard commands by listing the
1020 keys which you press to invoke the command and then giving the name of
1021 the command in parentheses, like this: @kbd{M-C-\}
1022 (@code{indent-region}). What this means is that the
1023 @code{indent-region} command is customarily invoked by typing
1024 @kbd{M-C-\}. (You can, if you wish, change the keys that are typed to
1025 invoke the command; this is called @dfn{rebinding}. @xref{Keymaps, ,
1026 Keymaps}.) The abbreviation @kbd{M-C-\} means that you type your
1027 @key{META} key, @key{CTRL} key and @key{\} key all at the same time.
1028 (On many modern keyboards the @key{META} key is labelled
1029 @key{ALT}.)
1030 Sometimes a combination like this is called a keychord, since it is
1031 similar to the way you play a chord on a piano. If your keyboard does
1032 not have a @key{META} key, the @key{ESC} key prefix is used in place
1033 of it. In this case, @kbd{M-C-\} means that you press and release your
1034 @key{ESC} key and then type the @key{CTRL} key and the @key{\} key at
1035 the same time. But usually @kbd{M-C-\} means press the @key{CTRL} key
1036 along with the key that is labelled @key{ALT} and, at the same time,
1037 press the @key{\} key.
1038
1039 In addition to typing a lone keychord, you can prefix what you type
1040 with @kbd{C-u}, which is called the `universal argument'. The
1041 @kbd{C-u} keychord passes an argument to the subsequent command.
1042 Thus, to indent a region of plain text by 6 spaces, mark the region,
1043 and then type @w{@kbd{C-u 6 M-C-\}}. (If you do not specify a number,
1044 Emacs either passes the number 4 to the command or otherwise runs the
1045 command differently than it would otherwise.) @xref{Arguments, ,
1046 Numeric Arguments, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
1047
1048 If you are reading this in Info using GNU Emacs, you can read through
1049 this whole document just by pressing the space bar, @key{SPC}.
1050 (To learn about Info, type @kbd{C-h i} and then select Info.)
1051
1052 A note on terminology: when I use the word Lisp alone, I often am
1053 referring to the various dialects of Lisp in general, but when I speak
1054 of Emacs Lisp, I am referring to GNU Emacs Lisp in particular.
1055
1056 @node Thank You, , Note for Novices, Preface
1057 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1058 @unnumberedsec Thank You
1059
1060 My thanks to all who helped me with this book. My especial thanks to
1061 @r{Jim Blandy}, @r{Noah Friedman}, @w{Jim Kingdon}, @r{Roland
1062 McGrath}, @w{Frank Ritter}, @w{Randy Smith}, @w{Richard M.@:
1063 Stallman}, and @w{Melissa Weisshaus}. My thanks also go to both
1064 @w{Philip Johnson} and @w{David Stampe} for their patient
1065 encouragement. My mistakes are my own.
1066
1067 @flushright
1068 Robert J. Chassell
1069 @email{bob@@gnu.org}
1070 @end flushright
1071
1072 @c ================ Beginning of main text ================
1073
1074 @c Start main text on right-hand (verso) page
1075
1076 @tex
1077 \par\vfill\supereject
1078 \headings off
1079 \ifodd\pageno
1080 \par\vfill\supereject
1081 \else
1082 \par\vfill\supereject
1083 \page\hbox{}\page
1084 \par\vfill\supereject
1085 \fi
1086 @end tex
1087
1088 @iftex
1089 @headings off
1090 @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thischapter
1091 @oddheading @thissection @| @| @thispage
1092 @global@pageno = 1
1093 @end iftex
1094
1095 @node List Processing, Practicing Evaluation, Preface, Top
1096 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1097 @chapter List Processing
1098
1099 To the untutored eye, Lisp is a strange programming language. In Lisp
1100 code there are parentheses everywhere. Some people even claim that
1101 the name stands for `Lots of Isolated Silly Parentheses'. But the
1102 claim is unwarranted. Lisp stands for LISt Processing, and the
1103 programming language handles @emph{lists} (and lists of lists) by
1104 putting them between parentheses. The parentheses mark the boundaries
1105 of the list. Sometimes a list is preceded by a single apostrophe or
1106 quotation mark, @samp{'}@footnote{The single apostrophe or quotation
1107 mark is an abbreviation for the function @code{quote}; you need not
1108 think about functions now; functions are defined in @ref{Making
1109 Errors, , Generate an Error Message}.} Lists are the basis of Lisp.
1110
1111 @menu
1112 * Lisp Lists:: What are lists?
1113 * Run a Program:: Any list in Lisp is a program ready to run.
1114 * Making Errors:: Generating an error message.
1115 * Names & Definitions:: Names of symbols and function definitions.
1116 * Lisp Interpreter:: What the Lisp interpreter does.
1117 * Evaluation:: Running a program.
1118 * Variables:: Returning a value from a variable.
1119 * Arguments:: Passing information to a function.
1120 * set & setq:: Setting the value of a variable.
1121 * Summary:: The major points.
1122 * Error Message Exercises::
1123 @end menu
1124
1125 @node Lisp Lists, Run a Program, List Processing, List Processing
1126 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1127 @section Lisp Lists
1128 @cindex Lisp Lists
1129
1130 In Lisp, a list looks like this: @code{'(rose violet daisy buttercup)}.
1131 This list is preceded by a single apostrophe. It could just as well be
1132 written as follows, which looks more like the kind of list you are likely
1133 to be familiar with:
1134
1135 @smallexample
1136 @group
1137 '(rose
1138 violet
1139 daisy
1140 buttercup)
1141 @end group
1142 @end smallexample
1143
1144 @noindent
1145 The elements of this list are the names of the four different flowers,
1146 separated from each other by whitespace and surrounded by parentheses,
1147 like flowers in a field with a stone wall around them.
1148 @cindex Flowers in a field
1149
1150 @menu
1151 * Numbers Lists:: List have numbers, other lists, in them.
1152 * Lisp Atoms:: Elemental entities.
1153 * Whitespace in Lists:: Formatting lists to be readable.
1154 * Typing Lists:: How GNU Emacs helps you type lists.
1155 @end menu
1156
1157 @node Numbers Lists, Lisp Atoms, Lisp Lists, Lisp Lists
1158 @ifnottex
1159 @unnumberedsubsec Numbers, Lists inside of Lists
1160 @end ifnottex
1161
1162 Lists can also have numbers in them, as in this list: @code{(+ 2 2)}.
1163 This list has a plus-sign, @samp{+}, followed by two @samp{2}s, each
1164 separated by whitespace.
1165
1166 In Lisp, both data and programs are represented the same way; that is,
1167 they are both lists of words, numbers, or other lists, separated by
1168 whitespace and surrounded by parentheses. (Since a program looks like
1169 data, one program may easily serve as data for another; this is a very
1170 powerful feature of Lisp.) (Incidentally, these two parenthetical
1171 remarks are @emph{not} Lisp lists, because they contain @samp{;} and
1172 @samp{.} as punctuation marks.)
1173
1174 @need 1200
1175 Here is another list, this time with a list inside of it:
1176
1177 @smallexample
1178 '(this list has (a list inside of it))
1179 @end smallexample
1180
1181 The components of this list are the words @samp{this}, @samp{list},
1182 @samp{has}, and the list @samp{(a list inside of it)}. The interior
1183 list is made up of the words @samp{a}, @samp{list}, @samp{inside},
1184 @samp{of}, @samp{it}.
1185
1186 @node Lisp Atoms, Whitespace in Lists, Numbers Lists, Lisp Lists
1187 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1188 @subsection Lisp Atoms
1189 @cindex Lisp Atoms
1190
1191 In Lisp, what we have been calling words are called @dfn{atoms}. This
1192 term comes from the historical meaning of the word atom, which means
1193 `indivisible'. As far as Lisp is concerned, the words we have been
1194 using in the lists cannot be divided into any smaller parts and still
1195 mean the same thing as part of a program; likewise with numbers and
1196 single character symbols like @samp{+}. On the other hand, unlike an
1197 ancient atom, a list can be split into parts. (@xref{car cdr & cons,
1198 , @code{car} @code{cdr} & @code{cons} Fundamental Functions}.)
1199
1200 In a list, atoms are separated from each other by whitespace. They can be
1201 right next to a parenthesis.
1202
1203 @cindex @samp{empty list} defined
1204 Technically speaking, a list in Lisp consists of parentheses surrounding
1205 atoms separated by whitespace or surrounding other lists or surrounding
1206 both atoms and other lists. A list can have just one atom in it or
1207 have nothing in it at all. A list with nothing in it looks like this:
1208 @code{()}, and is called the @dfn{empty list}. Unlike anything else, an
1209 empty list is considered both an atom and a list at the same time.
1210
1211 @cindex Symbolic expressions, introduced
1212 @cindex @samp{expression} defined
1213 @cindex @samp{form} defined
1214 The printed representation of both atoms and lists are called
1215 @dfn{symbolic expressions} or, more concisely, @dfn{s-expressions}.
1216 The word @dfn{expression} by itself can refer to either the printed
1217 representation, or to the atom or list as it is held internally in the
1218 computer. Often, people use the term @dfn{expression}
1219 indiscriminately. (Also, in many texts, the word @dfn{form} is used
1220 as a synonym for expression.)
1221
1222 Incidentally, the atoms that make up our universe were named such when
1223 they were thought to be indivisible; but it has been found that physical
1224 atoms are not indivisible. Parts can split off an atom or it can
1225 fission into two parts of roughly equal size. Physical atoms were named
1226 prematurely, before their truer nature was found. In Lisp, certain
1227 kinds of atom, such as an array, can be separated into parts; but the
1228 mechanism for doing this is different from the mechanism for splitting a
1229 list. As far as list operations are concerned, the atoms of a list are
1230 unsplittable.
1231
1232 As in English, the meanings of the component letters of a Lisp atom
1233 are different from the meaning the letters make as a word. For
1234 example, the word for the South American sloth, the @samp{ai}, is
1235 completely different from the two words, @samp{a}, and @samp{i}.
1236
1237 There are many kinds of atom in nature but only a few in Lisp: for
1238 example, @dfn{numbers}, such as 37, 511, or 1729, and @dfn{symbols}, such
1239 as @samp{+}, @samp{foo}, or @samp{forward-line}. The words we have
1240 listed in the examples above are all symbols. In everyday Lisp
1241 conversation, the word ``atom'' is not often used, because programmers
1242 usually try to be more specific about what kind of atom they are dealing
1243 with. Lisp programming is mostly about symbols (and sometimes numbers)
1244 within lists. (Incidentally, the preceding three word parenthetical
1245 remark is a proper list in Lisp, since it consists of atoms, which in
1246 this case are symbols, separated by whitespace and enclosed by
1247 parentheses, without any non-Lisp punctuation.)
1248
1249 @need 1250
1250 Text between double quotation marks---even sentences or
1251 paragraphs---is also an atom. Here is an example:
1252 @cindex Text between double quotation marks
1253
1254 @smallexample
1255 '(this list includes "text between quotation marks.")
1256 @end smallexample
1257
1258 @cindex @samp{string} defined
1259 @noindent
1260 In Lisp, all of the quoted text including the punctuation mark and the
1261 blank spaces is a single atom. This kind of atom is called a
1262 @dfn{string} (for `string of characters') and is the sort of thing that
1263 is used for messages that a computer can print for a human to read.
1264 Strings are a different kind of atom than numbers or symbols and are
1265 used differently.
1266
1267 @node Whitespace in Lists, Typing Lists, Lisp Atoms, Lisp Lists
1268 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1269 @subsection Whitespace in Lists
1270 @cindex Whitespace in lists
1271
1272 @need 1200
1273 The amount of whitespace in a list does not matter. From the point of view
1274 of the Lisp language,
1275
1276 @smallexample
1277 @group
1278 '(this list
1279 looks like this)
1280 @end group
1281 @end smallexample
1282
1283 @need 800
1284 @noindent
1285 is exactly the same as this:
1286
1287 @smallexample
1288 '(this list looks like this)
1289 @end smallexample
1290
1291 Both examples show what to Lisp is the same list, the list made up of
1292 the symbols @samp{this}, @samp{list}, @samp{looks}, @samp{like}, and
1293 @samp{this} in that order.
1294
1295 Extra whitespace and newlines are designed to make a list more readable
1296 by humans. When Lisp reads the expression, it gets rid of all the extra
1297 whitespace (but it needs to have at least one space between atoms in
1298 order to tell them apart.)
1299
1300 Odd as it seems, the examples we have seen cover almost all of what Lisp
1301 lists look like! Every other list in Lisp looks more or less like one
1302 of these examples, except that the list may be longer and more complex.
1303 In brief, a list is between parentheses, a string is between quotation
1304 marks, a symbol looks like a word, and a number looks like a number.
1305 (For certain situations, square brackets, dots and a few other special
1306 characters may be used; however, we will go quite far without them.)
1307
1308 @node Typing Lists, , Whitespace in Lists, Lisp Lists
1309 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1310 @subsection GNU Emacs Helps You Type Lists
1311 @cindex Help typing lists
1312 @cindex Formatting help
1313
1314 When you type a Lisp expression in GNU Emacs using either Lisp
1315 Interaction mode or Emacs Lisp mode, you have available to you several
1316 commands to format the Lisp expression so it is easy to read. For
1317 example, pressing the @key{TAB} key automatically indents the line the
1318 cursor is on by the right amount. A command to properly indent the
1319 code in a region is customarily bound to @kbd{M-C-\}. Indentation is
1320 designed so that you can see which elements of a list belong to which
1321 list---elements of a sub-list are indented more than the elements of
1322 the enclosing list.
1323
1324 In addition, when you type a closing parenthesis, Emacs momentarily
1325 jumps the cursor back to the matching opening parenthesis, so you can
1326 see which one it is. This is very useful, since every list you type
1327 in Lisp must have its closing parenthesis match its opening
1328 parenthesis. (@xref{Major Modes, , Major Modes, emacs, The GNU Emacs
1329 Manual}, for more information about Emacs' modes.)
1330
1331 @node Run a Program, Making Errors, Lisp Lists, List Processing
1332 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1333 @section Run a Program
1334 @cindex Run a program
1335 @cindex Program, running one
1336
1337 @cindex @samp{evaluate} defined
1338 A list in Lisp---any list---is a program ready to run. If you run it
1339 (for which the Lisp jargon is @dfn{evaluate}), the computer will do one
1340 of three things: do nothing except return to you the list itself; send
1341 you an error message; or, treat the first symbol in the list as a
1342 command to do something. (Usually, of course, it is the last of these
1343 three things that you really want!)
1344
1345 @c use code for the single apostrophe, not samp.
1346 The single apostrophe, @code{'}, that I put in front of some of the
1347 example lists in preceding sections is called a @dfn{quote}; when it
1348 precedes a list, it tells Lisp to do nothing with the list, other than
1349 take it as it is written. But if there is no quote preceding a list,
1350 the first item of the list is special: it is a command for the computer
1351 to obey. (In Lisp, these commands are called @emph{functions}.) The list
1352 @code{(+ 2 2)} shown above did not have a quote in front of it, so Lisp
1353 understands that the @code{+} is an instruction to do something with the
1354 rest of the list: add the numbers that follow.
1355
1356 @need 1250
1357 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs in Info, here is how you can
1358 evaluate such a list: place your cursor immediately after the right
1359 hand parenthesis of the following list and then type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1360
1361 @smallexample
1362 (+ 2 2)
1363 @end smallexample
1364
1365 @c use code for the number four, not samp.
1366 @noindent
1367 You will see the number @code{4} appear in the echo area. (In the
1368 jargon, what you have just done is ``evaluate the list.'' The echo area
1369 is the line at the bottom of the screen that displays or ``echoes''
1370 text.) Now try the same thing with a quoted list: place the cursor
1371 right after the following list and type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1372
1373 @smallexample
1374 '(this is a quoted list)
1375 @end smallexample
1376
1377 @noindent
1378 You will see @code{(this is a quoted list)} appear in the echo area.
1379
1380 @cindex Lisp interpreter, explained
1381 @cindex Interpreter, Lisp, explained
1382 In both cases, what you are doing is giving a command to the program
1383 inside of GNU Emacs called the @dfn{Lisp interpreter}---giving the
1384 interpreter a command to evaluate the expression. The name of the Lisp
1385 interpreter comes from the word for the task done by a human who comes
1386 up with the meaning of an expression---who ``interprets'' it.
1387
1388 You can also evaluate an atom that is not part of a list---one that is
1389 not surrounded by parentheses; again, the Lisp interpreter translates
1390 from the humanly readable expression to the language of the computer.
1391 But before discussing this (@pxref{Variables}), we will discuss what the
1392 Lisp interpreter does when you make an error.
1393
1394 @node Making Errors, Names & Definitions, Run a Program, List Processing
1395 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1396 @section Generate an Error Message
1397 @cindex Generate an error message
1398 @cindex Error message generation
1399
1400 Partly so you won't worry if you do it accidentally, we will now give
1401 a command to the Lisp interpreter that generates an error message.
1402 This is a harmless activity; and indeed, we will often try to generate
1403 error messages intentionally. Once you understand the jargon, error
1404 messages can be informative. Instead of being called ``error''
1405 messages, they should be called ``help'' messages. They are like
1406 signposts to a traveller in a strange country; deciphering them can be
1407 hard, but once understood, they can point the way.
1408
1409 The error message is generated by a built-in GNU Emacs debugger. We
1410 will `enter the debugger'. You get out of the debugger by typing @code{q}.
1411
1412 What we will do is evaluate a list that is not quoted and does not
1413 have a meaningful command as its first element. Here is a list almost
1414 exactly the same as the one we just used, but without the single-quote
1415 in front of it. Position the cursor right after it and type @kbd{C-x
1416 C-e}:
1417
1418 @smallexample
1419 (this is an unquoted list)
1420 @end smallexample
1421
1422 @noindent
1423 What you see depends on which version of Emacs you are running. GNU
1424 Emacs version 22 provides more information than version 20 and before.
1425 First, the more recent result of generating an error; then the
1426 earlier, version 20 result.
1427
1428 @need 1250
1429 @noindent
1430 In GNU Emacs version 22, a @file{*Backtrace*} window will open up and
1431 you will see the following in it:
1432
1433 @smallexample
1434 @group
1435 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1436 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)
1437 (this is an unquoted list)
1438 eval((this is an unquoted list))
1439 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1440 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1441 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1442 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1443 @end group
1444 @end smallexample
1445
1446 @need 1200
1447 @noindent
1448 Your cursor will be in this window (you may have to wait a few seconds
1449 before it becomes visible). To quit the debugger and make the
1450 debugger window go away, type:
1451
1452 @smallexample
1453 q
1454 @end smallexample
1455
1456 @noindent
1457 Please type @kbd{q} right now, so you become confident that you can
1458 get out of the debugger. Then, type @kbd{C-x C-e} again to re-enter
1459 it.
1460
1461 @cindex @samp{function} defined
1462 Based on what we already know, we can almost read this error message.
1463
1464 You read the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer from the bottom up; it tells
1465 you what Emacs did. When you typed @kbd{C-x C-e}, you made an
1466 interactive call to the command @code{eval-last-sexp}. @code{eval} is
1467 an abbreviation for `evaluate' and @code{sexp} is an abbreviation for
1468 `symbolic expression'. The command means `evaluate last symbolic
1469 expression', which is the expression just before your cursor.
1470
1471 Each line above tells you what the Lisp interpreter evaluated next.
1472 The most recent action is at the top. The buffer is called the
1473 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer because it enables you to track Emacs
1474 backwards.
1475
1476 @need 800
1477 At the top of the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer, you see the line:
1478
1479 @smallexample
1480 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)
1481 @end smallexample
1482
1483 @noindent
1484 The Lisp interpreter tried to evaluate the first atom of the list, the
1485 word @samp{this}. It is this action that generated the error message
1486 @samp{void-function this}.
1487
1488 The message contains the words @samp{void-function} and @samp{this}.
1489
1490 @cindex @samp{function} defined
1491 The word @samp{function} was mentioned once before. It is a very
1492 important word. For our purposes, we can define it by saying that a
1493 @dfn{function} is a set of instructions to the computer that tell the
1494 computer to do something.
1495
1496 Now we can begin to understand the error message: @samp{void-function
1497 this}. The function (that is, the word @samp{this}) does not have a
1498 definition of any set of instructions for the computer to carry out.
1499
1500 The slightly odd word, @samp{void-function}, is designed to cover the
1501 way Emacs Lisp is implemented, which is that when a symbol does not
1502 have a function definition attached to it, the place that should
1503 contain the instructions is `void'.
1504
1505 On the other hand, since we were able to add 2 plus 2 successfully, by
1506 evaluating @code{(+ 2 2)}, we can infer that the symbol @code{+} must
1507 have a set of instructions for the computer to obey and those
1508 instructions must be to add the numbers that follow the @code{+}.
1509
1510 @need 1250
1511 In GNU Emacs version 20, and in earlier versions, you will see only
1512 one line of error message; it will appear in the echo area and look
1513 like this:
1514
1515 @smallexample
1516 Symbol's function definition is void:@: this
1517 @end smallexample
1518
1519 @noindent
1520 (Also, your terminal may beep at you---some do, some don't; and others
1521 blink. This is just a device to get your attention.) The message goes
1522 away as soon as you type another key, even just to move the cursor.
1523
1524 We know the meaning of the word @samp{Symbol}. It refers to the first
1525 atom of the list, the word @samp{this}. The word @samp{function}
1526 refers to the instructions that tell the computer what to do.
1527 (Technically, the symbol tells the computer where to find the
1528 instructions, but this is a complication we can ignore for the
1529 moment.)
1530
1531 The error message can be understood: @samp{Symbol's function
1532 definition is void:@: this}. The symbol (that is, the word
1533 @samp{this}) lacks instructions for the computer to carry out.
1534
1535 @node Names & Definitions, Lisp Interpreter, Making Errors, List Processing
1536 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1537 @section Symbol Names and Function Definitions
1538 @cindex Symbol names
1539
1540 We can articulate another characteristic of Lisp based on what we have
1541 discussed so far---an important characteristic: a symbol, like
1542 @code{+}, is not itself the set of instructions for the computer to
1543 carry out. Instead, the symbol is used, perhaps temporarily, as a way
1544 of locating the definition or set of instructions. What we see is the
1545 name through which the instructions can be found. Names of people
1546 work the same way. I can be referred to as @samp{Bob}; however, I am
1547 not the letters @samp{B}, @samp{o}, @samp{b} but am, or was, the
1548 consciousness consistently associated with a particular life-form.
1549 The name is not me, but it can be used to refer to me.
1550
1551 In Lisp, one set of instructions can be attached to several names.
1552 For example, the computer instructions for adding numbers can be
1553 linked to the symbol @code{plus} as well as to the symbol @code{+}
1554 (and are in some dialects of Lisp). Among humans, I can be referred
1555 to as @samp{Robert} as well as @samp{Bob} and by other words as well.
1556
1557 On the other hand, a symbol can have only one function definition
1558 attached to it at a time. Otherwise, the computer would be confused as
1559 to which definition to use. If this were the case among people, only
1560 one person in the world could be named @samp{Bob}. However, the function
1561 definition to which the name refers can be changed readily.
1562 (@xref{Install, , Install a Function Definition}.)
1563
1564 Since Emacs Lisp is large, it is customary to name symbols in a way
1565 that identifies the part of Emacs to which the function belongs.
1566 Thus, all the names for functions that deal with Texinfo start with
1567 @samp{texinfo-} and those for functions that deal with reading mail
1568 start with @samp{rmail-}.
1569
1570 @node Lisp Interpreter, Evaluation, Names & Definitions, List Processing
1571 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1572 @section The Lisp Interpreter
1573 @cindex Lisp interpreter, what it does
1574 @cindex Interpreter, what it does
1575
1576 Based on what we have seen, we can now start to figure out what the
1577 Lisp interpreter does when we command it to evaluate a list.
1578 First, it looks to see whether there is a quote before the list; if
1579 there is, the interpreter just gives us the list. On the other
1580 hand, if there is no quote, the interpreter looks at the first element
1581 in the list and sees whether it has a function definition. If it does,
1582 the interpreter carries out the instructions in the function definition.
1583 Otherwise, the interpreter prints an error message.
1584
1585 This is how Lisp works. Simple. There are added complications which we
1586 will get to in a minute, but these are the fundamentals. Of course, to
1587 write Lisp programs, you need to know how to write function definitions
1588 and attach them to names, and how to do this without confusing either
1589 yourself or the computer.
1590
1591 @menu
1592 * Complications:: Variables, Special forms, Lists within.
1593 * Byte Compiling:: Specially processing code for speed.
1594 @end menu
1595
1596 @node Complications, Byte Compiling, Lisp Interpreter, Lisp Interpreter
1597 @ifnottex
1598 @unnumberedsubsec Complications
1599 @end ifnottex
1600
1601 Now, for the first complication. In addition to lists, the Lisp
1602 interpreter can evaluate a symbol that is not quoted and does not have
1603 parentheses around it. The Lisp interpreter will attempt to determine
1604 the symbol's value as a @dfn{variable}. This situation is described
1605 in the section on variables. (@xref{Variables}.)
1606
1607 @cindex Special form
1608 The second complication occurs because some functions are unusual and do
1609 not work in the usual manner. Those that don't are called @dfn{special
1610 forms}. They are used for special jobs, like defining a function, and
1611 there are not many of them. In the next few chapters, you will be
1612 introduced to several of the more important special forms.
1613
1614 The third and final complication is this: if the function that the
1615 Lisp interpreter is looking at is not a special form, and if it is part
1616 of a list, the Lisp interpreter looks to see whether the list has a list
1617 inside of it. If there is an inner list, the Lisp interpreter first
1618 figures out what it should do with the inside list, and then it works on
1619 the outside list. If there is yet another list embedded inside the
1620 inner list, it works on that one first, and so on. It always works on
1621 the innermost list first. The interpreter works on the innermost list
1622 first, to evaluate the result of that list. The result may be
1623 used by the enclosing expression.
1624
1625 Otherwise, the interpreter works left to right, from one expression to
1626 the next.
1627
1628 @node Byte Compiling, , Complications, Lisp Interpreter
1629 @subsection Byte Compiling
1630 @cindex Byte compiling
1631
1632 One other aspect of interpreting: the Lisp interpreter is able to
1633 interpret two kinds of entity: humanly readable code, on which we will
1634 focus exclusively, and specially processed code, called @dfn{byte
1635 compiled} code, which is not humanly readable. Byte compiled code
1636 runs faster than humanly readable code.
1637
1638 You can transform humanly readable code into byte compiled code by
1639 running one of the compile commands such as @code{byte-compile-file}.
1640 Byte compiled code is usually stored in a file that ends with a
1641 @file{.elc} extension rather than a @file{.el} extension. You will
1642 see both kinds of file in the @file{emacs/lisp} directory; the files
1643 to read are those with @file{.el} extensions.
1644
1645 As a practical matter, for most things you might do to customize or
1646 extend Emacs, you do not need to byte compile; and I will not discuss
1647 the topic here. @xref{Byte Compilation, , Byte Compilation, elisp,
1648 The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a full description of byte
1649 compilation.
1650
1651 @node Evaluation, Variables, Lisp Interpreter, List Processing
1652 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1653 @section Evaluation
1654 @cindex Evaluation
1655
1656 When the Lisp interpreter works on an expression, the term for the
1657 activity is called @dfn{evaluation}. We say that the interpreter
1658 `evaluates the expression'. I've used this term several times before.
1659 The word comes from its use in everyday language, `to ascertain the
1660 value or amount of; to appraise', according to @cite{Webster's New
1661 Collegiate Dictionary}.
1662
1663 @menu
1664 * How the Interpreter Acts:: Returns and Side Effects...
1665 * Evaluating Inner Lists:: Lists within lists...
1666 @end menu
1667
1668 @node How the Interpreter Acts, Evaluating Inner Lists, Evaluation, Evaluation
1669 @ifnottex
1670 @unnumberedsubsec How the Lisp Interpreter Acts
1671 @end ifnottex
1672
1673 @cindex @samp{returned value} explained
1674 After evaluating an expression, the Lisp interpreter will most likely
1675 @dfn{return} the value that the computer produces by carrying out the
1676 instructions it found in the function definition, or perhaps it will
1677 give up on that function and produce an error message. (The interpreter
1678 may also find itself tossed, so to speak, to a different function or it
1679 may attempt to repeat continually what it is doing for ever and ever in
1680 what is called an `infinite loop'. These actions are less common; and
1681 we can ignore them.) Most frequently, the interpreter returns a value.
1682
1683 @cindex @samp{side effect} defined
1684 At the same time the interpreter returns a value, it may do something
1685 else as well, such as move a cursor or copy a file; this other kind of
1686 action is called a @dfn{side effect}. Actions that we humans think are
1687 important, such as printing results, are often ``side effects'' to the
1688 Lisp interpreter. The jargon can sound peculiar, but it turns out that
1689 it is fairly easy to learn to use side effects.
1690
1691 In summary, evaluating a symbolic expression most commonly causes the
1692 Lisp interpreter to return a value and perhaps carry out a side effect;
1693 or else produce an error.
1694
1695 @node Evaluating Inner Lists, , How the Interpreter Acts, Evaluation
1696 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1697 @subsection Evaluating Inner Lists
1698 @cindex Inner list evaluation
1699 @cindex Evaluating inner lists
1700
1701 If evaluation applies to a list that is inside another list, the outer
1702 list may use the value returned by the first evaluation as information
1703 when the outer list is evaluated. This explains why inner expressions
1704 are evaluated first: the values they return are used by the outer
1705 expressions.
1706
1707 @need 1250
1708 We can investigate this process by evaluating another addition example.
1709 Place your cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1710
1711 @smallexample
1712 (+ 2 (+ 3 3))
1713 @end smallexample
1714
1715 @noindent
1716 The number 8 will appear in the echo area.
1717
1718 What happens is that the Lisp interpreter first evaluates the inner
1719 expression, @code{(+ 3 3)}, for which the value 6 is returned; then it
1720 evaluates the outer expression as if it were written @code{(+ 2 6)}, which
1721 returns the value 8. Since there are no more enclosing expressions to
1722 evaluate, the interpreter prints that value in the echo area.
1723
1724 Now it is easy to understand the name of the command invoked by the
1725 keystrokes @kbd{C-x C-e}: the name is @code{eval-last-sexp}. The
1726 letters @code{sexp} are an abbreviation for `symbolic expression', and
1727 @code{eval} is an abbreviation for `evaluate'. The command means
1728 `evaluate last symbolic expression'.
1729
1730 As an experiment, you can try evaluating the expression by putting the
1731 cursor at the beginning of the next line immediately following the
1732 expression, or inside the expression.
1733
1734 @need 800
1735 Here is another copy of the expression:
1736
1737 @smallexample
1738 (+ 2 (+ 3 3))
1739 @end smallexample
1740
1741 @noindent
1742 If you place the cursor at the beginning of the blank line that
1743 immediately follows the expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}, you will
1744 still get the value 8 printed in the echo area. Now try putting the
1745 cursor inside the expression. If you put it right after the next to
1746 last parenthesis (so it appears to sit on top of the last parenthesis),
1747 you will get a 6 printed in the echo area! This is because the command
1748 evaluates the expression @code{(+ 3 3)}.
1749
1750 Now put the cursor immediately after a number. Type @kbd{C-x C-e} and
1751 you will get the number itself. In Lisp, if you evaluate a number, you
1752 get the number itself---this is how numbers differ from symbols. If you
1753 evaluate a list starting with a symbol like @code{+}, you will get a
1754 value returned that is the result of the computer carrying out the
1755 instructions in the function definition attached to that name. If a
1756 symbol by itself is evaluated, something different happens, as we will
1757 see in the next section.
1758
1759 @node Variables, Arguments, Evaluation, List Processing
1760 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1761 @section Variables
1762 @cindex Variables
1763
1764 In Emacs Lisp, a symbol can have a value attached to it just as it can
1765 have a function definition attached to it. The two are different.
1766 The function definition is a set of instructions that a computer will
1767 obey. A value, on the other hand, is something, such as number or a
1768 name, that can vary (which is why such a symbol is called a variable).
1769 The value of a symbol can be any expression in Lisp, such as a symbol,
1770 number, list, or string. A symbol that has a value is often called a
1771 @dfn{variable}.
1772
1773 A symbol can have both a function definition and a value attached to
1774 it at the same time. Or it can have just one or the other.
1775 The two are separate. This is somewhat similar
1776 to the way the name Cambridge can refer to the city in Massachusetts
1777 and have some information attached to the name as well, such as
1778 ``great programming center''.
1779
1780 @ignore
1781 (Incidentally, in Emacs Lisp, a symbol can have two
1782 other things attached to it, too: a property list and a documentation
1783 string; these are discussed later.)
1784 @end ignore
1785
1786 Another way to think about this is to imagine a symbol as being a chest
1787 of drawers. The function definition is put in one drawer, the value in
1788 another, and so on. What is put in the drawer holding the value can be
1789 changed without affecting the contents of the drawer holding the
1790 function definition, and vice-verse.
1791
1792 @menu
1793 * fill-column Example::
1794 * Void Function:: The error message for a symbol
1795 without a function.
1796 * Void Variable:: The error message for a symbol without a value.
1797 @end menu
1798
1799 @node fill-column Example, Void Function, Variables, Variables
1800 @ifnottex
1801 @unnumberedsubsec @code{fill-column}, an Example Variable
1802 @end ifnottex
1803
1804 @findex fill-column, @r{an example variable}
1805 @cindex Example variable, @code{fill-column}
1806 @cindex Variable, example of, @code{fill-column}
1807 The variable @code{fill-column} illustrates a symbol with a value
1808 attached to it: in every GNU Emacs buffer, this symbol is set to some
1809 value, usually 72 or 70, but sometimes to some other value. To find the
1810 value of this symbol, evaluate it by itself. If you are reading this in
1811 Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can do this by putting the cursor after
1812 the symbol and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1813
1814 @smallexample
1815 fill-column
1816 @end smallexample
1817
1818 @noindent
1819 After I typed @kbd{C-x C-e}, Emacs printed the number 72 in my echo
1820 area. This is the value for which @code{fill-column} is set for me as I
1821 write this. It may be different for you in your Info buffer. Notice
1822 that the value returned as a variable is printed in exactly the same way
1823 as the value returned by a function carrying out its instructions. From
1824 the point of view of the Lisp interpreter, a value returned is a value
1825 returned. What kind of expression it came from ceases to matter once
1826 the value is known.
1827
1828 A symbol can have any value attached to it or, to use the jargon, we can
1829 @dfn{bind} the variable to a value: to a number, such as 72; to a
1830 string, @code{"such as this"}; to a list, such as @code{(spruce pine
1831 oak)}; we can even bind a variable to a function definition.
1832
1833 A symbol can be bound to a value in several ways. @xref{set & setq, ,
1834 Setting the Value of a Variable}, for information about one way to do
1835 this.
1836
1837 @node Void Function, Void Variable, fill-column Example, Variables
1838 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1839 @subsection Error Message for a Symbol Without a Function
1840 @cindex Symbol without function error
1841 @cindex Error for symbol without function
1842
1843 When we evaluated @code{fill-column} to find its value as a variable,
1844 we did not place parentheses around the word. This is because we did
1845 not intend to use it as a function name.
1846
1847 If @code{fill-column} were the first or only element of a list, the
1848 Lisp interpreter would attempt to find the function definition
1849 attached to it. But @code{fill-column} has no function definition.
1850 Try evaluating this:
1851
1852 @smallexample
1853 (fill-column)
1854 @end smallexample
1855
1856 @need 1250
1857 @noindent
1858 In GNU Emacs version 22, you will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer
1859 that says:
1860
1861 @smallexample
1862 @group
1863 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1864 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function fill-column)
1865 (fill-column)
1866 eval((fill-column))
1867 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1868 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1869 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1870 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1871 @end group
1872 @end smallexample
1873
1874 @noindent
1875 (Remember, to quit the debugger and make the debugger window go away,
1876 type @kbd{q} in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
1877
1878 @ignore
1879 @need 800
1880 In GNU Emacs 20 and before, you will produce an error message that says:
1881
1882 @smallexample
1883 Symbol's function definition is void:@: fill-column
1884 @end smallexample
1885
1886 @noindent
1887 (The message will go away as soon as you move the cursor or type
1888 another key.)
1889 @end ignore
1890
1891 @node Void Variable, , Void Function, Variables
1892 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1893 @subsection Error Message for a Symbol Without a Value
1894 @cindex Symbol without value error
1895 @cindex Error for symbol without value
1896
1897 If you attempt to evaluate a symbol that does not have a value bound to
1898 it, you will receive an error message. You can see this by
1899 experimenting with our 2 plus 2 addition. In the following expression,
1900 put your cursor right after the @code{+}, before the first number 2,
1901 type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1902
1903 @smallexample
1904 (+ 2 2)
1905 @end smallexample
1906
1907 @need 1500
1908 @noindent
1909 In GNU Emacs 22, you will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that
1910 says:
1911
1912 @smallexample
1913 @group
1914 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1915 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-variable +)
1916 eval(+)
1917 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1918 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1919 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1920 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1921 @end group
1922 @end smallexample
1923
1924 @noindent
1925 (As with the other times we entered the debugger, you can quit by
1926 typing @kbd{q} in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
1927
1928 This backtrace is different from the very first error message we saw,
1929 which said, @samp{Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)}.
1930 In this case, the function does not have a value as a variable; while
1931 in the other error message, the function (the word `this') did not
1932 have a definition.
1933
1934 In this experiment with the @code{+}, what we did was cause the Lisp
1935 interpreter to evaluate the @code{+} and look for the value of the
1936 variable instead of the function definition. We did this by placing the
1937 cursor right after the symbol rather than after the parenthesis of the
1938 enclosing list as we did before. As a consequence, the Lisp interpreter
1939 evaluated the preceding s-expression, which in this case was the
1940 @code{+} by itself.
1941
1942 Since @code{+} does not have a value bound to it, just the function
1943 definition, the error message reported that the symbol's value as a
1944 variable was void.
1945
1946 @ignore
1947 @need 800
1948 In GNU Emacs version 20 and before, your error message will say:
1949
1950 @example
1951 Symbol's value as variable is void:@: +
1952 @end example
1953
1954 @noindent
1955 The meaning is the same as in GNU Emacs 22.
1956 @end ignore
1957
1958 @node Arguments, set & setq, Variables, List Processing
1959 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1960 @section Arguments
1961 @cindex Arguments
1962 @cindex Passing information to functions
1963
1964 To see how information is passed to functions, let's look again at
1965 our old standby, the addition of two plus two. In Lisp, this is written
1966 as follows:
1967
1968 @smallexample
1969 (+ 2 2)
1970 @end smallexample
1971
1972 If you evaluate this expression, the number 4 will appear in your echo
1973 area. What the Lisp interpreter does is add the numbers that follow
1974 the @code{+}.
1975
1976 @cindex @samp{argument} defined
1977 The numbers added by @code{+} are called the @dfn{arguments} of the
1978 function @code{+}. These numbers are the information that is given to
1979 or @dfn{passed} to the function.
1980
1981 The word `argument' comes from the way it is used in mathematics and
1982 does not refer to a disputation between two people; instead it refers to
1983 the information presented to the function, in this case, to the
1984 @code{+}. In Lisp, the arguments to a function are the atoms or lists
1985 that follow the function. The values returned by the evaluation of
1986 these atoms or lists are passed to the function. Different functions
1987 require different numbers of arguments; some functions require none at
1988 all.@footnote{It is curious to track the path by which the word `argument'
1989 came to have two different meanings, one in mathematics and the other in
1990 everyday English. According to the @cite{Oxford English Dictionary},
1991 the word derives from the Latin for @samp{to make clear, prove}; thus it
1992 came to mean, by one thread of derivation, `the evidence offered as
1993 proof', which is to say, `the information offered', which led to its
1994 meaning in Lisp. But in the other thread of derivation, it came to mean
1995 `to assert in a manner against which others may make counter
1996 assertions', which led to the meaning of the word as a disputation.
1997 (Note here that the English word has two different definitions attached
1998 to it at the same time. By contrast, in Emacs Lisp, a symbol cannot
1999 have two different function definitions at the same time.)}
2000
2001 @menu
2002 * Data types:: Types of data passed to a function.
2003 * Args as Variable or List:: An argument can be the value
2004 of a variable or list.
2005 * Variable Number of Arguments:: Some functions may take a
2006 variable number of arguments.
2007 * Wrong Type of Argument:: Passing an argument of the wrong type
2008 to a function.
2009 * message:: A useful function for sending messages.
2010 @end menu
2011
2012 @node Data types, Args as Variable or List, Arguments, Arguments
2013 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2014 @subsection Arguments' Data Types
2015 @cindex Data types
2016 @cindex Types of data
2017 @cindex Arguments' data types
2018
2019 The type of data that should be passed to a function depends on what
2020 kind of information it uses. The arguments to a function such as
2021 @code{+} must have values that are numbers, since @code{+} adds numbers.
2022 Other functions use different kinds of data for their arguments.
2023
2024 @need 1250
2025 @findex concat
2026 For example, the @code{concat} function links together or unites two or
2027 more strings of text to produce a string. The arguments are strings.
2028 Concatenating the two character strings @code{abc}, @code{def} produces
2029 the single string @code{abcdef}. This can be seen by evaluating the
2030 following:
2031
2032 @smallexample
2033 (concat "abc" "def")
2034 @end smallexample
2035
2036 @noindent
2037 The value produced by evaluating this expression is @code{"abcdef"}.
2038
2039 A function such as @code{substring} uses both a string and numbers as
2040 arguments. The function returns a part of the string, a substring of
2041 the first argument. This function takes three arguments. Its first
2042 argument is the string of characters, the second and third arguments are
2043 numbers that indicate the beginning and end of the substring. The
2044 numbers are a count of the number of characters (including spaces and
2045 punctuations) from the beginning of the string.
2046
2047 @need 800
2048 For example, if you evaluate the following:
2049
2050 @smallexample
2051 (substring "The quick brown fox jumped." 16 19)
2052 @end smallexample
2053
2054 @noindent
2055 you will see @code{"fox"} appear in the echo area. The arguments are the
2056 string and the two numbers.
2057
2058 Note that the string passed to @code{substring} is a single atom even
2059 though it is made up of several words separated by spaces. Lisp counts
2060 everything between the two quotation marks as part of the string,
2061 including the spaces. You can think of the @code{substring} function as
2062 a kind of `atom smasher' since it takes an otherwise indivisible atom
2063 and extracts a part. However, @code{substring} is only able to extract
2064 a substring from an argument that is a string, not from another type of
2065 atom such as a number or symbol.
2066
2067 @node Args as Variable or List, Variable Number of Arguments, Data types, Arguments
2068 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2069 @subsection An Argument as the Value of a Variable or List
2070
2071 An argument can be a symbol that returns a value when it is evaluated.
2072 For example, when the symbol @code{fill-column} by itself is evaluated,
2073 it returns a number. This number can be used in an addition.
2074
2075 @need 1250
2076 Position the cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x
2077 C-e}:
2078
2079 @smallexample
2080 (+ 2 fill-column)
2081 @end smallexample
2082
2083 @noindent
2084 The value will be a number two more than what you get by evaluating
2085 @code{fill-column} alone. For me, this is 74, because my value of
2086 @code{fill-column} is 72.
2087
2088 As we have just seen, an argument can be a symbol that returns a value
2089 when evaluated. In addition, an argument can be a list that returns a
2090 value when it is evaluated. For example, in the following expression,
2091 the arguments to the function @code{concat} are the strings
2092 @w{@code{"The "}} and @w{@code{" red foxes."}} and the list
2093 @code{(number-to-string (+ 2 fill-column))}.
2094
2095 @c For GNU Emacs 22, need number-to-string
2096 @smallexample
2097 (concat "The " (number-to-string (+ 2 fill-column)) " red foxes.")
2098 @end smallexample
2099
2100 @noindent
2101 If you evaluate this expression---and if, as with my Emacs,
2102 @code{fill-column} evaluates to 72---@code{"The 74 red foxes."} will
2103 appear in the echo area. (Note that you must put spaces after the
2104 word @samp{The} and before the word @samp{red} so they will appear in
2105 the final string. The function @code{number-to-string} converts the
2106 integer that the addition function returns to a string.
2107 @code{number-to-string} is also known as @code{int-to-string}.)
2108
2109 @node Variable Number of Arguments, Wrong Type of Argument, Args as Variable or List, Arguments
2110 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2111 @subsection Variable Number of Arguments
2112 @cindex Variable number of arguments
2113 @cindex Arguments, variable number of
2114
2115 Some functions, such as @code{concat}, @code{+} or @code{*}, take any
2116 number of arguments. (The @code{*} is the symbol for multiplication.)
2117 This can be seen by evaluating each of the following expressions in
2118 the usual way. What you will see in the echo area is printed in this
2119 text after @samp{@result{}}, which you may read as `evaluates to'.
2120
2121 @need 1250
2122 In the first set, the functions have no arguments:
2123
2124 @smallexample
2125 @group
2126 (+) @result{} 0
2127
2128 (*) @result{} 1
2129 @end group
2130 @end smallexample
2131
2132 @need 1250
2133 In this set, the functions have one argument each:
2134
2135 @smallexample
2136 @group
2137 (+ 3) @result{} 3
2138
2139 (* 3) @result{} 3
2140 @end group
2141 @end smallexample
2142
2143 @need 1250
2144 In this set, the functions have three arguments each:
2145
2146 @smallexample
2147 @group
2148 (+ 3 4 5) @result{} 12
2149
2150 (* 3 4 5) @result{} 60
2151 @end group
2152 @end smallexample
2153
2154 @node Wrong Type of Argument, message, Variable Number of Arguments, Arguments
2155 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2156 @subsection Using the Wrong Type Object as an Argument
2157 @cindex Wrong type of argument
2158 @cindex Argument, wrong type of
2159
2160 When a function is passed an argument of the wrong type, the Lisp
2161 interpreter produces an error message. For example, the @code{+}
2162 function expects the values of its arguments to be numbers. As an
2163 experiment we can pass it the quoted symbol @code{hello} instead of a
2164 number. Position the cursor after the following expression and type
2165 @kbd{C-x C-e}:
2166
2167 @smallexample
2168 (+ 2 'hello)
2169 @end smallexample
2170
2171 @noindent
2172 When you do this you will generate an error message. What has happened
2173 is that @code{+} has tried to add the 2 to the value returned by
2174 @code{'hello}, but the value returned by @code{'hello} is the symbol
2175 @code{hello}, not a number. Only numbers can be added. So @code{+}
2176 could not carry out its addition.
2177
2178 @need 1250
2179 In GNU Emacs version 22, you will create and enter a
2180 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that says:
2181
2182 @noindent
2183 @smallexample
2184 @group
2185 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
2186 Debugger entered--Lisp error:
2187 (wrong-type-argument number-or-marker-p hello)
2188 +(2 hello)
2189 eval((+ 2 (quote hello)))
2190 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
2191 eval-last-sexp(nil)
2192 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
2193 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
2194 @end group
2195 @end smallexample
2196
2197 @need 1250
2198 As usual, the error message tries to be helpful and makes sense after you
2199 learn how to read it.@footnote{@code{(quote hello)} is an expansion of
2200 the abbreviation @code{'hello}.}
2201
2202 The first part of the error message is straightforward; it says
2203 @samp{wrong type argument}. Next comes the mysterious jargon word
2204 @w{@samp{number-or-marker-p}}. This word is trying to tell you what
2205 kind of argument the @code{+} expected.
2206
2207 The symbol @code{number-or-marker-p} says that the Lisp interpreter is
2208 trying to determine whether the information presented it (the value of
2209 the argument) is a number or a marker (a special object representing a
2210 buffer position). What it does is test to see whether the @code{+} is
2211 being given numbers to add. It also tests to see whether the
2212 argument is something called a marker, which is a specific feature of
2213 Emacs Lisp. (In Emacs, locations in a buffer are recorded as markers.
2214 When the mark is set with the @kbd{C-@@} or @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} command,
2215 its position is kept as a marker. The mark can be considered a
2216 number---the number of characters the location is from the beginning
2217 of the buffer.) In Emacs Lisp, @code{+} can be used to add the
2218 numeric value of marker positions as numbers.
2219
2220 The @samp{p} of @code{number-or-marker-p} is the embodiment of a
2221 practice started in the early days of Lisp programming. The @samp{p}
2222 stands for `predicate'. In the jargon used by the early Lisp
2223 researchers, a predicate refers to a function to determine whether some
2224 property is true or false. So the @samp{p} tells us that
2225 @code{number-or-marker-p} is the name of a function that determines
2226 whether it is true or false that the argument supplied is a number or
2227 a marker. Other Lisp symbols that end in @samp{p} include @code{zerop},
2228 a function that tests whether its argument has the value of zero, and
2229 @code{listp}, a function that tests whether its argument is a list.
2230
2231 Finally, the last part of the error message is the symbol @code{hello}.
2232 This is the value of the argument that was passed to @code{+}. If the
2233 addition had been passed the correct type of object, the value passed
2234 would have been a number, such as 37, rather than a symbol like
2235 @code{hello}. But then you would not have got the error message.
2236
2237 @ignore
2238 @need 1250
2239 In GNU Emacs version 20 and before, the echo area displays an error
2240 message that says:
2241
2242 @smallexample
2243 Wrong type argument:@: number-or-marker-p, hello
2244 @end smallexample
2245
2246 This says, in different words, the same as the top line of the
2247 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.
2248 @end ignore
2249
2250 @node message, , Wrong Type of Argument, Arguments
2251 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2252 @subsection The @code{message} Function
2253 @findex message
2254
2255 Like @code{+}, the @code{message} function takes a variable number of
2256 arguments. It is used to send messages to the user and is so useful
2257 that we will describe it here.
2258
2259 @need 1250
2260 A message is printed in the echo area. For example, you can print a
2261 message in your echo area by evaluating the following list:
2262
2263 @smallexample
2264 (message "This message appears in the echo area!")
2265 @end smallexample
2266
2267 The whole string between double quotation marks is a single argument
2268 and is printed @i{in toto}. (Note that in this example, the message
2269 itself will appear in the echo area within double quotes; that is
2270 because you see the value returned by the @code{message} function. In
2271 most uses of @code{message} in programs that you write, the text will
2272 be printed in the echo area as a side-effect, without the quotes.
2273 @xref{multiply-by-seven in detail, , @code{multiply-by-seven} in
2274 detail}, for an example of this.)
2275
2276 However, if there is a @samp{%s} in the quoted string of characters, the
2277 @code{message} function does not print the @samp{%s} as such, but looks
2278 to the argument that follows the string. It evaluates the second
2279 argument and prints the value at the location in the string where the
2280 @samp{%s} is.
2281
2282 @need 1250
2283 You can see this by positioning the cursor after the following
2284 expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}:
2285
2286 @smallexample
2287 (message "The name of this buffer is: %s." (buffer-name))
2288 @end smallexample
2289
2290 @noindent
2291 In Info, @code{"The name of this buffer is: *info*."} will appear in the
2292 echo area. The function @code{buffer-name} returns the name of the
2293 buffer as a string, which the @code{message} function inserts in place
2294 of @code{%s}.
2295
2296 To print a value as an integer, use @samp{%d} in the same way as
2297 @samp{%s}. For example, to print a message in the echo area that
2298 states the value of the @code{fill-column}, evaluate the following:
2299
2300 @smallexample
2301 (message "The value of fill-column is %d." fill-column)
2302 @end smallexample
2303
2304 @noindent
2305 On my system, when I evaluate this list, @code{"The value of
2306 fill-column is 72."} appears in my echo area@footnote{Actually, you
2307 can use @code{%s} to print a number. It is non-specific. @code{%d}
2308 prints only the part of a number left of a decimal point, and not
2309 anything that is not a number.}.
2310
2311 If there is more than one @samp{%s} in the quoted string, the value of
2312 the first argument following the quoted string is printed at the
2313 location of the first @samp{%s} and the value of the second argument is
2314 printed at the location of the second @samp{%s}, and so on.
2315
2316 @need 1250
2317 For example, if you evaluate the following,
2318
2319 @smallexample
2320 @group
2321 (message "There are %d %s in the office!"
2322 (- fill-column 14) "pink elephants")
2323 @end group
2324 @end smallexample
2325
2326 @noindent
2327 a rather whimsical message will appear in your echo area. On my system
2328 it says, @code{"There are 58 pink elephants in the office!"}.
2329
2330 The expression @code{(- fill-column 14)} is evaluated and the resulting
2331 number is inserted in place of the @samp{%d}; and the string in double
2332 quotes, @code{"pink elephants"}, is treated as a single argument and
2333 inserted in place of the @samp{%s}. (That is to say, a string between
2334 double quotes evaluates to itself, like a number.)
2335
2336 Finally, here is a somewhat complex example that not only illustrates
2337 the computation of a number, but also shows how you can use an
2338 expression within an expression to generate the text that is substituted
2339 for @samp{%s}:
2340
2341 @smallexample
2342 @group
2343 (message "He saw %d %s"
2344 (- fill-column 32)
2345 (concat "red "
2346 (substring
2347 "The quick brown foxes jumped." 16 21)
2348 " leaping."))
2349 @end group
2350 @end smallexample
2351
2352 In this example, @code{message} has three arguments: the string,
2353 @code{"He saw %d %s"}, the expression, @code{(- fill-column 32)}, and
2354 the expression beginning with the function @code{concat}. The value
2355 resulting from the evaluation of @code{(- fill-column 32)} is inserted
2356 in place of the @samp{%d}; and the value returned by the expression
2357 beginning with @code{concat} is inserted in place of the @samp{%s}.
2358
2359 When your fill column is 70 and you evaluate the expression, the
2360 message @code{"He saw 38 red foxes leaping."} appears in your echo
2361 area.
2362
2363 @node set & setq, Summary, Arguments, List Processing
2364 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2365 @section Setting the Value of a Variable
2366 @cindex Variable, setting value
2367 @cindex Setting value of variable
2368
2369 @cindex @samp{bind} defined
2370 There are several ways by which a variable can be given a value. One of
2371 the ways is to use either the function @code{set} or the function
2372 @code{setq}. Another way is to use @code{let} (@pxref{let}). (The
2373 jargon for this process is to @dfn{bind} a variable to a value.)
2374
2375 The following sections not only describe how @code{set} and @code{setq}
2376 work but also illustrate how arguments are passed.
2377
2378 @menu
2379 * Using set:: Setting values.
2380 * Using setq:: Setting a quoted value.
2381 * Counting:: Using @code{setq} to count.
2382 @end menu
2383
2384 @node Using set, Using setq, set & setq, set & setq
2385 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2386 @subsection Using @code{set}
2387 @findex set
2388
2389 To set the value of the symbol @code{flowers} to the list @code{'(rose
2390 violet daisy buttercup)}, evaluate the following expression by
2391 positioning the cursor after the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2392
2393 @smallexample
2394 (set 'flowers '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
2395 @end smallexample
2396
2397 @noindent
2398 The list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} will appear in the echo
2399 area. This is what is @emph{returned} by the @code{set} function. As a
2400 side effect, the symbol @code{flowers} is bound to the list; that is,
2401 the symbol @code{flowers}, which can be viewed as a variable, is given
2402 the list as its value. (This process, by the way, illustrates how a
2403 side effect to the Lisp interpreter, setting the value, can be the
2404 primary effect that we humans are interested in. This is because every
2405 Lisp function must return a value if it does not get an error, but it
2406 will only have a side effect if it is designed to have one.)
2407
2408 After evaluating the @code{set} expression, you can evaluate the symbol
2409 @code{flowers} and it will return the value you just set. Here is the
2410 symbol. Place your cursor after it and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2411
2412 @smallexample
2413 flowers
2414 @end smallexample
2415
2416 @noindent
2417 When you evaluate @code{flowers}, the list
2418 @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} appears in the echo area.
2419
2420 Incidentally, if you evaluate @code{'flowers}, the variable with a quote
2421 in front of it, what you will see in the echo area is the symbol itself,
2422 @code{flowers}. Here is the quoted symbol, so you can try this:
2423
2424 @smallexample
2425 'flowers
2426 @end smallexample
2427
2428 Note also, that when you use @code{set}, you need to quote both
2429 arguments to @code{set}, unless you want them evaluated. Since we do
2430 not want either argument evaluated, neither the variable
2431 @code{flowers} nor the list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)}, both
2432 are quoted. (When you use @code{set} without quoting its first
2433 argument, the first argument is evaluated before anything else is
2434 done. If you did this and @code{flowers} did not have a value
2435 already, you would get an error message that the @samp{Symbol's value
2436 as variable is void}; on the other hand, if @code{flowers} did return
2437 a value after it was evaluated, the @code{set} would attempt to set
2438 the value that was returned. There are situations where this is the
2439 right thing for the function to do; but such situations are rare.)
2440
2441 @node Using setq, Counting, Using set, set & setq
2442 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2443 @subsection Using @code{setq}
2444 @findex setq
2445
2446 As a practical matter, you almost always quote the first argument to
2447 @code{set}. The combination of @code{set} and a quoted first argument
2448 is so common that it has its own name: the special form @code{setq}.
2449 This special form is just like @code{set} except that the first argument
2450 is quoted automatically, so you don't need to type the quote mark
2451 yourself. Also, as an added convenience, @code{setq} permits you to set
2452 several different variables to different values, all in one expression.
2453
2454 To set the value of the variable @code{carnivores} to the list
2455 @code{'(lion tiger leopard)} using @code{setq}, the following expression
2456 is used:
2457
2458 @smallexample
2459 (setq carnivores '(lion tiger leopard))
2460 @end smallexample
2461
2462 @noindent
2463 This is exactly the same as using @code{set} except the first argument
2464 is automatically quoted by @code{setq}. (The @samp{q} in @code{setq}
2465 means @code{quote}.)
2466
2467 @need 1250
2468 With @code{set}, the expression would look like this:
2469
2470 @smallexample
2471 (set 'carnivores '(lion tiger leopard))
2472 @end smallexample
2473
2474 Also, @code{setq} can be used to assign different values to
2475 different variables. The first argument is bound to the value
2476 of the second argument, the third argument is bound to the value of the
2477 fourth argument, and so on. For example, you could use the following to
2478 assign a list of trees to the symbol @code{trees} and a list of herbivores
2479 to the symbol @code{herbivores}:
2480
2481 @smallexample
2482 @group
2483 (setq trees '(pine fir oak maple)
2484 herbivores '(gazelle antelope zebra))
2485 @end group
2486 @end smallexample
2487
2488 @noindent
2489 (The expression could just as well have been on one line, but it might
2490 not have fit on a page; and humans find it easier to read nicely
2491 formatted lists.)
2492
2493 Although I have been using the term `assign', there is another way of
2494 thinking about the workings of @code{set} and @code{setq}; and that is to
2495 say that @code{set} and @code{setq} make the symbol @emph{point} to the
2496 list. This latter way of thinking is very common and in forthcoming
2497 chapters we shall come upon at least one symbol that has `pointer' as
2498 part of its name. The name is chosen because the symbol has a value,
2499 specifically a list, attached to it; or, expressed another way,
2500 the symbol is set to ``point'' to the list.
2501
2502 @node Counting, , Using setq, set & setq
2503 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2504 @subsection Counting
2505 @cindex Counting
2506
2507 Here is an example that shows how to use @code{setq} in a counter. You
2508 might use this to count how many times a part of your program repeats
2509 itself. First set a variable to zero; then add one to the number each
2510 time the program repeats itself. To do this, you need a variable that
2511 serves as a counter, and two expressions: an initial @code{setq}
2512 expression that sets the counter variable to zero; and a second
2513 @code{setq} expression that increments the counter each time it is
2514 evaluated.
2515
2516 @smallexample
2517 @group
2518 (setq counter 0) ; @r{Let's call this the initializer.}
2519
2520 (setq counter (+ counter 1)) ; @r{This is the incrementer.}
2521
2522 counter ; @r{This is the counter.}
2523 @end group
2524 @end smallexample
2525
2526 @noindent
2527 (The text following the @samp{;} are comments. @xref{Change a
2528 defun, , Change a Function Definition}.)
2529
2530 If you evaluate the first of these expressions, the initializer,
2531 @code{(setq counter 0)}, and then evaluate the third expression,
2532 @code{counter}, the number @code{0} will appear in the echo area. If
2533 you then evaluate the second expression, the incrementer, @code{(setq
2534 counter (+ counter 1))}, the counter will get the value 1. So if you
2535 again evaluate @code{counter}, the number @code{1} will appear in the
2536 echo area. Each time you evaluate the second expression, the value of
2537 the counter will be incremented.
2538
2539 When you evaluate the incrementer, @code{(setq counter (+ counter 1))},
2540 the Lisp interpreter first evaluates the innermost list; this is the
2541 addition. In order to evaluate this list, it must evaluate the variable
2542 @code{counter} and the number @code{1}. When it evaluates the variable
2543 @code{counter}, it receives its current value. It passes this value and
2544 the number @code{1} to the @code{+} which adds them together. The sum
2545 is then returned as the value of the inner list and passed to the
2546 @code{setq} which sets the variable @code{counter} to this new value.
2547 Thus, the value of the variable, @code{counter}, is changed.
2548
2549 @node Summary, Error Message Exercises, set & setq, List Processing
2550 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2551 @section Summary
2552
2553 Learning Lisp is like climbing a hill in which the first part is the
2554 steepest. You have now climbed the most difficult part; what remains
2555 becomes easier as you progress onwards.
2556
2557 @need 1000
2558 In summary,
2559
2560 @itemize @bullet
2561
2562 @item
2563 Lisp programs are made up of expressions, which are lists or single atoms.
2564
2565 @item
2566 Lists are made up of zero or more atoms or inner lists, separated by whitespace and
2567 surrounded by parentheses. A list can be empty.
2568
2569 @item
2570 Atoms are multi-character symbols, like @code{forward-paragraph}, single
2571 character symbols like @code{+}, strings of characters between double
2572 quotation marks, or numbers.
2573
2574 @item
2575 A number evaluates to itself.
2576
2577 @item
2578 A string between double quotes also evaluates to itself.
2579
2580 @item
2581 When you evaluate a symbol by itself, its value is returned.
2582
2583 @item
2584 When you evaluate a list, the Lisp interpreter looks at the first symbol
2585 in the list and then at the function definition bound to that symbol.
2586 Then the instructions in the function definition are carried out.
2587
2588 @item
2589 A single quotation mark,
2590 @ifinfo
2591 '
2592 @end ifinfo
2593 @ifnotinfo
2594 @code{'}
2595 @end ifnotinfo
2596 , tells the Lisp interpreter that it should
2597 return the following expression as written, and not evaluate it as it
2598 would if the quote were not there.
2599
2600 @item
2601 Arguments are the information passed to a function. The arguments to a
2602 function are computed by evaluating the rest of the elements of the list
2603 of which the function is the first element.
2604
2605 @item
2606 A function always returns a value when it is evaluated (unless it gets
2607 an error); in addition, it may also carry out some action called a
2608 ``side effect''. In many cases, a function's primary purpose is to
2609 create a side effect.
2610 @end itemize
2611
2612 @node Error Message Exercises, , Summary, List Processing
2613 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2614 @section Exercises
2615
2616 A few simple exercises:
2617
2618 @itemize @bullet
2619 @item
2620 Generate an error message by evaluating an appropriate symbol that is
2621 not within parentheses.
2622
2623 @item
2624 Generate an error message by evaluating an appropriate symbol that is
2625 between parentheses.
2626
2627 @item
2628 Create a counter that increments by two rather than one.
2629
2630 @item
2631 Write an expression that prints a message in the echo area when
2632 evaluated.
2633 @end itemize
2634
2635 @node Practicing Evaluation, Writing Defuns, List Processing, Top
2636 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2637 @chapter Practicing Evaluation
2638 @cindex Practicing evaluation
2639 @cindex Evaluation practice
2640
2641 Before learning how to write a function definition in Emacs Lisp, it is
2642 useful to spend a little time evaluating various expressions that have
2643 already been written. These expressions will be lists with the
2644 functions as their first (and often only) element. Since some of the
2645 functions associated with buffers are both simple and interesting, we
2646 will start with those. In this section, we will evaluate a few of
2647 these. In another section, we will study the code of several other
2648 buffer-related functions, to see how they were written.
2649
2650 @menu
2651 * How to Evaluate:: Typing editing commands or @kbd{C-x C-e}
2652 causes evaluation.
2653 * Buffer Names:: Buffers and files are different.
2654 * Getting Buffers:: Getting a buffer itself, not merely its name.
2655 * Switching Buffers:: How to change to another buffer.
2656 * Buffer Size & Locations:: Where point is located and the size of
2657 the buffer.
2658 * Evaluation Exercise::
2659 @end menu
2660
2661 @node How to Evaluate, Buffer Names, Practicing Evaluation, Practicing Evaluation
2662 @ifnottex
2663 @unnumberedsec How to Evaluate
2664 @end ifnottex
2665
2666 @i{Whenever you give an editing command} to Emacs Lisp, such as the
2667 command to move the cursor or to scroll the screen, @i{you are evaluating
2668 an expression,} the first element of which is a function. @i{This is
2669 how Emacs works.}
2670
2671 @cindex @samp{interactive function} defined
2672 @cindex @samp{command} defined
2673 When you type keys, you cause the Lisp interpreter to evaluate an
2674 expression and that is how you get your results. Even typing plain text
2675 involves evaluating an Emacs Lisp function, in this case, one that uses
2676 @code{self-insert-command}, which simply inserts the character you
2677 typed. The functions you evaluate by typing keystrokes are called
2678 @dfn{interactive} functions, or @dfn{commands}; how you make a function
2679 interactive will be illustrated in the chapter on how to write function
2680 definitions. @xref{Interactive, , Making a Function Interactive}.
2681
2682 In addition to typing keyboard commands, we have seen a second way to
2683 evaluate an expression: by positioning the cursor after a list and
2684 typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. This is what we will do in the rest of this
2685 section. There are other ways to evaluate an expression as well; these
2686 will be described as we come to them.
2687
2688 Besides being used for practicing evaluation, the functions shown in the
2689 next few sections are important in their own right. A study of these
2690 functions makes clear the distinction between buffers and files, how to
2691 switch to a buffer, and how to determine a location within it.
2692
2693 @node Buffer Names, Getting Buffers, How to Evaluate, Practicing Evaluation
2694 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2695 @section Buffer Names
2696 @findex buffer-name
2697 @findex buffer-file-name
2698
2699 The two functions, @code{buffer-name} and @code{buffer-file-name}, show
2700 the difference between a file and a buffer. When you evaluate the
2701 following expression, @code{(buffer-name)}, the name of the buffer
2702 appears in the echo area. When you evaluate @code{(buffer-file-name)},
2703 the name of the file to which the buffer refers appears in the echo
2704 area. Usually, the name returned by @code{(buffer-name)} is the same as
2705 the name of the file to which it refers, and the name returned by
2706 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is the full path-name of the file.
2707
2708 A file and a buffer are two different entities. A file is information
2709 recorded permanently in the computer (unless you delete it). A buffer,
2710 on the other hand, is information inside of Emacs that will vanish at
2711 the end of the editing session (or when you kill the buffer). Usually,
2712 a buffer contains information that you have copied from a file; we say
2713 the buffer is @dfn{visiting} that file. This copy is what you work on
2714 and modify. Changes to the buffer do not change the file, until you
2715 save the buffer. When you save the buffer, the buffer is copied to the file
2716 and is thus saved permanently.
2717
2718 @need 1250
2719 If you are reading this in Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate
2720 each of the following expressions by positioning the cursor after it and
2721 typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2722
2723 @example
2724 @group
2725 (buffer-name)
2726
2727 (buffer-file-name)
2728 @end group
2729 @end example
2730
2731 @noindent
2732 When I do this in Info, the value returned by evaluating
2733 @code{(buffer-name)} is @file{"*info*"}, and the value returned by
2734 evaluating @code{(buffer-file-name)} is @file{nil}.
2735
2736 On the other hand, while I am writing this document, the value
2737 returned by evaluating @code{(buffer-name)} is
2738 @file{"introduction.texinfo"}, and the value returned by evaluating
2739 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is
2740 @file{"/gnu/work/intro/introduction.texinfo"}.
2741
2742 @cindex @code{nil}, history of word
2743 The former is the name of the buffer and the latter is the name of the
2744 file. In Info, the buffer name is @file{"*info*"}. Info does not
2745 point to any file, so the result of evaluating
2746 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is @file{nil}. The symbol @code{nil} is
2747 from the Latin word for `nothing'; in this case, it means that the
2748 buffer is not associated with any file. (In Lisp, @code{nil} is also
2749 used to mean `false' and is a synonym for the empty list, @code{()}.)
2750
2751 When I am writing, the name of my buffer is
2752 @file{"introduction.texinfo"}. The name of the file to which it
2753 points is @file{"/gnu/work/intro/introduction.texinfo"}.
2754
2755 (In the expressions, the parentheses tell the Lisp interpreter to
2756 treat @w{@code{buffer-name}} and @w{@code{buffer-file-name}} as
2757 functions; without the parentheses, the interpreter would attempt to
2758 evaluate the symbols as variables. @xref{Variables}.)
2759
2760 In spite of the distinction between files and buffers, you will often
2761 find that people refer to a file when they mean a buffer and vice-verse.
2762 Indeed, most people say, ``I am editing a file,'' rather than saying,
2763 ``I am editing a buffer which I will soon save to a file.'' It is
2764 almost always clear from context what people mean. When dealing with
2765 computer programs, however, it is important to keep the distinction in mind,
2766 since the computer is not as smart as a person.
2767
2768 @cindex Buffer, history of word
2769 The word `buffer', by the way, comes from the meaning of the word as a
2770 cushion that deadens the force of a collision. In early computers, a
2771 buffer cushioned the interaction between files and the computer's
2772 central processing unit. The drums or tapes that held a file and the
2773 central processing unit were pieces of equipment that were very
2774 different from each other, working at their own speeds, in spurts. The
2775 buffer made it possible for them to work together effectively.
2776 Eventually, the buffer grew from being an intermediary, a temporary
2777 holding place, to being the place where work is done. This
2778 transformation is rather like that of a small seaport that grew into a
2779 great city: once it was merely the place where cargo was warehoused
2780 temporarily before being loaded onto ships; then it became a business
2781 and cultural center in its own right.
2782
2783 Not all buffers are associated with files. For example, a
2784 @file{*scratch*} buffer does not visit any file. Similarly, a
2785 @file{*Help*} buffer is not associated with any file.
2786
2787 In the old days, when you lacked a @file{~/.emacs} file and started an
2788 Emacs session by typing the command @code{emacs} alone, without naming
2789 any files, Emacs started with the @file{*scratch*} buffer visible.
2790 Nowadays, you will see a splash screen. You can follow one of the
2791 commands suggested on the splash screen, visit a file, or press the
2792 spacebar to reach the @file{*scratch*} buffer.
2793
2794 If you switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer, type
2795 @code{(buffer-name)}, position the cursor after it, and then type
2796 @kbd{C-x C-e} to evaluate the expression. The name @code{"*scratch*"}
2797 will be returned and will appear in the echo area. @code{"*scratch*"}
2798 is the name of the buffer. When you type @code{(buffer-file-name)} in
2799 the @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate that, @code{nil} will appear
2800 in the echo area, just as it does when you evaluate
2801 @code{(buffer-file-name)} in Info.
2802
2803 Incidentally, if you are in the @file{*scratch*} buffer and want the
2804 value returned by an expression to appear in the @file{*scratch*}
2805 buffer itself rather than in the echo area, type @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}
2806 instead of @kbd{C-x C-e}. This causes the value returned to appear
2807 after the expression. The buffer will look like this:
2808
2809 @smallexample
2810 (buffer-name)"*scratch*"
2811 @end smallexample
2812
2813 @noindent
2814 You cannot do this in Info since Info is read-only and it will not allow
2815 you to change the contents of the buffer. But you can do this in any
2816 buffer you can edit; and when you write code or documentation (such as
2817 this book), this feature is very useful.
2818
2819 @node Getting Buffers, Switching Buffers, Buffer Names, Practicing Evaluation
2820 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2821 @section Getting Buffers
2822 @findex current-buffer
2823 @findex other-buffer
2824 @cindex Getting a buffer
2825
2826 The @code{buffer-name} function returns the @emph{name} of the buffer;
2827 to get the buffer @emph{itself}, a different function is needed: the
2828 @code{current-buffer} function. If you use this function in code, what
2829 you get is the buffer itself.
2830
2831 A name and the object or entity to which the name refers are different
2832 from each other. You are not your name. You are a person to whom
2833 others refer by name. If you ask to speak to George and someone hands you
2834 a card with the letters @samp{G}, @samp{e}, @samp{o}, @samp{r},
2835 @samp{g}, and @samp{e} written on it, you might be amused, but you would
2836 not be satisfied. You do not want to speak to the name, but to the
2837 person to whom the name refers. A buffer is similar: the name of the
2838 scratch buffer is @file{*scratch*}, but the name is not the buffer. To
2839 get a buffer itself, you need to use a function such as
2840 @code{current-buffer}.
2841
2842 However, there is a slight complication: if you evaluate
2843 @code{current-buffer} in an expression on its own, as we will do here,
2844 what you see is a printed representation of the name of the buffer
2845 without the contents of the buffer. Emacs works this way for two
2846 reasons: the buffer may be thousands of lines long---too long to be
2847 conveniently displayed; and, another buffer may have the same contents
2848 but a different name, and it is important to distinguish between them.
2849
2850 @need 800
2851 Here is an expression containing the function:
2852
2853 @smallexample
2854 (current-buffer)
2855 @end smallexample
2856
2857 @noindent
2858 If you evaluate this expression in Info in Emacs in the usual way,
2859 @file{#<buffer *info*>} will appear in the echo area. The special
2860 format indicates that the buffer itself is being returned, rather than
2861 just its name.
2862
2863 Incidentally, while you can type a number or symbol into a program, you
2864 cannot do that with the printed representation of a buffer: the only way
2865 to get a buffer itself is with a function such as @code{current-buffer}.
2866
2867 A related function is @code{other-buffer}. This returns the most
2868 recently selected buffer other than the one you are in currently, not
2869 a printed representation of its name. If you have recently switched
2870 back and forth from the @file{*scratch*} buffer, @code{other-buffer}
2871 will return that buffer.
2872
2873 @need 800
2874 You can see this by evaluating the expression:
2875
2876 @smallexample
2877 (other-buffer)
2878 @end smallexample
2879
2880 @noindent
2881 You should see @file{#<buffer *scratch*>} appear in the echo area, or
2882 the name of whatever other buffer you switched back from most
2883 recently@footnote{Actually, by default, if the buffer from which you
2884 just switched is visible to you in another window, @code{other-buffer}
2885 will choose the most recent buffer that you cannot see; this is a
2886 subtlety that I often forget.}.
2887
2888 @node Switching Buffers, Buffer Size & Locations, Getting Buffers, Practicing Evaluation
2889 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2890 @section Switching Buffers
2891 @findex switch-to-buffer
2892 @findex set-buffer
2893 @cindex Switching to a buffer
2894
2895 The @code{other-buffer} function actually provides a buffer when it is
2896 used as an argument to a function that requires one. We can see this
2897 by using @code{other-buffer} and @code{switch-to-buffer} to switch to a
2898 different buffer.
2899
2900 But first, a brief introduction to the @code{switch-to-buffer}
2901 function. When you switched back and forth from Info to the
2902 @file{*scratch*} buffer to evaluate @code{(buffer-name)}, you most
2903 likely typed @kbd{C-x b} and then typed @file{*scratch*}@footnote{Or
2904 rather, to save typing, you probably only typed @kbd{RET} if the
2905 default buffer was @file{*scratch*}, or if it was different, then you
2906 typed just part of the name, such as @code{*sc}, pressed your
2907 @kbd{TAB} key to cause it to expand to the full name, and then typed
2908 your @kbd{RET} key.} when prompted in the minibuffer for the name of
2909 the buffer to which you wanted to switch. The keystrokes, @kbd{C-x
2910 b}, cause the Lisp interpreter to evaluate the interactive function
2911 @code{switch-to-buffer}. As we said before, this is how Emacs works:
2912 different keystrokes call or run different functions. For example,
2913 @kbd{C-f} calls @code{forward-char}, @kbd{M-e} calls
2914 @code{forward-sentence}, and so on.
2915
2916 By writing @code{switch-to-buffer} in an expression, and giving it a
2917 buffer to switch to, we can switch buffers just the way @kbd{C-x b}
2918 does.
2919
2920 @need 1000
2921 Here is the Lisp expression:
2922
2923 @smallexample
2924 (switch-to-buffer (other-buffer))
2925 @end smallexample
2926
2927 @noindent
2928 The symbol @code{switch-to-buffer} is the first element of the list,
2929 so the Lisp interpreter will treat it as a function and carry out the
2930 instructions that are attached to it. But before doing that, the
2931 interpreter will note that @code{other-buffer} is inside parentheses
2932 and work on that symbol first. @code{other-buffer} is the first (and
2933 in this case, the only) element of this list, so the Lisp interpreter
2934 calls or runs the function. It returns another buffer. Next, the
2935 interpreter runs @code{switch-to-buffer}, passing to it, as an
2936 argument, the other buffer, which is what Emacs will switch to. If
2937 you are reading this in Info, try this now. Evaluate the expression.
2938 (To get back, type @kbd{C-x b @key{RET}}.)@footnote{Remember, this
2939 expression will move you to your most recent other buffer that you
2940 cannot see. If you really want to go to your most recently selected
2941 buffer, even if you can still see it, you need to evaluate the
2942 following more complex expression:
2943
2944 @smallexample
2945 (switch-to-buffer (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
2946 @end smallexample
2947
2948 @c noindent
2949 In this case, the first argument to @code{other-buffer} tells it which
2950 buffer to skip---the current one---and the second argument tells
2951 @code{other-buffer} it is OK to switch to a visible buffer.
2952 In regular use, @code{switch-to-buffer} takes you to an invisible
2953 window since you would most likely use @kbd{C-x o} (@code{other-window})
2954 to go to another visible buffer.}
2955
2956 In the programming examples in later sections of this document, you will
2957 see the function @code{set-buffer} more often than
2958 @code{switch-to-buffer}. This is because of a difference between
2959 computer programs and humans: humans have eyes and expect to see the
2960 buffer on which they are working on their computer terminals. This is
2961 so obvious, it almost goes without saying. However, programs do not
2962 have eyes. When a computer program works on a buffer, that buffer does
2963 not need to be visible on the screen.
2964
2965 @code{switch-to-buffer} is designed for humans and does two different
2966 things: it switches the buffer to which Emacs' attention is directed; and
2967 it switches the buffer displayed in the window to the new buffer.
2968 @code{set-buffer}, on the other hand, does only one thing: it switches
2969 the attention of the computer program to a different buffer. The buffer
2970 on the screen remains unchanged (of course, normally nothing happens
2971 there until the command finishes running).
2972
2973 @cindex @samp{call} defined
2974 Also, we have just introduced another jargon term, the word @dfn{call}.
2975 When you evaluate a list in which the first symbol is a function, you
2976 are calling that function. The use of the term comes from the notion of
2977 the function as an entity that can do something for you if you `call'
2978 it---just as a plumber is an entity who can fix a leak if you call him
2979 or her.
2980
2981 @node Buffer Size & Locations, Evaluation Exercise, Switching Buffers, Practicing Evaluation
2982 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2983 @section Buffer Size and the Location of Point
2984 @cindex Size of buffer
2985 @cindex Buffer size
2986 @cindex Point location
2987 @cindex Location of point
2988
2989 Finally, let's look at several rather simple functions,
2990 @code{buffer-size}, @code{point}, @code{point-min}, and
2991 @code{point-max}. These give information about the size of a buffer and
2992 the location of point within it.
2993
2994 The function @code{buffer-size} tells you the size of the current
2995 buffer; that is, the function returns a count of the number of
2996 characters in the buffer.
2997
2998 @smallexample
2999 (buffer-size)
3000 @end smallexample
3001
3002 @noindent
3003 You can evaluate this in the usual way, by positioning the
3004 cursor after the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
3005
3006 @cindex @samp{point} defined
3007 In Emacs, the current position of the cursor is called @dfn{point}.
3008 The expression @code{(point)} returns a number that tells you where the
3009 cursor is located as a count of the number of characters from the
3010 beginning of the buffer up to point.
3011
3012 @need 1250
3013 You can see the character count for point in this buffer by evaluating
3014 the following expression in the usual way:
3015
3016 @smallexample
3017 (point)
3018 @end smallexample
3019
3020 @noindent
3021 As I write this, the value of @code{point} is 65724. The @code{point}
3022 function is frequently used in some of the examples later in this
3023 book.
3024
3025 @need 1250
3026 The value of point depends, of course, on its location within the
3027 buffer. If you evaluate point in this spot, the number will be larger:
3028
3029 @smallexample
3030 (point)
3031 @end smallexample
3032
3033 @noindent
3034 For me, the value of point in this location is 66043, which means that
3035 there are 319 characters (including spaces) between the two
3036 expressions. (Doubtless, you will see different numbers, since I will
3037 have edited this since I first evaluated point.)
3038
3039 @cindex @samp{narrowing} defined
3040 The function @code{point-min} is somewhat similar to @code{point}, but
3041 it returns the value of the minimum permissible value of point in the
3042 current buffer. This is the number 1 unless @dfn{narrowing} is in
3043 effect. (Narrowing is a mechanism whereby you can restrict yourself,
3044 or a program, to operations on just a part of a buffer.
3045 @xref{Narrowing & Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}.) Likewise, the
3046 function @code{point-max} returns the value of the maximum permissible
3047 value of point in the current buffer.
3048
3049 @node Evaluation Exercise, , Buffer Size & Locations, Practicing Evaluation
3050 @section Exercise
3051
3052 Find a file with which you are working and move towards its middle.
3053 Find its buffer name, file name, length, and your position in the file.
3054
3055 @node Writing Defuns, Buffer Walk Through, Practicing Evaluation, Top
3056 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3057 @chapter How To Write Function Definitions
3058 @cindex Definition writing
3059 @cindex Function definition writing
3060 @cindex Writing a function definition
3061
3062 When the Lisp interpreter evaluates a list, it looks to see whether the
3063 first symbol on the list has a function definition attached to it; or,
3064 put another way, whether the symbol points to a function definition. If
3065 it does, the computer carries out the instructions in the definition. A
3066 symbol that has a function definition is called, simply, a function
3067 (although, properly speaking, the definition is the function and the
3068 symbol refers to it.)
3069
3070 @menu
3071 * Primitive Functions::
3072 * defun:: The @code{defun} special form.
3073 * Install:: Install a function definition.
3074 * Interactive:: Making a function interactive.
3075 * Interactive Options:: Different options for @code{interactive}.
3076 * Permanent Installation:: Installing code permanently.
3077 * let:: Creating and initializing local variables.
3078 * if:: What if?
3079 * else:: If--then--else expressions.
3080 * Truth & Falsehood:: What Lisp considers false and true.
3081 * save-excursion:: Keeping track of point, mark, and buffer.
3082 * Review::
3083 * defun Exercises::
3084 @end menu
3085
3086 @node Primitive Functions, defun, Writing Defuns, Writing Defuns
3087 @ifnottex
3088 @unnumberedsec An Aside about Primitive Functions
3089 @end ifnottex
3090 @cindex Primitive functions
3091 @cindex Functions, primitive
3092
3093 @cindex C language primitives
3094 @cindex Primitives written in C
3095 All functions are defined in terms of other functions, except for a few
3096 @dfn{primitive} functions that are written in the C programming
3097 language. When you write functions' definitions, you will write them in
3098 Emacs Lisp and use other functions as your building blocks. Some of the
3099 functions you will use will themselves be written in Emacs Lisp (perhaps
3100 by you) and some will be primitives written in C. The primitive
3101 functions are used exactly like those written in Emacs Lisp and behave
3102 like them. They are written in C so we can easily run GNU Emacs on any
3103 computer that has sufficient power and can run C.
3104
3105 Let me re-emphasize this: when you write code in Emacs Lisp, you do not
3106 distinguish between the use of functions written in C and the use of
3107 functions written in Emacs Lisp. The difference is irrelevant. I
3108 mention the distinction only because it is interesting to know. Indeed,
3109 unless you investigate, you won't know whether an already-written
3110 function is written in Emacs Lisp or C.
3111
3112 @node defun, Install, Primitive Functions, Writing Defuns
3113 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3114 @section The @code{defun} Special Form
3115 @findex defun
3116 @cindex Special form of @code{defun}
3117
3118 @cindex @samp{function definition} defined
3119 In Lisp, a symbol such as @code{mark-whole-buffer} has code attached to
3120 it that tells the computer what to do when the function is called.
3121 This code is called the @dfn{function definition} and is created by
3122 evaluating a Lisp expression that starts with the symbol @code{defun}
3123 (which is an abbreviation for @emph{define function}). Because
3124 @code{defun} does not evaluate its arguments in the usual way, it is
3125 called a @dfn{special form}.
3126
3127 In subsequent sections, we will look at function definitions from the
3128 Emacs source code, such as @code{mark-whole-buffer}. In this section,
3129 we will describe a simple function definition so you can see how it
3130 looks. This function definition uses arithmetic because it makes for a
3131 simple example. Some people dislike examples using arithmetic; however,
3132 if you are such a person, do not despair. Hardly any of the code we
3133 will study in the remainder of this introduction involves arithmetic or
3134 mathematics. The examples mostly involve text in one way or another.
3135
3136 A function definition has up to five parts following the word
3137 @code{defun}:
3138
3139 @enumerate
3140 @item
3141 The name of the symbol to which the function definition should be
3142 attached.
3143
3144 @item
3145 A list of the arguments that will be passed to the function. If no
3146 arguments will be passed to the function, this is an empty list,
3147 @code{()}.
3148
3149 @item
3150 Documentation describing the function. (Technically optional, but
3151 strongly recommended.)
3152
3153 @item
3154 Optionally, an expression to make the function interactive so you can
3155 use it by typing @kbd{M-x} and then the name of the function; or by
3156 typing an appropriate key or keychord.
3157
3158 @cindex @samp{body} defined
3159 @item
3160 The code that instructs the computer what to do: the @dfn{body} of the
3161 function definition.
3162 @end enumerate
3163
3164 It is helpful to think of the five parts of a function definition as
3165 being organized in a template, with slots for each part:
3166
3167 @smallexample
3168 @group
3169 (defun @var{function-name} (@var{arguments}@dots{})
3170 "@var{optional-documentation}@dots{}"
3171 (interactive @var{argument-passing-info}) ; @r{optional}
3172 @var{body}@dots{})
3173 @end group
3174 @end smallexample
3175
3176 As an example, here is the code for a function that multiplies its
3177 argument by 7. (This example is not interactive. @xref{Interactive,
3178 , Making a Function Interactive}, for that information.)
3179
3180 @smallexample
3181 @group
3182 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
3183 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3184 (* 7 number))
3185 @end group
3186 @end smallexample
3187
3188 This definition begins with a parenthesis and the symbol @code{defun},
3189 followed by the name of the function.
3190
3191 @cindex @samp{argument list} defined
3192 The name of the function is followed by a list that contains the
3193 arguments that will be passed to the function. This list is called
3194 the @dfn{argument list}. In this example, the list has only one
3195 element, the symbol, @code{number}. When the function is used, the
3196 symbol will be bound to the value that is used as the argument to the
3197 function.
3198
3199 Instead of choosing the word @code{number} for the name of the argument,
3200 I could have picked any other name. For example, I could have chosen
3201 the word @code{multiplicand}. I picked the word `number' because it
3202 tells what kind of value is intended for this slot; but I could just as
3203 well have chosen the word `multiplicand' to indicate the role that the
3204 value placed in this slot will play in the workings of the function. I
3205 could have called it @code{foogle}, but that would have been a bad
3206 choice because it would not tell humans what it means. The choice of
3207 name is up to the programmer and should be chosen to make the meaning of
3208 the function clear.
3209
3210 Indeed, you can choose any name you wish for a symbol in an argument
3211 list, even the name of a symbol used in some other function: the name
3212 you use in an argument list is private to that particular definition.
3213 In that definition, the name refers to a different entity than any use
3214 of the same name outside the function definition. Suppose you have a
3215 nick-name `Shorty' in your family; when your family members refer to
3216 `Shorty', they mean you. But outside your family, in a movie, for
3217 example, the name `Shorty' refers to someone else. Because a name in an
3218 argument list is private to the function definition, you can change the
3219 value of such a symbol inside the body of a function without changing
3220 its value outside the function. The effect is similar to that produced
3221 by a @code{let} expression. (@xref{let, , @code{let}}.)
3222
3223 @ignore
3224 Note also that we discuss the word `number' in two different ways: as a
3225 symbol that appears in the code, and as the name of something that will
3226 be replaced by a something else during the evaluation of the function.
3227 In the first case, @code{number} is a symbol, not a number; it happens
3228 that within the function, it is a variable who value is the number in
3229 question, but our primary interest in it is as a symbol. On the other
3230 hand, when we are talking about the function, our interest is that we
3231 will substitute a number for the word @var{number}. To keep this
3232 distinction clear, we use different typography for the two
3233 circumstances. When we talk about this function, or about how it works,
3234 we refer to this number by writing @var{number}. In the function
3235 itself, we refer to it by writing @code{number}.
3236 @end ignore
3237
3238 The argument list is followed by the documentation string that
3239 describes the function. This is what you see when you type
3240 @w{@kbd{C-h f}} and the name of a function. Incidentally, when you
3241 write a documentation string like this, you should make the first line
3242 a complete sentence since some commands, such as @code{apropos}, print
3243 only the first line of a multi-line documentation string. Also, you
3244 should not indent the second line of a documentation string, if you
3245 have one, because that looks odd when you use @kbd{C-h f}
3246 (@code{describe-function}). The documentation string is optional, but
3247 it is so useful, it should be included in almost every function you
3248 write.
3249
3250 @findex * @r{(multiplication)}
3251 The third line of the example consists of the body of the function
3252 definition. (Most functions' definitions, of course, are longer than
3253 this.) In this function, the body is the list, @code{(* 7 number)}, which
3254 says to multiply the value of @var{number} by 7. (In Emacs Lisp,
3255 @code{*} is the function for multiplication, just as @code{+} is the
3256 function for addition.)
3257
3258 When you use the @code{multiply-by-seven} function, the argument
3259 @code{number} evaluates to the actual number you want used. Here is an
3260 example that shows how @code{multiply-by-seven} is used; but don't try
3261 to evaluate this yet!
3262
3263 @smallexample
3264 (multiply-by-seven 3)
3265 @end smallexample
3266
3267 @noindent
3268 The symbol @code{number}, specified in the function definition in the
3269 next section, is given or ``bound to'' the value 3 in the actual use of
3270 the function. Note that although @code{number} was inside parentheses
3271 in the function definition, the argument passed to the
3272 @code{multiply-by-seven} function is not in parentheses. The
3273 parentheses are written in the function definition so the computer can
3274 figure out where the argument list ends and the rest of the function
3275 definition begins.
3276
3277 If you evaluate this example, you are likely to get an error message.
3278 (Go ahead, try it!) This is because we have written the function
3279 definition, but not yet told the computer about the definition---we have
3280 not yet installed (or `loaded') the function definition in Emacs.
3281 Installing a function is the process that tells the Lisp interpreter the
3282 definition of the function. Installation is described in the next
3283 section.
3284
3285 @node Install, Interactive, defun, Writing Defuns
3286 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3287 @section Install a Function Definition
3288 @cindex Install a Function Definition
3289 @cindex Definition installation
3290 @cindex Function definition installation
3291
3292 If you are reading this inside of Info in Emacs, you can try out the
3293 @code{multiply-by-seven} function by first evaluating the function
3294 definition and then evaluating @code{(multiply-by-seven 3)}. A copy of
3295 the function definition follows. Place the cursor after the last
3296 parenthesis of the function definition and type @kbd{C-x C-e}. When you
3297 do this, @code{multiply-by-seven} will appear in the echo area. (What
3298 this means is that when a function definition is evaluated, the value it
3299 returns is the name of the defined function.) At the same time, this
3300 action installs the function definition.
3301
3302 @smallexample
3303 @group
3304 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
3305 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3306 (* 7 number))
3307 @end group
3308 @end smallexample
3309
3310 @noindent
3311 By evaluating this @code{defun}, you have just installed
3312 @code{multiply-by-seven} in Emacs. The function is now just as much a
3313 part of Emacs as @code{forward-word} or any other editing function you
3314 use. (@code{multiply-by-seven} will stay installed until you quit
3315 Emacs. To reload code automatically whenever you start Emacs, see
3316 @ref{Permanent Installation, , Installing Code Permanently}.)
3317
3318 @menu
3319 * Effect of installation::
3320 * Change a defun:: How to change a function definition.
3321 @end menu
3322
3323 @node Effect of installation, Change a defun, Install, Install
3324 @ifnottex
3325 @unnumberedsubsec The effect of installation
3326 @end ifnottex
3327
3328 You can see the effect of installing @code{multiply-by-seven} by
3329 evaluating the following sample. Place the cursor after the following
3330 expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}. The number 21 will appear in the
3331 echo area.
3332
3333 @smallexample
3334 (multiply-by-seven 3)
3335 @end smallexample
3336
3337 If you wish, you can read the documentation for the function by typing
3338 @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}) and then the name of the
3339 function, @code{multiply-by-seven}. When you do this, a
3340 @file{*Help*} window will appear on your screen that says:
3341
3342 @smallexample
3343 @group
3344 multiply-by-seven is a Lisp function.
3345 (multiply-by-seven NUMBER)
3346
3347 Multiply NUMBER by seven.
3348 @end group
3349 @end smallexample
3350
3351 @noindent
3352 (To return to a single window on your screen, type @kbd{C-x 1}.)
3353
3354 @node Change a defun, , Effect of installation, Install
3355 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3356 @subsection Change a Function Definition
3357 @cindex Changing a function definition
3358 @cindex Function definition, how to change
3359 @cindex Definition, how to change
3360
3361 If you want to change the code in @code{multiply-by-seven}, just rewrite
3362 it. To install the new version in place of the old one, evaluate the
3363 function definition again. This is how you modify code in Emacs. It is
3364 very simple.
3365
3366 As an example, you can change the @code{multiply-by-seven} function to
3367 add the number to itself seven times instead of multiplying the number
3368 by seven. It produces the same answer, but by a different path. At
3369 the same time, we will add a comment to the code; a comment is text
3370 that the Lisp interpreter ignores, but that a human reader may find
3371 useful or enlightening. The comment is that this is the ``second
3372 version''.
3373
3374 @smallexample
3375 @group
3376 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Second version.}
3377 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3378 (+ number number number number number number number))
3379 @end group
3380 @end smallexample
3381
3382 @cindex Comments in Lisp code
3383 The comment follows a semicolon, @samp{;}. In Lisp, everything on a
3384 line that follows a semicolon is a comment. The end of the line is the
3385 end of the comment. To stretch a comment over two or more lines, begin
3386 each line with a semicolon.
3387
3388 @xref{Beginning a .emacs File, , Beginning a @file{.emacs}
3389 File}, and @ref{Comments, , Comments, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
3390 Reference Manual}, for more about comments.
3391
3392 You can install this version of the @code{multiply-by-seven} function by
3393 evaluating it in the same way you evaluated the first function: place
3394 the cursor after the last parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
3395
3396 In summary, this is how you write code in Emacs Lisp: you write a
3397 function; install it; test it; and then make fixes or enhancements and
3398 install it again.
3399
3400 @node Interactive, Interactive Options, Install, Writing Defuns
3401 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3402 @section Make a Function Interactive
3403 @cindex Interactive functions
3404 @findex interactive
3405
3406 You make a function interactive by placing a list that begins with
3407 the special form @code{interactive} immediately after the
3408 documentation. A user can invoke an interactive function by typing
3409 @kbd{M-x} and then the name of the function; or by typing the keys to
3410 which it is bound, for example, by typing @kbd{C-n} for
3411 @code{next-line} or @kbd{C-x h} for @code{mark-whole-buffer}.
3412
3413 Interestingly, when you call an interactive function interactively,
3414 the value returned is not automatically displayed in the echo area.
3415 This is because you often call an interactive function for its side
3416 effects, such as moving forward by a word or line, and not for the
3417 value returned. If the returned value were displayed in the echo area
3418 each time you typed a key, it would be very distracting.
3419
3420 @menu
3421 * Interactive multiply-by-seven:: An overview.
3422 * multiply-by-seven in detail:: The interactive version.
3423 @end menu
3424
3425 @node Interactive multiply-by-seven, multiply-by-seven in detail, Interactive, Interactive
3426 @ifnottex
3427 @unnumberedsubsec An Interactive @code{multiply-by-seven}, An Overview
3428 @end ifnottex
3429
3430 Both the use of the special form @code{interactive} and one way to
3431 display a value in the echo area can be illustrated by creating an
3432 interactive version of @code{multiply-by-seven}.
3433
3434 @need 1250
3435 Here is the code:
3436
3437 @smallexample
3438 @group
3439 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Interactive version.}
3440 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3441 (interactive "p")
3442 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number)))
3443 @end group
3444 @end smallexample
3445
3446 @noindent
3447 You can install this code by placing your cursor after it and typing
3448 @kbd{C-x C-e}. The name of the function will appear in your echo area.
3449 Then, you can use this code by typing @kbd{C-u} and a number and then
3450 typing @kbd{M-x multiply-by-seven} and pressing @key{RET}. The phrase
3451 @samp{The result is @dots{}} followed by the product will appear in the
3452 echo area.
3453
3454 Speaking more generally, you invoke a function like this in either of two
3455 ways:
3456
3457 @enumerate
3458 @item
3459 By typing a prefix argument that contains the number to be passed, and
3460 then typing @kbd{M-x} and the name of the function, as with
3461 @kbd{C-u 3 M-x forward-sentence}; or,
3462
3463 @item
3464 By typing whatever key or keychord the function is bound to, as with
3465 @kbd{C-u 3 M-e}.
3466 @end enumerate
3467
3468 @noindent
3469 Both the examples just mentioned work identically to move point forward
3470 three sentences. (Since @code{multiply-by-seven} is not bound to a key,
3471 it could not be used as an example of key binding.)
3472
3473 (@xref{Keybindings, , Some Keybindings}, to learn how to bind a command
3474 to a key.)
3475
3476 A prefix argument is passed to an interactive function by typing the
3477 @key{META} key followed by a number, for example, @kbd{M-3 M-e}, or by
3478 typing @kbd{C-u} and then a number, for example, @kbd{C-u 3 M-e} (if you
3479 type @kbd{C-u} without a number, it defaults to 4).
3480
3481 @node multiply-by-seven in detail, , Interactive multiply-by-seven, Interactive
3482 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3483 @subsection An Interactive @code{multiply-by-seven}
3484
3485 Let's look at the use of the special form @code{interactive} and then at
3486 the function @code{message} in the interactive version of
3487 @code{multiply-by-seven}. You will recall that the function definition
3488 looks like this:
3489
3490 @smallexample
3491 @group
3492 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Interactive version.}
3493 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3494 (interactive "p")
3495 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number)))
3496 @end group
3497 @end smallexample
3498
3499 In this function, the expression, @code{(interactive "p")}, is a list of
3500 two elements. The @code{"p"} tells Emacs to pass the prefix argument to
3501 the function and use its value for the argument of the function.
3502
3503 @need 1000
3504 The argument will be a number. This means that the symbol
3505 @code{number} will be bound to a number in the line:
3506
3507 @smallexample
3508 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number))
3509 @end smallexample
3510
3511 @need 1250
3512 @noindent
3513 For example, if your prefix argument is 5, the Lisp interpreter will
3514 evaluate the line as if it were:
3515
3516 @smallexample
3517 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 5))
3518 @end smallexample
3519
3520 @noindent
3521 (If you are reading this in GNU Emacs, you can evaluate this expression
3522 yourself.) First, the interpreter will evaluate the inner list, which
3523 is @code{(* 7 5)}. This returns a value of 35. Next, it
3524 will evaluate the outer list, passing the values of the second and
3525 subsequent elements of the list to the function @code{message}.
3526
3527 As we have seen, @code{message} is an Emacs Lisp function especially
3528 designed for sending a one line message to a user. (@xref{message, ,
3529 The @code{message} function}.) In summary, the @code{message}
3530 function prints its first argument in the echo area as is, except for
3531 occurrences of @samp{%d} or @samp{%s} (and various other %-sequences
3532 which we have not mentioned). When it sees a control sequence, the
3533 function looks to the second or subsequent arguments and prints the
3534 value of the argument in the location in the string where the control
3535 sequence is located.
3536
3537 In the interactive @code{multiply-by-seven} function, the control string
3538 is @samp{%d}, which requires a number, and the value returned by
3539 evaluating @code{(* 7 5)} is the number 35. Consequently, the number 35
3540 is printed in place of the @samp{%d} and the message is @samp{The result
3541 is 35}.
3542
3543 (Note that when you call the function @code{multiply-by-seven}, the
3544 message is printed without quotes, but when you call @code{message}, the
3545 text is printed in double quotes. This is because the value returned by
3546 @code{message} is what appears in the echo area when you evaluate an
3547 expression whose first element is @code{message}; but when embedded in a
3548 function, @code{message} prints the text as a side effect without
3549 quotes.)
3550
3551 @node Interactive Options, Permanent Installation, Interactive, Writing Defuns
3552 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3553 @section Different Options for @code{interactive}
3554 @cindex Options for @code{interactive}
3555 @cindex Interactive options
3556
3557 In the example, @code{multiply-by-seven} used @code{"p"} as the
3558 argument to @code{interactive}. This argument told Emacs to interpret
3559 your typing either @kbd{C-u} followed by a number or @key{META}
3560 followed by a number as a command to pass that number to the function
3561 as its argument. Emacs has more than twenty characters predefined for
3562 use with @code{interactive}. In almost every case, one of these
3563 options will enable you to pass the right information interactively to
3564 a function. (@xref{Interactive Codes, , Code Characters for
3565 @code{interactive}, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
3566
3567 @need 1250
3568 Consider the function @code{zap-to-char}. Its interactive expression
3569 is
3570
3571 @smallexample
3572 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
3573 @end smallexample
3574
3575 The first part of the argument to @code{interactive} is @samp{p}, with
3576 which you are already familiar. This argument tells Emacs to
3577 interpret a `prefix', as a number to be passed to the function. You
3578 can specify a prefix either by typing @kbd{C-u} followed by a number
3579 or by typing @key{META} followed by a number. The prefix is the
3580 number of specified characters. Thus, if your prefix is three and the
3581 specified character is @samp{x}, then you will delete all the text up
3582 to and including the third next @samp{x}. If you do not set a prefix,
3583 then you delete all the text up to and including the specified
3584 character, but no more.
3585
3586 The @samp{c} tells the function the name of the character to which to delete.
3587
3588 More formally, a function with two or more arguments can have
3589 information passed to each argument by adding parts to the string that
3590 follows @code{interactive}. When you do this, the information is
3591 passed to each argument in the same order it is specified in the
3592 @code{interactive} list. In the string, each part is separated from
3593 the next part by a @samp{\n}, which is a newline. For example, you
3594 can follow @samp{p} with a @samp{\n} and an @samp{cZap to char:@: }.
3595 This causes Emacs to pass the value of the prefix argument (if there
3596 is one) and the character.
3597
3598 In this case, the function definition looks like the following, where
3599 @code{arg} and @code{char} are the symbols to which @code{interactive}
3600 binds the prefix argument and the specified character:
3601
3602 @smallexample
3603 @group
3604 (defun @var{name-of-function} (arg char)
3605 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
3606 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
3607 @var{body-of-function}@dots{})
3608 @end group
3609 @end smallexample
3610
3611 @noindent
3612 (The space after the colon in the prompt makes it look better when you
3613 are prompted. @xref{copy-to-buffer, , The Definition of
3614 @code{copy-to-buffer}}, for an example.)
3615
3616 When a function does not take arguments, @code{interactive} does not
3617 require any. Such a function contains the simple expression
3618 @code{(interactive)}. The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is like
3619 this.
3620
3621 Alternatively, if the special letter-codes are not right for your
3622 application, you can pass your own arguments to @code{interactive} as
3623 a list.
3624
3625 @xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}},
3626 for an example. @xref{Using Interactive, , Using @code{Interactive},
3627 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a more complete
3628 explanation about this technique.
3629
3630 @node Permanent Installation, let, Interactive Options, Writing Defuns
3631 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3632 @section Install Code Permanently
3633 @cindex Install code permanently
3634 @cindex Permanent code installation
3635 @cindex Code installation
3636
3637 When you install a function definition by evaluating it, it will stay
3638 installed until you quit Emacs. The next time you start a new session
3639 of Emacs, the function will not be installed unless you evaluate the
3640 function definition again.
3641
3642 At some point, you may want to have code installed automatically
3643 whenever you start a new session of Emacs. There are several ways of
3644 doing this:
3645
3646 @itemize @bullet
3647 @item
3648 If you have code that is just for yourself, you can put the code for the
3649 function definition in your @file{.emacs} initialization file. When you
3650 start Emacs, your @file{.emacs} file is automatically evaluated and all
3651 the function definitions within it are installed.
3652 @xref{Emacs Initialization, , Your @file{.emacs} File}.
3653
3654 @item
3655 Alternatively, you can put the function definitions that you want
3656 installed in one or more files of their own and use the @code{load}
3657 function to cause Emacs to evaluate and thereby install each of the
3658 functions in the files.
3659 @xref{Loading Files, , Loading Files}.
3660
3661 @item
3662 Thirdly, if you have code that your whole site will use, it is usual
3663 to put it in a file called @file{site-init.el} that is loaded when
3664 Emacs is built. This makes the code available to everyone who uses
3665 your machine. (See the @file{INSTALL} file that is part of the Emacs
3666 distribution.)
3667 @end itemize
3668
3669 Finally, if you have code that everyone who uses Emacs may want, you
3670 can post it on a computer network or send a copy to the Free Software
3671 Foundation. (When you do this, please license the code and its
3672 documentation under a license that permits other people to run, copy,
3673 study, modify, and redistribute the code and which protects you from
3674 having your work taken from you.) If you send a copy of your code to
3675 the Free Software Foundation, and properly protect yourself and
3676 others, it may be included in the next release of Emacs. In large
3677 part, this is how Emacs has grown over the past years, by donations.
3678
3679 @node let, if, Permanent Installation, Writing Defuns
3680 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3681 @section @code{let}
3682 @findex let
3683
3684 The @code{let} expression is a special form in Lisp that you will need
3685 to use in most function definitions.
3686
3687 @code{let} is used to attach or bind a symbol to a value in such a way
3688 that the Lisp interpreter will not confuse the variable with a
3689 variable of the same name that is not part of the function.
3690
3691 To understand why the @code{let} special form is necessary, consider
3692 the situation in which you own a home that you generally refer to as
3693 `the house', as in the sentence, ``The house needs painting.'' If you
3694 are visiting a friend and your host refers to `the house', he is
3695 likely to be referring to @emph{his} house, not yours, that is, to a
3696 different house.
3697
3698 If your friend is referring to his house and you think he is referring
3699 to your house, you may be in for some confusion. The same thing could
3700 happen in Lisp if a variable that is used inside of one function has
3701 the same name as a variable that is used inside of another function,
3702 and the two are not intended to refer to the same value. The
3703 @code{let} special form prevents this kind of confusion.
3704
3705 @menu
3706 * Prevent confusion::
3707 * Parts of let Expression::
3708 * Sample let Expression::
3709 * Uninitialized let Variables::
3710 @end menu
3711
3712 @node Prevent confusion, Parts of let Expression, let, let
3713 @ifnottex
3714 @unnumberedsubsec @code{let} Prevents Confusion
3715 @end ifnottex
3716
3717 @cindex @samp{local variable} defined
3718 @cindex @samp{variable, local}, defined
3719 The @code{let} special form prevents confusion. @code{let} creates a
3720 name for a @dfn{local variable} that overshadows any use of the same
3721 name outside the @code{let} expression. This is like understanding
3722 that whenever your host refers to `the house', he means his house, not
3723 yours. (Symbols used in argument lists work the same way.
3724 @xref{defun, , The @code{defun} Special Form}.)
3725
3726 Local variables created by a @code{let} expression retain their value
3727 @emph{only} within the @code{let} expression itself (and within
3728 expressions called within the @code{let} expression); the local
3729 variables have no effect outside the @code{let} expression.
3730
3731 Another way to think about @code{let} is that it is like a @code{setq}
3732 that is temporary and local. The values set by @code{let} are
3733 automatically undone when the @code{let} is finished. The setting
3734 only affects expressions that are inside the bounds of the @code{let}
3735 expression. In computer science jargon, we would say ``the binding of
3736 a symbol is visible only in functions called in the @code{let} form;
3737 in Emacs Lisp, scoping is dynamic, not lexical.''
3738
3739 @code{let} can create more than one variable at once. Also,
3740 @code{let} gives each variable it creates an initial value, either a
3741 value specified by you, or @code{nil}. (In the jargon, this is called
3742 `binding the variable to the value'.) After @code{let} has created
3743 and bound the variables, it executes the code in the body of the
3744 @code{let}, and returns the value of the last expression in the body,
3745 as the value of the whole @code{let} expression. (`Execute' is a jargon
3746 term that means to evaluate a list; it comes from the use of the word
3747 meaning `to give practical effect to' (@cite{Oxford English
3748 Dictionary}). Since you evaluate an expression to perform an action,
3749 `execute' has evolved as a synonym to `evaluate'.)
3750
3751 @node Parts of let Expression, Sample let Expression, Prevent confusion, let
3752 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3753 @subsection The Parts of a @code{let} Expression
3754 @cindex @code{let} expression, parts of
3755 @cindex Parts of @code{let} expression
3756
3757 @cindex @samp{varlist} defined
3758 A @code{let} expression is a list of three parts. The first part is
3759 the symbol @code{let}. The second part is a list, called a
3760 @dfn{varlist}, each element of which is either a symbol by itself or a
3761 two-element list, the first element of which is a symbol. The third
3762 part of the @code{let} expression is the body of the @code{let}. The
3763 body usually consists of one or more lists.
3764
3765 @need 800
3766 A template for a @code{let} expression looks like this:
3767
3768 @smallexample
3769 (let @var{varlist} @var{body}@dots{})
3770 @end smallexample
3771
3772 @noindent
3773 The symbols in the varlist are the variables that are given initial
3774 values by the @code{let} special form. Symbols by themselves are given
3775 the initial value of @code{nil}; and each symbol that is the first
3776 element of a two-element list is bound to the value that is returned
3777 when the Lisp interpreter evaluates the second element.
3778
3779 Thus, a varlist might look like this: @code{(thread (needles 3))}. In
3780 this case, in a @code{let} expression, Emacs binds the symbol
3781 @code{thread} to an initial value of @code{nil}, and binds the symbol
3782 @code{needles} to an initial value of 3.
3783
3784 When you write a @code{let} expression, what you do is put the
3785 appropriate expressions in the slots of the @code{let} expression
3786 template.
3787
3788 If the varlist is composed of two-element lists, as is often the case,
3789 the template for the @code{let} expression looks like this:
3790
3791 @smallexample
3792 @group
3793 (let ((@var{variable} @var{value})
3794 (@var{variable} @var{value})
3795 @dots{})
3796 @var{body}@dots{})
3797 @end group
3798 @end smallexample
3799
3800 @node Sample let Expression, Uninitialized let Variables, Parts of let Expression, let
3801 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3802 @subsection Sample @code{let} Expression
3803 @cindex Sample @code{let} expression
3804 @cindex @code{let} expression sample
3805
3806 The following expression creates and gives initial values
3807 to the two variables @code{zebra} and @code{tiger}. The body of the
3808 @code{let} expression is a list which calls the @code{message} function.
3809
3810 @smallexample
3811 @group
3812 (let ((zebra 'stripes)
3813 (tiger 'fierce))
3814 (message "One kind of animal has %s and another is %s."
3815 zebra tiger))
3816 @end group
3817 @end smallexample
3818
3819 Here, the varlist is @code{((zebra 'stripes) (tiger 'fierce))}.
3820
3821 The two variables are @code{zebra} and @code{tiger}. Each variable is
3822 the first element of a two-element list and each value is the second
3823 element of its two-element list. In the varlist, Emacs binds the
3824 variable @code{zebra} to the value @code{stripes}@footnote{According
3825 to Jared Diamond in @cite{Guns, Germs, and Steel}, ``@dots{} zebras
3826 become impossibly dangerous as they grow older'' but the claim here is
3827 that they do not become fierce like a tiger. (1997, W. W. Norton and
3828 Co., ISBN 0-393-03894-2, page 171)}, and binds the
3829 variable @code{tiger} to the value @code{fierce}. In this example,
3830 both values are symbols preceded by a quote. The values could just as
3831 well have been another list or a string. The body of the @code{let}
3832 follows after the list holding the variables. In this example, the
3833 body is a list that uses the @code{message} function to print a string
3834 in the echo area.
3835
3836 @need 1500
3837 You may evaluate the example in the usual fashion, by placing the
3838 cursor after the last parenthesis and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. When you do
3839 this, the following will appear in the echo area:
3840
3841 @smallexample
3842 "One kind of animal has stripes and another is fierce."
3843 @end smallexample
3844
3845 As we have seen before, the @code{message} function prints its first
3846 argument, except for @samp{%s}. In this example, the value of the variable
3847 @code{zebra} is printed at the location of the first @samp{%s} and the
3848 value of the variable @code{tiger} is printed at the location of the
3849 second @samp{%s}.
3850
3851 @node Uninitialized let Variables, , Sample let Expression, let
3852 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3853 @subsection Uninitialized Variables in a @code{let} Statement
3854 @cindex Uninitialized @code{let} variables
3855 @cindex @code{let} variables uninitialized
3856
3857 If you do not bind the variables in a @code{let} statement to specific
3858 initial values, they will automatically be bound to an initial value of
3859 @code{nil}, as in the following expression:
3860
3861 @smallexample
3862 @group
3863 (let ((birch 3)
3864 pine
3865 fir
3866 (oak 'some))
3867 (message
3868 "Here are %d variables with %s, %s, and %s value."
3869 birch pine fir oak))
3870 @end group
3871 @end smallexample
3872
3873 @noindent
3874 Here, the varlist is @code{((birch 3) pine fir (oak 'some))}.
3875
3876 @need 1250
3877 If you evaluate this expression in the usual way, the following will
3878 appear in your echo area:
3879
3880 @smallexample
3881 "Here are 3 variables with nil, nil, and some value."
3882 @end smallexample
3883
3884 @noindent
3885 In this example, Emacs binds the symbol @code{birch} to the number 3,
3886 binds the symbols @code{pine} and @code{fir} to @code{nil}, and binds
3887 the symbol @code{oak} to the value @code{some}.
3888
3889 Note that in the first part of the @code{let}, the variables @code{pine}
3890 and @code{fir} stand alone as atoms that are not surrounded by
3891 parentheses; this is because they are being bound to @code{nil}, the
3892 empty list. But @code{oak} is bound to @code{some} and so is a part of
3893 the list @code{(oak 'some)}. Similarly, @code{birch} is bound to the
3894 number 3 and so is in a list with that number. (Since a number
3895 evaluates to itself, the number does not need to be quoted. Also, the
3896 number is printed in the message using a @samp{%d} rather than a
3897 @samp{%s}.) The four variables as a group are put into a list to
3898 delimit them from the body of the @code{let}.
3899
3900 @node if, else, let, Writing Defuns
3901 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3902 @section The @code{if} Special Form
3903 @findex if
3904 @cindex Conditional with @code{if}
3905
3906 A third special form, in addition to @code{defun} and @code{let}, is the
3907 conditional @code{if}. This form is used to instruct the computer to
3908 make decisions. You can write function definitions without using
3909 @code{if}, but it is used often enough, and is important enough, to be
3910 included here. It is used, for example, in the code for the
3911 function @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
3912
3913 The basic idea behind an @code{if}, is that ``@emph{if} a test is true,
3914 @emph{then} an expression is evaluated.'' If the test is not true, the
3915 expression is not evaluated. For example, you might make a decision
3916 such as, ``if it is warm and sunny, then go to the beach!''
3917
3918 @menu
3919 * if in more detail::
3920 * type-of-animal in detail:: An example of an @code{if} expression.
3921 @end menu
3922
3923 @node if in more detail, type-of-animal in detail, if, if
3924 @ifnottex
3925 @unnumberedsubsec @code{if} in more detail
3926 @end ifnottex
3927
3928 @cindex @samp{if-part} defined
3929 @cindex @samp{then-part} defined
3930 An @code{if} expression written in Lisp does not use the word `then';
3931 the test and the action are the second and third elements of the list
3932 whose first element is @code{if}. Nonetheless, the test part of an
3933 @code{if} expression is often called the @dfn{if-part} and the second
3934 argument is often called the @dfn{then-part}.
3935
3936 Also, when an @code{if} expression is written, the true-or-false-test
3937 is usually written on the same line as the symbol @code{if}, but the
3938 action to carry out if the test is true, the ``then-part'', is written
3939 on the second and subsequent lines. This makes the @code{if}
3940 expression easier to read.
3941
3942 @smallexample
3943 @group
3944 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
3945 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-test-is-true})
3946 @end group
3947 @end smallexample
3948
3949 @noindent
3950 The true-or-false-test will be an expression that
3951 is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter.
3952
3953 Here is an example that you can evaluate in the usual manner. The test
3954 is whether the number 5 is greater than the number 4. Since it is, the
3955 message @samp{5 is greater than 4!} will be printed.
3956
3957 @smallexample
3958 @group
3959 (if (> 5 4) ; @r{if-part}
3960 (message "5 is greater than 4!")) ; @r{then-part}
3961 @end group
3962 @end smallexample
3963
3964 @noindent
3965 (The function @code{>} tests whether its first argument is greater than
3966 its second argument and returns true if it is.)
3967 @findex > (greater than)
3968
3969 Of course, in actual use, the test in an @code{if} expression will not
3970 be fixed for all time as it is by the expression @code{(> 5 4)}.
3971 Instead, at least one of the variables used in the test will be bound to
3972 a value that is not known ahead of time. (If the value were known ahead
3973 of time, we would not need to run the test!)
3974
3975 For example, the value may be bound to an argument of a function
3976 definition. In the following function definition, the character of the
3977 animal is a value that is passed to the function. If the value bound to
3978 @code{characteristic} is @code{fierce}, then the message, @samp{It's a
3979 tiger!} will be printed; otherwise, @code{nil} will be returned.
3980
3981 @smallexample
3982 @group
3983 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic)
3984 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
3985 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
3986 then warn of a tiger."
3987 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
3988 (message "It's a tiger!")))
3989 @end group
3990 @end smallexample
3991
3992 @need 1500
3993 @noindent
3994 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate the
3995 function definition in the usual way to install it in Emacs, and then you
3996 can evaluate the following two expressions to see the results:
3997
3998 @smallexample
3999 @group
4000 (type-of-animal 'fierce)
4001
4002 (type-of-animal 'zebra)
4003
4004 @end group
4005 @end smallexample
4006
4007 @c Following sentences rewritten to prevent overfull hbox.
4008 @noindent
4009 When you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'fierce)}, you will see the
4010 following message printed in the echo area: @code{"It's a tiger!"}; and
4011 when you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'zebra)} you will see @code{nil}
4012 printed in the echo area.
4013
4014 @node type-of-animal in detail, , if in more detail, if
4015 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4016 @subsection The @code{type-of-animal} Function in Detail
4017
4018 Let's look at the @code{type-of-animal} function in detail.
4019
4020 The function definition for @code{type-of-animal} was written by filling
4021 the slots of two templates, one for a function definition as a whole, and
4022 a second for an @code{if} expression.
4023
4024 @need 1250
4025 The template for every function that is not interactive is:
4026
4027 @smallexample
4028 @group
4029 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
4030 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
4031 @var{body}@dots{})
4032 @end group
4033 @end smallexample
4034
4035 @need 800
4036 The parts of the function that match this template look like this:
4037
4038 @smallexample
4039 @group
4040 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic)
4041 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
4042 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
4043 then warn of a tiger."
4044 @var{body: the} @code{if} @var{expression})
4045 @end group
4046 @end smallexample
4047
4048 The name of function is @code{type-of-animal}; it is passed the value
4049 of one argument. The argument list is followed by a multi-line
4050 documentation string. The documentation string is included in the
4051 example because it is a good habit to write documentation string for
4052 every function definition. The body of the function definition
4053 consists of the @code{if} expression.
4054
4055 @need 800
4056 The template for an @code{if} expression looks like this:
4057
4058 @smallexample
4059 @group
4060 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
4061 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-true})
4062 @end group
4063 @end smallexample
4064
4065 @need 1250
4066 In the @code{type-of-animal} function, the code for the @code{if}
4067 looks like this:
4068
4069 @smallexample
4070 @group
4071 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
4072 (message "It's a tiger!")))
4073 @end group
4074 @end smallexample
4075
4076 @need 800
4077 Here, the true-or-false-test is the expression:
4078
4079 @smallexample
4080 (equal characteristic 'fierce)
4081 @end smallexample
4082
4083 @noindent
4084 In Lisp, @code{equal} is a function that determines whether its first
4085 argument is equal to its second argument. The second argument is the
4086 quoted symbol @code{'fierce} and the first argument is the value of the
4087 symbol @code{characteristic}---in other words, the argument passed to
4088 this function.
4089
4090 In the first exercise of @code{type-of-animal}, the argument
4091 @code{fierce} is passed to @code{type-of-animal}. Since @code{fierce}
4092 is equal to @code{fierce}, the expression, @code{(equal characteristic
4093 'fierce)}, returns a value of true. When this happens, the @code{if}
4094 evaluates the second argument or then-part of the @code{if}:
4095 @code{(message "It's tiger!")}.
4096
4097 On the other hand, in the second exercise of @code{type-of-animal}, the
4098 argument @code{zebra} is passed to @code{type-of-animal}. @code{zebra}
4099 is not equal to @code{fierce}, so the then-part is not evaluated and
4100 @code{nil} is returned by the @code{if} expression.
4101
4102 @node else, Truth & Falsehood, if, Writing Defuns
4103 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4104 @section If--then--else Expressions
4105 @cindex Else
4106
4107 An @code{if} expression may have an optional third argument, called
4108 the @dfn{else-part}, for the case when the true-or-false-test returns
4109 false. When this happens, the second argument or then-part of the
4110 overall @code{if} expression is @emph{not} evaluated, but the third or
4111 else-part @emph{is} evaluated. You might think of this as the cloudy
4112 day alternative for the decision ``if it is warm and sunny, then go to
4113 the beach, else read a book!''.
4114
4115 The word ``else'' is not written in the Lisp code; the else-part of an
4116 @code{if} expression comes after the then-part. In the written Lisp, the
4117 else-part is usually written to start on a line of its own and is
4118 indented less than the then-part:
4119
4120 @smallexample
4121 @group
4122 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
4123 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-true}
4124 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-false})
4125 @end group
4126 @end smallexample
4127
4128 For example, the following @code{if} expression prints the message @samp{4
4129 is not greater than 5!} when you evaluate it in the usual way:
4130
4131 @smallexample
4132 @group
4133 (if (> 4 5) ; @r{if-part}
4134 (message "4 falsely greater than 5!") ; @r{then-part}
4135 (message "4 is not greater than 5!")) ; @r{else-part}
4136 @end group
4137 @end smallexample
4138
4139 @noindent
4140 Note that the different levels of indentation make it easy to
4141 distinguish the then-part from the else-part. (GNU Emacs has several
4142 commands that automatically indent @code{if} expressions correctly.
4143 @xref{Typing Lists, , GNU Emacs Helps You Type Lists}.)
4144
4145 We can extend the @code{type-of-animal} function to include an
4146 else-part by simply incorporating an additional part to the @code{if}
4147 expression.
4148
4149 @need 1500
4150 You can see the consequences of doing this if you evaluate the following
4151 version of the @code{type-of-animal} function definition to install it
4152 and then evaluate the two subsequent expressions to pass different
4153 arguments to the function.
4154
4155 @smallexample
4156 @group
4157 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic) ; @r{Second version.}
4158 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
4159 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
4160 then warn of a tiger;
4161 else say it's not fierce."
4162 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
4163 (message "It's a tiger!")
4164 (message "It's not fierce!")))
4165 @end group
4166 @end smallexample
4167 @sp 1
4168
4169 @smallexample
4170 @group
4171 (type-of-animal 'fierce)
4172
4173 (type-of-animal 'zebra)
4174
4175 @end group
4176 @end smallexample
4177
4178 @c Following sentence rewritten to prevent overfull hbox.
4179 @noindent
4180 When you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'fierce)}, you will see the
4181 following message printed in the echo area: @code{"It's a tiger!"}; but
4182 when you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'zebra)}, you will see
4183 @code{"It's not fierce!"}.
4184
4185 (Of course, if the @var{characteristic} were @code{ferocious}, the
4186 message @code{"It's not fierce!"} would be printed; and it would be
4187 misleading! When you write code, you need to take into account the
4188 possibility that some such argument will be tested by the @code{if}
4189 and write your program accordingly.)
4190
4191 @node Truth & Falsehood, save-excursion, else, Writing Defuns
4192 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4193 @section Truth and Falsehood in Emacs Lisp
4194 @cindex Truth and falsehood in Emacs Lisp
4195 @cindex Falsehood and truth in Emacs Lisp
4196 @findex nil
4197
4198 There is an important aspect to the truth test in an @code{if}
4199 expression. So far, we have spoken of `true' and `false' as values of
4200 predicates as if they were new kinds of Emacs Lisp objects. In fact,
4201 `false' is just our old friend @code{nil}. Anything else---anything
4202 at all---is `true'.
4203
4204 The expression that tests for truth is interpreted as @dfn{true}
4205 if the result of evaluating it is a value that is not @code{nil}. In
4206 other words, the result of the test is considered true if the value
4207 returned is a number such as 47, a string such as @code{"hello"}, or a
4208 symbol (other than @code{nil}) such as @code{flowers}, or a list (so
4209 long as it is not empty), or even a buffer!
4210
4211 @menu
4212 * nil explained:: @code{nil} has two meanings.
4213 @end menu
4214
4215 @node nil explained, , Truth & Falsehood, Truth & Falsehood
4216 @ifnottex
4217 @unnumberedsubsec An explanation of @code{nil}
4218 @end ifnottex
4219
4220 Before illustrating a test for truth, we need an explanation of @code{nil}.
4221
4222 In Emacs Lisp, the symbol @code{nil} has two meanings. First, it means the
4223 empty list. Second, it means false and is the value returned when a
4224 true-or-false-test tests false. @code{nil} can be written as an empty
4225 list, @code{()}, or as @code{nil}. As far as the Lisp interpreter is
4226 concerned, @code{()} and @code{nil} are the same. Humans, however, tend
4227 to use @code{nil} for false and @code{()} for the empty list.
4228
4229 In Emacs Lisp, any value that is not @code{nil}---is not the empty
4230 list---is considered true. This means that if an evaluation returns
4231 something that is not an empty list, an @code{if} expression will test
4232 true. For example, if a number is put in the slot for the test, it
4233 will be evaluated and will return itself, since that is what numbers
4234 do when evaluated. In this conditional, the @code{if} expression will
4235 test true. The expression tests false only when @code{nil}, an empty
4236 list, is returned by evaluating the expression.
4237
4238 You can see this by evaluating the two expressions in the following examples.
4239
4240 In the first example, the number 4 is evaluated as the test in the
4241 @code{if} expression and returns itself; consequently, the then-part
4242 of the expression is evaluated and returned: @samp{true} appears in
4243 the echo area. In the second example, the @code{nil} indicates false;
4244 consequently, the else-part of the expression is evaluated and
4245 returned: @samp{false} appears in the echo area.
4246
4247 @smallexample
4248 @group
4249 (if 4
4250 'true
4251 'false)
4252 @end group
4253
4254 @group
4255 (if nil
4256 'true
4257 'false)
4258 @end group
4259 @end smallexample
4260
4261 @need 1250
4262 Incidentally, if some other useful value is not available for a test that
4263 returns true, then the Lisp interpreter will return the symbol @code{t}
4264 for true. For example, the expression @code{(> 5 4)} returns @code{t}
4265 when evaluated, as you can see by evaluating it in the usual way:
4266
4267 @smallexample
4268 (> 5 4)
4269 @end smallexample
4270
4271 @need 1250
4272 @noindent
4273 On the other hand, this function returns @code{nil} if the test is false.
4274
4275 @smallexample
4276 (> 4 5)
4277 @end smallexample
4278
4279 @node save-excursion, Review, Truth & Falsehood, Writing Defuns
4280 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4281 @section @code{save-excursion}
4282 @findex save-excursion
4283 @cindex Region, what it is
4284 @cindex Preserving point, mark, and buffer
4285 @cindex Point, mark, buffer preservation
4286 @findex point
4287 @findex mark
4288
4289 The @code{save-excursion} function is the fourth and final special form
4290 that we will discuss in this chapter.
4291
4292 In Emacs Lisp programs used for editing, the @code{save-excursion}
4293 function is very common. It saves the location of point and mark,
4294 executes the body of the function, and then restores point and mark to
4295 their previous positions if their locations were changed. Its primary
4296 purpose is to keep the user from being surprised and disturbed by
4297 unexpected movement of point or mark.
4298
4299 @menu
4300 * Point and mark:: A review of various locations.
4301 * Template for save-excursion::
4302 @end menu
4303
4304 @node Point and mark, Template for save-excursion, save-excursion, save-excursion
4305 @ifnottex
4306 @unnumberedsubsec Point and Mark
4307 @end ifnottex
4308
4309 Before discussing @code{save-excursion}, however, it may be useful
4310 first to review what point and mark are in GNU Emacs. @dfn{Point} is
4311 the current location of the cursor. Wherever the cursor
4312 is, that is point. More precisely, on terminals where the cursor
4313 appears to be on top of a character, point is immediately before the
4314 character. In Emacs Lisp, point is an integer. The first character in
4315 a buffer is number one, the second is number two, and so on. The
4316 function @code{point} returns the current position of the cursor as a
4317 number. Each buffer has its own value for point.
4318
4319 The @dfn{mark} is another position in the buffer; its value can be set
4320 with a command such as @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} (@code{set-mark-command}). If
4321 a mark has been set, you can use the command @kbd{C-x C-x}
4322 (@code{exchange-point-and-mark}) to cause the cursor to jump to the mark
4323 and set the mark to be the previous position of point. In addition, if
4324 you set another mark, the position of the previous mark is saved in the
4325 mark ring. Many mark positions can be saved this way. You can jump the
4326 cursor to a saved mark by typing @kbd{C-u C-@key{SPC}} one or more
4327 times.
4328
4329 The part of the buffer between point and mark is called @dfn{the
4330 region}. Numerous commands work on the region, including
4331 @code{center-region}, @code{count-lines-region}, @code{kill-region}, and
4332 @code{print-region}.
4333
4334 The @code{save-excursion} special form saves the locations of point and
4335 mark and restores those positions after the code within the body of the
4336 special form is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter. Thus, if point were
4337 in the beginning of a piece of text and some code moved point to the end
4338 of the buffer, the @code{save-excursion} would put point back to where
4339 it was before, after the expressions in the body of the function were
4340 evaluated.
4341
4342 In Emacs, a function frequently moves point as part of its internal
4343 workings even though a user would not expect this. For example,
4344 @code{count-lines-region} moves point. To prevent the user from being
4345 bothered by jumps that are both unexpected and (from the user's point of
4346 view) unnecessary, @code{save-excursion} is often used to keep point and
4347 mark in the location expected by the user. The use of
4348 @code{save-excursion} is good housekeeping.
4349
4350 To make sure the house stays clean, @code{save-excursion} restores the
4351 values of point and mark even if something goes wrong in the code inside
4352 of it (or, to be more precise and to use the proper jargon, ``in case of
4353 abnormal exit''). This feature is very helpful.
4354
4355 In addition to recording the values of point and mark,
4356 @code{save-excursion} keeps track of the current buffer, and restores
4357 it, too. This means you can write code that will change the buffer and
4358 have @code{save-excursion} switch you back to the original buffer.
4359 This is how @code{save-excursion} is used in @code{append-to-buffer}.
4360 (@xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
4361
4362 @node Template for save-excursion, , Point and mark, save-excursion
4363 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4364 @subsection Template for a @code{save-excursion} Expression
4365
4366 @need 800
4367 The template for code using @code{save-excursion} is simple:
4368
4369 @smallexample
4370 @group
4371 (save-excursion
4372 @var{body}@dots{})
4373 @end group
4374 @end smallexample
4375
4376 @noindent
4377 The body of the function is one or more expressions that will be
4378 evaluated in sequence by the Lisp interpreter. If there is more than
4379 one expression in the body, the value of the last one will be returned
4380 as the value of the @code{save-excursion} function. The other
4381 expressions in the body are evaluated only for their side effects; and
4382 @code{save-excursion} itself is used only for its side effect (which
4383 is restoring the positions of point and mark).
4384
4385 @need 1250
4386 In more detail, the template for a @code{save-excursion} expression
4387 looks like this:
4388
4389 @smallexample
4390 @group
4391 (save-excursion
4392 @var{first-expression-in-body}
4393 @var{second-expression-in-body}
4394 @var{third-expression-in-body}
4395 @dots{}
4396 @var{last-expression-in-body})
4397 @end group
4398 @end smallexample
4399
4400 @noindent
4401 An expression, of course, may be a symbol on its own or a list.
4402
4403 In Emacs Lisp code, a @code{save-excursion} expression often occurs
4404 within the body of a @code{let} expression. It looks like this:
4405
4406 @smallexample
4407 @group
4408 (let @var{varlist}
4409 (save-excursion
4410 @var{body}@dots{}))
4411 @end group
4412 @end smallexample
4413
4414 @node Review, defun Exercises, save-excursion, Writing Defuns
4415 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4416 @section Review
4417
4418 In the last few chapters we have introduced a fair number of functions
4419 and special forms. Here they are described in brief, along with a few
4420 similar functions that have not been mentioned yet.
4421
4422 @table @code
4423 @item eval-last-sexp
4424 Evaluate the last symbolic expression before the current location of
4425 point. The value is printed in the echo area unless the function is
4426 invoked with an argument; in that case, the output is printed in the
4427 current buffer. This command is normally bound to @kbd{C-x C-e}.
4428
4429 @item defun
4430 Define function. This special form has up to five parts: the name,
4431 a template for the arguments that will be passed to the function,
4432 documentation, an optional interactive declaration, and the body of the
4433 definition.
4434
4435 @need 1250
4436 For example, in an early version of Emacs, the function definition was
4437 as follows. (It is slightly more complex now that it seeks the first
4438 non-whitespace character rather than the first visible character.)
4439
4440 @smallexample
4441 @group
4442 (defun back-to-indentation ()
4443 "Move point to first visible character on line."
4444 (interactive)
4445 (beginning-of-line 1)
4446 (skip-chars-forward " \t"))
4447 @end group
4448 @end smallexample
4449
4450 @ignore
4451 In GNU Emacs 22,
4452
4453 (defun backward-to-indentation (&optional arg)
4454 "Move backward ARG lines and position at first nonblank character."
4455 (interactive "p")
4456 (forward-line (- (or arg 1)))
4457 (skip-chars-forward " \t"))
4458
4459 (defun back-to-indentation ()
4460 "Move point to the first non-whitespace character on this line."
4461 (interactive)
4462 (beginning-of-line 1)
4463 (skip-syntax-forward " " (line-end-position))
4464 ;; Move back over chars that have whitespace syntax but have the p flag.
4465 (backward-prefix-chars))
4466 @end ignore
4467
4468 @item interactive
4469 Declare to the interpreter that the function can be used
4470 interactively. This special form may be followed by a string with one
4471 or more parts that pass the information to the arguments of the
4472 function, in sequence. These parts may also tell the interpreter to
4473 prompt for information. Parts of the string are separated by
4474 newlines, @samp{\n}.
4475
4476 @need 1000
4477 Common code characters are:
4478
4479 @table @code
4480 @item b
4481 The name of an existing buffer.
4482
4483 @item f
4484 The name of an existing file.
4485
4486 @item p
4487 The numeric prefix argument. (Note that this `p' is lower case.)
4488
4489 @item r
4490 Point and the mark, as two numeric arguments, smallest first. This
4491 is the only code letter that specifies two successive arguments
4492 rather than one.
4493 @end table
4494
4495 @xref{Interactive Codes, , Code Characters for @samp{interactive},
4496 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a complete list of
4497 code characters.
4498
4499 @item let
4500 Declare that a list of variables is for use within the body of the
4501 @code{let} and give them an initial value, either @code{nil} or a
4502 specified value; then evaluate the rest of the expressions in the body
4503 of the @code{let} and return the value of the last one. Inside the
4504 body of the @code{let}, the Lisp interpreter does not see the values of
4505 the variables of the same names that are bound outside of the
4506 @code{let}.
4507
4508 @need 1250
4509 For example,
4510
4511 @smallexample
4512 @group
4513 (let ((foo (buffer-name))
4514 (bar (buffer-size)))
4515 (message
4516 "This buffer is %s and has %d characters."
4517 foo bar))
4518 @end group
4519 @end smallexample
4520
4521 @item save-excursion
4522 Record the values of point and mark and the current buffer before
4523 evaluating the body of this special form. Restore the values of point
4524 and mark and buffer afterward.
4525
4526 @need 1250
4527 For example,
4528
4529 @smallexample
4530 @group
4531 (message "We are %d characters into this buffer."
4532 (- (point)
4533 (save-excursion
4534 (goto-char (point-min)) (point))))
4535 @end group
4536 @end smallexample
4537
4538 @item if
4539 Evaluate the first argument to the function; if it is true, evaluate
4540 the second argument; else evaluate the third argument, if there is one.
4541
4542 The @code{if} special form is called a @dfn{conditional}. There are
4543 other conditionals in Emacs Lisp, but @code{if} is perhaps the most
4544 commonly used.
4545
4546 @need 1250
4547 For example,
4548
4549 @smallexample
4550 @group
4551 (if (= 22 emacs-major-version)
4552 (message "This is version 22 Emacs")
4553 (message "This is not version 22 Emacs"))
4554 @end group
4555 @end smallexample
4556
4557 @need 1250
4558 @item <
4559 @itemx >
4560 @itemx <=
4561 @itemx >=
4562 The @code{<} function tests whether its first argument is smaller than
4563 its second argument. A corresponding function, @code{>}, tests whether
4564 the first argument is greater than the second. Likewise, @code{<=}
4565 tests whether the first argument is less than or equal to the second and
4566 @code{>=} tests whether the first argument is greater than or equal to
4567 the second. In all cases, both arguments must be numbers or markers
4568 (markers indicate positions in buffers).
4569
4570 @need 800
4571 @item =
4572 The @code{=} function tests whether two arguments, both numbers or
4573 markers, are equal.
4574
4575 @need 1250
4576 @item equal
4577 @itemx eq
4578 Test whether two objects are the same. @code{equal} uses one meaning
4579 of the word `same' and @code{eq} uses another: @code{equal} returns
4580 true if the two objects have a similar structure and contents, such as
4581 two copies of the same book. On the other hand, @code{eq}, returns
4582 true if both arguments are actually the same object.
4583 @findex equal
4584 @findex eq
4585
4586 @need 1250
4587 @item string<
4588 @itemx string-lessp
4589 @itemx string=
4590 @itemx string-equal
4591 The @code{string-lessp} function tests whether its first argument is
4592 smaller than the second argument. A shorter, alternative name for the
4593 same function (a @code{defalias}) is @code{string<}.
4594
4595 The arguments to @code{string-lessp} must be strings or symbols; the
4596 ordering is lexicographic, so case is significant. The print names of
4597 symbols are used instead of the symbols themselves.
4598
4599 @cindex @samp{empty string} defined
4600 An empty string, @samp{""}, a string with no characters in it, is
4601 smaller than any string of characters.
4602
4603 @code{string-equal} provides the corresponding test for equality. Its
4604 shorter, alternative name is @code{string=}. There are no string test
4605 functions that correspond to @var{>}, @code{>=}, or @code{<=}.
4606
4607 @item message
4608 Print a message in the echo area. The first argument is a string that
4609 can contain @samp{%s}, @samp{%d}, or @samp{%c} to print the value of
4610 arguments that follow the string. The argument used by @samp{%s} must
4611 be a string or a symbol; the argument used by @samp{%d} must be a
4612 number. The argument used by @samp{%c} must be an @sc{ascii} code
4613 number; it will be printed as the character with that @sc{ascii} code.
4614 (Various other %-sequences have not been mentioned.)
4615
4616 @item setq
4617 @itemx set
4618 The @code{setq} function sets the value of its first argument to the
4619 value of the second argument. The first argument is automatically
4620 quoted by @code{setq}. It does the same for succeeding pairs of
4621 arguments. Another function, @code{set}, takes only two arguments and
4622 evaluates both of them before setting the value returned by its first
4623 argument to the value returned by its second argument.
4624
4625 @item buffer-name
4626 Without an argument, return the name of the buffer, as a string.
4627
4628 @itemx buffer-file-name
4629 Without an argument, return the name of the file the buffer is
4630 visiting.
4631
4632 @item current-buffer
4633 Return the buffer in which Emacs is active; it may not be
4634 the buffer that is visible on the screen.
4635
4636 @item other-buffer
4637 Return the most recently selected buffer (other than the buffer passed
4638 to @code{other-buffer} as an argument and other than the current
4639 buffer).
4640
4641 @item switch-to-buffer
4642 Select a buffer for Emacs to be active in and display it in the current
4643 window so users can look at it. Usually bound to @kbd{C-x b}.
4644
4645 @item set-buffer
4646 Switch Emacs' attention to a buffer on which programs will run. Don't
4647 alter what the window is showing.
4648
4649 @item buffer-size
4650 Return the number of characters in the current buffer.
4651
4652 @item point
4653 Return the value of the current position of the cursor, as an
4654 integer counting the number of characters from the beginning of the
4655 buffer.
4656
4657 @item point-min
4658 Return the minimum permissible value of point in
4659 the current buffer. This is 1, unless narrowing is in effect.
4660
4661 @item point-max
4662 Return the value of the maximum permissible value of point in the
4663 current buffer. This is the end of the buffer, unless narrowing is in
4664 effect.
4665 @end table
4666
4667 @need 1500
4668 @node defun Exercises, , Review, Writing Defuns
4669 @section Exercises
4670
4671 @itemize @bullet
4672 @item
4673 Write a non-interactive function that doubles the value of its
4674 argument, a number. Make that function interactive.
4675
4676 @item
4677 Write a function that tests whether the current value of
4678 @code{fill-column} is greater than the argument passed to the function,
4679 and if so, prints an appropriate message.
4680 @end itemize
4681
4682 @node Buffer Walk Through, More Complex, Writing Defuns, Top
4683 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4684 @chapter A Few Buffer--Related Functions
4685
4686 In this chapter we study in detail several of the functions used in GNU
4687 Emacs. This is called a ``walk-through''. These functions are used as
4688 examples of Lisp code, but are not imaginary examples; with the
4689 exception of the first, simplified function definition, these functions
4690 show the actual code used in GNU Emacs. You can learn a great deal from
4691 these definitions. The functions described here are all related to
4692 buffers. Later, we will study other functions.
4693
4694 @menu
4695 * Finding More:: How to find more information.
4696 * simplified-beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
4697 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
4698 * mark-whole-buffer:: Almost the same as @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
4699 * append-to-buffer:: Uses @code{save-excursion} and
4700 @code{insert-buffer-substring}.
4701 * Buffer Related Review:: Review.
4702 * Buffer Exercises::
4703 @end menu
4704
4705 @node Finding More, simplified-beginning-of-buffer, Buffer Walk Through, Buffer Walk Through
4706 @section Finding More Information
4707
4708 @findex describe-function, @r{introduced}
4709 @cindex Find function documentation
4710 In this walk-through, I will describe each new function as we come to
4711 it, sometimes in detail and sometimes briefly. If you are interested,
4712 you can get the full documentation of any Emacs Lisp function at any
4713 time by typing @kbd{C-h f} and then the name of the function (and then
4714 @key{RET}). Similarly, you can get the full documentation for a
4715 variable by typing @kbd{C-h v} and then the name of the variable (and
4716 then @key{RET}).
4717
4718 @cindex Find source of function
4719 @c In version 22, tells location both of C and of Emacs Lisp
4720 Also, @code{describe-function} will tell you the location of the
4721 function definition.
4722
4723 Put point into the name of the file that contains the function and
4724 press the @key{RET} key. In this case, @key{RET} means
4725 @code{push-button} rather than `return' or `enter'. Emacs will take
4726 you directly to the function definition.
4727
4728 @ignore
4729 Not In version 22
4730
4731 If you move point over the file name and press
4732 the @key{RET} key, which in this case means @code{help-follow} rather
4733 than `return' or `enter', Emacs will take you directly to the function
4734 definition.
4735 @end ignore
4736
4737 More generally, if you want to see a function in its original source
4738 file, you can use the @code{find-tag} function to jump to it.
4739 @code{find-tag} works with a wide variety of languages, not just
4740 Lisp, and C, and it works with non-programming text as well. For
4741 example, @code{find-tag} will jump to the various nodes in the
4742 Texinfo source file of this document.
4743 The @code{find-tag} function depends on `tags tables' that record
4744 the locations of the functions, variables, and other items to which
4745 @code{find-tag} jumps.
4746
4747 To use the @code{find-tag} command, type @kbd{M-.} (i.e., press the
4748 period key while holding down the @key{META} key, or else type the
4749 @key{ESC} key and then type the period key), and then, at the prompt,
4750 type in the name of the function whose source code you want to see,
4751 such as @code{mark-whole-buffer}, and then type @key{RET}. Emacs will
4752 switch buffers and display the source code for the function on your
4753 screen. To switch back to your current buffer, type @kbd{C-x b
4754 @key{RET}}. (On some keyboards, the @key{META} key is labelled
4755 @key{ALT}.)
4756
4757 @c !!! 22.1.1 tags table location in this paragraph
4758 @cindex TAGS table, specifying
4759 @findex find-tag
4760 Depending on how the initial default values of your copy of Emacs are
4761 set, you may also need to specify the location of your `tags table',
4762 which is a file called @file{TAGS}. For example, if you are
4763 interested in Emacs sources, the tags table you will most likely want,
4764 if it has already been created for you, will be in a subdirectory of
4765 the @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/} directory; thus you would use the
4766 @code{M-x visit-tags-table} command and specify a pathname such as
4767 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/TAGS}. If the tags table
4768 has not already been created, you will have to create it yourself. It
4769 will be in a file such as @file{/usr/local/src/emacs/src/TAGS}.
4770
4771 @need 1250
4772 To create a @file{TAGS} file in a specific directory, switch to that
4773 directory in Emacs using @kbd{M-x cd} command, or list the directory
4774 with @kbd{C-x d} (@code{dired}). Then run the compile command, with
4775 @w{@code{etags *.el}} as the command to execute:
4776
4777 @smallexample
4778 M-x compile RET etags *.el RET
4779 @end smallexample
4780
4781 For more information, see @ref{etags, , Create Your Own @file{TAGS} File}.
4782
4783 After you become more familiar with Emacs Lisp, you will find that you will
4784 frequently use @code{find-tag} to navigate your way around source code;
4785 and you will create your own @file{TAGS} tables.
4786
4787 @cindex Library, as term for `file'
4788 Incidentally, the files that contain Lisp code are conventionally
4789 called @dfn{libraries}. The metaphor is derived from that of a
4790 specialized library, such as a law library or an engineering library,
4791 rather than a general library. Each library, or file, contains
4792 functions that relate to a particular topic or activity, such as
4793 @file{abbrev.el} for handling abbreviations and other typing
4794 shortcuts, and @file{help.el} for on-line help. (Sometimes several
4795 libraries provide code for a single activity, as the various
4796 @file{rmail@dots{}} files provide code for reading electronic mail.)
4797 In @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}, you will see sentences such as ``The
4798 @kbd{C-h p} command lets you search the standard Emacs Lisp libraries
4799 by topic keywords.''
4800
4801 @node simplified-beginning-of-buffer, mark-whole-buffer, Finding More, Buffer Walk Through
4802 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4803 @section A Simplified @code{beginning-of-buffer} Definition
4804 @findex simplified-beginning-of-buffer
4805
4806 The @code{beginning-of-buffer} command is a good function to start with
4807 since you are likely to be familiar with it and it is easy to
4808 understand. Used as an interactive command, @code{beginning-of-buffer}
4809 moves the cursor to the beginning of the buffer, leaving the mark at the
4810 previous position. It is generally bound to @kbd{M-<}.
4811
4812 In this section, we will discuss a shortened version of the function
4813 that shows how it is most frequently used. This shortened function
4814 works as written, but it does not contain the code for a complex option.
4815 In another section, we will describe the entire function.
4816 (@xref{beginning-of-buffer, , Complete Definition of
4817 @code{beginning-of-buffer}}.)
4818
4819 Before looking at the code, let's consider what the function
4820 definition has to contain: it must include an expression that makes
4821 the function interactive so it can be called by typing @kbd{M-x
4822 beginning-of-buffer} or by typing a keychord such as @kbd{M-<}; it
4823 must include code to leave a mark at the original position in the
4824 buffer; and it must include code to move the cursor to the beginning
4825 of the buffer.
4826
4827 @need 1250
4828 Here is the complete text of the shortened version of the function:
4829
4830 @smallexample
4831 @group
4832 (defun simplified-beginning-of-buffer ()
4833 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
4834 leave mark at previous position."
4835 (interactive)
4836 (push-mark)
4837 (goto-char (point-min)))
4838 @end group
4839 @end smallexample
4840
4841 Like all function definitions, this definition has five parts following
4842 the special form @code{defun}:
4843
4844 @enumerate
4845 @item
4846 The name: in this example, @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer}.
4847
4848 @item
4849 A list of the arguments: in this example, an empty list, @code{()},
4850
4851 @item
4852 The documentation string.
4853
4854 @item
4855 The interactive expression.
4856
4857 @item
4858 The body.
4859 @end enumerate
4860
4861 @noindent
4862 In this function definition, the argument list is empty; this means that
4863 this function does not require any arguments. (When we look at the
4864 definition for the complete function, we will see that it may be passed
4865 an optional argument.)
4866
4867 The interactive expression tells Emacs that the function is intended to
4868 be used interactively. In this example, @code{interactive} does not have
4869 an argument because @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} does not
4870 require one.
4871
4872 @need 800
4873 The body of the function consists of the two lines:
4874
4875 @smallexample
4876 @group
4877 (push-mark)
4878 (goto-char (point-min))
4879 @end group
4880 @end smallexample
4881
4882 The first of these lines is the expression, @code{(push-mark)}. When
4883 this expression is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter, it sets a mark at
4884 the current position of the cursor, wherever that may be. The position
4885 of this mark is saved in the mark ring.
4886
4887 The next line is @code{(goto-char (point-min))}. This expression
4888 jumps the cursor to the minimum point in the buffer, that is, to the
4889 beginning of the buffer (or to the beginning of the accessible portion
4890 of the buffer if it is narrowed. @xref{Narrowing & Widening, ,
4891 Narrowing and Widening}.)
4892
4893 The @code{push-mark} command sets a mark at the place where the cursor
4894 was located before it was moved to the beginning of the buffer by the
4895 @code{(goto-char (point-min))} expression. Consequently, you can, if
4896 you wish, go back to where you were originally by typing @kbd{C-x C-x}.
4897
4898 That is all there is to the function definition!
4899
4900 @findex describe-function
4901 When you are reading code such as this and come upon an unfamiliar
4902 function, such as @code{goto-char}, you can find out what it does by
4903 using the @code{describe-function} command. To use this command, type
4904 @kbd{C-h f} and then type in the name of the function and press
4905 @key{RET}. The @code{describe-function} command will print the
4906 function's documentation string in a @file{*Help*} window. For
4907 example, the documentation for @code{goto-char} is:
4908
4909 @smallexample
4910 @group
4911 Set point to POSITION, a number or marker.
4912 Beginning of buffer is position (point-min), end is (point-max).
4913 @end group
4914 @end smallexample
4915
4916 @noindent
4917 The function's one argument is the desired position.
4918
4919 @noindent
4920 (The prompt for @code{describe-function} will offer you the symbol
4921 under or preceding the cursor, so you can save typing by positioning
4922 the cursor right over or after the function and then typing @kbd{C-h f
4923 @key{RET}}.)
4924
4925 The @code{end-of-buffer} function definition is written in the same way as
4926 the @code{beginning-of-buffer} definition except that the body of the
4927 function contains the expression @code{(goto-char (point-max))} in place
4928 of @code{(goto-char (point-min))}.
4929
4930 @node mark-whole-buffer, append-to-buffer, simplified-beginning-of-buffer, Buffer Walk Through
4931 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4932 @section The Definition of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4933 @findex mark-whole-buffer
4934
4935 The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is no harder to understand than the
4936 @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function. In this case, however,
4937 we will look at the complete function, not a shortened version.
4938
4939 The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is not as commonly used as the
4940 @code{beginning-of-buffer} function, but is useful nonetheless: it
4941 marks a whole buffer as a region by putting point at the beginning and
4942 a mark at the end of the buffer. It is generally bound to @kbd{C-x
4943 h}.
4944
4945 @menu
4946 * mark-whole-buffer overview::
4947 * Body of mark-whole-buffer:: Only three lines of code.
4948 @end menu
4949
4950 @node mark-whole-buffer overview, Body of mark-whole-buffer, mark-whole-buffer, mark-whole-buffer
4951 @ifnottex
4952 @unnumberedsubsec An overview of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4953 @end ifnottex
4954
4955 @need 1250
4956 In GNU Emacs 22, the code for the complete function looks like this:
4957
4958 @smallexample
4959 @group
4960 (defun mark-whole-buffer ()
4961 "Put point at beginning and mark at end of buffer.
4962 You probably should not use this function in Lisp programs;
4963 it is usually a mistake for a Lisp function to use any subroutine
4964 that uses or sets the mark."
4965 (interactive)
4966 (push-mark (point))
4967 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
4968 (goto-char (point-min)))
4969 @end group
4970 @end smallexample
4971
4972 @need 1250
4973 Like all other functions, the @code{mark-whole-buffer} function fits
4974 into the template for a function definition. The template looks like
4975 this:
4976
4977 @smallexample
4978 @group
4979 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
4980 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
4981 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
4982 @var{body}@dots{})
4983 @end group
4984 @end smallexample
4985
4986 Here is how the function works: the name of the function is
4987 @code{mark-whole-buffer}; it is followed by an empty argument list,
4988 @samp{()}, which means that the function does not require arguments.
4989 The documentation comes next.
4990
4991 The next line is an @code{(interactive)} expression that tells Emacs
4992 that the function will be used interactively. These details are similar
4993 to the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function described in the
4994 previous section.
4995
4996 @need 1250
4997 @node Body of mark-whole-buffer, , mark-whole-buffer overview, mark-whole-buffer
4998 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4999 @subsection Body of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
5000
5001 The body of the @code{mark-whole-buffer} function consists of three
5002 lines of code:
5003
5004 @c GNU Emacs 22
5005 @smallexample
5006 @group
5007 (push-mark (point))
5008 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
5009 (goto-char (point-min))
5010 @end group
5011 @end smallexample
5012
5013 The first of these lines is the expression, @code{(push-mark (point))}.
5014
5015 This line does exactly the same job as the first line of the body of
5016 the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function, which is written
5017 @code{(push-mark)}. In both cases, the Lisp interpreter sets a mark
5018 at the current position of the cursor.
5019
5020 I don't know why the expression in @code{mark-whole-buffer} is written
5021 @code{(push-mark (point))} and the expression in
5022 @code{beginning-of-buffer} is written @code{(push-mark)}. Perhaps
5023 whoever wrote the code did not know that the arguments for
5024 @code{push-mark} are optional and that if @code{push-mark} is not
5025 passed an argument, the function automatically sets mark at the
5026 location of point by default. Or perhaps the expression was written
5027 so as to parallel the structure of the next line. In any case, the
5028 line causes Emacs to determine the position of point and set a mark
5029 there.
5030
5031 In earlier versions of GNU Emacs, the next line of
5032 @code{mark-whole-buffer} was @code{(push-mark (point-max))}. This
5033 expression sets a mark at the point in the buffer that has the highest
5034 number. This will be the end of the buffer (or, if the buffer is
5035 narrowed, the end of the accessible portion of the buffer.
5036 @xref{Narrowing & Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}, for more about
5037 narrowing.) After this mark has been set, the previous mark, the one
5038 set at point, is no longer set, but Emacs remembers its position, just
5039 as all other recent marks are always remembered. This means that you
5040 can, if you wish, go back to that position by typing @kbd{C-u
5041 C-@key{SPC}} twice.
5042
5043 @need 1250
5044 In GNU Emacs 22, the @code{(point-max)} is slightly more complicated.
5045 The line reads
5046
5047 @smallexample
5048 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
5049 @end smallexample
5050
5051 @noindent
5052 The expression works nearly the same as before. It sets a mark at the
5053 highest numbered place in the buffer that it can. However, in this
5054 version, @code{push-mark} has two additional arguments. The second
5055 argument to @code{push-mark} is @code{nil}. This tells the function
5056 it @emph{should} display a message that says `Mark set' when it pushes
5057 the mark. The third argument is @code{t}. This tells
5058 @code{push-mark} to activate the mark when Transient Mark mode is
5059 turned on. Transient Mark mode highlights the currently active
5060 region. It is often turned off.
5061
5062 Finally, the last line of the function is @code{(goto-char
5063 (point-min)))}. This is written exactly the same way as it is written
5064 in @code{beginning-of-buffer}. The expression moves the cursor to
5065 the minimum point in the buffer, that is, to the beginning of the buffer
5066 (or to the beginning of the accessible portion of the buffer). As a
5067 result of this, point is placed at the beginning of the buffer and mark
5068 is set at the end of the buffer. The whole buffer is, therefore, the
5069 region.
5070
5071 @node append-to-buffer, Buffer Related Review, mark-whole-buffer, Buffer Walk Through
5072 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5073 @section The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}
5074 @findex append-to-buffer
5075
5076 The @code{append-to-buffer} command is more complex than the
5077 @code{mark-whole-buffer} command. What it does is copy the region
5078 (that is, the part of the buffer between point and mark) from the
5079 current buffer to a specified buffer.
5080
5081 @menu
5082 * append-to-buffer overview::
5083 * append interactive:: A two part interactive expression.
5084 * append-to-buffer body:: Incorporates a @code{let} expression.
5085 * append save-excursion:: How the @code{save-excursion} works.
5086 @end menu
5087
5088 @node append-to-buffer overview, append interactive, append-to-buffer, append-to-buffer
5089 @ifnottex
5090 @unnumberedsubsec An Overview of @code{append-to-buffer}
5091 @end ifnottex
5092
5093 @findex insert-buffer-substring
5094 The @code{append-to-buffer} command uses the
5095 @code{insert-buffer-substring} function to copy the region.
5096 @code{insert-buffer-substring} is described by its name: it takes a
5097 string of characters from part of a buffer, a ``substring'', and
5098 inserts them into another buffer.
5099
5100 Most of @code{append-to-buffer} is
5101 concerned with setting up the conditions for
5102 @code{insert-buffer-substring} to work: the code must specify both the
5103 buffer to which the text will go, the window it comes from and goes
5104 to, and the region that will be copied.
5105
5106 @need 1250
5107 Here is the complete text of the function:
5108
5109 @smallexample
5110 @group
5111 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5112 "Append to specified buffer the text of the region.
5113 It is inserted into that buffer before its point.
5114 @end group
5115
5116 @group
5117 When calling from a program, give three arguments:
5118 BUFFER (or buffer name), START and END.
5119 START and END specify the portion of the current buffer to be copied."
5120 (interactive
5121 (list (read-buffer "Append to buffer: " (other-buffer
5122 (current-buffer) t))
5123 (region-beginning) (region-end)))
5124 @end group
5125 @group
5126 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5127 (save-excursion
5128 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5129 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5130 point)
5131 (set-buffer append-to)
5132 (setq point (point))
5133 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5134 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5135 (dolist (window windows)
5136 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5137 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5138 @end group
5139 @end smallexample
5140
5141 The function can be understood by looking at it as a series of
5142 filled-in templates.
5143
5144 The outermost template is for the function definition. In this
5145 function, it looks like this (with several slots filled in):
5146
5147 @smallexample
5148 @group
5149 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5150 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5151 (interactive @dots{})
5152 @var{body}@dots{})
5153 @end group
5154 @end smallexample
5155
5156 The first line of the function includes its name and three arguments.
5157 The arguments are the @code{buffer} to which the text will be copied, and
5158 the @code{start} and @code{end} of the region in the current buffer that
5159 will be copied.
5160
5161 The next part of the function is the documentation, which is clear and
5162 complete. As is conventional, the three arguments are written in
5163 upper case so you will notice them easily. Even better, they are
5164 described in the same order as in the argument list.
5165
5166 Note that the documentation distinguishes between a buffer and its
5167 name. (The function can handle either.)
5168
5169 @node append interactive, append-to-buffer body, append-to-buffer overview, append-to-buffer
5170 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5171 @subsection The @code{append-to-buffer} Interactive Expression
5172
5173 Since the @code{append-to-buffer} function will be used interactively,
5174 the function must have an @code{interactive} expression. (For a
5175 review of @code{interactive}, see @ref{Interactive, , Making a
5176 Function Interactive}.) The expression reads as follows:
5177
5178 @smallexample
5179 @group
5180 (interactive
5181 (list (read-buffer
5182 "Append to buffer: "
5183 (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
5184 (region-beginning)
5185 (region-end)))
5186 @end group
5187 @end smallexample
5188
5189 @noindent
5190 This expression is not one with letters standing for parts, as
5191 described earlier. Instead, it starts a list with these parts:
5192
5193 The first part of the list is an expression to read the name of a
5194 buffer and return it as a string. That is @code{read-buffer}. The
5195 function requires a prompt as its first argument, @samp{"Append to
5196 buffer: "}. Its second argument tells the command what value to
5197 provide if you don't specify anything.
5198
5199 In this case that second argument is an expression containing the
5200 function @code{other-buffer}, an exception, and a @samp{t}, standing
5201 for true.
5202
5203 The first argument to @code{other-buffer}, the exception, is yet
5204 another function, @code{current-buffer}. That is not going to be
5205 returned. The second argument is the symbol for true, @code{t}. that
5206 tells @code{other-buffer} that it may show visible buffers (except in
5207 this case, it will not show the current buffer, which makes sense).
5208
5209 @need 1250
5210 The expression looks like this:
5211
5212 @smallexample
5213 (other-buffer (current-buffer) t)
5214 @end smallexample
5215
5216 The second and third arguments to the @code{list} expression are
5217 @code{(region-beginning)} and @code{(region-end)}. These two
5218 functions specify the beginning and end of the text to be appended.
5219
5220 @need 1250
5221 Originally, the command used the letters @samp{B} and @samp{r}.
5222 The whole @code{interactive} expression looked like this:
5223
5224 @smallexample
5225 (interactive "BAppend to buffer:@: \nr")
5226 @end smallexample
5227
5228 @noindent
5229 But when that was done, the default value of the buffer switched to
5230 was invisible. That was not wanted.
5231
5232 (The prompt was separated from the second argument with a newline,
5233 @samp{\n}. It was followed by an @samp{r} that told Emacs to bind the
5234 two arguments that follow the symbol @code{buffer} in the function's
5235 argument list (that is, @code{start} and @code{end}) to the values of
5236 point and mark. That argument worked fine.)
5237
5238 @node append-to-buffer body, append save-excursion, append interactive, append-to-buffer
5239 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5240 @subsection The Body of @code{append-to-buffer}
5241
5242 @ignore
5243 in GNU Emacs 22 in /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/simple.el
5244
5245 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5246 "Append to specified buffer the text of the region.
5247 It is inserted into that buffer before its point.
5248
5249 When calling from a program, give three arguments:
5250 BUFFER (or buffer name), START and END.
5251 START and END specify the portion of the current buffer to be copied."
5252 (interactive
5253 (list (read-buffer "Append to buffer: " (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
5254 (region-beginning) (region-end)))
5255 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5256 (save-excursion
5257 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5258 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5259 point)
5260 (set-buffer append-to)
5261 (setq point (point))
5262 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5263 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5264 (dolist (window windows)
5265 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5266 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5267 @end ignore
5268
5269 The body of the @code{append-to-buffer} function begins with @code{let}.
5270
5271 As we have seen before (@pxref{let, , @code{let}}), the purpose of a
5272 @code{let} expression is to create and give initial values to one or
5273 more variables that will only be used within the body of the
5274 @code{let}. This means that such a variable will not be confused with
5275 any variable of the same name outside the @code{let} expression.
5276
5277 We can see how the @code{let} expression fits into the function as a
5278 whole by showing a template for @code{append-to-buffer} with the
5279 @code{let} expression in outline:
5280
5281 @smallexample
5282 @group
5283 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5284 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5285 (interactive @dots{})
5286 (let ((@var{variable} @var{value}))
5287 @var{body}@dots{})
5288 @end group
5289 @end smallexample
5290
5291 The @code{let} expression has three elements:
5292
5293 @enumerate
5294 @item
5295 The symbol @code{let};
5296
5297 @item
5298 A varlist containing, in this case, a single two-element list,
5299 @code{(@var{variable} @var{value})};
5300
5301 @item
5302 The body of the @code{let} expression.
5303 @end enumerate
5304
5305 @need 800
5306 In the @code{append-to-buffer} function, the varlist looks like this:
5307
5308 @smallexample
5309 (oldbuf (current-buffer))
5310 @end smallexample
5311
5312 @noindent
5313 In this part of the @code{let} expression, the one variable,
5314 @code{oldbuf}, is bound to the value returned by the
5315 @code{(current-buffer)} expression. The variable, @code{oldbuf}, is
5316 used to keep track of the buffer in which you are working and from
5317 which you will copy.
5318
5319 The element or elements of a varlist are surrounded by a set of
5320 parentheses so the Lisp interpreter can distinguish the varlist from
5321 the body of the @code{let}. As a consequence, the two-element list
5322 within the varlist is surrounded by a circumscribing set of parentheses.
5323 The line looks like this:
5324
5325 @smallexample
5326 @group
5327 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5328 @dots{} )
5329 @end group
5330 @end smallexample
5331
5332 @noindent
5333 The two parentheses before @code{oldbuf} might surprise you if you did
5334 not realize that the first parenthesis before @code{oldbuf} marks the
5335 boundary of the varlist and the second parenthesis marks the beginning
5336 of the two-element list, @code{(oldbuf (current-buffer))}.
5337
5338 @node append save-excursion, , append-to-buffer body, append-to-buffer
5339 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5340 @subsection @code{save-excursion} in @code{append-to-buffer}
5341
5342 The body of the @code{let} expression in @code{append-to-buffer}
5343 consists of a @code{save-excursion} expression.
5344
5345 The @code{save-excursion} function saves the locations of point and
5346 mark, and restores them to those positions after the expressions in the
5347 body of the @code{save-excursion} complete execution. In addition,
5348 @code{save-excursion} keeps track of the original buffer, and
5349 restores it. This is how @code{save-excursion} is used in
5350 @code{append-to-buffer}.
5351
5352 @need 1500
5353 @cindex Indentation for formatting
5354 @cindex Formatting convention
5355 Incidentally, it is worth noting here that a Lisp function is normally
5356 formatted so that everything that is enclosed in a multi-line spread is
5357 indented more to the right than the first symbol. In this function
5358 definition, the @code{let} is indented more than the @code{defun}, and
5359 the @code{save-excursion} is indented more than the @code{let}, like
5360 this:
5361
5362 @smallexample
5363 @group
5364 (defun @dots{}
5365 @dots{}
5366 @dots{}
5367 (let@dots{}
5368 (save-excursion
5369 @dots{}
5370 @end group
5371 @end smallexample
5372
5373 @need 1500
5374 @noindent
5375 This formatting convention makes it easy to see that the lines in
5376 the body of the @code{save-excursion} are enclosed by the parentheses
5377 associated with @code{save-excursion}, just as the
5378 @code{save-excursion} itself is enclosed by the parentheses associated
5379 with the @code{let}:
5380
5381 @smallexample
5382 @group
5383 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5384 (save-excursion
5385 @dots{}
5386 (set-buffer @dots{})
5387 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5388 @dots{}))
5389 @end group
5390 @end smallexample
5391
5392 @need 1200
5393 The use of the @code{save-excursion} function can be viewed as a process
5394 of filling in the slots of a template:
5395
5396 @smallexample
5397 @group
5398 (save-excursion
5399 @var{first-expression-in-body}
5400 @var{second-expression-in-body}
5401 @dots{}
5402 @var{last-expression-in-body})
5403 @end group
5404 @end smallexample
5405
5406 @need 1200
5407 @noindent
5408 In this function, the body of the @code{save-excursion} contains only
5409 one expression, the @code{let*} expression. You know about a
5410 @code{let} function. The @code{let*} function is different. It has a
5411 @samp{*} in its name. It enables Emacs to set each variable in its
5412 varlist in sequence, one after another.
5413
5414 Its critical feature is that variables later in the varlist can make
5415 use of the values to which Emacs set variables earlier in the varlist.
5416 @xref{fwd-para let, , The @code{let*} expression}.
5417
5418 We will skip functions like @code{let*} and focus on two: the
5419 @code{set-buffer} function and the @code{insert-buffer-substring}
5420 function.
5421
5422 @need 1250
5423 In the old days, the @code{set-buffer} expression was simply
5424
5425 @smallexample
5426 (set-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer))
5427 @end smallexample
5428
5429 @need 1250
5430 @noindent
5431 but now it is
5432
5433 @smallexample
5434 (set-buffer append-to)
5435 @end smallexample
5436
5437 @noindent
5438 @code{append-to} is bound to @code{(get-buffer-create buffer)} earlier
5439 on in the @code{let*} expression. That extra binding would not be
5440 necessary except for that @code{append-to} is used later in the
5441 varlist as an argument to @code{get-buffer-window-list}.
5442
5443 @ignore
5444 in GNU Emacs 22
5445
5446 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5447 (save-excursion
5448 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5449 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5450 point)
5451 (set-buffer append-to)
5452 (setq point (point))
5453 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5454 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5455 (dolist (window windows)
5456 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5457 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5458 @end ignore
5459
5460 The @code{append-to-buffer} function definition inserts text from the
5461 buffer in which you are currently to a named buffer. It happens that
5462 @code{insert-buffer-substring} copies text from another buffer to the
5463 current buffer, just the reverse---that is why the
5464 @code{append-to-buffer} definition starts out with a @code{let} that
5465 binds the local symbol @code{oldbuf} to the value returned by
5466 @code{current-buffer}.
5467
5468 @need 1250
5469 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} expression looks like this:
5470
5471 @smallexample
5472 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5473 @end smallexample
5474
5475 @noindent
5476 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} function copies a string
5477 @emph{from} the buffer specified as its first argument and inserts the
5478 string into the present buffer. In this case, the argument to
5479 @code{insert-buffer-substring} is the value of the variable created
5480 and bound by the @code{let}, namely the value of @code{oldbuf}, which
5481 was the current buffer when you gave the @code{append-to-buffer}
5482 command.
5483
5484 After @code{insert-buffer-substring} has done its work,
5485 @code{save-excursion} will restore the action to the original buffer
5486 and @code{append-to-buffer} will have done its job.
5487
5488 @need 800
5489 Written in skeletal form, the workings of the body look like this:
5490
5491 @smallexample
5492 @group
5493 (let (@var{bind-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-to-value-of-}@code{current-buffer})
5494 (save-excursion ; @r{Keep track of buffer.}
5495 @var{change-buffer}
5496 @var{insert-substring-from-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-into-buffer})
5497
5498 @var{change-back-to-original-buffer-when-finished}
5499 @var{let-the-local-meaning-of-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-disappear-when-finished}
5500 @end group
5501 @end smallexample
5502
5503 In summary, @code{append-to-buffer} works as follows: it saves the
5504 value of the current buffer in the variable called @code{oldbuf}. It
5505 gets the new buffer (creating one if need be) and switches Emacs'
5506 attention to it. Using the value of @code{oldbuf}, it inserts the
5507 region of text from the old buffer into the new buffer; and then using
5508 @code{save-excursion}, it brings you back to your original buffer.
5509
5510 In looking at @code{append-to-buffer}, you have explored a fairly
5511 complex function. It shows how to use @code{let} and
5512 @code{save-excursion}, and how to change to and come back from another
5513 buffer. Many function definitions use @code{let},
5514 @code{save-excursion}, and @code{set-buffer} this way.
5515
5516 @node Buffer Related Review, Buffer Exercises, append-to-buffer, Buffer Walk Through
5517 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5518 @section Review
5519
5520 Here is a brief summary of the various functions discussed in this chapter.
5521
5522 @table @code
5523 @item describe-function
5524 @itemx describe-variable
5525 Print the documentation for a function or variable.
5526 Conventionally bound to @kbd{C-h f} and @kbd{C-h v}.
5527
5528 @item find-tag
5529 Find the file containing the source for a function or variable and
5530 switch buffers to it, positioning point at the beginning of the item.
5531 Conventionally bound to @kbd{M-.} (that's a period following the
5532 @key{META} key).
5533
5534 @item save-excursion
5535 Save the location of point and mark and restore their values after the
5536 arguments to @code{save-excursion} have been evaluated. Also, remember
5537 the current buffer and return to it.
5538
5539 @item push-mark
5540 Set mark at a location and record the value of the previous mark on the
5541 mark ring. The mark is a location in the buffer that will keep its
5542 relative position even if text is added to or removed from the buffer.
5543
5544 @item goto-char
5545 Set point to the location specified by the value of the argument, which
5546 can be a number, a marker, or an expression that returns the number of
5547 a position, such as @code{(point-min)}.
5548
5549 @item insert-buffer-substring
5550 Copy a region of text from a buffer that is passed to the function as
5551 an argument and insert the region into the current buffer.
5552
5553 @item mark-whole-buffer
5554 Mark the whole buffer as a region. Normally bound to @kbd{C-x h}.
5555
5556 @item set-buffer
5557 Switch the attention of Emacs to another buffer, but do not change the
5558 window being displayed. Used when the program rather than a human is
5559 to work on a different buffer.
5560
5561 @item get-buffer-create
5562 @itemx get-buffer
5563 Find a named buffer or create one if a buffer of that name does not
5564 exist. The @code{get-buffer} function returns @code{nil} if the named
5565 buffer does not exist.
5566 @end table
5567
5568 @need 1500
5569 @node Buffer Exercises, , Buffer Related Review, Buffer Walk Through
5570 @section Exercises
5571
5572 @itemize @bullet
5573 @item
5574 Write your own @code{simplified-end-of-buffer} function definition;
5575 then test it to see whether it works.
5576
5577 @item
5578 Use @code{if} and @code{get-buffer} to write a function that prints a
5579 message telling you whether a buffer exists.
5580
5581 @item
5582 Using @code{find-tag}, find the source for the @code{copy-to-buffer}
5583 function.
5584 @end itemize
5585
5586 @node More Complex, Narrowing & Widening, Buffer Walk Through, Top
5587 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5588 @chapter A Few More Complex Functions
5589
5590 In this chapter, we build on what we have learned in previous chapters
5591 by looking at more complex functions. The @code{copy-to-buffer}
5592 function illustrates use of two @code{save-excursion} expressions in
5593 one definition, while the @code{insert-buffer} function illustrates
5594 use of an asterisk in an @code{interactive} expression, use of
5595 @code{or}, and the important distinction between a name and the object
5596 to which the name refers.
5597
5598 @menu
5599 * copy-to-buffer:: With @code{set-buffer}, @code{get-buffer-create}.
5600 * insert-buffer:: Read-only, and with @code{or}.
5601 * beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
5602 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
5603 * Second Buffer Related Review::
5604 * optional Exercise::
5605 @end menu
5606
5607 @node copy-to-buffer, insert-buffer, More Complex, More Complex
5608 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5609 @section The Definition of @code{copy-to-buffer}
5610 @findex copy-to-buffer
5611
5612 After understanding how @code{append-to-buffer} works, it is easy to
5613 understand @code{copy-to-buffer}. This function copies text into a
5614 buffer, but instead of adding to the second buffer, it replaces all the
5615 previous text in the second buffer.
5616
5617 @need 800
5618 The body of @code{copy-to-buffer} looks like this,
5619
5620 @smallexample
5621 @group
5622 @dots{}
5623 (interactive "BCopy to buffer: \nr")
5624 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5625 (with-current-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer)
5626 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5627 (erase-buffer)
5628 (save-excursion
5629 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)))))
5630 @end group
5631 @end smallexample
5632
5633 The @code{copy-to-buffer} function has a simpler @code{interactive}
5634 expression than @code{append-to-buffer}.
5635
5636 @need 800
5637 The definition then says
5638
5639 @smallexample
5640 (with-current-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer) @dots{}
5641 @end smallexample
5642
5643 First, look at the earliest inner expression; that is evaluated first.
5644 That expression starts with @code{get-buffer-create buffer}. The
5645 function tells the computer to use the buffer with the name specified
5646 as the one to which you are copying, or if such a buffer does not
5647 exist, to create it. Then, the @code{with-current-buffer} function
5648 evaluates its body with that buffer temporarily current.
5649
5650 (This demonstrates another way to shift the computer's attention but
5651 not the user's. The @code{append-to-buffer} function showed how to do
5652 the same with @code{save-excursion} and @code{set-buffer}.
5653 @code{with-current-buffer} is a newer, and arguably easier,
5654 mechanism.)
5655
5656 The @code{barf-if-buffer-read-only} function sends you an error
5657 message saying the buffer is read-only if you cannot modify it.
5658
5659 The next line has the @code{erase-buffer} function as its sole
5660 contents. That function erases the buffer.
5661
5662 Finally, the last two lines contain the @code{save-excursion}
5663 expression with @code{insert-buffer-substring} as its body.
5664 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} expression copies the text from
5665 the buffer you are in (and you have not seen the computer shift its
5666 attention, so you don't know that that buffer is now called
5667 @code{oldbuf}).
5668
5669 Incidentally, this is what is meant by `replacement'. To replace text,
5670 Emacs erases the previous text and then inserts new text.
5671
5672 @need 1250
5673 In outline, the body of @code{copy-to-buffer} looks like this:
5674
5675 @smallexample
5676 @group
5677 (let (@var{bind-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-to-value-of-}@code{current-buffer})
5678 (@var{with-the-buffer-you-are-copying-to}
5679 (@var{but-do-not-erase-or-copy-to-a-read-only-buffer})
5680 (erase-buffer)
5681 (save-excursion
5682 @var{insert-substring-from-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-into-buffer})))
5683 @end group
5684 @end smallexample
5685
5686 @node insert-buffer, beginning-of-buffer, copy-to-buffer, More Complex
5687 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5688 @section The Definition of @code{insert-buffer}
5689 @findex insert-buffer
5690
5691 @code{insert-buffer} is yet another buffer-related function. This
5692 command copies another buffer @emph{into} the current buffer. It is the
5693 reverse of @code{append-to-buffer} or @code{copy-to-buffer}, since they
5694 copy a region of text @emph{from} the current buffer to another buffer.
5695
5696 Here is a discussion based on the original code. The code was
5697 simplified in 2003 and is harder to understand.
5698
5699 (@xref{New insert-buffer, , New Body for @code{insert-buffer}}, to see
5700 a discussion of the new body.)
5701
5702 In addition, this code illustrates the use of @code{interactive} with a
5703 buffer that might be @dfn{read-only} and the important distinction
5704 between the name of an object and the object actually referred to.
5705
5706 @menu
5707 * insert-buffer code::
5708 * insert-buffer interactive:: When you can read, but not write.
5709 * insert-buffer body:: The body has an @code{or} and a @code{let}.
5710 * if & or:: Using an @code{if} instead of an @code{or}.
5711 * Insert or:: How the @code{or} expression works.
5712 * Insert let:: Two @code{save-excursion} expressions.
5713 * New insert-buffer::
5714 @end menu
5715
5716 @node insert-buffer code, insert-buffer interactive, insert-buffer, insert-buffer
5717 @ifnottex
5718 @unnumberedsubsec The Code for @code{insert-buffer}
5719 @end ifnottex
5720
5721 @need 800
5722 Here is the earlier code:
5723
5724 @smallexample
5725 @group
5726 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5727 "Insert after point the contents of BUFFER.
5728 Puts mark after the inserted text.
5729 BUFFER may be a buffer or a buffer name."
5730 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5731 @end group
5732 @group
5733 (or (bufferp buffer)
5734 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer)))
5735 (let (start end newmark)
5736 (save-excursion
5737 (save-excursion
5738 (set-buffer buffer)
5739 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
5740 @end group
5741 @group
5742 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
5743 (setq newmark (point)))
5744 (push-mark newmark)))
5745 @end group
5746 @end smallexample
5747
5748 @need 1200
5749 As with other function definitions, you can use a template to see an
5750 outline of the function:
5751
5752 @smallexample
5753 @group
5754 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5755 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5756 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5757 @var{body}@dots{})
5758 @end group
5759 @end smallexample
5760
5761 @node insert-buffer interactive, insert-buffer body, insert-buffer code, insert-buffer
5762 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5763 @subsection The Interactive Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
5764 @findex interactive, @r{example use of}
5765
5766 In @code{insert-buffer}, the argument to the @code{interactive}
5767 declaration has two parts, an asterisk, @samp{*}, and @samp{bInsert
5768 buffer:@: }.
5769
5770 @menu
5771 * Read-only buffer:: When a buffer cannot be modified.
5772 * b for interactive:: An existing buffer or else its name.
5773 @end menu
5774
5775 @node Read-only buffer, b for interactive, insert-buffer interactive, insert-buffer interactive
5776 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5777 @unnumberedsubsubsec A Read-only Buffer
5778 @cindex Read-only buffer
5779 @cindex Asterisk for read-only buffer
5780 @findex * @r{for read-only buffer}
5781
5782 The asterisk is for the situation when the current buffer is a
5783 read-only buffer---a buffer that cannot be modified. If
5784 @code{insert-buffer} is called when the current buffer is read-only, a
5785 message to this effect is printed in the echo area and the terminal
5786 may beep or blink at you; you will not be permitted to insert anything
5787 into current buffer. The asterisk does not need to be followed by a
5788 newline to separate it from the next argument.
5789
5790 @node b for interactive, , Read-only buffer, insert-buffer interactive
5791 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5792 @unnumberedsubsubsec @samp{b} in an Interactive Expression
5793
5794 The next argument in the interactive expression starts with a lower
5795 case @samp{b}. (This is different from the code for
5796 @code{append-to-buffer}, which uses an upper-case @samp{B}.
5797 @xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
5798 The lower-case @samp{b} tells the Lisp interpreter that the argument
5799 for @code{insert-buffer} should be an existing buffer or else its
5800 name. (The upper-case @samp{B} option provides for the possibility
5801 that the buffer does not exist.) Emacs will prompt you for the name
5802 of the buffer, offering you a default buffer, with name completion
5803 enabled. If the buffer does not exist, you receive a message that
5804 says ``No match''; your terminal may beep at you as well.
5805
5806 The new and simplified code generates a list for @code{interactive}.
5807 It uses the @code{barf-if-buffer-read-only} and @code{read-buffer}
5808 functions with which we are already familiar and the @code{progn}
5809 special form with which we are not. (It will be described later.)
5810
5811 @node insert-buffer body, if & or, insert-buffer interactive, insert-buffer
5812 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5813 @subsection The Body of the @code{insert-buffer} Function
5814
5815 The body of the @code{insert-buffer} function has two major parts: an
5816 @code{or} expression and a @code{let} expression. The purpose of the
5817 @code{or} expression is to ensure that the argument @code{buffer} is
5818 bound to a buffer and not just the name of a buffer. The body of the
5819 @code{let} expression contains the code which copies the other buffer
5820 into the current buffer.
5821
5822 @need 1250
5823 In outline, the two expressions fit into the @code{insert-buffer}
5824 function like this:
5825
5826 @smallexample
5827 @group
5828 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5829 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5830 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5831 (or @dots{}
5832 @dots{}
5833 @end group
5834 @group
5835 (let (@var{varlist})
5836 @var{body-of-}@code{let}@dots{} )
5837 @end group
5838 @end smallexample
5839
5840 To understand how the @code{or} expression ensures that the argument
5841 @code{buffer} is bound to a buffer and not to the name of a buffer, it
5842 is first necessary to understand the @code{or} function.
5843
5844 Before doing this, let me rewrite this part of the function using
5845 @code{if} so that you can see what is done in a manner that will be familiar.
5846
5847 @node if & or, Insert or, insert-buffer body, insert-buffer
5848 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5849 @subsection @code{insert-buffer} With an @code{if} Instead of an @code{or}
5850
5851 The job to be done is to make sure the value of @code{buffer} is a
5852 buffer itself and not the name of a buffer. If the value is the name,
5853 then the buffer itself must be got.
5854
5855 You can imagine yourself at a conference where an usher is wandering
5856 around holding a list with your name on it and looking for you: the
5857 usher is ``bound'' to your name, not to you; but when the usher finds
5858 you and takes your arm, the usher becomes ``bound'' to you.
5859
5860 @need 800
5861 In Lisp, you might describe this situation like this:
5862
5863 @smallexample
5864 @group
5865 (if (not (holding-on-to-guest))
5866 (find-and-take-arm-of-guest))
5867 @end group
5868 @end smallexample
5869
5870 We want to do the same thing with a buffer---if we do not have the
5871 buffer itself, we want to get it.
5872
5873 @need 1200
5874 Using a predicate called @code{bufferp} that tells us whether we have a
5875 buffer (rather than its name), we can write the code like this:
5876
5877 @smallexample
5878 @group
5879 (if (not (bufferp buffer)) ; @r{if-part}
5880 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))) ; @r{then-part}
5881 @end group
5882 @end smallexample
5883
5884 @noindent
5885 Here, the true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression is
5886 @w{@code{(not (bufferp buffer))}}; and the then-part is the expression
5887 @w{@code{(setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))}}.
5888
5889 In the test, the function @code{bufferp} returns true if its argument is
5890 a buffer---but false if its argument is the name of the buffer. (The
5891 last character of the function name @code{bufferp} is the character
5892 @samp{p}; as we saw earlier, such use of @samp{p} is a convention that
5893 indicates that the function is a predicate, which is a term that means
5894 that the function will determine whether some property is true or false.
5895 @xref{Wrong Type of Argument, , Using the Wrong Type Object as an
5896 Argument}.)
5897
5898 @need 1200
5899 The function @code{not} precedes the expression @code{(bufferp buffer)},
5900 so the true-or-false-test looks like this:
5901
5902 @smallexample
5903 (not (bufferp buffer))
5904 @end smallexample
5905
5906 @noindent
5907 @code{not} is a function that returns true if its argument is false
5908 and false if its argument is true. So if @code{(bufferp buffer)}
5909 returns true, the @code{not} expression returns false and vice-verse:
5910 what is ``not true'' is false and what is ``not false'' is true.
5911
5912 Using this test, the @code{if} expression works as follows: when the
5913 value of the variable @code{buffer} is actually a buffer rather than
5914 its name, the true-or-false-test returns false and the @code{if}
5915 expression does not evaluate the then-part. This is fine, since we do
5916 not need to do anything to the variable @code{buffer} if it really is
5917 a buffer.
5918
5919 On the other hand, when the value of @code{buffer} is not a buffer
5920 itself, but the name of a buffer, the true-or-false-test returns true
5921 and the then-part of the expression is evaluated. In this case, the
5922 then-part is @code{(setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))}. This
5923 expression uses the @code{get-buffer} function to return an actual
5924 buffer itself, given its name. The @code{setq} then sets the variable
5925 @code{buffer} to the value of the buffer itself, replacing its previous
5926 value (which was the name of the buffer).
5927
5928 @node Insert or, Insert let, if & or, insert-buffer
5929 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5930 @subsection The @code{or} in the Body
5931
5932 The purpose of the @code{or} expression in the @code{insert-buffer}
5933 function is to ensure that the argument @code{buffer} is bound to a
5934 buffer and not just to the name of a buffer. The previous section shows
5935 how the job could have been done using an @code{if} expression.
5936 However, the @code{insert-buffer} function actually uses @code{or}.
5937 To understand this, it is necessary to understand how @code{or} works.
5938
5939 @findex or
5940 An @code{or} function can have any number of arguments. It evaluates
5941 each argument in turn and returns the value of the first of its
5942 arguments that is not @code{nil}. Also, and this is a crucial feature
5943 of @code{or}, it does not evaluate any subsequent arguments after
5944 returning the first non-@code{nil} value.
5945
5946 @need 800
5947 The @code{or} expression looks like this:
5948
5949 @smallexample
5950 @group
5951 (or (bufferp buffer)
5952 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer)))
5953 @end group
5954 @end smallexample
5955
5956 @noindent
5957 The first argument to @code{or} is the expression @code{(bufferp buffer)}.
5958 This expression returns true (a non-@code{nil} value) if the buffer is
5959 actually a buffer, and not just the name of a buffer. In the @code{or}
5960 expression, if this is the case, the @code{or} expression returns this
5961 true value and does not evaluate the next expression---and this is fine
5962 with us, since we do not want to do anything to the value of
5963 @code{buffer} if it really is a buffer.
5964
5965 On the other hand, if the value of @code{(bufferp buffer)} is @code{nil},
5966 which it will be if the value of @code{buffer} is the name of a buffer,
5967 the Lisp interpreter evaluates the next element of the @code{or}
5968 expression. This is the expression @code{(setq buffer (get-buffer
5969 buffer))}. This expression returns a non-@code{nil} value, which
5970 is the value to which it sets the variable @code{buffer}---and this
5971 value is a buffer itself, not the name of a buffer.
5972
5973 The result of all this is that the symbol @code{buffer} is always
5974 bound to a buffer itself rather than to the name of a buffer. All
5975 this is necessary because the @code{set-buffer} function in a
5976 following line only works with a buffer itself, not with the name to a
5977 buffer.
5978
5979 @need 1250
5980 Incidentally, using @code{or}, the situation with the usher would be
5981 written like this:
5982
5983 @smallexample
5984 (or (holding-on-to-guest) (find-and-take-arm-of-guest))
5985 @end smallexample
5986
5987 @node Insert let, New insert-buffer, Insert or, insert-buffer
5988 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5989 @subsection The @code{let} Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
5990
5991 After ensuring that the variable @code{buffer} refers to a buffer itself
5992 and not just to the name of a buffer, the @code{insert-buffer function}
5993 continues with a @code{let} expression. This specifies three local
5994 variables, @code{start}, @code{end}, and @code{newmark} and binds them
5995 to the initial value @code{nil}. These variables are used inside the
5996 remainder of the @code{let} and temporarily hide any other occurrence of
5997 variables of the same name in Emacs until the end of the @code{let}.
5998
5999 @need 1200
6000 The body of the @code{let} contains two @code{save-excursion}
6001 expressions. First, we will look at the inner @code{save-excursion}
6002 expression in detail. The expression looks like this:
6003
6004 @smallexample
6005 @group
6006 (save-excursion
6007 (set-buffer buffer)
6008 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
6009 @end group
6010 @end smallexample
6011
6012 @noindent
6013 The expression @code{(set-buffer buffer)} changes Emacs' attention
6014 from the current buffer to the one from which the text will copied.
6015 In that buffer, the variables @code{start} and @code{end} are set to
6016 the beginning and end of the buffer, using the commands
6017 @code{point-min} and @code{point-max}. Note that we have here an
6018 illustration of how @code{setq} is able to set two variables in the
6019 same expression. The first argument of @code{setq} is set to the
6020 value of its second, and its third argument is set to the value of its
6021 fourth.
6022
6023 After the body of the inner @code{save-excursion} is evaluated, the
6024 @code{save-excursion} restores the original buffer, but @code{start} and
6025 @code{end} remain set to the values of the beginning and end of the
6026 buffer from which the text will be copied.
6027
6028 @need 1250
6029 The outer @code{save-excursion} expression looks like this:
6030
6031 @smallexample
6032 @group
6033 (save-excursion
6034 (@var{inner-}@code{save-excursion}@var{-expression}
6035 (@var{go-to-new-buffer-and-set-}@code{start}@var{-and-}@code{end})
6036 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
6037 (setq newmark (point)))
6038 @end group
6039 @end smallexample
6040
6041 @noindent
6042 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} function copies the text
6043 @emph{into} the current buffer @emph{from} the region indicated by
6044 @code{start} and @code{end} in @code{buffer}. Since the whole of the
6045 second buffer lies between @code{start} and @code{end}, the whole of
6046 the second buffer is copied into the buffer you are editing. Next,
6047 the value of point, which will be at the end of the inserted text, is
6048 recorded in the variable @code{newmark}.
6049
6050 After the body of the outer @code{save-excursion} is evaluated, point
6051 and mark are relocated to their original places.
6052
6053 However, it is convenient to locate a mark at the end of the newly
6054 inserted text and locate point at its beginning. The @code{newmark}
6055 variable records the end of the inserted text. In the last line of
6056 the @code{let} expression, the @code{(push-mark newmark)} expression
6057 function sets a mark to this location. (The previous location of the
6058 mark is still accessible; it is recorded on the mark ring and you can
6059 go back to it with @kbd{C-u C-@key{SPC}}.) Meanwhile, point is
6060 located at the beginning of the inserted text, which is where it was
6061 before you called the insert function, the position of which was saved
6062 by the first @code{save-excursion}.
6063
6064 @need 1250
6065 The whole @code{let} expression looks like this:
6066
6067 @smallexample
6068 @group
6069 (let (start end newmark)
6070 (save-excursion
6071 (save-excursion
6072 (set-buffer buffer)
6073 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
6074 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
6075 (setq newmark (point)))
6076 (push-mark newmark))
6077 @end group
6078 @end smallexample
6079
6080 Like the @code{append-to-buffer} function, the @code{insert-buffer}
6081 function uses @code{let}, @code{save-excursion}, and
6082 @code{set-buffer}. In addition, the function illustrates one way to
6083 use @code{or}. All these functions are building blocks that we will
6084 find and use again and again.
6085
6086 @node New insert-buffer, , Insert let, insert-buffer
6087 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6088 @subsection New Body for @code{insert-buffer}
6089 @findex insert-buffer, new version body
6090 @findex new version body for insert-buffer
6091
6092 The body in the GNU Emacs 22 version is more confusing than the original.
6093
6094 @need 1250
6095 It consists of two expressions,
6096
6097 @smallexample
6098 @group
6099 (push-mark
6100 (save-excursion
6101 (insert-buffer-substring (get-buffer buffer))
6102 (point)))
6103
6104 nil
6105 @end group
6106 @end smallexample
6107
6108 @noindent
6109 except, and this is what confuses novices, very important work is done
6110 inside the @code{push-mark} expression.
6111
6112 The @code{get-buffer} function returns a buffer with the name
6113 provided. You will note that the function is @emph{not} called
6114 @code{get-buffer-create}; it does not create a buffer if one does not
6115 already exist. The buffer returned by @code{get-buffer}, an existing
6116 buffer, is passed to @code{insert-buffer-substring}, which inserts the
6117 whole of the buffer (since you did not specify anything else).
6118
6119 The location into which the buffer is inserted is recorded by
6120 @code{push-mark}. Then the function returns @code{nil}, the value of
6121 its last command. Put another way, the @code{insert-buffer} function
6122 exists only to produce a side effect, inserting another buffer, not to
6123 return any value.
6124
6125 @node beginning-of-buffer, Second Buffer Related Review, insert-buffer, More Complex
6126 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6127 @section Complete Definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6128 @findex beginning-of-buffer
6129
6130 The basic structure of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function has
6131 already been discussed. (@xref{simplified-beginning-of-buffer, , A
6132 Simplified @code{beginning-of-buffer} Definition}.)
6133 This section describes the complex part of the definition.
6134
6135 As previously described, when invoked without an argument,
6136 @code{beginning-of-buffer} moves the cursor to the beginning of the
6137 buffer (in truth, the beginning of the accessible portion of the
6138 buffer), leaving the mark at the previous position. However, when the
6139 command is invoked with a number between one and ten, the function
6140 considers that number to be a fraction of the length of the buffer,
6141 measured in tenths, and Emacs moves the cursor that fraction of the
6142 way from the beginning of the buffer. Thus, you can either call this
6143 function with the key command @kbd{M-<}, which will move the cursor to
6144 the beginning of the buffer, or with a key command such as @kbd{C-u 7
6145 M-<} which will move the cursor to a point 70% of the way through the
6146 buffer. If a number bigger than ten is used for the argument, it
6147 moves to the end of the buffer.
6148
6149 The @code{beginning-of-buffer} function can be called with or without an
6150 argument. The use of the argument is optional.
6151
6152 @menu
6153 * Optional Arguments::
6154 * beginning-of-buffer opt arg:: Example with optional argument.
6155 * beginning-of-buffer complete::
6156 @end menu
6157
6158 @node Optional Arguments, beginning-of-buffer opt arg, beginning-of-buffer, beginning-of-buffer
6159 @subsection Optional Arguments
6160
6161 Unless told otherwise, Lisp expects that a function with an argument in
6162 its function definition will be called with a value for that argument.
6163 If that does not happen, you get an error and a message that says
6164 @samp{Wrong number of arguments}.
6165
6166 @cindex Optional arguments
6167 @cindex Keyword
6168 @findex optional
6169 However, optional arguments are a feature of Lisp: a particular
6170 @dfn{keyword} is used to tell the Lisp interpreter that an argument is
6171 optional. The keyword is @code{&optional}. (The @samp{&} in front of
6172 @samp{optional} is part of the keyword.) In a function definition, if
6173 an argument follows the keyword @code{&optional}, no value need be
6174 passed to that argument when the function is called.
6175
6176 @need 1200
6177 The first line of the function definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6178 therefore looks like this:
6179
6180 @smallexample
6181 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6182 @end smallexample
6183
6184 @need 1250
6185 In outline, the whole function looks like this:
6186
6187 @smallexample
6188 @group
6189 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6190 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
6191 (interactive "P")
6192 (or (@var{is-the-argument-a-cons-cell} arg)
6193 (and @var{are-both-transient-mark-mode-and-mark-active-true})
6194 (push-mark))
6195 (let (@var{determine-size-and-set-it})
6196 (goto-char
6197 (@var{if-there-is-an-argument}
6198 @var{figure-out-where-to-go}
6199 @var{else-go-to}
6200 (point-min))))
6201 @var{do-nicety}
6202 @end group
6203 @end smallexample
6204
6205 The function is similar to the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer}
6206 function except that the @code{interactive} expression has @code{"P"}
6207 as an argument and the @code{goto-char} function is followed by an
6208 if-then-else expression that figures out where to put the cursor if
6209 there is an argument that is not a cons cell.
6210
6211 (Since I do not explain a cons cell for many more chapters, please
6212 consider ignoring the function @code{consp}. @xref{List
6213 Implementation, , How Lists are Implemented}, and @ref{Cons Cell Type,
6214 , Cons Cell and List Types, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
6215 Manual}.)
6216
6217 The @code{"P"} in the @code{interactive} expression tells Emacs to
6218 pass a prefix argument, if there is one, to the function in raw form.
6219 A prefix argument is made by typing the @key{META} key followed by a
6220 number, or by typing @kbd{C-u} and then a number. (If you don't type
6221 a number, @kbd{C-u} defaults to a cons cell with a 4. A lowercase
6222 @code{"p"} in the @code{interactive} expression causes the function to
6223 convert a prefix arg to a number.)
6224
6225 The true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression looks complex, but
6226 it is not: it checks whether @code{arg} has a value that is not
6227 @code{nil} and whether it is a cons cell. (That is what @code{consp}
6228 does; it checks whether its argument is a cons cell.) If @code{arg}
6229 has a value that is not @code{nil} (and is not a cons cell), which
6230 will be the case if @code{beginning-of-buffer} is called with a
6231 numeric argument, then this true-or-false-test will return true and
6232 the then-part of the @code{if} expression will be evaluated. On the
6233 other hand, if @code{beginning-of-buffer} is not called with an
6234 argument, the value of @code{arg} will be @code{nil} and the else-part
6235 of the @code{if} expression will be evaluated. The else-part is
6236 simply @code{point-min}, and when this is the outcome, the whole
6237 @code{goto-char} expression is @code{(goto-char (point-min))}, which
6238 is how we saw the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function in its
6239 simplified form.
6240
6241 @node beginning-of-buffer opt arg, beginning-of-buffer complete, Optional Arguments, beginning-of-buffer
6242 @subsection @code{beginning-of-buffer} with an Argument
6243
6244 When @code{beginning-of-buffer} is called with an argument, an
6245 expression is evaluated which calculates what value to pass to
6246 @code{goto-char}. This expression is rather complicated at first sight.
6247 It includes an inner @code{if} expression and much arithmetic. It looks
6248 like this:
6249
6250 @smallexample
6251 @group
6252 (if (> (buffer-size) 10000)
6253 ;; @r{Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!}
6254 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6255 (/ size 10))
6256 (/
6257 (+ 10
6258 (*
6259 size (prefix-numeric-value arg))) 10)))
6260 @end group
6261 @end smallexample
6262
6263 @menu
6264 * Disentangle beginning-of-buffer::
6265 * Large buffer case::
6266 * Small buffer case::
6267 @end menu
6268
6269 @node Disentangle beginning-of-buffer, Large buffer case, beginning-of-buffer opt arg, beginning-of-buffer opt arg
6270 @ifnottex
6271 @unnumberedsubsubsec Disentangle @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6272 @end ifnottex
6273
6274 Like other complex-looking expressions, the conditional expression
6275 within @code{beginning-of-buffer} can be disentangled by looking at it
6276 as parts of a template, in this case, the template for an if-then-else
6277 expression. In skeletal form, the expression looks like this:
6278
6279 @smallexample
6280 @group
6281 (if (@var{buffer-is-large}
6282 @var{divide-buffer-size-by-10-and-multiply-by-arg}
6283 @var{else-use-alternate-calculation}
6284 @end group
6285 @end smallexample
6286
6287 The true-or-false-test of this inner @code{if} expression checks the
6288 size of the buffer. The reason for this is that the old version 18
6289 Emacs used numbers that are no bigger than eight million or so and in
6290 the computation that followed, the programmer feared that Emacs might
6291 try to use over-large numbers if the buffer were large. The term
6292 `overflow', mentioned in the comment, means numbers that are over
6293 large. More recent versions of Emacs use larger numbers, but this
6294 code has not been touched, if only because people now look at buffers
6295 that are far, far larger than ever before.
6296
6297 There are two cases: if the buffer is large and if it is not.
6298
6299 @node Large buffer case, Small buffer case, Disentangle beginning-of-buffer, beginning-of-buffer opt arg
6300 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6301 @unnumberedsubsubsec What happens in a large buffer
6302
6303 In @code{beginning-of-buffer}, the inner @code{if} expression tests
6304 whether the size of the buffer is greater than 10,000 characters. To do
6305 this, it uses the @code{>} function and the computation of @code{size}
6306 that comes from the let expression.
6307
6308 In the old days, the function @code{buffer-size} was used. Not only
6309 was that function called several times, it gave the size of the whole
6310 buffer, not the accessible part. The computation makes much more
6311 sense when it handles just the accessible part. (@xref{Narrowing &
6312 Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}, for more information on focusing
6313 attention to an `accessible' part.)
6314
6315 @need 800
6316 The line looks like this:
6317
6318 @smallexample
6319 (if (> size 10000)
6320 @end smallexample
6321
6322 @need 1200
6323 @noindent
6324 When the buffer is large, the then-part of the @code{if} expression is
6325 evaluated. It reads like this (after formatting for easy reading):
6326
6327 @smallexample
6328 @group
6329 (*
6330 (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6331 (/ size 10))
6332 @end group
6333 @end smallexample
6334
6335 @noindent
6336 This expression is a multiplication, with two arguments to the function
6337 @code{*}.
6338
6339 The first argument is @code{(prefix-numeric-value arg)}. When
6340 @code{"P"} is used as the argument for @code{interactive}, the value
6341 passed to the function as its argument is passed a ``raw prefix
6342 argument'', and not a number. (It is a number in a list.) To perform
6343 the arithmetic, a conversion is necessary, and
6344 @code{prefix-numeric-value} does the job.
6345
6346 @findex / @r{(division)}
6347 @cindex Division
6348 The second argument is @code{(/ size 10)}. This expression divides
6349 the numeric value by ten --- the numeric value of the size of the
6350 accessible portion of the buffer. This produces a number that tells
6351 how many characters make up one tenth of the buffer size. (In Lisp,
6352 @code{/} is used for division, just as @code{*} is used for
6353 multiplication.)
6354
6355 @need 1200
6356 In the multiplication expression as a whole, this amount is multiplied
6357 by the value of the prefix argument---the multiplication looks like this:
6358
6359 @smallexample
6360 @group
6361 (* @var{numeric-value-of-prefix-arg}
6362 @var{number-of-characters-in-one-tenth-of-the-accessible-buffer})
6363 @end group
6364 @end smallexample
6365
6366 @noindent
6367 If, for example, the prefix argument is @samp{7}, the one-tenth value
6368 will be multiplied by 7 to give a position 70% of the way through.
6369
6370 @need 1200
6371 The result of all this is that if the accessible portion of the buffer
6372 is large, the @code{goto-char} expression reads like this:
6373
6374 @smallexample
6375 @group
6376 (goto-char (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6377 (/ size 10)))
6378 @end group
6379 @end smallexample
6380
6381 This puts the cursor where we want it.
6382
6383 @node Small buffer case, , Large buffer case, beginning-of-buffer opt arg
6384 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6385 @unnumberedsubsubsec What happens in a small buffer
6386
6387 If the buffer contains fewer than 10,000 characters, a slightly
6388 different computation is performed. You might think this is not
6389 necessary, since the first computation could do the job. However, in
6390 a small buffer, the first method may not put the cursor on exactly the
6391 desired line; the second method does a better job.
6392
6393 @need 800
6394 The code looks like this:
6395
6396 @c Keep this on one line.
6397 @smallexample
6398 (/ (+ 10 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg))) 10))
6399 @end smallexample
6400
6401 @need 1200
6402 @noindent
6403 This is code in which you figure out what happens by discovering how the
6404 functions are embedded in parentheses. It is easier to read if you
6405 reformat it with each expression indented more deeply than its
6406 enclosing expression:
6407
6408 @smallexample
6409 @group
6410 (/
6411 (+ 10
6412 (*
6413 size
6414 (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6415 10))
6416 @end group
6417 @end smallexample
6418
6419 @need 1200
6420 @noindent
6421 Looking at parentheses, we see that the innermost operation is
6422 @code{(prefix-numeric-value arg)}, which converts the raw argument to
6423 a number. In the following expression, this number is multiplied by
6424 the size of the accessible portion of the buffer:
6425
6426 @smallexample
6427 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg))
6428 @end smallexample
6429
6430 @noindent
6431 This multiplication creates a number that may be larger than the size of
6432 the buffer---seven times larger if the argument is 7, for example. Ten
6433 is then added to this number and finally the large number is divided by
6434 ten to provide a value that is one character larger than the percentage
6435 position in the buffer.
6436
6437 The number that results from all this is passed to @code{goto-char} and
6438 the cursor is moved to that point.
6439
6440 @need 1500
6441 @node beginning-of-buffer complete, , beginning-of-buffer opt arg, beginning-of-buffer
6442 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6443 @subsection The Complete @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6444
6445 @need 1000
6446 Here is the complete text of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function:
6447 @sp 1
6448
6449 @c In GNU Emacs 22
6450 @smallexample
6451 @group
6452 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6453 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
6454 leave mark at previous position.
6455 With \\[universal-argument] prefix,
6456 do not set mark at previous position.
6457 With numeric arg N,
6458 put point N/10 of the way from the beginning.
6459
6460 If the buffer is narrowed,
6461 this command uses the beginning and size
6462 of the accessible part of the buffer.
6463 @end group
6464
6465 @group
6466 Don't use this command in Lisp programs!
6467 \(goto-char (point-min)) is faster
6468 and avoids clobbering the mark."
6469 (interactive "P")
6470 (or (consp arg)
6471 (and transient-mark-mode mark-active)
6472 (push-mark))
6473 @end group
6474 @group
6475 (let ((size (- (point-max) (point-min))))
6476 (goto-char (if (and arg (not (consp arg)))
6477 (+ (point-min)
6478 (if (> size 10000)
6479 ;; Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!
6480 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6481 (/ size 10))
6482 (/ (+ 10 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6483 10)))
6484 (point-min))))
6485 (if arg (forward-line 1)))
6486 @end group
6487 @end smallexample
6488
6489 @ignore
6490 From before GNU Emacs 22
6491 @smallexample
6492 @group
6493 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6494 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
6495 leave mark at previous position.
6496 With arg N, put point N/10 of the way
6497 from the true beginning.
6498 @end group
6499 @group
6500 Don't use this in Lisp programs!
6501 \(goto-char (point-min)) is faster
6502 and does not set the mark."
6503 (interactive "P")
6504 (push-mark)
6505 @end group
6506 @group
6507 (goto-char
6508 (if arg
6509 (if (> (buffer-size) 10000)
6510 ;; @r{Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!}
6511 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6512 (/ (buffer-size) 10))
6513 @end group
6514 @group
6515 (/ (+ 10 (* (buffer-size)
6516 (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6517 10))
6518 (point-min)))
6519 (if arg (forward-line 1)))
6520 @end group
6521 @end smallexample
6522 @end ignore
6523
6524 @noindent
6525 Except for two small points, the previous discussion shows how this
6526 function works. The first point deals with a detail in the
6527 documentation string, and the second point concerns the last line of
6528 the function.
6529
6530 @need 800
6531 In the documentation string, there is reference to an expression:
6532
6533 @smallexample
6534 \\[universal-argument]
6535 @end smallexample
6536
6537 @noindent
6538 A @samp{\\} is used before the first square bracket of this
6539 expression. This @samp{\\} tells the Lisp interpreter to substitute
6540 whatever key is currently bound to the @samp{[@dots{}]}. In the case
6541 of @code{universal-argument}, that is usually @kbd{C-u}, but it might
6542 be different. (@xref{Documentation Tips, , Tips for Documentation
6543 Strings, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
6544 information.)
6545
6546 @need 1200
6547 Finally, the last line of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} command says
6548 to move point to the beginning of the next line if the command is
6549 invoked with an argument:
6550
6551 @smallexample
6552 (if arg (forward-line 1)))
6553 @end smallexample
6554
6555 @noindent
6556 This puts the cursor at the beginning of the first line after the
6557 appropriate tenths position in the buffer. This is a flourish that
6558 means that the cursor is always located @emph{at least} the requested
6559 tenths of the way through the buffer, which is a nicety that is,
6560 perhaps, not necessary, but which, if it did not occur, would be sure
6561 to draw complaints.
6562
6563 On the other hand, it also means that if you specify the command with
6564 a @kbd{C-u}, but without a number, that is to say, if the `raw prefix
6565 argument' is simply a cons cell, then the command puts you at the
6566 beginning of the second line @dots{} I don't know whether this is
6567 intended or whether no one has dealt with the code to avoid this
6568 happening.
6569
6570 @node Second Buffer Related Review, optional Exercise, beginning-of-buffer, More Complex
6571 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6572 @section Review
6573
6574 Here is a brief summary of some of the topics covered in this chapter.
6575
6576 @table @code
6577 @item or
6578 Evaluate each argument in sequence, and return the value of the first
6579 argument that is not @code{nil}; if none return a value that is not
6580 @code{nil}, return @code{nil}. In brief, return the first true value
6581 of the arguments; return a true value if one @emph{or} any of the
6582 others are true.
6583
6584 @item and
6585 Evaluate each argument in sequence, and if any are @code{nil}, return
6586 @code{nil}; if none are @code{nil}, return the value of the last
6587 argument. In brief, return a true value only if all the arguments are
6588 true; return a true value if one @emph{and} each of the others is
6589 true.
6590
6591 @item &optional
6592 A keyword used to indicate that an argument to a function definition
6593 is optional; this means that the function can be evaluated without the
6594 argument, if desired.
6595
6596 @item prefix-numeric-value
6597 Convert the `raw prefix argument' produced by @code{(interactive
6598 "P")} to a numeric value.
6599
6600 @item forward-line
6601 Move point forward to the beginning of the next line, or if the argument
6602 is greater than one, forward that many lines. If it can't move as far
6603 forward as it is supposed to, @code{forward-line} goes forward as far as
6604 it can and then returns a count of the number of additional lines it was
6605 supposed to move but couldn't.
6606
6607 @item erase-buffer
6608 Delete the entire contents of the current buffer.
6609
6610 @item bufferp
6611 Return @code{t} if its argument is a buffer; otherwise return @code{nil}.
6612 @end table
6613
6614 @node optional Exercise, , Second Buffer Related Review, More Complex
6615 @section @code{optional} Argument Exercise
6616
6617 Write an interactive function with an optional argument that tests
6618 whether its argument, a number, is greater than or equal to, or else,
6619 less than the value of @code{fill-column}, and tells you which, in a
6620 message. However, if you do not pass an argument to the function, use
6621 56 as a default value.
6622
6623 @node Narrowing & Widening, car cdr & cons, More Complex, Top
6624 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6625 @chapter Narrowing and Widening
6626 @cindex Focusing attention (narrowing)
6627 @cindex Narrowing
6628 @cindex Widening
6629
6630 Narrowing is a feature of Emacs that makes it possible for you to focus
6631 on a specific part of a buffer, and work without accidentally changing
6632 other parts. Narrowing is normally disabled since it can confuse
6633 novices.
6634
6635 @menu
6636 * Narrowing advantages:: The advantages of narrowing
6637 * save-restriction:: The @code{save-restriction} special form.
6638 * what-line:: The number of the line that point is on.
6639 * narrow Exercise::
6640 @end menu
6641
6642 @node Narrowing advantages, save-restriction, Narrowing & Widening, Narrowing & Widening
6643 @ifnottex
6644 @unnumberedsec The Advantages of Narrowing
6645 @end ifnottex
6646
6647 With narrowing, the rest of a buffer is made invisible, as if it weren't
6648 there. This is an advantage if, for example, you want to replace a word
6649 in one part of a buffer but not in another: you narrow to the part you want
6650 and the replacement is carried out only in that section, not in the rest
6651 of the buffer. Searches will only work within a narrowed region, not
6652 outside of one, so if you are fixing a part of a document, you can keep
6653 yourself from accidentally finding parts you do not need to fix by
6654 narrowing just to the region you want.
6655 (The key binding for @code{narrow-to-region} is @kbd{C-x n n}.)
6656
6657 However, narrowing does make the rest of the buffer invisible, which
6658 can scare people who inadvertently invoke narrowing and think they
6659 have deleted a part of their file. Moreover, the @code{undo} command
6660 (which is usually bound to @kbd{C-x u}) does not turn off narrowing
6661 (nor should it), so people can become quite desperate if they do not
6662 know that they can return the rest of a buffer to visibility with the
6663 @code{widen} command.
6664 (The key binding for @code{widen} is @kbd{C-x n w}.)
6665
6666 Narrowing is just as useful to the Lisp interpreter as to a human.
6667 Often, an Emacs Lisp function is designed to work on just part of a
6668 buffer; or conversely, an Emacs Lisp function needs to work on all of a
6669 buffer that has been narrowed. The @code{what-line} function, for
6670 example, removes the narrowing from a buffer, if it has any narrowing
6671 and when it has finished its job, restores the narrowing to what it was.
6672 On the other hand, the @code{count-lines} function, which is called by
6673 @code{what-line}, uses narrowing to restrict itself to just that portion
6674 of the buffer in which it is interested and then restores the previous
6675 situation.
6676
6677 @node save-restriction, what-line, Narrowing advantages, Narrowing & Widening
6678 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6679 @section The @code{save-restriction} Special Form
6680 @findex save-restriction
6681
6682 In Emacs Lisp, you can use the @code{save-restriction} special form to
6683 keep track of whatever narrowing is in effect, if any. When the Lisp
6684 interpreter meets with @code{save-restriction}, it executes the code
6685 in the body of the @code{save-restriction} expression, and then undoes
6686 any changes to narrowing that the code caused. If, for example, the
6687 buffer is narrowed and the code that follows @code{save-restriction}
6688 gets rid of the narrowing, @code{save-restriction} returns the buffer
6689 to its narrowed region afterwards. In the @code{what-line} command,
6690 any narrowing the buffer may have is undone by the @code{widen}
6691 command that immediately follows the @code{save-restriction} command.
6692 Any original narrowing is restored just before the completion of the
6693 function.
6694
6695 @need 1250
6696 The template for a @code{save-restriction} expression is simple:
6697
6698 @smallexample
6699 @group
6700 (save-restriction
6701 @var{body}@dots{} )
6702 @end group
6703 @end smallexample
6704
6705 @noindent
6706 The body of the @code{save-restriction} is one or more expressions that
6707 will be evaluated in sequence by the Lisp interpreter.
6708
6709 Finally, a point to note: when you use both @code{save-excursion} and
6710 @code{save-restriction}, one right after the other, you should use
6711 @code{save-excursion} outermost. If you write them in reverse order,
6712 you may fail to record narrowing in the buffer to which Emacs switches
6713 after calling @code{save-excursion}. Thus, when written together,
6714 @code{save-excursion} and @code{save-restriction} should be written
6715 like this:
6716
6717 @smallexample
6718 @group
6719 (save-excursion
6720 (save-restriction
6721 @var{body}@dots{}))
6722 @end group
6723 @end smallexample
6724
6725 In other circumstances, when not written together, the
6726 @code{save-excursion} and @code{save-restriction} special forms must
6727 be written in the order appropriate to the function.
6728
6729 @need 1250
6730 For example,
6731
6732 @smallexample
6733 @group
6734 (save-restriction
6735 (widen)
6736 (save-excursion
6737 @var{body}@dots{}))
6738 @end group
6739 @end smallexample
6740
6741 @ignore
6742 Emacs 22
6743 /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/simple.el
6744
6745 (defun what-line ()
6746 "Print the current buffer line number and narrowed line number of point."
6747 (interactive)
6748 (let ((start (point-min))
6749 (n (line-number-at-pos)))
6750 (if (= start 1)
6751 (message "Line %d" n)
6752 (save-excursion
6753 (save-restriction
6754 (widen)
6755 (message "line %d (narrowed line %d)"
6756 (+ n (line-number-at-pos start) -1) n))))))
6757
6758 (defun line-number-at-pos (&optional pos)
6759 "Return (narrowed) buffer line number at position POS.
6760 If POS is nil, use current buffer location.
6761 Counting starts at (point-min), so the value refers
6762 to the contents of the accessible portion of the buffer."
6763 (let ((opoint (or pos (point))) start)
6764 (save-excursion
6765 (goto-char (point-min))
6766 (setq start (point))
6767 (goto-char opoint)
6768 (forward-line 0)
6769 (1+ (count-lines start (point))))))
6770
6771 (defun count-lines (start end)
6772 "Return number of lines between START and END.
6773 This is usually the number of newlines between them,
6774 but can be one more if START is not equal to END
6775 and the greater of them is not at the start of a line."
6776 (save-excursion
6777 (save-restriction
6778 (narrow-to-region start end)
6779 (goto-char (point-min))
6780 (if (eq selective-display t)
6781 (save-match-data
6782 (let ((done 0))
6783 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 40)
6784 (setq done (+ 40 done)))
6785 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 1)
6786 (setq done (+ 1 done)))
6787 (goto-char (point-max))
6788 (if (and (/= start end)
6789 (not (bolp)))
6790 (1+ done)
6791 done)))
6792 (- (buffer-size) (forward-line (buffer-size)))))))
6793 @end ignore
6794
6795 @node what-line, narrow Exercise, save-restriction, Narrowing & Widening
6796 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6797 @section @code{what-line}
6798 @findex what-line
6799 @cindex Widening, example of
6800
6801 The @code{what-line} command tells you the number of the line in which
6802 the cursor is located. The function illustrates the use of the
6803 @code{save-restriction} and @code{save-excursion} commands. Here is the
6804 original text of the function:
6805
6806 @smallexample
6807 @group
6808 (defun what-line ()
6809 "Print the current line number (in the buffer) of point."
6810 (interactive)
6811 (save-restriction
6812 (widen)
6813 (save-excursion
6814 (beginning-of-line)
6815 (message "Line %d"
6816 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))))))
6817 @end group
6818 @end smallexample
6819
6820 (In recent versions of GNU Emacs, the @code{what-line} function has
6821 been expanded to tell you your line number in a narrowed buffer as
6822 well as your line number in a widened buffer. The recent version is
6823 more complex than the version shown here. If you feel adventurous,
6824 you might want to look at it after figuring out how this version
6825 works. You will probably need to use @kbd{C-h f}
6826 (@code{describe-function}). The newer version uses a conditional to
6827 determine whether the buffer has been narrowed.
6828
6829 (Also, it uses @code{line-number-at-pos}, which among other simple
6830 expressions, such as @code{(goto-char (point-min))}, moves point to
6831 the beginning of the current line with @code{(forward-line 0)} rather
6832 than @code{beginning-of-line}.)
6833
6834 The @code{what-line} function as shown here has a documentation line
6835 and is interactive, as you would expect. The next two lines use the
6836 functions @code{save-restriction} and @code{widen}.
6837
6838 The @code{save-restriction} special form notes whatever narrowing is in
6839 effect, if any, in the current buffer and restores that narrowing after
6840 the code in the body of the @code{save-restriction} has been evaluated.
6841
6842 The @code{save-restriction} special form is followed by @code{widen}.
6843 This function undoes any narrowing the current buffer may have had
6844 when @code{what-line} was called. (The narrowing that was there is
6845 the narrowing that @code{save-restriction} remembers.) This widening
6846 makes it possible for the line counting commands to count from the
6847 beginning of the buffer. Otherwise, they would have been limited to
6848 counting within the accessible region. Any original narrowing is
6849 restored just before the completion of the function by the
6850 @code{save-restriction} special form.
6851
6852 The call to @code{widen} is followed by @code{save-excursion}, which
6853 saves the location of the cursor (i.e., of point) and of the mark, and
6854 restores them after the code in the body of the @code{save-excursion}
6855 uses the @code{beginning-of-line} function to move point.
6856
6857 (Note that the @code{(widen)} expression comes between the
6858 @code{save-restriction} and @code{save-excursion} special forms. When
6859 you write the two @code{save- @dots{}} expressions in sequence, write
6860 @code{save-excursion} outermost.)
6861
6862 @need 1200
6863 The last two lines of the @code{what-line} function are functions to
6864 count the number of lines in the buffer and then print the number in the
6865 echo area.
6866
6867 @smallexample
6868 @group
6869 (message "Line %d"
6870 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))))))
6871 @end group
6872 @end smallexample
6873
6874 The @code{message} function prints a one-line message at the bottom of
6875 the Emacs screen. The first argument is inside of quotation marks and
6876 is printed as a string of characters. However, it may contain a
6877 @samp{%d} expression to print a following argument. @samp{%d} prints
6878 the argument as a decimal, so the message will say something such as
6879 @samp{Line 243}.
6880
6881 @need 1200
6882 The number that is printed in place of the @samp{%d} is computed by the
6883 last line of the function:
6884
6885 @smallexample
6886 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))
6887 @end smallexample
6888
6889 @ignore
6890 GNU Emacs 22
6891
6892 (defun count-lines (start end)
6893 "Return number of lines between START and END.
6894 This is usually the number of newlines between them,
6895 but can be one more if START is not equal to END
6896 and the greater of them is not at the start of a line."
6897 (save-excursion
6898 (save-restriction
6899 (narrow-to-region start end)
6900 (goto-char (point-min))
6901 (if (eq selective-display t)
6902 (save-match-data
6903 (let ((done 0))
6904 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 40)
6905 (setq done (+ 40 done)))
6906 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 1)
6907 (setq done (+ 1 done)))
6908 (goto-char (point-max))
6909 (if (and (/= start end)
6910 (not (bolp)))
6911 (1+ done)
6912 done)))
6913 (- (buffer-size) (forward-line (buffer-size)))))))
6914 @end ignore
6915
6916 @noindent
6917 What this does is count the lines from the first position of the
6918 buffer, indicated by the @code{1}, up to @code{(point)}, and then add
6919 one to that number. (The @code{1+} function adds one to its
6920 argument.) We add one to it because line 2 has only one line before
6921 it, and @code{count-lines} counts only the lines @emph{before} the
6922 current line.
6923
6924 After @code{count-lines} has done its job, and the message has been
6925 printed in the echo area, the @code{save-excursion} restores point and
6926 mark to their original positions; and @code{save-restriction} restores
6927 the original narrowing, if any.
6928
6929 @node narrow Exercise, , what-line, Narrowing & Widening
6930 @section Exercise with Narrowing
6931
6932 Write a function that will display the first 60 characters of the
6933 current buffer, even if you have narrowed the buffer to its latter
6934 half so that the first line is inaccessible. Restore point, mark, and
6935 narrowing. For this exercise, you need to use a whole potpourri of
6936 functions, including @code{save-restriction}, @code{widen},
6937 @code{goto-char}, @code{point-min}, @code{message}, and
6938 @code{buffer-substring}.
6939
6940 @cindex Properties, mention of @code{buffer-substring-no-properties}
6941 (@code{buffer-substring} is a previously unmentioned function you will
6942 have to investigate yourself; or perhaps you will have to use
6943 @code{buffer-substring-no-properties} or
6944 @code{filter-buffer-substring} @dots{}, yet other functions. Text
6945 properties are a feature otherwise not discussed here. @xref{Text
6946 Properties, , Text Properties, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
6947 Manual}.)
6948
6949 Additionally, do you really need @code{goto-char} or @code{point-min}?
6950 Or can you write the function without them?
6951
6952 @node car cdr & cons, Cutting & Storing Text, Narrowing & Widening, Top
6953 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6954 @chapter @code{car}, @code{cdr}, @code{cons}: Fundamental Functions
6955 @findex car, @r{introduced}
6956 @findex cdr, @r{introduced}
6957
6958 In Lisp, @code{car}, @code{cdr}, and @code{cons} are fundamental
6959 functions. The @code{cons} function is used to construct lists, and
6960 the @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions are used to take them apart.
6961
6962 In the walk through of the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function, we
6963 will see @code{cons} as well as two variants on @code{cdr},
6964 namely, @code{setcdr} and @code{nthcdr}. (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.)
6965
6966 @menu
6967 * Strange Names:: An historical aside: why the strange names?
6968 * car & cdr:: Functions for extracting part of a list.
6969 * cons:: Constructing a list.
6970 * nthcdr:: Calling @code{cdr} repeatedly.
6971 * nth::
6972 * setcar:: Changing the first element of a list.
6973 * setcdr:: Changing the rest of a list.
6974 * cons Exercise::
6975 @end menu
6976
6977 @node Strange Names, car & cdr, car cdr & cons, car cdr & cons
6978 @ifnottex
6979 @unnumberedsec Strange Names
6980 @end ifnottex
6981
6982 The name of the @code{cons} function is not unreasonable: it is an
6983 abbreviation of the word `construct'. The origins of the names for
6984 @code{car} and @code{cdr}, on the other hand, are esoteric: @code{car}
6985 is an acronym from the phrase `Contents of the Address part of the
6986 Register'; and @code{cdr} (pronounced `could-er') is an acronym from
6987 the phrase `Contents of the Decrement part of the Register'. These
6988 phrases refer to specific pieces of hardware on the very early
6989 computer on which the original Lisp was developed. Besides being
6990 obsolete, the phrases have been completely irrelevant for more than 25
6991 years to anyone thinking about Lisp. Nonetheless, although a few
6992 brave scholars have begun to use more reasonable names for these
6993 functions, the old terms are still in use. In particular, since the
6994 terms are used in the Emacs Lisp source code, we will use them in this
6995 introduction.
6996
6997 @node car & cdr, cons, Strange Names, car cdr & cons
6998 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6999 @section @code{car} and @code{cdr}
7000
7001 The @sc{car} of a list is, quite simply, the first item in the list.
7002 Thus the @sc{car} of the list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} is
7003 @code{rose}.
7004
7005 @need 1200
7006 If you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can see this by
7007 evaluating the following:
7008
7009 @smallexample
7010 (car '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
7011 @end smallexample
7012
7013 @noindent
7014 After evaluating the expression, @code{rose} will appear in the echo
7015 area.
7016
7017 Clearly, a more reasonable name for the @code{car} function would be
7018 @code{first} and this is often suggested.
7019
7020 @code{car} does not remove the first item from the list; it only reports
7021 what it is. After @code{car} has been applied to a list, the list is
7022 still the same as it was. In the jargon, @code{car} is
7023 `non-destructive'. This feature turns out to be important.
7024
7025 The @sc{cdr} of a list is the rest of the list, that is, the
7026 @code{cdr} function returns the part of the list that follows the
7027 first item. Thus, while the @sc{car} of the list @code{'(rose violet
7028 daisy buttercup)} is @code{rose}, the rest of the list, the value
7029 returned by the @code{cdr} function, is @code{(violet daisy
7030 buttercup)}.
7031
7032 @need 800
7033 You can see this by evaluating the following in the usual way:
7034
7035 @smallexample
7036 (cdr '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
7037 @end smallexample
7038
7039 @noindent
7040 When you evaluate this, @code{(violet daisy buttercup)} will appear in
7041 the echo area.
7042
7043 Like @code{car}, @code{cdr} does not remove any elements from the
7044 list---it just returns a report of what the second and subsequent
7045 elements are.
7046
7047 Incidentally, in the example, the list of flowers is quoted. If it were
7048 not, the Lisp interpreter would try to evaluate the list by calling
7049 @code{rose} as a function. In this example, we do not want to do that.
7050
7051 Clearly, a more reasonable name for @code{cdr} would be @code{rest}.
7052
7053 (There is a lesson here: when you name new functions, consider very
7054 carefully what you are doing, since you may be stuck with the names
7055 for far longer than you expect. The reason this document perpetuates
7056 these names is that the Emacs Lisp source code uses them, and if I did
7057 not use them, you would have a hard time reading the code; but do,
7058 please, try to avoid using these terms yourself. The people who come
7059 after you will be grateful to you.)
7060
7061 When @code{car} and @code{cdr} are applied to a list made up of symbols,
7062 such as the list @code{(pine fir oak maple)}, the element of the list
7063 returned by the function @code{car} is the symbol @code{pine} without
7064 any parentheses around it. @code{pine} is the first element in the
7065 list. However, the @sc{cdr} of the list is a list itself, @code{(fir
7066 oak maple)}, as you can see by evaluating the following expressions in
7067 the usual way:
7068
7069 @smallexample
7070 @group
7071 (car '(pine fir oak maple))
7072
7073 (cdr '(pine fir oak maple))
7074 @end group
7075 @end smallexample
7076
7077 On the other hand, in a list of lists, the first element is itself a
7078 list. @code{car} returns this first element as a list. For example,
7079 the following list contains three sub-lists, a list of carnivores, a
7080 list of herbivores and a list of sea mammals:
7081
7082 @smallexample
7083 @group
7084 (car '((lion tiger cheetah)
7085 (gazelle antelope zebra)
7086 (whale dolphin seal)))
7087 @end group
7088 @end smallexample
7089
7090 @noindent
7091 In this example, the first element or @sc{car} of the list is the list of
7092 carnivores, @code{(lion tiger cheetah)}, and the rest of the list is
7093 @code{((gazelle antelope zebra) (whale dolphin seal))}.
7094
7095 @smallexample
7096 @group
7097 (cdr '((lion tiger cheetah)
7098 (gazelle antelope zebra)
7099 (whale dolphin seal)))
7100 @end group
7101 @end smallexample
7102
7103 It is worth saying again that @code{car} and @code{cdr} are
7104 non-destructive---that is, they do not modify or change lists to which
7105 they are applied. This is very important for how they are used.
7106
7107 Also, in the first chapter, in the discussion about atoms, I said that
7108 in Lisp, ``certain kinds of atom, such as an array, can be separated
7109 into parts; but the mechanism for doing this is different from the
7110 mechanism for splitting a list. As far as Lisp is concerned, the
7111 atoms of a list are unsplittable.'' (@xref{Lisp Atoms}.) The
7112 @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions are used for splitting lists and
7113 are considered fundamental to Lisp. Since they cannot split or gain
7114 access to the parts of an array, an array is considered an atom.
7115 Conversely, the other fundamental function, @code{cons}, can put
7116 together or construct a list, but not an array. (Arrays are handled
7117 by array-specific functions. @xref{Arrays, , Arrays, elisp, The GNU
7118 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
7119
7120 @node cons, nthcdr, car & cdr, car cdr & cons
7121 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7122 @section @code{cons}
7123 @findex cons, @r{introduced}
7124
7125 The @code{cons} function constructs lists; it is the inverse of
7126 @code{car} and @code{cdr}. For example, @code{cons} can be used to make
7127 a four element list from the three element list, @code{(fir oak maple)}:
7128
7129 @smallexample
7130 (cons 'pine '(fir oak maple))
7131 @end smallexample
7132
7133 @need 800
7134 @noindent
7135 After evaluating this list, you will see
7136
7137 @smallexample
7138 (pine fir oak maple)
7139 @end smallexample
7140
7141 @noindent
7142 appear in the echo area. @code{cons} causes the creation of a new
7143 list in which the element is followed by the elements of the original
7144 list.
7145
7146 We often say that `@code{cons} puts a new element at the beginning of
7147 a list; it attaches or pushes elements onto the list', but this
7148 phrasing can be misleading, since @code{cons} does not change an
7149 existing list, but creates a new one.
7150
7151 Like @code{car} and @code{cdr}, @code{cons} is non-destructive.
7152
7153 @menu
7154 * Build a list::
7155 * length:: How to find the length of a list.
7156 @end menu
7157
7158 @node Build a list, length, cons, cons
7159 @ifnottex
7160 @unnumberedsubsec Build a list
7161 @end ifnottex
7162
7163 @code{cons} must have a list to attach to.@footnote{Actually, you can
7164 @code{cons} an element to an atom to produce a dotted pair. Dotted
7165 pairs are not discussed here; see @ref{Dotted Pair Notation, , Dotted
7166 Pair Notation, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.} You
7167 cannot start from absolutely nothing. If you are building a list, you
7168 need to provide at least an empty list at the beginning. Here is a
7169 series of @code{cons} expressions that build up a list of flowers. If
7170 you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can evaluate each of
7171 the expressions in the usual way; the value is printed in this text
7172 after @samp{@result{}}, which you may read as `evaluates to'.
7173
7174 @smallexample
7175 @group
7176 (cons 'buttercup ())
7177 @result{} (buttercup)
7178 @end group
7179
7180 @group
7181 (cons 'daisy '(buttercup))
7182 @result{} (daisy buttercup)
7183 @end group
7184
7185 @group
7186 (cons 'violet '(daisy buttercup))
7187 @result{} (violet daisy buttercup)
7188 @end group
7189
7190 @group
7191 (cons 'rose '(violet daisy buttercup))
7192 @result{} (rose violet daisy buttercup)
7193 @end group
7194 @end smallexample
7195
7196 @noindent
7197 In the first example, the empty list is shown as @code{()} and a list
7198 made up of @code{buttercup} followed by the empty list is constructed.
7199 As you can see, the empty list is not shown in the list that was
7200 constructed. All that you see is @code{(buttercup)}. The empty list is
7201 not counted as an element of a list because there is nothing in an empty
7202 list. Generally speaking, an empty list is invisible.
7203
7204 The second example, @code{(cons 'daisy '(buttercup))} constructs a new,
7205 two element list by putting @code{daisy} in front of @code{buttercup};
7206 and the third example constructs a three element list by putting
7207 @code{violet} in front of @code{daisy} and @code{buttercup}.
7208
7209 @node length, , Build a list, cons
7210 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7211 @subsection Find the Length of a List: @code{length}
7212 @findex length
7213
7214 You can find out how many elements there are in a list by using the Lisp
7215 function @code{length}, as in the following examples:
7216
7217 @smallexample
7218 @group
7219 (length '(buttercup))
7220 @result{} 1
7221 @end group
7222
7223 @group
7224 (length '(daisy buttercup))
7225 @result{} 2
7226 @end group
7227
7228 @group
7229 (length (cons 'violet '(daisy buttercup)))
7230 @result{} 3
7231 @end group
7232 @end smallexample
7233
7234 @noindent
7235 In the third example, the @code{cons} function is used to construct a
7236 three element list which is then passed to the @code{length} function as
7237 its argument.
7238
7239 @need 1200
7240 We can also use @code{length} to count the number of elements in an
7241 empty list:
7242
7243 @smallexample
7244 @group
7245 (length ())
7246 @result{} 0
7247 @end group
7248 @end smallexample
7249
7250 @noindent
7251 As you would expect, the number of elements in an empty list is zero.
7252
7253 An interesting experiment is to find out what happens if you try to find
7254 the length of no list at all; that is, if you try to call @code{length}
7255 without giving it an argument, not even an empty list:
7256
7257 @smallexample
7258 (length )
7259 @end smallexample
7260
7261 @need 800
7262 @noindent
7263 What you see, if you evaluate this, is the error message
7264
7265 @smallexample
7266 Lisp error: (wrong-number-of-arguments length 0)
7267 @end smallexample
7268
7269 @noindent
7270 This means that the function receives the wrong number of
7271 arguments, zero, when it expects some other number of arguments. In
7272 this case, one argument is expected, the argument being a list whose
7273 length the function is measuring. (Note that @emph{one} list is
7274 @emph{one} argument, even if the list has many elements inside it.)
7275
7276 The part of the error message that says @samp{length} is the name of
7277 the function.
7278
7279 @ignore
7280 @code{length} is still a subroutine, but you need C-h f to discover that.
7281
7282 In an earlier version:
7283 This is written with a special notation, @samp{#<subr},
7284 that indicates that the function @code{length} is one of the primitive
7285 functions written in C rather than in Emacs Lisp. (@samp{subr} is an
7286 abbreviation for `subroutine'.) @xref{What Is a Function, , What Is a
7287 Function?, elisp , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
7288 about subroutines.
7289 @end ignore
7290
7291 @node nthcdr, nth, cons, car cdr & cons
7292 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7293 @section @code{nthcdr}
7294 @findex nthcdr
7295
7296 The @code{nthcdr} function is associated with the @code{cdr} function.
7297 What it does is take the @sc{cdr} of a list repeatedly.
7298
7299 If you take the @sc{cdr} of the list @code{(pine fir
7300 oak maple)}, you will be returned the list @code{(fir oak maple)}. If you
7301 repeat this on what was returned, you will be returned the list
7302 @code{(oak maple)}. (Of course, repeated @sc{cdr}ing on the original
7303 list will just give you the original @sc{cdr} since the function does
7304 not change the list. You need to evaluate the @sc{cdr} of the
7305 @sc{cdr} and so on.) If you continue this, eventually you will be
7306 returned an empty list, which in this case, instead of being shown as
7307 @code{()} is shown as @code{nil}.
7308
7309 @need 1200
7310 For review, here is a series of repeated @sc{cdr}s, the text following
7311 the @samp{@result{}} shows what is returned.
7312
7313 @smallexample
7314 @group
7315 (cdr '(pine fir oak maple))
7316 @result{}(fir oak maple)
7317 @end group
7318
7319 @group
7320 (cdr '(fir oak maple))
7321 @result{} (oak maple)
7322 @end group
7323
7324 @group
7325 (cdr '(oak maple))
7326 @result{}(maple)
7327 @end group
7328
7329 @group
7330 (cdr '(maple))
7331 @result{} nil
7332 @end group
7333
7334 @group
7335 (cdr 'nil)
7336 @result{} nil
7337 @end group
7338
7339 @group
7340 (cdr ())
7341 @result{} nil
7342 @end group
7343 @end smallexample
7344
7345 @need 1200
7346 You can also do several @sc{cdr}s without printing the values in
7347 between, like this:
7348
7349 @smallexample
7350 @group
7351 (cdr (cdr '(pine fir oak maple)))
7352 @result{} (oak maple)
7353 @end group
7354 @end smallexample
7355
7356 @noindent
7357 In this example, the Lisp interpreter evaluates the innermost list first.
7358 The innermost list is quoted, so it just passes the list as it is to the
7359 innermost @code{cdr}. This @code{cdr} passes a list made up of the
7360 second and subsequent elements of the list to the outermost @code{cdr},
7361 which produces a list composed of the third and subsequent elements of
7362 the original list. In this example, the @code{cdr} function is repeated
7363 and returns a list that consists of the original list without its
7364 first two elements.
7365
7366 The @code{nthcdr} function does the same as repeating the call to
7367 @code{cdr}. In the following example, the argument 2 is passed to the
7368 function @code{nthcdr}, along with the list, and the value returned is
7369 the list without its first two items, which is exactly the same
7370 as repeating @code{cdr} twice on the list:
7371
7372 @smallexample
7373 @group
7374 (nthcdr 2 '(pine fir oak maple))
7375 @result{} (oak maple)
7376 @end group
7377 @end smallexample
7378
7379 @need 1200
7380 Using the original four element list, we can see what happens when
7381 various numeric arguments are passed to @code{nthcdr}, including 0, 1,
7382 and 5:
7383
7384 @smallexample
7385 @group
7386 ;; @r{Leave the list as it was.}
7387 (nthcdr 0 '(pine fir oak maple))
7388 @result{} (pine fir oak maple)
7389 @end group
7390
7391 @group
7392 ;; @r{Return a copy without the first element.}
7393 (nthcdr 1 '(pine fir oak maple))
7394 @result{} (fir oak maple)
7395 @end group
7396
7397 @group
7398 ;; @r{Return a copy of the list without three elements.}
7399 (nthcdr 3 '(pine fir oak maple))
7400 @result{} (maple)
7401 @end group
7402
7403 @group
7404 ;; @r{Return a copy lacking all four elements.}
7405 (nthcdr 4 '(pine fir oak maple))
7406 @result{} nil
7407 @end group
7408
7409 @group
7410 ;; @r{Return a copy lacking all elements.}
7411 (nthcdr 5 '(pine fir oak maple))
7412 @result{} nil
7413 @end group
7414 @end smallexample
7415
7416 @node nth, setcar, nthcdr, car cdr & cons
7417 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7418 @section @code{nth}
7419 @findex nth
7420
7421 The @code{nthcdr} function takes the @sc{cdr} of a list repeatedly.
7422 The @code{nth} function takes the @sc{car} of the result returned by
7423 @code{nthcdr}. It returns the Nth element of the list.
7424
7425 @need 1500
7426 Thus, if it were not defined in C for speed, the definition of
7427 @code{nth} would be:
7428
7429 @smallexample
7430 @group
7431 (defun nth (n list)
7432 "Returns the Nth element of LIST.
7433 N counts from zero. If LIST is not that long, nil is returned."
7434 (car (nthcdr n list)))
7435 @end group
7436 @end smallexample
7437
7438 @noindent
7439 (Originally, @code{nth} was defined in Emacs Lisp in @file{subr.el},
7440 but its definition was redone in C in the 1980s.)
7441
7442 The @code{nth} function returns a single element of a list.
7443 This can be very convenient.
7444
7445 Note that the elements are numbered from zero, not one. That is to
7446 say, the first element of a list, its @sc{car} is the zeroth element.
7447 This is called `zero-based' counting and often bothers people who
7448 are accustomed to the first element in a list being number one, which
7449 is `one-based'.
7450
7451 @need 1250
7452 For example:
7453
7454 @smallexample
7455 @group
7456 (nth 0 '("one" "two" "three"))
7457 @result{} "one"
7458
7459 (nth 1 '("one" "two" "three"))
7460 @result{} "two"
7461 @end group
7462 @end smallexample
7463
7464 It is worth mentioning that @code{nth}, like @code{nthcdr} and
7465 @code{cdr}, does not change the original list---the function is
7466 non-destructive. This is in sharp contrast to the @code{setcar} and
7467 @code{setcdr} functions.
7468
7469 @node setcar, setcdr, nth, car cdr & cons
7470 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7471 @section @code{setcar}
7472 @findex setcar
7473
7474 As you might guess from their names, the @code{setcar} and @code{setcdr}
7475 functions set the @sc{car} or the @sc{cdr} of a list to a new value.
7476 They actually change the original list, unlike @code{car} and @code{cdr}
7477 which leave the original list as it was. One way to find out how this
7478 works is to experiment. We will start with the @code{setcar} function.
7479
7480 @need 1200
7481 First, we can make a list and then set the value of a variable to the
7482 list, using the @code{setq} function. Here is a list of animals:
7483
7484 @smallexample
7485 (setq animals '(antelope giraffe lion tiger))
7486 @end smallexample
7487
7488 @noindent
7489 If you are reading this in Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate
7490 this expression in the usual fashion, by positioning the cursor after
7491 the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. (I'm doing this right here
7492 as I write this. This is one of the advantages of having the
7493 interpreter built into the computing environment. Incidentally, when
7494 there is nothing on the line after the final parentheses, such as a
7495 comment, point can be on the next line. Thus, if your cursor is in
7496 the first column of the next line, you do not need to move it.
7497 Indeed, Emacs permits any amount of white space after the final
7498 parenthesis.)
7499
7500 @need 1200
7501 When we evaluate the variable @code{animals}, we see that it is bound to
7502 the list @code{(antelope giraffe lion tiger)}:
7503
7504 @smallexample
7505 @group
7506 animals
7507 @result{} (antelope giraffe lion tiger)
7508 @end group
7509 @end smallexample
7510
7511 @noindent
7512 Put another way, the variable @code{animals} points to the list
7513 @code{(antelope giraffe lion tiger)}.
7514
7515 Next, evaluate the function @code{setcar} while passing it two
7516 arguments, the variable @code{animals} and the quoted symbol
7517 @code{hippopotamus}; this is done by writing the three element list
7518 @code{(setcar animals 'hippopotamus)} and then evaluating it in the
7519 usual fashion:
7520
7521 @smallexample
7522 (setcar animals 'hippopotamus)
7523 @end smallexample
7524
7525 @need 1200
7526 @noindent
7527 After evaluating this expression, evaluate the variable @code{animals}
7528 again. You will see that the list of animals has changed:
7529
7530 @smallexample
7531 @group
7532 animals
7533 @result{} (hippopotamus giraffe lion tiger)
7534 @end group
7535 @end smallexample
7536
7537 @noindent
7538 The first element on the list, @code{antelope} is replaced by
7539 @code{hippopotamus}.
7540
7541 So we can see that @code{setcar} did not add a new element to the list
7542 as @code{cons} would have; it replaced @code{antelope} with
7543 @code{hippopotamus}; it @emph{changed} the list.
7544
7545 @node setcdr, cons Exercise, setcar, car cdr & cons
7546 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7547 @section @code{setcdr}
7548 @findex setcdr
7549
7550 The @code{setcdr} function is similar to the @code{setcar} function,
7551 except that the function replaces the second and subsequent elements of
7552 a list rather than the first element.
7553
7554 (To see how to change the last element of a list, look ahead to
7555 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, which uses
7556 the @code{nthcdr} and @code{setcdr} functions.)
7557
7558 @need 1200
7559 To see how this works, set the value of the variable to a list of
7560 domesticated animals by evaluating the following expression:
7561
7562 @smallexample
7563 (setq domesticated-animals '(horse cow sheep goat))
7564 @end smallexample
7565
7566 @need 1200
7567 @noindent
7568 If you now evaluate the list, you will be returned the list
7569 @code{(horse cow sheep goat)}:
7570
7571 @smallexample
7572 @group
7573 domesticated-animals
7574 @result{} (horse cow sheep goat)
7575 @end group
7576 @end smallexample
7577
7578 @need 1200
7579 Next, evaluate @code{setcdr} with two arguments, the name of the
7580 variable which has a list as its value, and the list to which the
7581 @sc{cdr} of the first list will be set;
7582
7583 @smallexample
7584 (setcdr domesticated-animals '(cat dog))
7585 @end smallexample
7586
7587 @noindent
7588 If you evaluate this expression, the list @code{(cat dog)} will appear
7589 in the echo area. This is the value returned by the function. The
7590 result we are interested in is the ``side effect'', which we can see by
7591 evaluating the variable @code{domesticated-animals}:
7592
7593 @smallexample
7594 @group
7595 domesticated-animals
7596 @result{} (horse cat dog)
7597 @end group
7598 @end smallexample
7599
7600 @noindent
7601 Indeed, the list is changed from @code{(horse cow sheep goat)} to
7602 @code{(horse cat dog)}. The @sc{cdr} of the list is changed from
7603 @code{(cow sheep goat)} to @code{(cat dog)}.
7604
7605 @node cons Exercise, , setcdr, car cdr & cons
7606 @section Exercise
7607
7608 Construct a list of four birds by evaluating several expressions with
7609 @code{cons}. Find out what happens when you @code{cons} a list onto
7610 itself. Replace the first element of the list of four birds with a
7611 fish. Replace the rest of that list with a list of other fish.
7612
7613 @node Cutting & Storing Text, List Implementation, car cdr & cons, Top
7614 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7615 @chapter Cutting and Storing Text
7616 @cindex Cutting and storing text
7617 @cindex Storing and cutting text
7618 @cindex Killing text
7619 @cindex Clipping text
7620 @cindex Erasing text
7621 @cindex Deleting text
7622
7623 Whenever you cut or clip text out of a buffer with a `kill' command in
7624 GNU Emacs, it is stored in a list and you can bring it back with a
7625 `yank' command.
7626
7627 (The use of the word `kill' in Emacs for processes which specifically
7628 @emph{do not} destroy the values of the entities is an unfortunate
7629 historical accident. A much more appropriate word would be `clip' since
7630 that is what the kill commands do; they clip text out of a buffer and
7631 put it into storage from which it can be brought back. I have often
7632 been tempted to replace globally all occurrences of `kill' in the Emacs
7633 sources with `clip' and all occurrences of `killed' with `clipped'.)
7634
7635 @menu
7636 * Storing Text:: Text is stored in a list.
7637 * zap-to-char:: Cutting out text up to a character.
7638 * kill-region:: Cutting text out of a region.
7639 * copy-region-as-kill:: A definition for copying text.
7640 * Digression into C:: Minor note on C programming language macros.
7641 * defvar:: How to give a variable an initial value.
7642 * cons & search-fwd Review::
7643 * search Exercises::
7644 @end menu
7645
7646 @node Storing Text, zap-to-char, Cutting & Storing Text, Cutting & Storing Text
7647 @ifnottex
7648 @unnumberedsec Storing Text in a List
7649 @end ifnottex
7650
7651 When text is cut out of a buffer, it is stored on a list. Successive
7652 pieces of text are stored on the list successively, so the list might
7653 look like this:
7654
7655 @smallexample
7656 ("a piece of text" "previous piece")
7657 @end smallexample
7658
7659 @need 1200
7660 @noindent
7661 The function @code{cons} can be used to create a new list from a piece
7662 of text (an `atom', to use the jargon) and an existing list, like
7663 this:
7664
7665 @smallexample
7666 @group
7667 (cons "another piece"
7668 '("a piece of text" "previous piece"))
7669 @end group
7670 @end smallexample
7671
7672 @need 1200
7673 @noindent
7674 If you evaluate this expression, a list of three elements will appear in
7675 the echo area:
7676
7677 @smallexample
7678 ("another piece" "a piece of text" "previous piece")
7679 @end smallexample
7680
7681 With the @code{car} and @code{nthcdr} functions, you can retrieve
7682 whichever piece of text you want. For example, in the following code,
7683 @code{nthcdr 1 @dots{}} returns the list with the first item removed;
7684 and the @code{car} returns the first element of that remainder---the
7685 second element of the original list:
7686
7687 @smallexample
7688 @group
7689 (car (nthcdr 1 '("another piece"
7690 "a piece of text"
7691 "previous piece")))
7692 @result{} "a piece of text"
7693 @end group
7694 @end smallexample
7695
7696 The actual functions in Emacs are more complex than this, of course.
7697 The code for cutting and retrieving text has to be written so that
7698 Emacs can figure out which element in the list you want---the first,
7699 second, third, or whatever. In addition, when you get to the end of
7700 the list, Emacs should give you the first element of the list, rather
7701 than nothing at all.
7702
7703 The list that holds the pieces of text is called the @dfn{kill ring}.
7704 This chapter leads up to a description of the kill ring and how it is
7705 used by first tracing how the @code{zap-to-char} function works. This
7706 function uses (or `calls') a function that invokes a function that
7707 manipulates the kill ring. Thus, before reaching the mountains, we
7708 climb the foothills.
7709
7710 A subsequent chapter describes how text that is cut from the buffer is
7711 retrieved. @xref{Yanking, , Yanking Text Back}.
7712
7713 @node zap-to-char, kill-region, Storing Text, Cutting & Storing Text
7714 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7715 @section @code{zap-to-char}
7716 @findex zap-to-char
7717
7718 The @code{zap-to-char} function changed little between GNU Emacs
7719 version 19 and GNU Emacs version 22. However, @code{zap-to-char}
7720 calls another function, @code{kill-region}, which enjoyed a major
7721 rewrite.
7722
7723 The @code{kill-region} function in Emacs 19 is complex, but does not
7724 use code that is important at this time. We will skip it.
7725
7726 The @code{kill-region} function in Emacs 22 is easier to read than the
7727 same function in Emacs 19 and introduces a very important concept,
7728 that of error handling. We will walk through the function.
7729
7730 But first, let us look at the interactive @code{zap-to-char} function.
7731
7732 @menu
7733 * Complete zap-to-char:: The complete implementation.
7734 * zap-to-char interactive:: A three part interactive expression.
7735 * zap-to-char body:: A short overview.
7736 * search-forward:: How to search for a string.
7737 * progn:: The @code{progn} special form.
7738 * Summing up zap-to-char:: Using @code{point} and @code{search-forward}.
7739 @end menu
7740
7741 @node Complete zap-to-char, zap-to-char interactive, zap-to-char, zap-to-char
7742 @ifnottex
7743 @unnumberedsubsec The Complete @code{zap-to-char} Implementation
7744 @end ifnottex
7745
7746 The @code{zap-to-char} function removes the text in the region between
7747 the location of the cursor (i.e., of point) up to and including the
7748 next occurrence of a specified character. The text that
7749 @code{zap-to-char} removes is put in the kill ring; and it can be
7750 retrieved from the kill ring by typing @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank}). If
7751 the command is given an argument, it removes text through that number
7752 of occurrences. Thus, if the cursor were at the beginning of this
7753 sentence and the character were @samp{s}, @samp{Thus} would be
7754 removed. If the argument were two, @samp{Thus, if the curs} would be
7755 removed, up to and including the @samp{s} in @samp{cursor}.
7756
7757 If the specified character is not found, @code{zap-to-char} will say
7758 ``Search failed'', tell you the character you typed, and not remove
7759 any text.
7760
7761 In order to determine how much text to remove, @code{zap-to-char} uses
7762 a search function. Searches are used extensively in code that
7763 manipulates text, and we will focus attention on them as well as on the
7764 deletion command.
7765
7766 @ignore
7767 @c GNU Emacs version 19
7768 (defun zap-to-char (arg char) ; version 19 implementation
7769 "Kill up to and including ARG'th occurrence of CHAR.
7770 Goes backward if ARG is negative; error if CHAR not found."
7771 (interactive "*p\ncZap to char: ")
7772 (kill-region (point)
7773 (progn
7774 (search-forward
7775 (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7776 (point))))
7777 @end ignore
7778
7779 @need 1250
7780 Here is the complete text of the version 22 implementation of the function:
7781
7782 @c GNU Emacs 22
7783 @smallexample
7784 @group
7785 (defun zap-to-char (arg char)
7786 "Kill up to and including ARG'th occurrence of CHAR.
7787 Case is ignored if `case-fold-search' is non-nil in the current buffer.
7788 Goes backward if ARG is negative; error if CHAR not found."
7789 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
7790 (if (char-table-p translation-table-for-input)
7791 (setq char (or (aref translation-table-for-input char) char)))
7792 (kill-region (point) (progn
7793 (search-forward (char-to-string char)
7794 nil nil arg)
7795 (point))))
7796 @end group
7797 @end smallexample
7798
7799 The documentation is thorough. You do need to know the jargon meaning
7800 of the word `kill'.
7801
7802 @node zap-to-char interactive, zap-to-char body, Complete zap-to-char, zap-to-char
7803 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7804 @subsection The @code{interactive} Expression
7805
7806 @need 800
7807 The interactive expression in the @code{zap-to-char} command looks like
7808 this:
7809
7810 @smallexample
7811 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
7812 @end smallexample
7813
7814 The part within quotation marks, @code{"p\ncZap to char:@: "}, specifies
7815 two different things. First, and most simply, is the @samp{p}.
7816 This part is separated from the next part by a newline, @samp{\n}.
7817 The @samp{p} means that the first argument to the function will be
7818 passed the value of a `processed prefix'. The prefix argument is
7819 passed by typing @kbd{C-u} and a number, or @kbd{M-} and a number. If
7820 the function is called interactively without a prefix, 1 is passed to
7821 this argument.
7822
7823 The second part of @code{"p\ncZap to char:@: "} is
7824 @samp{cZap to char:@: }. In this part, the lower case @samp{c}
7825 indicates that @code{interactive} expects a prompt and that the
7826 argument will be a character. The prompt follows the @samp{c} and is
7827 the string @samp{Zap to char:@: } (with a space after the colon to
7828 make it look good).
7829
7830 What all this does is prepare the arguments to @code{zap-to-char} so they
7831 are of the right type, and give the user a prompt.
7832
7833 In a read-only buffer, the @code{zap-to-char} function copies the text
7834 to the kill ring, but does not remove it. The echo area displays a
7835 message saying that the buffer is read-only. Also, the terminal may
7836 beep or blink at you.
7837
7838 @node zap-to-char body, search-forward, zap-to-char interactive, zap-to-char
7839 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7840 @subsection The Body of @code{zap-to-char}
7841
7842 The body of the @code{zap-to-char} function contains the code that
7843 kills (that is, removes) the text in the region from the current
7844 position of the cursor up to and including the specified character.
7845
7846 The first part of the code looks like this:
7847
7848 @smallexample
7849 (if (char-table-p translation-table-for-input)
7850 (setq char (or (aref translation-table-for-input char) char)))
7851 (kill-region (point) (progn
7852 (search-forward (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7853 (point)))
7854 @end smallexample
7855
7856 @noindent
7857 @code{char-table-p} is an hitherto unseen function. It determines
7858 whether its argument is a character table. When it is, it sets the
7859 character passed to @code{zap-to-char} to one of them, if that
7860 character exists, or to the character itself. (This becomes important
7861 for certain characters in non-European languages. The @code{aref}
7862 function extracts an element from an array. It is an array-specific
7863 function that is not described in this document. @xref{Arrays, ,
7864 Arrays, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
7865
7866 @noindent
7867 @code{(point)} is the current position of the cursor.
7868
7869 The next part of the code is an expression using @code{progn}. The body
7870 of the @code{progn} consists of calls to @code{search-forward} and
7871 @code{point}.
7872
7873 It is easier to understand how @code{progn} works after learning about
7874 @code{search-forward}, so we will look at @code{search-forward} and
7875 then at @code{progn}.
7876
7877 @node search-forward, progn, zap-to-char body, zap-to-char
7878 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7879 @subsection The @code{search-forward} Function
7880 @findex search-forward
7881
7882 The @code{search-forward} function is used to locate the
7883 zapped-for-character in @code{zap-to-char}. If the search is
7884 successful, @code{search-forward} leaves point immediately after the
7885 last character in the target string. (In @code{zap-to-char}, the
7886 target string is just one character long. @code{zap-to-char} uses the
7887 function @code{char-to-string} to ensure that the computer treats that
7888 character as a string.) If the search is backwards,
7889 @code{search-forward} leaves point just before the first character in
7890 the target. Also, @code{search-forward} returns @code{t} for true.
7891 (Moving point is therefore a `side effect'.)
7892
7893 @need 1250
7894 In @code{zap-to-char}, the @code{search-forward} function looks like this:
7895
7896 @smallexample
7897 (search-forward (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7898 @end smallexample
7899
7900 The @code{search-forward} function takes four arguments:
7901
7902 @enumerate
7903 @item
7904 The first argument is the target, what is searched for. This must be a
7905 string, such as @samp{"z"}.
7906
7907 As it happens, the argument passed to @code{zap-to-char} is a single
7908 character. Because of the way computers are built, the Lisp
7909 interpreter may treat a single character as being different from a
7910 string of characters. Inside the computer, a single character has a
7911 different electronic format than a string of one character. (A single
7912 character can often be recorded in the computer using exactly one
7913 byte; but a string may be longer, and the computer needs to be ready
7914 for this.) Since the @code{search-forward} function searches for a
7915 string, the character that the @code{zap-to-char} function receives as
7916 its argument must be converted inside the computer from one format to
7917 the other; otherwise the @code{search-forward} function will fail.
7918 The @code{char-to-string} function is used to make this conversion.
7919
7920 @item
7921 The second argument bounds the search; it is specified as a position in
7922 the buffer. In this case, the search can go to the end of the buffer,
7923 so no bound is set and the second argument is @code{nil}.
7924
7925 @item
7926 The third argument tells the function what it should do if the search
7927 fails---it can signal an error (and print a message) or it can return
7928 @code{nil}. A @code{nil} as the third argument causes the function to
7929 signal an error when the search fails.
7930
7931 @item
7932 The fourth argument to @code{search-forward} is the repeat count---how
7933 many occurrences of the string to look for. This argument is optional
7934 and if the function is called without a repeat count, this argument is
7935 passed the value 1. If this argument is negative, the search goes
7936 backwards.
7937 @end enumerate
7938
7939 @need 800
7940 In template form, a @code{search-forward} expression looks like this:
7941
7942 @smallexample
7943 @group
7944 (search-forward "@var{target-string}"
7945 @var{limit-of-search}
7946 @var{what-to-do-if-search-fails}
7947 @var{repeat-count})
7948 @end group
7949 @end smallexample
7950
7951 We will look at @code{progn} next.
7952
7953 @node progn, Summing up zap-to-char, search-forward, zap-to-char
7954 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7955 @subsection The @code{progn} Special Form
7956 @findex progn
7957
7958 @code{progn} is a special form that causes each of its arguments to be
7959 evaluated in sequence and then returns the value of the last one. The
7960 preceding expressions are evaluated only for the side effects they
7961 perform. The values produced by them are discarded.
7962
7963 @need 800
7964 The template for a @code{progn} expression is very simple:
7965
7966 @smallexample
7967 @group
7968 (progn
7969 @var{body}@dots{})
7970 @end group
7971 @end smallexample
7972
7973 In @code{zap-to-char}, the @code{progn} expression has to do two things:
7974 put point in exactly the right position; and return the location of
7975 point so that @code{kill-region} will know how far to kill to.
7976
7977 The first argument to the @code{progn} is @code{search-forward}. When
7978 @code{search-forward} finds the string, the function leaves point
7979 immediately after the last character in the target string. (In this
7980 case the target string is just one character long.) If the search is
7981 backwards, @code{search-forward} leaves point just before the first
7982 character in the target. The movement of point is a side effect.
7983
7984 The second and last argument to @code{progn} is the expression
7985 @code{(point)}. This expression returns the value of point, which in
7986 this case will be the location to which it has been moved by
7987 @code{search-forward}. (In the source, a line that tells the function
7988 to go to the previous character, if it is going forward, was commented
7989 out in 1999; I don't remember whether that feature or mis-feature was
7990 ever a part of the distributed source.) The value of @code{point} is
7991 returned by the @code{progn} expression and is passed to
7992 @code{kill-region} as @code{kill-region}'s second argument.
7993
7994 @node Summing up zap-to-char, , progn, zap-to-char
7995 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7996 @subsection Summing up @code{zap-to-char}
7997
7998 Now that we have seen how @code{search-forward} and @code{progn} work,
7999 we can see how the @code{zap-to-char} function works as a whole.
8000
8001 The first argument to @code{kill-region} is the position of the cursor
8002 when the @code{zap-to-char} command is given---the value of point at
8003 that time. Within the @code{progn}, the search function then moves
8004 point to just after the zapped-to-character and @code{point} returns the
8005 value of this location. The @code{kill-region} function puts together
8006 these two values of point, the first one as the beginning of the region
8007 and the second one as the end of the region, and removes the region.
8008
8009 The @code{progn} special form is necessary because the
8010 @code{kill-region} command takes two arguments; and it would fail if
8011 @code{search-forward} and @code{point} expressions were written in
8012 sequence as two additional arguments. The @code{progn} expression is
8013 a single argument to @code{kill-region} and returns the one value that
8014 @code{kill-region} needs for its second argument.
8015
8016 @node kill-region, copy-region-as-kill, zap-to-char, Cutting & Storing Text
8017 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8018 @section @code{kill-region}
8019 @findex kill-region
8020
8021 The @code{zap-to-char} function uses the @code{kill-region} function.
8022 This function clips text from a region and copies that text to
8023 the kill ring, from which it may be retrieved.
8024
8025 @ignore
8026 GNU Emacs 22:
8027
8028 (defun kill-region (beg end &optional yank-handler)
8029 "Kill (\"cut\") text between point and mark.
8030 This deletes the text from the buffer and saves it in the kill ring.
8031 The command \\[yank] can retrieve it from there.
8032 \(If you want to kill and then yank immediately, use \\[kill-ring-save].)
8033
8034 If you want to append the killed region to the last killed text,
8035 use \\[append-next-kill] before \\[kill-region].
8036
8037 If the buffer is read-only, Emacs will beep and refrain from deleting
8038 the text, but put the text in the kill ring anyway. This means that
8039 you can use the killing commands to copy text from a read-only buffer.
8040
8041 This is the primitive for programs to kill text (as opposed to deleting it).
8042 Supply two arguments, character positions indicating the stretch of text
8043 to be killed.
8044 Any command that calls this function is a \"kill command\".
8045 If the previous command was also a kill command,
8046 the text killed this time appends to the text killed last time
8047 to make one entry in the kill ring.
8048
8049 In Lisp code, optional third arg YANK-HANDLER, if non-nil,
8050 specifies the yank-handler text property to be set on the killed
8051 text. See `insert-for-yank'."
8052 ;; Pass point first, then mark, because the order matters
8053 ;; when calling kill-append.
8054 (interactive (list (point) (mark)))
8055 (unless (and beg end)
8056 (error "The mark is not set now, so there is no region"))
8057 (condition-case nil
8058 (let ((string (filter-buffer-substring beg end t)))
8059 (when string ;STRING is nil if BEG = END
8060 ;; Add that string to the kill ring, one way or another.
8061 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8062 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8063 (kill-new string nil yank-handler)))
8064 (when (or string (eq last-command 'kill-region))
8065 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
8066 nil)
8067 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only)
8068 ;; The code above failed because the buffer, or some of the characters
8069 ;; in the region, are read-only.
8070 ;; We should beep, in case the user just isn't aware of this.
8071 ;; However, there's no harm in putting
8072 ;; the region's text in the kill ring, anyway.
8073 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8074 ;; Set this-command now, so it will be set even if we get an error.
8075 (setq this-command 'kill-region)
8076 ;; This should barf, if appropriate, and give us the correct error.
8077 (if kill-read-only-ok
8078 (progn (message "Read only text copied to kill ring") nil)
8079 ;; Signal an error if the buffer is read-only.
8080 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8081 ;; If the buffer isn't read-only, the text is.
8082 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))))
8083 @end ignore
8084
8085 The Emacs 22 version of that function uses @code{condition-case} and
8086 @code{copy-region-as-kill}, both of which we will explain.
8087 @code{condition-case} is an important special form.
8088
8089 In essence, the @code{kill-region} function calls
8090 @code{condition-case}, which takes three arguments. In this function,
8091 the first argument does nothing. The second argument contains the
8092 code that does the work when all goes well. The third argument
8093 contains the code that is called in the event of an error.
8094
8095 @menu
8096 * Complete kill-region:: The function definition.
8097 * condition-case:: Dealing with a problem.
8098 * Lisp macro::
8099 @end menu
8100
8101 @node Complete kill-region, condition-case, kill-region, kill-region
8102 @ifnottex
8103 @unnumberedsubsec The Complete @code{kill-region} Definition
8104 @end ifnottex
8105
8106 @need 1200
8107 We will go through the @code{condition-case} code in a moment. First,
8108 let us look at the definition of @code{kill-region}, with comments
8109 added:
8110
8111 @c GNU Emacs 22:
8112 @smallexample
8113 @group
8114 (defun kill-region (beg end)
8115 "Kill (\"cut\") text between point and mark.
8116 This deletes the text from the buffer and saves it in the kill ring.
8117 The command \\[yank] can retrieve it from there. @dots{} "
8118 @end group
8119
8120 @group
8121 ;; @bullet{} Since order matters, pass point first.
8122 (interactive (list (point) (mark)))
8123 ;; @bullet{} And tell us if we cannot cut the text.
8124 ;; `unless' is an `if' without a then-part.
8125 (unless (and beg end)
8126 (error "The mark is not set now, so there is no region"))
8127 @end group
8128
8129 @group
8130 ;; @bullet{} `condition-case' takes three arguments.
8131 ;; If the first argument is nil, as it is here,
8132 ;; information about the error signal is not
8133 ;; stored for use by another function.
8134 (condition-case nil
8135 @end group
8136
8137 @group
8138 ;; @bullet{} The second argument to `condition-case' tells the
8139 ;; Lisp interpreter what to do when all goes well.
8140 @end group
8141
8142 @group
8143 ;; It starts with a `let' function that extracts the string
8144 ;; and tests whether it exists. If so (that is what the
8145 ;; `when' checks), it calls an `if' function that determines
8146 ;; whether the previous command was another call to
8147 ;; `kill-region'; if it was, then the new text is appended to
8148 ;; the previous text; if not, then a different function,
8149 ;; `kill-new', is called.
8150 @end group
8151
8152 @group
8153 ;; The `kill-append' function concatenates the new string and
8154 ;; the old. The `kill-new' function inserts text into a new
8155 ;; item in the kill ring.
8156 @end group
8157
8158 @group
8159 ;; `when' is an `if' without an else-part. The second `when'
8160 ;; again checks whether the current string exists; in
8161 ;; addition, it checks whether the previous command was
8162 ;; another call to `kill-region'. If one or the other
8163 ;; condition is true, then it sets the current command to
8164 ;; be `kill-region'.
8165 @end group
8166 @group
8167 (let ((string (filter-buffer-substring beg end t)))
8168 (when string ;STRING is nil if BEG = END
8169 ;; Add that string to the kill ring, one way or another.
8170 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8171 @end group
8172 @group
8173 ;; @minus{} `yank-handler' is an optional argument to
8174 ;; `kill-region' that tells the `kill-append' and
8175 ;; `kill-new' functions how deal with properties
8176 ;; added to the text, such as `bold' or `italics'.
8177 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8178 (kill-new string nil yank-handler)))
8179 (when (or string (eq last-command 'kill-region))
8180 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
8181 nil)
8182 @end group
8183
8184 @group
8185 ;; @bullet{} The third argument to `condition-case' tells the interpreter
8186 ;; what to do with an error.
8187 @end group
8188 @group
8189 ;; The third argument has a conditions part and a body part.
8190 ;; If the conditions are met (in this case,
8191 ;; if text or buffer are read-only)
8192 ;; then the body is executed.
8193 @end group
8194 @group
8195 ;; The first part of the third argument is the following:
8196 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only) ;; the if-part
8197 ;; @dots{} the then-part
8198 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8199 @end group
8200 @group
8201 ;; Next, also as part of the then-part, set this-command, so
8202 ;; it will be set in an error
8203 (setq this-command 'kill-region)
8204 ;; Finally, in the then-part, send a message if you may copy
8205 ;; the text to the kill ring without signally an error, but
8206 ;; don't if you may not.
8207 @end group
8208 @group
8209 (if kill-read-only-ok
8210 (progn (message "Read only text copied to kill ring") nil)
8211 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8212 ;; If the buffer isn't read-only, the text is.
8213 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))
8214 @end group
8215 @end smallexample
8216
8217 @ignore
8218 @c v 21
8219 @smallexample
8220 @group
8221 (defun kill-region (beg end)
8222 "Kill between point and mark.
8223 The text is deleted but saved in the kill ring."
8224 (interactive "r")
8225 @end group
8226
8227 @group
8228 ;; 1. `condition-case' takes three arguments.
8229 ;; If the first argument is nil, as it is here,
8230 ;; information about the error signal is not
8231 ;; stored for use by another function.
8232 (condition-case nil
8233 @end group
8234
8235 @group
8236 ;; 2. The second argument to `condition-case'
8237 ;; tells the Lisp interpreter what to do when all goes well.
8238 @end group
8239
8240 @group
8241 ;; The `delete-and-extract-region' function usually does the
8242 ;; work. If the beginning and ending of the region are both
8243 ;; the same, then the variable `string' will be empty, or nil
8244 (let ((string (delete-and-extract-region beg end)))
8245 @end group
8246
8247 @group
8248 ;; `when' is an `if' clause that cannot take an `else-part'.
8249 ;; Emacs normally sets the value of `last-command' to the
8250 ;; previous command.
8251 @end group
8252 @group
8253 ;; `kill-append' concatenates the new string and the old.
8254 ;; `kill-new' inserts text into a new item in the kill ring.
8255 (when string
8256 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8257 ;; if true, prepend string
8258 (kill-append string (< end beg))
8259 (kill-new string)))
8260 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
8261 @end group
8262
8263 @group
8264 ;; 3. The third argument to `condition-case' tells the interpreter
8265 ;; what to do with an error.
8266 @end group
8267 @group
8268 ;; The third argument has a conditions part and a body part.
8269 ;; If the conditions are met (in this case,
8270 ;; if text or buffer are read-only)
8271 ;; then the body is executed.
8272 @end group
8273 @group
8274 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only) ;; this is the if-part
8275 ;; then...
8276 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8277 @end group
8278 @group
8279 (if kill-read-only-ok ;; usually this variable is nil
8280 (message "Read only text copied to kill ring")
8281 ;; or else, signal an error if the buffer is read-only;
8282 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8283 ;; and, in any case, signal that the text is read-only.
8284 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))))
8285 @end group
8286 @end smallexample
8287 @end ignore
8288
8289 @node condition-case, Lisp macro, Complete kill-region, kill-region
8290 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8291 @subsection @code{condition-case}
8292 @findex condition-case
8293
8294 As we have seen earlier (@pxref{Making Errors, , Generate an Error
8295 Message}), when the Emacs Lisp interpreter has trouble evaluating an
8296 expression, it provides you with help; in the jargon, this is called
8297 ``signaling an error''. Usually, the computer stops the program and
8298 shows you a message.
8299
8300 However, some programs undertake complicated actions. They should not
8301 simply stop on an error. In the @code{kill-region} function, the most
8302 likely error is that you will try to kill text that is read-only and
8303 cannot be removed. So the @code{kill-region} function contains code
8304 to handle this circumstance. This code, which makes up the body of
8305 the @code{kill-region} function, is inside of a @code{condition-case}
8306 special form.
8307
8308 @need 800
8309 The template for @code{condition-case} looks like this:
8310
8311 @smallexample
8312 @group
8313 (condition-case
8314 @var{var}
8315 @var{bodyform}
8316 @var{error-handler}@dots{})
8317 @end group
8318 @end smallexample
8319
8320 The second argument, @var{bodyform}, is straightforward. The
8321 @code{condition-case} special form causes the Lisp interpreter to
8322 evaluate the code in @var{bodyform}. If no error occurs, the special
8323 form returns the code's value and produces the side-effects, if any.
8324
8325 In short, the @var{bodyform} part of a @code{condition-case}
8326 expression determines what should happen when everything works
8327 correctly.
8328
8329 However, if an error occurs, among its other actions, the function
8330 generating the error signal will define one or more error condition
8331 names.
8332
8333 An error handler is the third argument to @code{condition case}.
8334 An error handler has two parts, a @var{condition-name} and a
8335 @var{body}. If the @var{condition-name} part of an error handler
8336 matches a condition name generated by an error, then the @var{body}
8337 part of the error handler is run.
8338
8339 As you will expect, the @var{condition-name} part of an error handler
8340 may be either a single condition name or a list of condition names.
8341
8342 Also, a complete @code{condition-case} expression may contain more
8343 than one error handler. When an error occurs, the first applicable
8344 handler is run.
8345
8346 Lastly, the first argument to the @code{condition-case} expression,
8347 the @var{var} argument, is sometimes bound to a variable that
8348 contains information about the error. However, if that argument is
8349 nil, as is the case in @code{kill-region}, that information is
8350 discarded.
8351
8352 @need 1200
8353 In brief, in the @code{kill-region} function, the code
8354 @code{condition-case} works like this:
8355
8356 @smallexample
8357 @group
8358 @var{If no errors}, @var{run only this code}
8359 @var{but}, @var{if errors}, @var{run this other code}.
8360 @end group
8361 @end smallexample
8362
8363 @ignore
8364 2006 Oct 24
8365 In Emacs 22,
8366 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
8367 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
8368 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
8369 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
8370
8371 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
8372 this is line 8054
8373 Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar} includes line 8350
8374 @end ignore
8375
8376 @node Lisp macro, , condition-case, kill-region
8377 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8378 @subsection Lisp macro
8379 @cindex Macro, lisp
8380 @cindex Lisp macro
8381
8382 The part of the @code{condition-case} expression that is evaluated in
8383 the expectation that all goes well has a @code{when}. The code uses
8384 @code{when} to determine whether the @code{string} variable points to
8385 text that exists.
8386
8387 A @code{when} expression is simply a programmers' convenience. It is
8388 an @code{if} without the possibility of an else clause. In your mind,
8389 you can replace @code{when} with @code{if} and understand what goes
8390 on. That is what the Lisp interpreter does.
8391
8392 Technically speaking, @code{when} is a Lisp macro. A Lisp @dfn{macro}
8393 enables you to define new control constructs and other language
8394 features. It tells the interpreter how to compute another Lisp
8395 expression which will in turn compute the value. In this case, the
8396 `other expression' is an @code{if} expression.
8397
8398 The @code{kill-region} function definition also has an @code{unless}
8399 macro; it is the converse of @code{when}. The @code{unless} macro is
8400 an @code{if} without a then clause
8401
8402 For more about Lisp macros, see @ref{Macros, , Macros, elisp, The GNU
8403 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}. The C programming language also
8404 provides macros. These are different, but also useful.
8405
8406 @ignore
8407 We will briefly look at C macros in
8408 @ref{Digression into C}.
8409 @end ignore
8410
8411 @need 1200
8412 Regarding the @code{when} macro, in the @code{condition-case}
8413 expression, when the string has content, then another conditional
8414 expression is executed. This is an @code{if} with both a then-part
8415 and an else-part.
8416
8417 @smallexample
8418 @group
8419 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8420 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8421 (kill-new string nil yank-handler))
8422 @end group
8423 @end smallexample
8424
8425 The then-part is evaluated if the previous command was another call to
8426 @code{kill-region}; if not, the else-part is evaluated.
8427
8428 @code{yank-handler} is an optional argument to @code{kill-region} that
8429 tells the @code{kill-append} and @code{kill-new} functions how deal
8430 with properties added to the text, such as `bold' or `italics'.
8431
8432 @code{last-command} is a variable that comes with Emacs that we have
8433 not seen before. Normally, whenever a function is executed, Emacs
8434 sets the value of @code{last-command} to the previous command.
8435
8436 @need 1200
8437 In this segment of the definition, the @code{if} expression checks
8438 whether the previous command was @code{kill-region}. If it was,
8439
8440 @smallexample
8441 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8442 @end smallexample
8443
8444 @noindent
8445 concatenates a copy of the newly clipped text to the just previously
8446 clipped text in the kill ring.
8447
8448 @node copy-region-as-kill, Digression into C, kill-region, Cutting & Storing Text
8449 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8450 @section @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8451 @findex copy-region-as-kill
8452 @findex nthcdr
8453
8454 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function copies a region of text from a
8455 buffer and (via either @code{kill-append} or @code{kill-new}) saves it
8456 in the @code{kill-ring}.
8457
8458 If you call @code{copy-region-as-kill} immediately after a
8459 @code{kill-region} command, Emacs appends the newly copied text to the
8460 previously copied text. This means that if you yank back the text, you
8461 get it all, from both this and the previous operation. On the other
8462 hand, if some other command precedes the @code{copy-region-as-kill},
8463 the function copies the text into a separate entry in the kill ring.
8464
8465 @menu
8466 * Complete copy-region-as-kill:: The complete function definition.
8467 * copy-region-as-kill body:: The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}.
8468 @end menu
8469
8470 @node Complete copy-region-as-kill, copy-region-as-kill body, copy-region-as-kill, copy-region-as-kill
8471 @ifnottex
8472 @unnumberedsubsec The complete @code{copy-region-as-kill} function definition
8473 @end ifnottex
8474
8475 @need 1200
8476 Here is the complete text of the version 22 @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8477 function:
8478
8479 @smallexample
8480 @group
8481 (defun copy-region-as-kill (beg end)
8482 "Save the region as if killed, but don't kill it.
8483 In Transient Mark mode, deactivate the mark.
8484 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, also save the text for a window
8485 system cut and paste."
8486 (interactive "r")
8487 @end group
8488 @group
8489 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8490 (kill-append (filter-buffer-substring beg end) (< end beg))
8491 (kill-new (filter-buffer-substring beg end)))
8492 @end group
8493 @group
8494 (if transient-mark-mode
8495 (setq deactivate-mark t))
8496 nil)
8497 @end group
8498 @end smallexample
8499
8500 @need 800
8501 As usual, this function can be divided into its component parts:
8502
8503 @smallexample
8504 @group
8505 (defun copy-region-as-kill (@var{argument-list})
8506 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
8507 (interactive "r")
8508 @var{body}@dots{})
8509 @end group
8510 @end smallexample
8511
8512 The arguments are @code{beg} and @code{end} and the function is
8513 interactive with @code{"r"}, so the two arguments must refer to the
8514 beginning and end of the region. If you have been reading though this
8515 document from the beginning, understanding these parts of a function is
8516 almost becoming routine.
8517
8518 The documentation is somewhat confusing unless you remember that the
8519 word `kill' has a meaning different from usual. The `Transient Mark'
8520 and @code{interprogram-cut-function} comments explain certain
8521 side-effects.
8522
8523 After you once set a mark, a buffer always contains a region. If you
8524 wish, you can use Transient Mark mode to highlight the region
8525 temporarily. (No one wants to highlight the region all the time, so
8526 Transient Mark mode highlights it only at appropriate times. Many
8527 people turn off Transient Mark mode, so the region is never
8528 highlighted.)
8529
8530 Also, a windowing system allows you to copy, cut, and paste among
8531 different programs. In the X windowing system, for example, the
8532 @code{interprogram-cut-function} function is @code{x-select-text},
8533 which works with the windowing system's equivalent of the Emacs kill
8534 ring.
8535
8536 The body of the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function starts with an
8537 @code{if} clause. What this clause does is distinguish between two
8538 different situations: whether or not this command is executed
8539 immediately after a previous @code{kill-region} command. In the first
8540 case, the new region is appended to the previously copied text.
8541 Otherwise, it is inserted into the beginning of the kill ring as a
8542 separate piece of text from the previous piece.
8543
8544 The last two lines of the function prevent the region from lighting up
8545 if Transient Mark mode is turned on.
8546
8547 The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill} merits discussion in detail.
8548
8549 @node copy-region-as-kill body, , Complete copy-region-as-kill, copy-region-as-kill
8550 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8551 @subsection The Body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8552
8553 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function works in much the same way as
8554 the @code{kill-region} function. Both are written so that two or more
8555 kills in a row combine their text into a single entry. If you yank
8556 back the text from the kill ring, you get it all in one piece.
8557 Moreover, kills that kill forward from the current position of the
8558 cursor are added to the end of the previously copied text and commands
8559 that copy text backwards add it to the beginning of the previously
8560 copied text. This way, the words in the text stay in the proper
8561 order.
8562
8563 Like @code{kill-region}, the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function makes
8564 use of the @code{last-command} variable that keeps track of the
8565 previous Emacs command.
8566
8567 @menu
8568 * last-command & this-command::
8569 * kill-append function::
8570 * kill-new function::
8571 @end menu
8572
8573 @node last-command & this-command, kill-append function, copy-region-as-kill body, copy-region-as-kill body
8574 @ifnottex
8575 @unnumberedsubsubsec @code{last-command} and @code{this-command}
8576 @end ifnottex
8577
8578 Normally, whenever a function is executed, Emacs sets the value of
8579 @code{this-command} to the function being executed (which in this case
8580 would be @code{copy-region-as-kill}). At the same time, Emacs sets
8581 the value of @code{last-command} to the previous value of
8582 @code{this-command}.
8583
8584 In the first part of the body of the @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8585 function, an @code{if} expression determines whether the value of
8586 @code{last-command} is @code{kill-region}. If so, the then-part of
8587 the @code{if} expression is evaluated; it uses the @code{kill-append}
8588 function to concatenate the text copied at this call to the function
8589 with the text already in the first element (the @sc{car}) of the kill
8590 ring. On the other hand, if the value of @code{last-command} is not
8591 @code{kill-region}, then the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function
8592 attaches a new element to the kill ring using the @code{kill-new}
8593 function.
8594
8595 @need 1250
8596 The @code{if} expression reads as follows; it uses @code{eq}:
8597
8598 @smallexample
8599 @group
8600 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8601 ;; @r{then-part}
8602 (kill-append (filter-buffer-substring beg end) (< end beg))
8603 ;; @r{else-part}
8604 (kill-new (filter-buffer-substring beg end)))
8605 @end group
8606 @end smallexample
8607
8608 @findex filter-buffer-substring
8609 (The @code{filter-buffer-substring} function returns a filtered
8610 substring of the buffer, if any. Optionally---the arguments are not
8611 here, so neither is done---the function may delete the initial text or
8612 return the text without its properties; this function is a replacement
8613 for the older @code{buffer-substring} function, which came before text
8614 properties were implemented.)
8615
8616 @findex eq @r{(example of use)}
8617 @noindent
8618 The @code{eq} function tests whether its first argument is the same Lisp
8619 object as its second argument. The @code{eq} function is similar to the
8620 @code{equal} function in that it is used to test for equality, but
8621 differs in that it determines whether two representations are actually
8622 the same object inside the computer, but with different names.
8623 @code{equal} determines whether the structure and contents of two
8624 expressions are the same.
8625
8626 If the previous command was @code{kill-region}, then the Emacs Lisp
8627 interpreter calls the @code{kill-append} function
8628
8629 @node kill-append function, kill-new function, last-command & this-command, copy-region-as-kill body
8630 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{kill-append} function
8631 @findex kill-append
8632
8633 @need 800
8634 The @code{kill-append} function looks like this:
8635
8636 @c in GNU Emacs 22
8637 @smallexample
8638 @group
8639 (defun kill-append (string before-p &optional yank-handler)
8640 "Append STRING to the end of the latest kill in the kill ring.
8641 If BEFORE-P is non-nil, prepend STRING to the kill.
8642 @dots{} "
8643 (let* ((cur (car kill-ring)))
8644 (kill-new (if before-p (concat string cur) (concat cur string))
8645 (or (= (length cur) 0)
8646 (equal yank-handler
8647 (get-text-property 0 'yank-handler cur)))
8648 yank-handler)))
8649 @end group
8650 @end smallexample
8651
8652 @ignore
8653 was:
8654 (defun kill-append (string before-p)
8655 "Append STRING to the end of the latest kill in the kill ring.
8656 If BEFORE-P is non-nil, prepend STRING to the kill.
8657 If `interprogram-cut-function' is set, pass the resulting kill to
8658 it."
8659 (kill-new (if before-p
8660 (concat string (car kill-ring))
8661 (concat (car kill-ring) string))
8662 t))
8663 @end ignore
8664
8665 @noindent
8666 The @code{kill-append} function is fairly straightforward. It uses
8667 the @code{kill-new} function, which we will discuss in more detail in
8668 a moment.
8669
8670 (Also, the function provides an optional argument called
8671 @code{yank-handler}; when invoked, this argument tells the function
8672 how to deal with properties added to the text, such as `bold' or
8673 `italics'.)
8674
8675 @c !!! bug in GNU Emacs 22 version of kill-append ?
8676 It has a @code{let*} function to set the value of the first element of
8677 the kill ring to @code{cur}. (I do not know why the function does not
8678 use @code{let} instead; only one value is set in the expression.
8679 Perhaps this is a bug that produces no problems?)
8680
8681 Consider the conditional that is one of the two arguments to
8682 @code{kill-new}. It uses @code{concat} to concatenate the new text to
8683 the @sc{car} of the kill ring. Whether it prepends or appends the
8684 text depends on the results of an @code{if} expression:
8685
8686 @smallexample
8687 @group
8688 (if before-p ; @r{if-part}
8689 (concat string cur) ; @r{then-part}
8690 (concat cur string)) ; @r{else-part}
8691 @end group
8692 @end smallexample
8693
8694 @noindent
8695 If the region being killed is before the region that was killed in the
8696 last command, then it should be prepended before the material that was
8697 saved in the previous kill; and conversely, if the killed text follows
8698 what was just killed, it should be appended after the previous text.
8699 The @code{if} expression depends on the predicate @code{before-p} to
8700 decide whether the newly saved text should be put before or after the
8701 previously saved text.
8702
8703 The symbol @code{before-p} is the name of one of the arguments to
8704 @code{kill-append}. When the @code{kill-append} function is
8705 evaluated, it is bound to the value returned by evaluating the actual
8706 argument. In this case, this is the expression @code{(< end beg)}.
8707 This expression does not directly determine whether the killed text in
8708 this command is located before or after the kill text of the last
8709 command; what it does is determine whether the value of the variable
8710 @code{end} is less than the value of the variable @code{beg}. If it
8711 is, it means that the user is most likely heading towards the
8712 beginning of the buffer. Also, the result of evaluating the predicate
8713 expression, @code{(< end beg)}, will be true and the text will be
8714 prepended before the previous text. On the other hand, if the value of
8715 the variable @code{end} is greater than the value of the variable
8716 @code{beg}, the text will be appended after the previous text.
8717
8718 @need 800
8719 When the newly saved text will be prepended, then the string with the new
8720 text will be concatenated before the old text:
8721
8722 @smallexample
8723 (concat string cur)
8724 @end smallexample
8725
8726 @need 1200
8727 @noindent
8728 But if the text will be appended, it will be concatenated
8729 after the old text:
8730
8731 @smallexample
8732 (concat cur string))
8733 @end smallexample
8734
8735 To understand how this works, we first need to review the
8736 @code{concat} function. The @code{concat} function links together or
8737 unites two strings of text. The result is a string. For example:
8738
8739 @smallexample
8740 @group
8741 (concat "abc" "def")
8742 @result{} "abcdef"
8743 @end group
8744
8745 @group
8746 (concat "new "
8747 (car '("first element" "second element")))
8748 @result{} "new first element"
8749
8750 (concat (car
8751 '("first element" "second element")) " modified")
8752 @result{} "first element modified"
8753 @end group
8754 @end smallexample
8755
8756 We can now make sense of @code{kill-append}: it modifies the contents
8757 of the kill ring. The kill ring is a list, each element of which is
8758 saved text. The @code{kill-append} function uses the @code{kill-new}
8759 function which in turn uses the @code{setcar} function.
8760
8761 @node kill-new function, , kill-append function, copy-region-as-kill body
8762 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{kill-new} function
8763 @findex kill-new
8764
8765 @c in GNU Emacs 22, additional documentation to kill-new:
8766 @ignore
8767 Optional third arguments YANK-HANDLER controls how the STRING is later
8768 inserted into a buffer; see `insert-for-yank' for details.
8769 When a yank handler is specified, STRING must be non-empty (the yank
8770 handler, if non-nil, is stored as a `yank-handler' text property on STRING).
8771
8772 When the yank handler has a non-nil PARAM element, the original STRING
8773 argument is not used by `insert-for-yank'. However, since Lisp code
8774 may access and use elements from the kill ring directly, the STRING
8775 argument should still be a \"useful\" string for such uses."
8776 @end ignore
8777 @need 1200
8778 The @code{kill-new} function looks like this:
8779
8780 @smallexample
8781 @group
8782 (defun kill-new (string &optional replace yank-handler)
8783 "Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8784 Set `kill-ring-yank-pointer' to point to it.
8785
8786 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, apply it to STRING.
8787 Optional second argument REPLACE non-nil means that STRING will replace
8788 the front of the kill ring, rather than being added to the list.
8789 @dots{}"
8790 @end group
8791 @group
8792 (if (> (length string) 0)
8793 (if yank-handler
8794 (put-text-property 0 (length string)
8795 'yank-handler yank-handler string))
8796 (if yank-handler
8797 (signal 'args-out-of-range
8798 (list string "yank-handler specified for empty string"))))
8799 @end group
8800 @group
8801 (if (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8802 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8803 @end group
8804 @group
8805 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8806 (setcar kill-ring string)
8807 (push string kill-ring)
8808 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8809 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8810 @end group
8811 @group
8812 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8813 (if interprogram-cut-function
8814 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8815 @end group
8816 @end smallexample
8817 @ignore
8818 was:
8819 (defun kill-new (string &optional replace)
8820 "Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8821 Set the kill-ring-yank pointer to point to it.
8822 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, apply it to STRING.
8823 Optional second argument REPLACE non-nil means that STRING will replace
8824 the front of the kill ring, rather than being added to the list."
8825 (and (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8826 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8827 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8828 (setcar kill-ring string)
8829 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8830 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8831 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8832 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8833 (if interprogram-cut-function
8834 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8835 @end ignore
8836
8837 (Notice that the function is not interactive.)
8838
8839 As usual, we can look at this function in parts.
8840
8841 The function definition has an optional @code{yank-handler} argument,
8842 which when invoked tells the function how to deal with properties
8843 added to the text, such as `bold' or `italics'. We will skip that.
8844
8845 @need 1200
8846 The first line of the documentation makes sense:
8847
8848 @smallexample
8849 Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8850 @end smallexample
8851
8852 @noindent
8853 Let's skip over the rest of the documentation for the moment.
8854
8855 @noindent
8856 Also, let's skip over the initial @code{if} expression and those lines
8857 of code involving @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu}. We will explain
8858 them below.
8859
8860 @need 1200
8861 The critical lines are these:
8862
8863 @smallexample
8864 @group
8865 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8866 ;; @r{then}
8867 (setcar kill-ring string)
8868 @end group
8869 @group
8870 ;; @r{else}
8871 (push string kill-ring)
8872 @end group
8873 @group
8874 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8875 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8876 ;; @r{avoid overly long kill ring}
8877 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8878 @end group
8879 @group
8880 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8881 (if interprogram-cut-function
8882 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8883 @end group
8884 @end smallexample
8885
8886 The conditional test is @w{@code{(and replace kill-ring)}}.
8887 This will be true when two conditions are met: the kill ring has
8888 something in it, and the @code{replace} variable is true.
8889
8890 @need 1250
8891 When the @code{kill-append} function sets @code{replace} to be true
8892 and when the kill ring has at least one item in it, the @code{setcar}
8893 expression is executed:
8894
8895 @smallexample
8896 (setcar kill-ring string)
8897 @end smallexample
8898
8899 The @code{setcar} function actually changes the first element of the
8900 @code{kill-ring} list to the value of @code{string}. It replaces the
8901 first element.
8902
8903 @need 1250
8904 On the other hand, if the kill ring is empty, or replace is false, the
8905 else-part of the condition is executed:
8906
8907 @smallexample
8908 (push string kill-ring)
8909 @end smallexample
8910
8911 @noindent
8912 @need 1250
8913 @code{push} puts its first argument onto the second. It is similar to
8914 the older
8915
8916 @smallexample
8917 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8918 @end smallexample
8919
8920 @noindent
8921 @need 1250
8922 or the newer
8923
8924 @smallexample
8925 (add-to-list kill-ring string)
8926 @end smallexample
8927
8928 @noindent
8929 When it is false, the expression first constructs a new version of the
8930 kill ring by prepending @code{string} to the existing kill ring as a
8931 new element (that is what the @code{push} does). Then it executes a
8932 second @code{if} clause. This second @code{if} clause keeps the kill
8933 ring from growing too long.
8934
8935 Let's look at these two expressions in order.
8936
8937 The @code{push} line of the else-part sets the new value of the kill
8938 ring to what results from adding the string being killed to the old
8939 kill ring.
8940
8941 We can see how this works with an example.
8942
8943 @need 800
8944 First,
8945
8946 @smallexample
8947 (setq example-list '("here is a clause" "another clause"))
8948 @end smallexample
8949
8950 @need 1200
8951 @noindent
8952 After evaluating this expression with @kbd{C-x C-e}, you can evaluate
8953 @code{example-list} and see what it returns:
8954
8955 @smallexample
8956 @group
8957 example-list
8958 @result{} ("here is a clause" "another clause")
8959 @end group
8960 @end smallexample
8961
8962 @need 1200
8963 @noindent
8964 Now, we can add a new element on to this list by evaluating the
8965 following expression:
8966 @findex push, @r{example}
8967
8968 @smallexample
8969 (push "a third clause" example-list)
8970 @end smallexample
8971
8972 @need 800
8973 @noindent
8974 When we evaluate @code{example-list}, we find its value is:
8975
8976 @smallexample
8977 @group
8978 example-list
8979 @result{} ("a third clause" "here is a clause" "another clause")
8980 @end group
8981 @end smallexample
8982
8983 @noindent
8984 Thus, the third clause is added to the list by @code{push}.
8985
8986 @need 1200
8987 Now for the second part of the @code{if} clause. This expression
8988 keeps the kill ring from growing too long. It looks like this:
8989
8990 @smallexample
8991 @group
8992 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8993 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil))
8994 @end group
8995 @end smallexample
8996
8997 The code checks whether the length of the kill ring is greater than
8998 the maximum permitted length. This is the value of
8999 @code{kill-ring-max} (which is 60, by default). If the length of the
9000 kill ring is too long, then this code sets the last element of the
9001 kill ring to @code{nil}. It does this by using two functions,
9002 @code{nthcdr} and @code{setcdr}.
9003
9004 We looked at @code{setcdr} earlier (@pxref{setcdr, , @code{setcdr}}).
9005 It sets the @sc{cdr} of a list, just as @code{setcar} sets the
9006 @sc{car} of a list. In this case, however, @code{setcdr} will not be
9007 setting the @sc{cdr} of the whole kill ring; the @code{nthcdr}
9008 function is used to cause it to set the @sc{cdr} of the next to last
9009 element of the kill ring---this means that since the @sc{cdr} of the
9010 next to last element is the last element of the kill ring, it will set
9011 the last element of the kill ring.
9012
9013 @findex nthcdr, @r{example}
9014 The @code{nthcdr} function works by repeatedly taking the @sc{cdr} of a
9015 list---it takes the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr}
9016 @dots{} It does this @var{N} times and returns the results.
9017 (@xref{nthcdr, , @code{nthcdr}}.)
9018
9019 @findex setcdr, @r{example}
9020 Thus, if we had a four element list that was supposed to be three
9021 elements long, we could set the @sc{cdr} of the next to last element
9022 to @code{nil}, and thereby shorten the list. (If you set the last
9023 element to some other value than @code{nil}, which you could do, then
9024 you would not have shortened the list. @xref{setcdr, ,
9025 @code{setcdr}}.)
9026
9027 You can see shortening by evaluating the following three expressions
9028 in turn. First set the value of @code{trees} to @code{(maple oak pine
9029 birch)}, then set the @sc{cdr} of its second @sc{cdr} to @code{nil}
9030 and then find the value of @code{trees}:
9031
9032 @smallexample
9033 @group
9034 (setq trees '(maple oak pine birch))
9035 @result{} (maple oak pine birch)
9036 @end group
9037
9038 @group
9039 (setcdr (nthcdr 2 trees) nil)
9040 @result{} nil
9041
9042 trees
9043 @result{} (maple oak pine)
9044 @end group
9045 @end smallexample
9046
9047 @noindent
9048 (The value returned by the @code{setcdr} expression is @code{nil} since
9049 that is what the @sc{cdr} is set to.)
9050
9051 To repeat, in @code{kill-new}, the @code{nthcdr} function takes the
9052 @sc{cdr} a number of times that is one less than the maximum permitted
9053 size of the kill ring and @code{setcdr} sets the @sc{cdr} of that
9054 element (which will be the rest of the elements in the kill ring) to
9055 @code{nil}. This prevents the kill ring from growing too long.
9056
9057 @need 800
9058 The next to last expression in the @code{kill-new} function is
9059
9060 @smallexample
9061 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
9062 @end smallexample
9063
9064 The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is a global variable that is set to be
9065 the @code{kill-ring}.
9066
9067 Even though the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is called a
9068 @samp{pointer}, it is a variable just like the kill ring. However, the
9069 name has been chosen to help humans understand how the variable is used.
9070
9071 @need 1200
9072 Now, to return to an early expression in the body of the function:
9073
9074 @smallexample
9075 @group
9076 (if (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
9077 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
9078 @end group
9079 @end smallexample
9080
9081 @noindent
9082 It starts with an @code{if} expression
9083
9084 In this case, the expression tests first to see whether
9085 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} exists as a function, and if so,
9086 calls it. The @code{fboundp} function returns true if the symbol it
9087 is testing has a function definition that `is not void'. If the
9088 symbol's function definition were void, we would receive an error
9089 message, as we did when we created errors intentionally (@pxref{Making
9090 Errors, , Generate an Error Message}).
9091
9092 @noindent
9093 The then-part contains an expression whose first element is the
9094 function @code{and}.
9095
9096 @findex and
9097 The @code{and} special form evaluates each of its arguments until one
9098 of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, in which case the
9099 @code{and} expression returns @code{nil}; however, if none of the
9100 arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, the value resulting from
9101 evaluating the last argument is returned. (Since such a value is not
9102 @code{nil}, it is considered true in Emacs Lisp.) In other words, an
9103 @code{and} expression returns a true value only if all its arguments
9104 are true. (@xref{Second Buffer Related Review}.)
9105
9106 The expression determines whether the second argument to
9107 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} is true or not.
9108 @ignore
9109 ;; If we're supposed to be extending an existing string, and that
9110 ;; string really is at the front of the menu, then update it in place.
9111 @end ignore
9112
9113 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} is one of the functions that make it
9114 possible to use the `Select and Paste' menu in the Edit item of a menu
9115 bar; using a mouse, you can look at the various pieces of text you
9116 have saved and select one piece to paste.
9117
9118 The last expression in the @code{kill-new} function adds the newly
9119 copied string to whatever facility exists for copying and pasting
9120 among different programs running in a windowing system. In the X
9121 Windowing system, for example, the @code{x-select-text} function takes
9122 the string and stores it in memory operated by X. You can paste the
9123 string in another program, such as an Xterm.
9124
9125 @need 1200
9126 The expression looks like this:
9127
9128 @smallexample
9129 @group
9130 (if interprogram-cut-function
9131 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
9132 @end group
9133 @end smallexample
9134
9135 If an @code{interprogram-cut-function} exists, then Emacs executes
9136 @code{funcall}, which in turn calls its first argument as a function
9137 and passes the remaining arguments to it. (Incidentally, as far as I
9138 can see, this @code{if} expression could be replaced by an @code{and}
9139 expression similar to the one in the first part of the function.)
9140
9141 We are not going to discuss windowing systems and other programs
9142 further, but merely note that this is a mechanism that enables GNU
9143 Emacs to work easily and well with other programs.
9144
9145 This code for placing text in the kill ring, either concatenated with
9146 an existing element or as a new element, leads us to the code for
9147 bringing back text that has been cut out of the buffer---the yank
9148 commands. However, before discussing the yank commands, it is better
9149 to learn how lists are implemented in a computer. This will make
9150 clear such mysteries as the use of the term `pointer'. But before
9151 that, we will digress into C.
9152
9153 @ignore
9154 @c is this true in Emacs 22? Does not seems to be
9155
9156 (If the @w{@code{(< end beg))}}
9157 expression is true, @code{kill-append} prepends the string to the just
9158 previously clipped text. For a detailed discussion, see
9159 @ref{kill-append function, , The @code{kill-append} function}.)
9160
9161 If you then yank back the text, i.e., `paste' it, you get both
9162 pieces of text at once. That way, if you delete two words in a row,
9163 and then yank them back, you get both words, in their proper order,
9164 with one yank. (The @w{@code{(< end beg))}} expression makes sure the
9165 order is correct.)
9166
9167 On the other hand, if the previous command is not @code{kill-region},
9168 then the @code{kill-new} function is called, which adds the text to
9169 the kill ring as the latest item, and sets the
9170 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable to point to it.
9171 @end ignore
9172 @ignore
9173
9174 @c Evidently, changed for Emacs 22. The zap-to-char command does not
9175 @c use the delete-and-extract-region function
9176
9177 2006 Oct 26, the Digression into C is now OK but should come after
9178 copy-region-as-kill and filter-buffer-substring
9179
9180 2006 Oct 24
9181 In Emacs 22,
9182 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
9183 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
9184 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
9185 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
9186
9187 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9188 @end ignore
9189
9190 @node Digression into C, defvar, copy-region-as-kill, Cutting & Storing Text
9191 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
9192 @section Digression into C
9193 @findex delete-and-extract-region
9194 @cindex C, a digression into
9195 @cindex Digression into C
9196
9197 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function (@pxref{copy-region-as-kill, ,
9198 @code{copy-region-as-kill}}) uses the @code{filter-buffer-substring}
9199 function, which in turn uses the @code{delete-and-extract-region}
9200 function. It removes the contents of a region and you cannot get them
9201 back.
9202
9203 Unlike the other code discussed here, the
9204 @code{delete-and-extract-region} function is not written in Emacs
9205 Lisp; it is written in C and is one of the primitives of the GNU Emacs
9206 system. Since it is very simple, I will digress briefly from Lisp and
9207 describe it here.
9208
9209 @c GNU Emacs 22 in /usr/local/src/emacs/src/editfns.c
9210 @c the DEFUN for buffer-substring-no-properties
9211
9212 @need 1500
9213 Like many of the other Emacs primitives,
9214 @code{delete-and-extract-region} is written as an instance of a C
9215 macro, a macro being a template for code. The complete macro looks
9216 like this:
9217
9218 @smallexample
9219 @group
9220 DEFUN ("buffer-substring-no-properties", Fbuffer_substring_no_properties,
9221 Sbuffer_substring_no_properties, 2, 2, 0,
9222 doc: /* Return the characters of part of the buffer,
9223 without the text properties.
9224 The two arguments START and END are character positions;
9225 they can be in either order. */)
9226 (start, end)
9227 Lisp_Object start, end;
9228 @{
9229 register int b, e;
9230
9231 validate_region (&start, &end);
9232 b = XINT (start);
9233 e = XINT (end);
9234
9235 return make_buffer_string (b, e, 0);
9236 @}
9237 @end group
9238 @end smallexample
9239
9240 Without going into the details of the macro writing process, let me
9241 point out that this macro starts with the word @code{DEFUN}. The word
9242 @code{DEFUN} was chosen since the code serves the same purpose as
9243 @code{defun} does in Lisp. (The @code{DEFUN} C macro is defined in
9244 @file{emacs/src/lisp.h}.)
9245
9246 The word @code{DEFUN} is followed by seven parts inside of
9247 parentheses:
9248
9249 @itemize @bullet
9250 @item
9251 The first part is the name given to the function in Lisp,
9252 @code{delete-and-extract-region}.
9253
9254 @item
9255 The second part is the name of the function in C,
9256 @code{Fdelete_and_extract_region}. By convention, it starts with
9257 @samp{F}. Since C does not use hyphens in names, underscores are used
9258 instead.
9259
9260 @item
9261 The third part is the name for the C constant structure that records
9262 information on this function for internal use. It is the name of the
9263 function in C but begins with an @samp{S} instead of an @samp{F}.
9264
9265 @item
9266 The fourth and fifth parts specify the minimum and maximum number of
9267 arguments the function can have. This function demands exactly 2
9268 arguments.
9269
9270 @item
9271 The sixth part is nearly like the argument that follows the
9272 @code{interactive} declaration in a function written in Lisp: a letter
9273 followed, perhaps, by a prompt. The only difference from the Lisp is
9274 when the macro is called with no arguments. Then you write a @code{0}
9275 (which is a `null string'), as in this macro.
9276
9277 If you were to specify arguments, you would place them between
9278 quotation marks. The C macro for @code{goto-char} includes
9279 @code{"NGoto char: "} in this position to indicate that the function
9280 expects a raw prefix, in this case, a numerical location in a buffer,
9281 and provides a prompt.
9282
9283 @item
9284 The seventh part is a documentation string, just like the one for a
9285 function written in Emacs Lisp, except that every newline must be
9286 written explicitly as @samp{\n} followed by a backslash and carriage
9287 return.
9288
9289 @need 1000
9290 Thus, the first two lines of documentation for @code{goto-char} are
9291 written like this:
9292
9293 @smallexample
9294 @group
9295 "Set point to POSITION, a number or marker.\n\
9296 Beginning of buffer is position (point-min), end is (point-max)."
9297 @end group
9298 @end smallexample
9299 @end itemize
9300
9301 @need 1200
9302 In a C macro, the formal parameters come next, with a statement of
9303 what kind of object they are, followed by what might be called the `body'
9304 of the macro. For @code{delete-and-extract-region} the `body'
9305 consists of the following four lines:
9306
9307 @smallexample
9308 @group
9309 validate_region (&start, &end);
9310 if (XINT (start) == XINT (end))
9311 return build_string ("");
9312 return del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9313 @end group
9314 @end smallexample
9315
9316 The @code{validate_region} function checks whether the values
9317 passed as the beginning and end of the region are the proper type and
9318 are within range. If the beginning and end positions are the same,
9319 then return and empty string.
9320
9321 The @code{del_range_1} function actually deletes the text. It is a
9322 complex function we will not look into. It updates the buffer and
9323 does other things. However, it is worth looking at the two arguments
9324 passed to @code{del_range}. These are @w{@code{XINT (start)}} and
9325 @w{@code{XINT (end)}}.
9326
9327 As far as the C language is concerned, @code{start} and @code{end} are
9328 two integers that mark the beginning and end of the region to be
9329 deleted@footnote{More precisely, and requiring more expert knowledge
9330 to understand, the two integers are of type `Lisp_Object', which can
9331 also be a C union instead of an integer type.}.
9332
9333 In early versions of Emacs, these two numbers were thirty-two bits
9334 long, but the code is slowly being generalized to handle other
9335 lengths. Three of the available bits are used to specify the type of
9336 information; the remaining bits are used as `content'.
9337
9338 @samp{XINT} is a C macro that extracts the relevant number from the
9339 longer collection of bits; the three other bits are discarded.
9340
9341 @need 800
9342 The command in @code{delete-and-extract-region} looks like this:
9343
9344 @smallexample
9345 del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9346 @end smallexample
9347
9348 @noindent
9349 It deletes the region between the beginning position, @code{start},
9350 and the ending position, @code{end}.
9351
9352 From the point of view of the person writing Lisp, Emacs is all very
9353 simple; but hidden underneath is a great deal of complexity to make it
9354 all work.
9355
9356 @node defvar, cons & search-fwd Review, Digression into C, Cutting & Storing Text
9357 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
9358 @section Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9359 @findex defvar
9360 @cindex Initializing a variable
9361 @cindex Variable initialization
9362
9363 @ignore
9364 2006 Oct 24
9365 In Emacs 22,
9366 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
9367 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
9368 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
9369 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
9370
9371 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9372
9373 @end ignore
9374
9375 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function is written in Emacs Lisp. Two
9376 functions within it, @code{kill-append} and @code{kill-new}, copy a
9377 region in a buffer and save it in a variable called the
9378 @code{kill-ring}. This section describes how the @code{kill-ring}
9379 variable is created and initialized using the @code{defvar} special
9380 form.
9381
9382 (Again we note that the term @code{kill-ring} is a misnomer. The text
9383 that is clipped out of the buffer can be brought back; it is not a ring
9384 of corpses, but a ring of resurrectable text.)
9385
9386 In Emacs Lisp, a variable such as the @code{kill-ring} is created and
9387 given an initial value by using the @code{defvar} special form. The
9388 name comes from ``define variable''.
9389
9390 The @code{defvar} special form is similar to @code{setq} in that it sets
9391 the value of a variable. It is unlike @code{setq} in two ways: first,
9392 it only sets the value of the variable if the variable does not already
9393 have a value. If the variable already has a value, @code{defvar} does
9394 not override the existing value. Second, @code{defvar} has a
9395 documentation string.
9396
9397 (Another special form, @code{defcustom}, is designed for variables
9398 that people customize. It has more features than @code{defvar}.
9399 (@xref{defcustom, , Setting Variables with @code{defcustom}}.)
9400
9401 @menu
9402 * See variable current value::
9403 * defvar and asterisk::
9404 @end menu
9405
9406 @node See variable current value, defvar and asterisk, defvar, defvar
9407 @ifnottex
9408 @unnumberedsubsec Seeing the Current Value of a Variable
9409 @end ifnottex
9410
9411 You can see the current value of a variable, any variable, by using
9412 the @code{describe-variable} function, which is usually invoked by
9413 typing @kbd{C-h v}. If you type @kbd{C-h v} and then @code{kill-ring}
9414 (followed by @key{RET}) when prompted, you will see what is in your
9415 current kill ring---this may be quite a lot! Conversely, if you have
9416 been doing nothing this Emacs session except read this document, you
9417 may have nothing in it. Also, you will see the documentation for
9418 @code{kill-ring}:
9419
9420 @smallexample
9421 @group
9422 Documentation:
9423 List of killed text sequences.
9424 Since the kill ring is supposed to interact nicely with cut-and-paste
9425 facilities offered by window systems, use of this variable should
9426 @end group
9427 @group
9428 interact nicely with `interprogram-cut-function' and
9429 `interprogram-paste-function'. The functions `kill-new',
9430 `kill-append', and `current-kill' are supposed to implement this
9431 interaction; you may want to use them instead of manipulating the kill
9432 ring directly.
9433 @end group
9434 @end smallexample
9435
9436 @need 800
9437 The kill ring is defined by a @code{defvar} in the following way:
9438
9439 @smallexample
9440 @group
9441 (defvar kill-ring nil
9442 "List of killed text sequences.
9443 @dots{}")
9444 @end group
9445 @end smallexample
9446
9447 @noindent
9448 In this variable definition, the variable is given an initial value of
9449 @code{nil}, which makes sense, since if you have saved nothing, you want
9450 nothing back if you give a @code{yank} command. The documentation
9451 string is written just like the documentation string of a @code{defun}.
9452 As with the documentation string of the @code{defun}, the first line of
9453 the documentation should be a complete sentence, since some commands,
9454 like @code{apropos}, print only the first line of documentation.
9455 Succeeding lines should not be indented; otherwise they look odd when
9456 you use @kbd{C-h v} (@code{describe-variable}).
9457
9458 @node defvar and asterisk, , See variable current value, defvar
9459 @subsection @code{defvar} and an asterisk
9460 @findex defvar @r{for a user customizable variable}
9461 @findex defvar @r{with an asterisk}
9462
9463 In the past, Emacs used the @code{defvar} special form both for
9464 internal variables that you would not expect a user to change and for
9465 variables that you do expect a user to change. Although you can still
9466 use @code{defvar} for user customizable variables, please use
9467 @code{defcustom} instead, since that special form provides a path into
9468 the Customization commands. (@xref{defcustom, , Specifying Variables
9469 using @code{defcustom}}.)
9470
9471 When you specified a variable using the @code{defvar} special form,
9472 you could distinguish a variable that a user might want to change from
9473 others by typing an asterisk, @samp{*}, in the first column of its
9474 documentation string. For example:
9475
9476 @smallexample
9477 @group
9478 (defvar shell-command-default-error-buffer nil
9479 "*Buffer name for `shell-command' @dots{} error output.
9480 @dots{} ")
9481 @end group
9482 @end smallexample
9483
9484 @findex set-variable
9485 @noindent
9486 You could (and still can) use the @code{set-variable} command to
9487 change the value of @code{shell-command-default-error-buffer}
9488 temporarily. However, options set using @code{set-variable} are set
9489 only for the duration of your editing session. The new values are not
9490 saved between sessions. Each time Emacs starts, it reads the original
9491 value, unless you change the value within your @file{.emacs} file,
9492 either by setting it manually or by using @code{customize}.
9493 @xref{Emacs Initialization, , Your @file{.emacs} File}.
9494
9495 For me, the major use of the @code{set-variable} command is to suggest
9496 variables that I might want to set in my @file{.emacs} file. There
9497 are now more than 700 such variables --- far too many to remember
9498 readily. Fortunately, you can press @key{TAB} after calling the
9499 @code{M-x set-variable} command to see the list of variables.
9500 (@xref{Examining, , Examining and Setting Variables, emacs,
9501 The GNU Emacs Manual}.)
9502
9503 @need 1250
9504 @node cons & search-fwd Review, search Exercises, defvar, Cutting & Storing Text
9505 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
9506 @section Review
9507
9508 Here is a brief summary of some recently introduced functions.
9509
9510 @table @code
9511 @item car
9512 @itemx cdr
9513 @code{car} returns the first element of a list; @code{cdr} returns the
9514 second and subsequent elements of a list.
9515
9516 @need 1250
9517 For example:
9518
9519 @smallexample
9520 @group
9521 (car '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9522 @result{} 1
9523 (cdr '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9524 @result{} (2 3 4 5 6 7)
9525 @end group
9526 @end smallexample
9527
9528 @item cons
9529 @code{cons} constructs a list by prepending its first argument to its
9530 second argument.
9531
9532 @need 1250
9533 For example:
9534
9535 @smallexample
9536 @group
9537 (cons 1 '(2 3 4))
9538 @result{} (1 2 3 4)
9539 @end group
9540 @end smallexample
9541
9542 @item funcall
9543 @code{funcall} evaluates its first argument as a function. It passes
9544 its remaining arguments to its first argument.
9545
9546 @item nthcdr
9547 Return the result of taking @sc{cdr} `n' times on a list.
9548 @iftex
9549 The
9550 @tex
9551 $n^{th}$
9552 @end tex
9553 @code{cdr}.
9554 @end iftex
9555 The `rest of the rest', as it were.
9556
9557 @need 1250
9558 For example:
9559
9560 @smallexample
9561 @group
9562 (nthcdr 3 '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9563 @result{} (4 5 6 7)
9564 @end group
9565 @end smallexample
9566
9567 @item setcar
9568 @itemx setcdr
9569 @code{setcar} changes the first element of a list; @code{setcdr}
9570 changes the second and subsequent elements of a list.
9571
9572 @need 1250
9573 For example:
9574
9575 @smallexample
9576 @group
9577 (setq triple '(1 2 3))
9578
9579 (setcar triple '37)
9580
9581 triple
9582 @result{} (37 2 3)
9583
9584 (setcdr triple '("foo" "bar"))
9585
9586 triple
9587 @result{} (37 "foo" "bar")
9588 @end group
9589 @end smallexample
9590
9591 @item progn
9592 Evaluate each argument in sequence and then return the value of the
9593 last.
9594
9595 @need 1250
9596 For example:
9597
9598 @smallexample
9599 @group
9600 (progn 1 2 3 4)
9601 @result{} 4
9602 @end group
9603 @end smallexample
9604
9605 @item save-restriction
9606 Record whatever narrowing is in effect in the current buffer, if any,
9607 and restore that narrowing after evaluating the arguments.
9608
9609 @item search-forward
9610 Search for a string, and if the string is found, move point. With a
9611 regular expression, use the similar @code{re-search-forward}.
9612 (@xref{Regexp Search, , Regular Expression Searches}, for an
9613 explanation of regular expression patterns and searches.)
9614
9615 @need 1250
9616 @noindent
9617 @code{search-forward} and @code{re-search-forward} take four
9618 arguments:
9619
9620 @enumerate
9621 @item
9622 The string or regular expression to search for.
9623
9624 @item
9625 Optionally, the limit of the search.
9626
9627 @item
9628 Optionally, what to do if the search fails, return @code{nil} or an
9629 error message.
9630
9631 @item
9632 Optionally, how many times to repeat the search; if negative, the
9633 search goes backwards.
9634 @end enumerate
9635
9636 @item kill-region
9637 @itemx delete-and-extract-region
9638 @itemx copy-region-as-kill
9639
9640 @code{kill-region} cuts the text between point and mark from the
9641 buffer and stores that text in the kill ring, so you can get it back
9642 by yanking.
9643
9644 @code{copy-region-as-kill} copies the text between point and mark into
9645 the kill ring, from which you can get it by yanking. The function
9646 does not cut or remove the text from the buffer.
9647 @end table
9648
9649 @code{delete-and-extract-region} removes the text between point and
9650 mark from the buffer and throws it away. You cannot get it back.
9651 (This is not an interactive command.)
9652
9653 @need 1500
9654 @node search Exercises, , cons & search-fwd Review, Cutting & Storing Text
9655 @section Searching Exercises
9656
9657 @itemize @bullet
9658 @item
9659 Write an interactive function that searches for a string. If the
9660 search finds the string, leave point after it and display a message
9661 that says ``Found!''. (Do not use @code{search-forward} for the name
9662 of this function; if you do, you will overwrite the existing version of
9663 @code{search-forward} that comes with Emacs. Use a name such as
9664 @code{test-search} instead.)
9665
9666 @item
9667 Write a function that prints the third element of the kill ring in the
9668 echo area, if any; if the kill ring does not contain a third element,
9669 print an appropriate message.
9670 @end itemize
9671
9672 @node List Implementation, Yanking, Cutting & Storing Text, Top
9673 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
9674 @chapter How Lists are Implemented
9675 @cindex Lists in a computer
9676
9677 In Lisp, atoms are recorded in a straightforward fashion; if the
9678 implementation is not straightforward in practice, it is, nonetheless,
9679 straightforward in theory. The atom @samp{rose}, for example, is
9680 recorded as the four contiguous letters @samp{r}, @samp{o}, @samp{s},
9681 @samp{e}. A list, on the other hand, is kept differently. The mechanism
9682 is equally simple, but it takes a moment to get used to the idea. A
9683 list is kept using a series of pairs of pointers. In the series, the
9684 first pointer in each pair points to an atom or to another list, and the
9685 second pointer in each pair points to the next pair, or to the symbol
9686 @code{nil}, which marks the end of the list.
9687
9688 A pointer itself is quite simply the electronic address of what is
9689 pointed to. Hence, a list is kept as a series of electronic addresses.
9690
9691 @menu
9692 * Lists diagrammed::
9693 * Symbols as Chest:: Exploring a powerful metaphor.
9694 * List Exercise::
9695 @end menu
9696
9697 @node Lists diagrammed, Symbols as Chest, List Implementation, List Implementation
9698 @ifnottex
9699 @unnumberedsec Lists diagrammed
9700 @end ifnottex
9701
9702 For example, the list @code{(rose violet buttercup)} has three elements,
9703 @samp{rose}, @samp{violet}, and @samp{buttercup}. In the computer, the
9704 electronic address of @samp{rose} is recorded in a segment of computer
9705 memory along with the address that gives the electronic address of where
9706 the atom @samp{violet} is located; and that address (the one that tells
9707 where @samp{violet} is located) is kept along with an address that tells
9708 where the address for the atom @samp{buttercup} is located.
9709
9710 @need 1200
9711 This sounds more complicated than it is and is easier seen in a diagram:
9712
9713 @c clear print-postscript-figures
9714 @c !!! cons-cell-diagram #1
9715 @ifnottex
9716 @smallexample
9717 @group
9718 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9719 |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9720 | | |
9721 | | |
9722 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9723 @end group
9724 @end smallexample
9725 @end ifnottex
9726 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9727 @sp 1
9728 @tex
9729 @center @image{cons-1}
9730 %%%% old method of including an image
9731 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9732 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-1.eps}}
9733 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9734 @end tex
9735 @sp 1
9736 @end ifset
9737 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9738 @iftex
9739 @smallexample
9740 @group
9741 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9742 |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9743 | | |
9744 | | |
9745 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9746 @end group
9747 @end smallexample
9748 @end iftex
9749 @end ifclear
9750
9751 @noindent
9752 In the diagram, each box represents a word of computer memory that
9753 holds a Lisp object, usually in the form of a memory address. The boxes,
9754 i.e.@: the addresses, are in pairs. Each arrow points to what the address
9755 is the address of, either an atom or another pair of addresses. The
9756 first box is the electronic address of @samp{rose} and the arrow points
9757 to @samp{rose}; the second box is the address of the next pair of boxes,
9758 the first part of which is the address of @samp{violet} and the second
9759 part of which is the address of the next pair. The very last box
9760 points to the symbol @code{nil}, which marks the end of the list.
9761
9762 @need 1200
9763 When a variable is set to a list with a function such as @code{setq},
9764 it stores the address of the first box in the variable. Thus,
9765 evaluation of the expression
9766
9767 @smallexample
9768 (setq bouquet '(rose violet buttercup))
9769 @end smallexample
9770
9771 @need 1250
9772 @noindent
9773 creates a situation like this:
9774
9775 @c cons-cell-diagram #2
9776 @ifnottex
9777 @smallexample
9778 @group
9779 bouquet
9780 |
9781 | ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9782 --> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9783 | | |
9784 | | |
9785 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9786 @end group
9787 @end smallexample
9788 @end ifnottex
9789 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9790 @sp 1
9791 @tex
9792 @center @image{cons-2}
9793 %%%% old method of including an image
9794 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9795 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-2.eps}}
9796 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9797 @end tex
9798 @sp 1
9799 @end ifset
9800 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9801 @iftex
9802 @smallexample
9803 @group
9804 bouquet
9805 |
9806 | ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9807 --> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9808 | | |
9809 | | |
9810 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9811 @end group
9812 @end smallexample
9813 @end iftex
9814 @end ifclear
9815
9816 @noindent
9817 In this example, the symbol @code{bouquet} holds the address of the first
9818 pair of boxes.
9819
9820 @need 1200
9821 This same list can be illustrated in a different sort of box notation
9822 like this:
9823
9824 @c cons-cell-diagram #2a
9825 @ifnottex
9826 @smallexample
9827 @group
9828 bouquet
9829 |
9830 | -------------- --------------- ----------------
9831 | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr |
9832 -->| rose | o------->| violet | o------->| butter- | nil |
9833 | | | | | | | cup | |
9834 -------------- --------------- ----------------
9835 @end group
9836 @end smallexample
9837 @end ifnottex
9838 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9839 @sp 1
9840 @tex
9841 @center @image{cons-2a}
9842 %%%% old method of including an image
9843 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9844 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-2a.eps}}
9845 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9846 @end tex
9847 @sp 1
9848 @end ifset
9849 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9850 @iftex
9851 @smallexample
9852 @group
9853 bouquet
9854 |
9855 | -------------- --------------- ----------------
9856 | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr |
9857 -->| rose | o------->| violet | o------->| butter- | nil |
9858 | | | | | | | cup | |
9859 -------------- --------------- ----------------
9860 @end group
9861 @end smallexample
9862 @end iftex
9863 @end ifclear
9864
9865 (Symbols consist of more than pairs of addresses, but the structure of
9866 a symbol is made up of addresses. Indeed, the symbol @code{bouquet}
9867 consists of a group of address-boxes, one of which is the address of
9868 the printed word @samp{bouquet}, a second of which is the address of a
9869 function definition attached to the symbol, if any, a third of which
9870 is the address of the first pair of address-boxes for the list
9871 @code{(rose violet buttercup)}, and so on. Here we are showing that
9872 the symbol's third address-box points to the first pair of
9873 address-boxes for the list.)
9874
9875 If a symbol is set to the @sc{cdr} of a list, the list itself is not
9876 changed; the symbol simply has an address further down the list. (In
9877 the jargon, @sc{car} and @sc{cdr} are `non-destructive'.) Thus,
9878 evaluation of the following expression
9879
9880 @smallexample
9881 (setq flowers (cdr bouquet))
9882 @end smallexample
9883
9884 @need 800
9885 @noindent
9886 produces this:
9887
9888 @c cons-cell-diagram #3
9889 @ifnottex
9890 @sp 1
9891 @smallexample
9892 @group
9893 bouquet flowers
9894 | |
9895 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9896 --> | | | --> | | | | | |
9897 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9898 | | |
9899 | | |
9900 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9901 @end group
9902 @end smallexample
9903 @sp 1
9904 @end ifnottex
9905 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9906 @sp 1
9907 @tex
9908 @center @image{cons-3}
9909 %%%% old method of including an image
9910 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9911 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-3.eps}}
9912 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9913 @end tex
9914 @sp 1
9915 @end ifset
9916 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9917 @iftex
9918 @sp 1
9919 @smallexample
9920 @group
9921 bouquet flowers
9922 | |
9923 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9924 --> | | | --> | | | | | |
9925 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9926 | | |
9927 | | |
9928 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9929 @end group
9930 @end smallexample
9931 @sp 1
9932 @end iftex
9933 @end ifclear
9934
9935 @noindent
9936 The value of @code{flowers} is @code{(violet buttercup)}, which is
9937 to say, the symbol @code{flowers} holds the address of the pair of
9938 address-boxes, the first of which holds the address of @code{violet},
9939 and the second of which holds the address of @code{buttercup}.
9940
9941 A pair of address-boxes is called a @dfn{cons cell} or @dfn{dotted
9942 pair}. @xref{Cons Cell Type, , Cons Cell and List Types, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
9943 Reference Manual}, and @ref{Dotted Pair Notation, , Dotted Pair
9944 Notation, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
9945 information about cons cells and dotted pairs.
9946
9947 @need 1200
9948 The function @code{cons} adds a new pair of addresses to the front of
9949 a series of addresses like that shown above. For example, evaluating
9950 the expression
9951
9952 @smallexample
9953 (setq bouquet (cons 'lily bouquet))
9954 @end smallexample
9955
9956 @need 1500
9957 @noindent
9958 produces:
9959
9960 @c cons-cell-diagram #4
9961 @ifnottex
9962 @sp 1
9963 @smallexample
9964 @group
9965 bouquet flowers
9966 | |
9967 | ___ ___ ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9968 --> | | | | | | --> | | | | | |
9969 |___|___|----> |___|___|----> |___|___|---->|___|___|--> nil
9970 | | | |
9971 | | | |
9972 --> lily --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9973 @end group
9974 @end smallexample
9975 @sp 1
9976 @end ifnottex
9977 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9978 @sp 1
9979 @tex
9980 @center @image{cons-4}
9981 %%%% old method of including an image
9982 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9983 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-4.eps}}
9984 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9985 @end tex
9986 @sp 1
9987 @end ifset
9988 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9989 @iftex
9990 @sp 1
9991 @smallexample
9992 @group
9993 bouquet flowers
9994 | |
9995 | ___ ___ ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9996 --> | | | | | | --> | | | | | |
9997 |___|___|----> |___|___|----> |___|___|---->|___|___|--> nil
9998 | | | |
9999 | | | |
10000 --> lily --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
10001 @end group
10002 @end smallexample
10003 @sp 1
10004 @end iftex
10005 @end ifclear
10006
10007 @need 1200
10008 @noindent
10009 However, this does not change the value of the symbol
10010 @code{flowers}, as you can see by evaluating the following,
10011
10012 @smallexample
10013 (eq (cdr (cdr bouquet)) flowers)
10014 @end smallexample
10015
10016 @noindent
10017 which returns @code{t} for true.
10018
10019 Until it is reset, @code{flowers} still has the value
10020 @code{(violet buttercup)}; that is, it has the address of the cons
10021 cell whose first address is of @code{violet}. Also, this does not
10022 alter any of the pre-existing cons cells; they are all still there.
10023
10024 Thus, in Lisp, to get the @sc{cdr} of a list, you just get the address
10025 of the next cons cell in the series; to get the @sc{car} of a list,
10026 you get the address of the first element of the list; to @code{cons} a
10027 new element on a list, you add a new cons cell to the front of the list.
10028 That is all there is to it! The underlying structure of Lisp is
10029 brilliantly simple!
10030
10031 And what does the last address in a series of cons cells refer to? It
10032 is the address of the empty list, of @code{nil}.
10033
10034 In summary, when a Lisp variable is set to a value, it is provided with
10035 the address of the list to which the variable refers.
10036
10037 @node Symbols as Chest, List Exercise, Lists diagrammed, List Implementation
10038 @section Symbols as a Chest of Drawers
10039 @cindex Symbols as a Chest of Drawers
10040 @cindex Chest of Drawers, metaphor for a symbol
10041 @cindex Drawers, Chest of, metaphor for a symbol
10042
10043 In an earlier section, I suggested that you might imagine a symbol as
10044 being a chest of drawers. The function definition is put in one
10045 drawer, the value in another, and so on. What is put in the drawer
10046 holding the value can be changed without affecting the contents of the
10047 drawer holding the function definition, and vice-verse.
10048
10049 Actually, what is put in each drawer is the address of the value or
10050 function definition. It is as if you found an old chest in the attic,
10051 and in one of its drawers you found a map giving you directions to
10052 where the buried treasure lies.
10053
10054 (In addition to its name, symbol definition, and variable value, a
10055 symbol has a `drawer' for a @dfn{property list} which can be used to
10056 record other information. Property lists are not discussed here; see
10057 @ref{Property Lists, , Property Lists, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
10058 Reference Manual}.)
10059
10060 @need 1500
10061 Here is a fanciful representation:
10062
10063 @c chest-of-drawers diagram
10064 @ifnottex
10065 @sp 1
10066 @smallexample
10067 @group
10068 Chest of Drawers Contents of Drawers
10069
10070 __ o0O0o __
10071 / \
10072 ---------------------
10073 | directions to | [map to]
10074 | symbol name | bouquet
10075 | |
10076 +---------------------+
10077 | directions to |
10078 | symbol definition | [none]
10079 | |
10080 +---------------------+
10081 | directions to | [map to]
10082 | variable value | (rose violet buttercup)
10083 | |
10084 +---------------------+
10085 | directions to |
10086 | property list | [not described here]
10087 | |
10088 +---------------------+
10089 |/ \|
10090 @end group
10091 @end smallexample
10092 @sp 1
10093 @end ifnottex
10094 @ifset print-postscript-figures
10095 @sp 1
10096 @tex
10097 @center @image{drawers}
10098 %%%% old method of including an image
10099 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
10100 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/drawers.eps}}
10101 % \catcode`\@=0 %
10102 @end tex
10103 @sp 1
10104 @end ifset
10105 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
10106 @iftex
10107 @sp 1
10108 @smallexample
10109 @group
10110 Chest of Drawers Contents of Drawers
10111
10112 __ o0O0o __
10113 / \
10114 ---------------------
10115 | directions to | [map to]
10116 | symbol name | bouquet
10117 | |
10118 +---------------------+
10119 | directions to |
10120 | symbol definition | [none]
10121 | |
10122 +---------------------+
10123 | directions to | [map to]
10124 | variable value | (rose violet buttercup)
10125 | |
10126 +---------------------+
10127 | directions to |
10128 | property list | [not described here]
10129 | |
10130 +---------------------+
10131 |/ \|
10132 @end group
10133 @end smallexample
10134 @sp 1
10135 @end iftex
10136 @end ifclear
10137
10138 @node List Exercise, , Symbols as Chest, List Implementation
10139 @section Exercise
10140
10141 Set @code{flowers} to @code{violet} and @code{buttercup}. Cons two
10142 more flowers on to this list and set this new list to
10143 @code{more-flowers}. Set the @sc{car} of @code{flowers} to a fish.
10144 What does the @code{more-flowers} list now contain?
10145
10146 @node Yanking, Loops & Recursion, List Implementation, Top
10147 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10148 @chapter Yanking Text Back
10149 @findex yank
10150 @cindex Text retrieval
10151 @cindex Retrieving text
10152 @cindex Pasting text
10153
10154 Whenever you cut text out of a buffer with a `kill' command in GNU Emacs,
10155 you can bring it back with a `yank' command. The text that is cut out of
10156 the buffer is put in the kill ring and the yank commands insert the
10157 appropriate contents of the kill ring back into a buffer (not necessarily
10158 the original buffer).
10159
10160 A simple @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank}) command inserts the first item from
10161 the kill ring into the current buffer. If the @kbd{C-y} command is
10162 followed immediately by @kbd{M-y}, the first element is replaced by
10163 the second element. Successive @kbd{M-y} commands replace the second
10164 element with the third, fourth, or fifth element, and so on. When the
10165 last element in the kill ring is reached, it is replaced by the first
10166 element and the cycle is repeated. (Thus the kill ring is called a
10167 `ring' rather than just a `list'. However, the actual data structure
10168 that holds the text is a list.
10169 @xref{Kill Ring, , Handling the Kill Ring}, for the details of how the
10170 list is handled as a ring.)
10171
10172 @menu
10173 * Kill Ring Overview::
10174 * kill-ring-yank-pointer:: The kill ring is a list.
10175 * yank nthcdr Exercises:: The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
10176 @end menu
10177
10178 @node Kill Ring Overview, kill-ring-yank-pointer, Yanking, Yanking
10179 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10180 @section Kill Ring Overview
10181 @cindex Kill ring overview
10182
10183 The kill ring is a list of textual strings. This is what it looks like:
10184
10185 @smallexample
10186 ("some text" "a different piece of text" "yet more text")
10187 @end smallexample
10188
10189 If this were the contents of my kill ring and I pressed @kbd{C-y}, the
10190 string of characters saying @samp{some text} would be inserted in this
10191 buffer where my cursor is located.
10192
10193 The @code{yank} command is also used for duplicating text by copying it.
10194 The copied text is not cut from the buffer, but a copy of it is put on the
10195 kill ring and is inserted by yanking it back.
10196
10197 Three functions are used for bringing text back from the kill ring:
10198 @code{yank}, which is usually bound to @kbd{C-y}; @code{yank-pop},
10199 which is usually bound to @kbd{M-y}; and @code{rotate-yank-pointer},
10200 which is used by the two other functions.
10201
10202 These functions refer to the kill ring through a variable called the
10203 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}. Indeed, the insertion code for both the
10204 @code{yank} and @code{yank-pop} functions is:
10205
10206 @smallexample
10207 (insert (car kill-ring-yank-pointer))
10208 @end smallexample
10209
10210 @noindent
10211 (Well, no more. In GNU Emacs 22, the function has been replaced by
10212 @code{insert-for-yank} which calls @code{insert-for-yank-1}
10213 repetitively for each @code{yank-handler} segment. In turn,
10214 @code{insert-for-yank-1} strips text properties from the inserted text
10215 according to @code{yank-excluded-properties}. Otherwise, it is just
10216 like @code{insert}. We will stick with plain @code{insert} since it
10217 is easier to understand.)
10218
10219 To begin to understand how @code{yank} and @code{yank-pop} work, it is
10220 first necessary to look at the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
10221
10222 @node kill-ring-yank-pointer, yank nthcdr Exercises, Kill Ring Overview, Yanking
10223 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10224 @section The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} Variable
10225
10226 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is a variable, just as @code{kill-ring} is
10227 a variable. It points to something by being bound to the value of what
10228 it points to, like any other Lisp variable.
10229
10230 @need 1000
10231 Thus, if the value of the kill ring is:
10232
10233 @smallexample
10234 ("some text" "a different piece of text" "yet more text")
10235 @end smallexample
10236
10237 @need 1250
10238 @noindent
10239 and the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points to the second clause, the
10240 value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is:
10241
10242 @smallexample
10243 ("a different piece of text" "yet more text")
10244 @end smallexample
10245
10246 As explained in the previous chapter (@pxref{List Implementation}), the
10247 computer does not keep two different copies of the text being pointed to
10248 by both the @code{kill-ring} and the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}. The
10249 words ``a different piece of text'' and ``yet more text'' are not
10250 duplicated. Instead, the two Lisp variables point to the same pieces of
10251 text. Here is a diagram:
10252
10253 @c cons-cell-diagram #5
10254 @ifnottex
10255 @smallexample
10256 @group
10257 kill-ring kill-ring-yank-pointer
10258 | |
10259 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
10260 ---> | | | --> | | | | | |
10261 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
10262 | | |
10263 | | |
10264 | | --> "yet more text"
10265 | |
10266 | --> "a different piece of text"
10267 |
10268 --> "some text"
10269 @end group
10270 @end smallexample
10271 @sp 1
10272 @end ifnottex
10273 @ifset print-postscript-figures
10274 @sp 1
10275 @tex
10276 @center @image{cons-5}
10277 %%%% old method of including an image
10278 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
10279 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-5.eps}}
10280 % \catcode`\@=0 %
10281 @end tex
10282 @sp 1
10283 @end ifset
10284 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
10285 @iftex
10286 @smallexample
10287 @group
10288 kill-ring kill-ring-yank-pointer
10289 | |
10290 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
10291 ---> | | | --> | | | | | |
10292 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
10293 | | |
10294 | | |
10295 | | --> "yet more text"
10296 | |
10297 | --> "a different piece of text
10298 |
10299 --> "some text"
10300 @end group
10301 @end smallexample
10302 @sp 1
10303 @end iftex
10304 @end ifclear
10305
10306 Both the variable @code{kill-ring} and the variable
10307 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} are pointers. But the kill ring itself is
10308 usually described as if it were actually what it is composed of. The
10309 @code{kill-ring} is spoken of as if it were the list rather than that it
10310 points to the list. Conversely, the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is
10311 spoken of as pointing to a list.
10312
10313 These two ways of talking about the same thing sound confusing at first but
10314 make sense on reflection. The kill ring is generally thought of as the
10315 complete structure of data that holds the information of what has recently
10316 been cut out of the Emacs buffers. The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}
10317 on the other hand, serves to indicate---that is, to `point to'---that part
10318 of the kill ring of which the first element (the @sc{car}) will be
10319 inserted.
10320
10321 @ignore
10322 In GNU Emacs 22, the @code{kill-new} function calls
10323
10324 @code{(setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)}
10325
10326 (defun rotate-yank-pointer (arg)
10327 "Rotate the yanking point in the kill ring.
10328 With argument, rotate that many kills forward (or backward, if negative)."
10329 (interactive "p")
10330 (current-kill arg))
10331
10332 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
10333 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill.
10334 If N is zero, `interprogram-paste-function' is set, and calling it
10335 returns a string, then that string is added to the front of the
10336 kill ring and returned as the latest kill.
10337 If optional arg DO-NOT-MOVE is non-nil, then don't actually move the
10338 yanking point; just return the Nth kill forward."
10339 (let ((interprogram-paste (and (= n 0)
10340 interprogram-paste-function
10341 (funcall interprogram-paste-function))))
10342 (if interprogram-paste
10343 (progn
10344 ;; Disable the interprogram cut function when we add the new
10345 ;; text to the kill ring, so Emacs doesn't try to own the
10346 ;; selection, with identical text.
10347 (let ((interprogram-cut-function nil))
10348 (kill-new interprogram-paste))
10349 interprogram-paste)
10350 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
10351 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
10352 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
10353 (length kill-ring))
10354 kill-ring)))
10355 (or do-not-move
10356 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
10357 (car ARGth-kill-element)))))
10358
10359 @end ignore
10360
10361 @need 1500
10362 @node yank nthcdr Exercises, , kill-ring-yank-pointer, Yanking
10363 @section Exercises with @code{yank} and @code{nthcdr}
10364
10365 @itemize @bullet
10366 @item
10367 Using @kbd{C-h v} (@code{describe-variable}), look at the value of
10368 your kill ring. Add several items to your kill ring; look at its
10369 value again. Using @kbd{M-y} (@code{yank-pop)}, move all the way
10370 around the kill ring. How many items were in your kill ring? Find
10371 the value of @code{kill-ring-max}. Was your kill ring full, or could
10372 you have kept more blocks of text within it?
10373
10374 @item
10375 Using @code{nthcdr} and @code{car}, construct a series of expressions
10376 to return the first, second, third, and fourth elements of a list.
10377 @end itemize
10378
10379 @node Loops & Recursion, Regexp Search, Yanking, Top
10380 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10381 @chapter Loops and Recursion
10382 @cindex Loops and recursion
10383 @cindex Recursion and loops
10384 @cindex Repetition (loops)
10385
10386 Emacs Lisp has two primary ways to cause an expression, or a series of
10387 expressions, to be evaluated repeatedly: one uses a @code{while}
10388 loop, and the other uses @dfn{recursion}.
10389
10390 Repetition can be very valuable. For example, to move forward four
10391 sentences, you need only write a program that will move forward one
10392 sentence and then repeat the process four times. Since a computer does
10393 not get bored or tired, such repetitive action does not have the
10394 deleterious effects that excessive or the wrong kinds of repetition can
10395 have on humans.
10396
10397 People mostly write Emacs Lisp functions using @code{while} loops and
10398 their kin; but you can use recursion, which provides a very powerful
10399 way to think about and then to solve problems@footnote{You can write
10400 recursive functions to be frugal or wasteful of mental or computer
10401 resources; as it happens, methods that people find easy---that are
10402 frugal of `mental resources'---sometimes use considerable computer
10403 resources. Emacs was designed to run on machines that we now consider
10404 limited and its default settings are conservative. You may want to
10405 increase the values of @code{max-specpdl-size} and
10406 @code{max-lisp-eval-depth}. In my @file{.emacs} file, I set them to
10407 15 and 30 times their default value.}.
10408
10409 @menu
10410 * while:: Causing a stretch of code to repeat.
10411 * dolist dotimes::
10412 * Recursion:: Causing a function to call itself.
10413 * Looping exercise::
10414 @end menu
10415
10416 @node while, dolist dotimes, Loops & Recursion, Loops & Recursion
10417 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10418 @section @code{while}
10419 @cindex Loops
10420 @findex while
10421
10422 The @code{while} special form tests whether the value returned by
10423 evaluating its first argument is true or false. This is similar to what
10424 the Lisp interpreter does with an @code{if}; what the interpreter does
10425 next, however, is different.
10426
10427 In a @code{while} expression, if the value returned by evaluating the
10428 first argument is false, the Lisp interpreter skips the rest of the
10429 expression (the @dfn{body} of the expression) and does not evaluate it.
10430 However, if the value is true, the Lisp interpreter evaluates the body
10431 of the expression and then again tests whether the first argument to
10432 @code{while} is true or false. If the value returned by evaluating the
10433 first argument is again true, the Lisp interpreter again evaluates the
10434 body of the expression.
10435
10436 @need 1200
10437 The template for a @code{while} expression looks like this:
10438
10439 @smallexample
10440 @group
10441 (while @var{true-or-false-test}
10442 @var{body}@dots{})
10443 @end group
10444 @end smallexample
10445
10446 @menu
10447 * Looping with while:: Repeat so long as test returns true.
10448 * Loop Example:: A @code{while} loop that uses a list.
10449 * print-elements-of-list:: Uses @code{while}, @code{car}, @code{cdr}.
10450 * Incrementing Loop:: A loop with an incrementing counter.
10451 * Incrementing Loop Details::
10452 * Decrementing Loop:: A loop with a decrementing counter.
10453 @end menu
10454
10455 @node Looping with while, Loop Example, while, while
10456 @ifnottex
10457 @unnumberedsubsec Looping with @code{while}
10458 @end ifnottex
10459
10460 So long as the true-or-false-test of the @code{while} expression
10461 returns a true value when it is evaluated, the body is repeatedly
10462 evaluated. This process is called a loop since the Lisp interpreter
10463 repeats the same thing again and again, like an airplane doing a loop.
10464 When the result of evaluating the true-or-false-test is false, the
10465 Lisp interpreter does not evaluate the rest of the @code{while}
10466 expression and `exits the loop'.
10467
10468 Clearly, if the value returned by evaluating the first argument to
10469 @code{while} is always true, the body following will be evaluated
10470 again and again @dots{} and again @dots{} forever. Conversely, if the
10471 value returned is never true, the expressions in the body will never
10472 be evaluated. The craft of writing a @code{while} loop consists of
10473 choosing a mechanism such that the true-or-false-test returns true
10474 just the number of times that you want the subsequent expressions to
10475 be evaluated, and then have the test return false.
10476
10477 The value returned by evaluating a @code{while} is the value of the
10478 true-or-false-test. An interesting consequence of this is that a
10479 @code{while} loop that evaluates without error will return @code{nil}
10480 or false regardless of whether it has looped 1 or 100 times or none at
10481 all. A @code{while} expression that evaluates successfully never
10482 returns a true value! What this means is that @code{while} is always
10483 evaluated for its side effects, which is to say, the consequences of
10484 evaluating the expressions within the body of the @code{while} loop.
10485 This makes sense. It is not the mere act of looping that is desired,
10486 but the consequences of what happens when the expressions in the loop
10487 are repeatedly evaluated.
10488
10489 @node Loop Example, print-elements-of-list, Looping with while, while
10490 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10491 @subsection A @code{while} Loop and a List
10492
10493 A common way to control a @code{while} loop is to test whether a list
10494 has any elements. If it does, the loop is repeated; but if it does not,
10495 the repetition is ended. Since this is an important technique, we will
10496 create a short example to illustrate it.
10497
10498 A simple way to test whether a list has elements is to evaluate the
10499 list: if it has no elements, it is an empty list and will return the
10500 empty list, @code{()}, which is a synonym for @code{nil} or false. On
10501 the other hand, a list with elements will return those elements when it
10502 is evaluated. Since Emacs Lisp considers as true any value that is not
10503 @code{nil}, a list that returns elements will test true in a
10504 @code{while} loop.
10505
10506 @need 1200
10507 For example, you can set the variable @code{empty-list} to @code{nil} by
10508 evaluating the following @code{setq} expression:
10509
10510 @smallexample
10511 (setq empty-list ())
10512 @end smallexample
10513
10514 @noindent
10515 After evaluating the @code{setq} expression, you can evaluate the
10516 variable @code{empty-list} in the usual way, by placing the cursor after
10517 the symbol and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}; @code{nil} will appear in your
10518 echo area:
10519
10520 @smallexample
10521 empty-list
10522 @end smallexample
10523
10524 On the other hand, if you set a variable to be a list with elements, the
10525 list will appear when you evaluate the variable, as you can see by
10526 evaluating the following two expressions:
10527
10528 @smallexample
10529 @group
10530 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10531
10532 animals
10533 @end group
10534 @end smallexample
10535
10536 Thus, to create a @code{while} loop that tests whether there are any
10537 items in the list @code{animals}, the first part of the loop will be
10538 written like this:
10539
10540 @smallexample
10541 @group
10542 (while animals
10543 @dots{}
10544 @end group
10545 @end smallexample
10546
10547 @noindent
10548 When the @code{while} tests its first argument, the variable
10549 @code{animals} is evaluated. It returns a list. So long as the list
10550 has elements, the @code{while} considers the results of the test to be
10551 true; but when the list is empty, it considers the results of the test
10552 to be false.
10553
10554 To prevent the @code{while} loop from running forever, some mechanism
10555 needs to be provided to empty the list eventually. An oft-used
10556 technique is to have one of the subsequent forms in the @code{while}
10557 expression set the value of the list to be the @sc{cdr} of the list.
10558 Each time the @code{cdr} function is evaluated, the list will be made
10559 shorter, until eventually only the empty list will be left. At this
10560 point, the test of the @code{while} loop will return false, and the
10561 arguments to the @code{while} will no longer be evaluated.
10562
10563 For example, the list of animals bound to the variable @code{animals}
10564 can be set to be the @sc{cdr} of the original list with the
10565 following expression:
10566
10567 @smallexample
10568 (setq animals (cdr animals))
10569 @end smallexample
10570
10571 @noindent
10572 If you have evaluated the previous expressions and then evaluate this
10573 expression, you will see @code{(giraffe lion tiger)} appear in the echo
10574 area. If you evaluate the expression again, @code{(lion tiger)} will
10575 appear in the echo area. If you evaluate it again and yet again,
10576 @code{(tiger)} appears and then the empty list, shown by @code{nil}.
10577
10578 A template for a @code{while} loop that uses the @code{cdr} function
10579 repeatedly to cause the true-or-false-test eventually to test false
10580 looks like this:
10581
10582 @smallexample
10583 @group
10584 (while @var{test-whether-list-is-empty}
10585 @var{body}@dots{}
10586 @var{set-list-to-cdr-of-list})
10587 @end group
10588 @end smallexample
10589
10590 This test and use of @code{cdr} can be put together in a function that
10591 goes through a list and prints each element of the list on a line of its
10592 own.
10593
10594 @node print-elements-of-list, Incrementing Loop, Loop Example, while
10595 @subsection An Example: @code{print-elements-of-list}
10596 @findex print-elements-of-list
10597
10598 The @code{print-elements-of-list} function illustrates a @code{while}
10599 loop with a list.
10600
10601 @cindex @file{*scratch*} buffer
10602 The function requires several lines for its output. If you are
10603 reading this in a recent instance of GNU Emacs,
10604 @c GNU Emacs 21, GNU Emacs 22, or a later version,
10605 you can evaluate the following expression inside of Info, as usual.
10606
10607 If you are using an earlier version of Emacs, you need to copy the
10608 necessary expressions to your @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate
10609 them there. This is because the echo area had only one line in the
10610 earlier versions.
10611
10612 You can copy the expressions by marking the beginning of the region
10613 with @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} (@code{set-mark-command}), moving the cursor to
10614 the end of the region and then copying the region using @kbd{M-w}
10615 (@code{kill-ring-save}, which calls @code{copy-region-as-kill} and
10616 then provides visual feedback). In the @file{*scratch*}
10617 buffer, you can yank the expressions back by typing @kbd{C-y}
10618 (@code{yank}).
10619
10620 After you have copied the expressions to the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
10621 evaluate each expression in turn. Be sure to evaluate the last
10622 expression, @code{(print-elements-of-list animals)}, by typing
10623 @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}, that is, by giving an argument to
10624 @code{eval-last-sexp}. This will cause the result of the evaluation
10625 to be printed in the @file{*scratch*} buffer instead of being printed
10626 in the echo area. (Otherwise you will see something like this in your
10627 echo area: @code{^Jgazelle^J^Jgiraffe^J^Jlion^J^Jtiger^Jnil}, in which
10628 each @samp{^J} stands for a `newline'.)
10629
10630 @need 1500
10631 In a recent instance of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate these expressions
10632 directly in the Info buffer, and the echo area will grow to show the
10633 results.
10634
10635 @smallexample
10636 @group
10637 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10638
10639 (defun print-elements-of-list (list)
10640 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own."
10641 (while list
10642 (print (car list))
10643 (setq list (cdr list))))
10644
10645 (print-elements-of-list animals)
10646 @end group
10647 @end smallexample
10648
10649 @need 1200
10650 @noindent
10651 When you evaluate the three expressions in sequence, you will see
10652 this:
10653
10654 @smallexample
10655 @group
10656 gazelle
10657
10658 giraffe
10659
10660 lion
10661
10662 tiger
10663 nil
10664 @end group
10665 @end smallexample
10666
10667 Each element of the list is printed on a line of its own (that is what
10668 the function @code{print} does) and then the value returned by the
10669 function is printed. Since the last expression in the function is the
10670 @code{while} loop, and since @code{while} loops always return
10671 @code{nil}, a @code{nil} is printed after the last element of the list.
10672
10673 @node Incrementing Loop, Incrementing Loop Details, print-elements-of-list, while
10674 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10675 @subsection A Loop with an Incrementing Counter
10676
10677 A loop is not useful unless it stops when it ought. Besides
10678 controlling a loop with a list, a common way of stopping a loop is to
10679 write the first argument as a test that returns false when the correct
10680 number of repetitions are complete. This means that the loop must
10681 have a counter---an expression that counts how many times the loop
10682 repeats itself.
10683
10684 @node Incrementing Loop Details, Decrementing Loop, Incrementing Loop, while
10685 @ifnottex
10686 @unnumberedsubsec Details of an Incrementing Loop
10687 @end ifnottex
10688
10689 The test for a loop with an incrementing counter can be an expression
10690 such as @code{(< count desired-number)} which returns @code{t} for
10691 true if the value of @code{count} is less than the
10692 @code{desired-number} of repetitions and @code{nil} for false if the
10693 value of @code{count} is equal to or is greater than the
10694 @code{desired-number}. The expression that increments the count can
10695 be a simple @code{setq} such as @code{(setq count (1+ count))}, where
10696 @code{1+} is a built-in function in Emacs Lisp that adds 1 to its
10697 argument. (The expression @w{@code{(1+ count)}} has the same result
10698 as @w{@code{(+ count 1)}}, but is easier for a human to read.)
10699
10700 @need 1250
10701 The template for a @code{while} loop controlled by an incrementing
10702 counter looks like this:
10703
10704 @smallexample
10705 @group
10706 @var{set-count-to-initial-value}
10707 (while (< count desired-number) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10708 @var{body}@dots{}
10709 (setq count (1+ count))) ; @r{incrementer}
10710 @end group
10711 @end smallexample
10712
10713 @noindent
10714 Note that you need to set the initial value of @code{count}; usually it
10715 is set to 1.
10716
10717 @menu
10718 * Incrementing Example:: Counting pebbles in a triangle.
10719 * Inc Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
10720 * Inc Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
10721 @end menu
10722
10723 @node Incrementing Example, Inc Example parts, Incrementing Loop Details, Incrementing Loop Details
10724 @unnumberedsubsubsec Example with incrementing counter
10725
10726 Suppose you are playing on the beach and decide to make a triangle of
10727 pebbles, putting one pebble in the first row, two in the second row,
10728 three in the third row and so on, like this:
10729
10730 @sp 1
10731 @c pebble diagram
10732 @ifnottex
10733 @smallexample
10734 @group
10735 *
10736 * *
10737 * * *
10738 * * * *
10739 @end group
10740 @end smallexample
10741 @end ifnottex
10742 @iftex
10743 @smallexample
10744 @group
10745 @bullet{}
10746 @bullet{} @bullet{}
10747 @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{}
10748 @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{}
10749 @end group
10750 @end smallexample
10751 @end iftex
10752 @sp 1
10753
10754 @noindent
10755 (About 2500 years ago, Pythagoras and others developed the beginnings of
10756 number theory by considering questions such as this.)
10757
10758 Suppose you want to know how many pebbles you will need to make a
10759 triangle with 7 rows?
10760
10761 Clearly, what you need to do is add up the numbers from 1 to 7. There
10762 are two ways to do this; start with the smallest number, one, and add up
10763 the list in sequence, 1, 2, 3, 4 and so on; or start with the largest
10764 number and add the list going down: 7, 6, 5, 4 and so on. Because both
10765 mechanisms illustrate common ways of writing @code{while} loops, we will
10766 create two examples, one counting up and the other counting down. In
10767 this first example, we will start with 1 and add 2, 3, 4 and so on.
10768
10769 If you are just adding up a short list of numbers, the easiest way to do
10770 it is to add up all the numbers at once. However, if you do not know
10771 ahead of time how many numbers your list will have, or if you want to be
10772 prepared for a very long list, then you need to design your addition so
10773 that what you do is repeat a simple process many times instead of doing
10774 a more complex process once.
10775
10776 For example, instead of adding up all the pebbles all at once, what you
10777 can do is add the number of pebbles in the first row, 1, to the number
10778 in the second row, 2, and then add the total of those two rows to the
10779 third row, 3. Then you can add the number in the fourth row, 4, to the
10780 total of the first three rows; and so on.
10781
10782 The critical characteristic of the process is that each repetitive
10783 action is simple. In this case, at each step we add only two numbers,
10784 the number of pebbles in the row and the total already found. This
10785 process of adding two numbers is repeated again and again until the last
10786 row has been added to the total of all the preceding rows. In a more
10787 complex loop the repetitive action might not be so simple, but it will
10788 be simpler than doing everything all at once.
10789
10790 @node Inc Example parts, Inc Example altogether, Incrementing Example, Incrementing Loop Details
10791 @unnumberedsubsubsec The parts of the function definition
10792
10793 The preceding analysis gives us the bones of our function definition:
10794 first, we will need a variable that we can call @code{total} that will
10795 be the total number of pebbles. This will be the value returned by
10796 the function.
10797
10798 Second, we know that the function will require an argument: this
10799 argument will be the total number of rows in the triangle. It can be
10800 called @code{number-of-rows}.
10801
10802 Finally, we need a variable to use as a counter. We could call this
10803 variable @code{counter}, but a better name is @code{row-number}. That
10804 is because what the counter does in this function is count rows, and a
10805 program should be written to be as understandable as possible.
10806
10807 When the Lisp interpreter first starts evaluating the expressions in the
10808 function, the value of @code{total} should be set to zero, since we have
10809 not added anything to it. Then the function should add the number of
10810 pebbles in the first row to the total, and then add the number of
10811 pebbles in the second to the total, and then add the number of
10812 pebbles in the third row to the total, and so on, until there are no
10813 more rows left to add.
10814
10815 Both @code{total} and @code{row-number} are used only inside the
10816 function, so they can be declared as local variables with @code{let}
10817 and given initial values. Clearly, the initial value for @code{total}
10818 should be 0. The initial value of @code{row-number} should be 1,
10819 since we start with the first row. This means that the @code{let}
10820 statement will look like this:
10821
10822 @smallexample
10823 @group
10824 (let ((total 0)
10825 (row-number 1))
10826 @var{body}@dots{})
10827 @end group
10828 @end smallexample
10829
10830 After the internal variables are declared and bound to their initial
10831 values, we can begin the @code{while} loop. The expression that serves
10832 as the test should return a value of @code{t} for true so long as the
10833 @code{row-number} is less than or equal to the @code{number-of-rows}.
10834 (If the expression tests true only so long as the row number is less
10835 than the number of rows in the triangle, the last row will never be
10836 added to the total; hence the row number has to be either less than or
10837 equal to the number of rows.)
10838
10839 @need 1500
10840 @findex <= @r{(less than or equal)}
10841 Lisp provides the @code{<=} function that returns true if the value of
10842 its first argument is less than or equal to the value of its second
10843 argument and false otherwise. So the expression that the @code{while}
10844 will evaluate as its test should look like this:
10845
10846 @smallexample
10847 (<= row-number number-of-rows)
10848 @end smallexample
10849
10850 The total number of pebbles can be found by repeatedly adding the number
10851 of pebbles in a row to the total already found. Since the number of
10852 pebbles in the row is equal to the row number, the total can be found by
10853 adding the row number to the total. (Clearly, in a more complex
10854 situation, the number of pebbles in the row might be related to the row
10855 number in a more complicated way; if this were the case, the row number
10856 would be replaced by the appropriate expression.)
10857
10858 @smallexample
10859 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10860 @end smallexample
10861
10862 @noindent
10863 What this does is set the new value of @code{total} to be equal to the
10864 sum of adding the number of pebbles in the row to the previous total.
10865
10866 After setting the value of @code{total}, the conditions need to be
10867 established for the next repetition of the loop, if there is one. This
10868 is done by incrementing the value of the @code{row-number} variable,
10869 which serves as a counter. After the @code{row-number} variable has
10870 been incremented, the true-or-false-test at the beginning of the
10871 @code{while} loop tests whether its value is still less than or equal to
10872 the value of the @code{number-of-rows} and if it is, adds the new value
10873 of the @code{row-number} variable to the @code{total} of the previous
10874 repetition of the loop.
10875
10876 @need 1200
10877 The built-in Emacs Lisp function @code{1+} adds 1 to a number, so the
10878 @code{row-number} variable can be incremented with this expression:
10879
10880 @smallexample
10881 (setq row-number (1+ row-number))
10882 @end smallexample
10883
10884 @node Inc Example altogether, , Inc Example parts, Incrementing Loop Details
10885 @unnumberedsubsubsec Putting the function definition together
10886
10887 We have created the parts for the function definition; now we need to
10888 put them together.
10889
10890 @need 800
10891 First, the contents of the @code{while} expression:
10892
10893 @smallexample
10894 @group
10895 (while (<= row-number number-of-rows) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10896 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10897 (setq row-number (1+ row-number))) ; @r{incrementer}
10898 @end group
10899 @end smallexample
10900
10901 Along with the @code{let} expression varlist, this very nearly
10902 completes the body of the function definition. However, it requires
10903 one final element, the need for which is somewhat subtle.
10904
10905 The final touch is to place the variable @code{total} on a line by
10906 itself after the @code{while} expression. Otherwise, the value returned
10907 by the whole function is the value of the last expression that is
10908 evaluated in the body of the @code{let}, and this is the value
10909 returned by the @code{while}, which is always @code{nil}.
10910
10911 This may not be evident at first sight. It almost looks as if the
10912 incrementing expression is the last expression of the whole function.
10913 But that expression is part of the body of the @code{while}; it is the
10914 last element of the list that starts with the symbol @code{while}.
10915 Moreover, the whole of the @code{while} loop is a list within the body
10916 of the @code{let}.
10917
10918 @need 1250
10919 In outline, the function will look like this:
10920
10921 @smallexample
10922 @group
10923 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
10924 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
10925 (let (@var{varlist})
10926 (while (@var{true-or-false-test})
10927 @var{body-of-while}@dots{} )
10928 @dots{} )) ; @r{Need final expression here.}
10929 @end group
10930 @end smallexample
10931
10932 The result of evaluating the @code{let} is what is going to be returned
10933 by the @code{defun} since the @code{let} is not embedded within any
10934 containing list, except for the @code{defun} as a whole. However, if
10935 the @code{while} is the last element of the @code{let} expression, the
10936 function will always return @code{nil}. This is not what we want!
10937 Instead, what we want is the value of the variable @code{total}. This
10938 is returned by simply placing the symbol as the last element of the list
10939 starting with @code{let}. It gets evaluated after the preceding
10940 elements of the list are evaluated, which means it gets evaluated after
10941 it has been assigned the correct value for the total.
10942
10943 It may be easier to see this by printing the list starting with
10944 @code{let} all on one line. This format makes it evident that the
10945 @var{varlist} and @code{while} expressions are the second and third
10946 elements of the list starting with @code{let}, and the @code{total} is
10947 the last element:
10948
10949 @smallexample
10950 @group
10951 (let (@var{varlist}) (while (@var{true-or-false-test}) @var{body-of-while}@dots{} ) total)
10952 @end group
10953 @end smallexample
10954
10955 @need 1200
10956 Putting everything together, the @code{triangle} function definition
10957 looks like this:
10958
10959 @smallexample
10960 @group
10961 (defun triangle (number-of-rows) ; @r{Version with}
10962 ; @r{ incrementing counter.}
10963 "Add up the number of pebbles in a triangle.
10964 The first row has one pebble, the second row two pebbles,
10965 the third row three pebbles, and so on.
10966 The argument is NUMBER-OF-ROWS."
10967 @end group
10968 @group
10969 (let ((total 0)
10970 (row-number 1))
10971 (while (<= row-number number-of-rows)
10972 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10973 (setq row-number (1+ row-number)))
10974 total))
10975 @end group
10976 @end smallexample
10977
10978 @need 1200
10979 After you have installed @code{triangle} by evaluating the function, you
10980 can try it out. Here are two examples:
10981
10982 @smallexample
10983 @group
10984 (triangle 4)
10985
10986 (triangle 7)
10987 @end group
10988 @end smallexample
10989
10990 @noindent
10991 The sum of the first four numbers is 10 and the sum of the first seven
10992 numbers is 28.
10993
10994 @node Decrementing Loop, , Incrementing Loop Details, while
10995 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10996 @subsection Loop with a Decrementing Counter
10997
10998 Another common way to write a @code{while} loop is to write the test
10999 so that it determines whether a counter is greater than zero. So long
11000 as the counter is greater than zero, the loop is repeated. But when
11001 the counter is equal to or less than zero, the loop is stopped. For
11002 this to work, the counter has to start out greater than zero and then
11003 be made smaller and smaller by a form that is evaluated
11004 repeatedly.
11005
11006 The test will be an expression such as @code{(> counter 0)} which
11007 returns @code{t} for true if the value of @code{counter} is greater
11008 than zero, and @code{nil} for false if the value of @code{counter} is
11009 equal to or less than zero. The expression that makes the number
11010 smaller and smaller can be a simple @code{setq} such as @code{(setq
11011 counter (1- counter))}, where @code{1-} is a built-in function in
11012 Emacs Lisp that subtracts 1 from its argument.
11013
11014 @need 1250
11015 The template for a decrementing @code{while} loop looks like this:
11016
11017 @smallexample
11018 @group
11019 (while (> counter 0) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
11020 @var{body}@dots{}
11021 (setq counter (1- counter))) ; @r{decrementer}
11022 @end group
11023 @end smallexample
11024
11025 @menu
11026 * Decrementing Example:: More pebbles on the beach.
11027 * Dec Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
11028 * Dec Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
11029 @end menu
11030
11031 @node Decrementing Example, Dec Example parts, Decrementing Loop, Decrementing Loop
11032 @unnumberedsubsubsec Example with decrementing counter
11033
11034 To illustrate a loop with a decrementing counter, we will rewrite the
11035 @code{triangle} function so the counter decreases to zero.
11036
11037 This is the reverse of the earlier version of the function. In this
11038 case, to find out how many pebbles are needed to make a triangle with
11039 3 rows, add the number of pebbles in the third row, 3, to the number
11040 in the preceding row, 2, and then add the total of those two rows to
11041 the row that precedes them, which is 1.
11042
11043 Likewise, to find the number of pebbles in a triangle with 7 rows, add
11044 the number of pebbles in the seventh row, 7, to the number in the
11045 preceding row, which is 6, and then add the total of those two rows to
11046 the row that precedes them, which is 5, and so on. As in the previous
11047 example, each addition only involves adding two numbers, the total of
11048 the rows already added up and the number of pebbles in the row that is
11049 being added to the total. This process of adding two numbers is
11050 repeated again and again until there are no more pebbles to add.
11051
11052 We know how many pebbles to start with: the number of pebbles in the
11053 last row is equal to the number of rows. If the triangle has seven
11054 rows, the number of pebbles in the last row is 7. Likewise, we know how
11055 many pebbles are in the preceding row: it is one less than the number in
11056 the row.
11057
11058 @node Dec Example parts, Dec Example altogether, Decrementing Example, Decrementing Loop
11059 @unnumberedsubsubsec The parts of the function definition
11060
11061 We start with three variables: the total number of rows in the
11062 triangle; the number of pebbles in a row; and the total number of
11063 pebbles, which is what we want to calculate. These variables can be
11064 named @code{number-of-rows}, @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row}, and
11065 @code{total}, respectively.
11066
11067 Both @code{total} and @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} are used only
11068 inside the function and are declared with @code{let}. The initial
11069 value of @code{total} should, of course, be zero. However, the
11070 initial value of @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} should be equal to
11071 the number of rows in the triangle, since the addition will start with
11072 the longest row.
11073
11074 @need 1250
11075 This means that the beginning of the @code{let} expression will look
11076 like this:
11077
11078 @smallexample
11079 @group
11080 (let ((total 0)
11081 (number-of-pebbles-in-row number-of-rows))
11082 @var{body}@dots{})
11083 @end group
11084 @end smallexample
11085
11086 The total number of pebbles can be found by repeatedly adding the number
11087 of pebbles in a row to the total already found, that is, by repeatedly
11088 evaluating the following expression:
11089
11090 @smallexample
11091 (setq total (+ total number-of-pebbles-in-row))
11092 @end smallexample
11093
11094 @noindent
11095 After the @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} is added to the @code{total},
11096 the @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} should be decremented by one, since
11097 the next time the loop repeats, the preceding row will be
11098 added to the total.
11099
11100 The number of pebbles in a preceding row is one less than the number of
11101 pebbles in a row, so the built-in Emacs Lisp function @code{1-} can be
11102 used to compute the number of pebbles in the preceding row. This can be
11103 done with the following expression:
11104
11105 @smallexample
11106 @group
11107 (setq number-of-pebbles-in-row
11108 (1- number-of-pebbles-in-row))
11109 @end group
11110 @end smallexample
11111
11112 Finally, we know that the @code{while} loop should stop making repeated
11113 additions when there are no pebbles in a row. So the test for
11114 the @code{while} loop is simply:
11115
11116 @smallexample
11117 (while (> number-of-pebbles-in-row 0)
11118 @end smallexample
11119
11120 @node Dec Example altogether, , Dec Example parts, Decrementing Loop
11121 @unnumberedsubsubsec Putting the function definition together
11122
11123 We can put these expressions together to create a function definition
11124 that works. However, on examination, we find that one of the local
11125 variables is unneeded!
11126
11127 @need 1250
11128 The function definition looks like this:
11129
11130 @smallexample
11131 @group
11132 ;;; @r{First subtractive version.}
11133 (defun triangle (number-of-rows)
11134 "Add up the number of pebbles in a triangle."
11135 (let ((total 0)
11136 (number-of-pebbles-in-row number-of-rows))
11137 (while (> number-of-pebbles-in-row 0)
11138 (setq total (+ total number-of-pebbles-in-row))
11139 (setq number-of-pebbles-in-row
11140 (1- number-of-pebbles-in-row)))
11141 total))
11142 @end group
11143 @end smallexample
11144
11145 As written, this function works.
11146
11147 However, we do not need @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row}.
11148
11149 @cindex Argument as local variable
11150 When the @code{triangle} function is evaluated, the symbol
11151 @code{number-of-rows} will be bound to a number, giving it an initial
11152 value. That number can be changed in the body of the function as if
11153 it were a local variable, without any fear that such a change will
11154 effect the value of the variable outside of the function. This is a
11155 very useful characteristic of Lisp; it means that the variable
11156 @code{number-of-rows} can be used anywhere in the function where
11157 @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} is used.
11158
11159 @need 800
11160 Here is a second version of the function written a bit more cleanly:
11161
11162 @smallexample
11163 @group
11164 (defun triangle (number) ; @r{Second version.}
11165 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
11166 (let ((total 0))
11167 (while (> number 0)
11168 (setq total (+ total number))
11169 (setq number (1- number)))
11170 total))
11171 @end group
11172 @end smallexample
11173
11174 In brief, a properly written @code{while} loop will consist of three parts:
11175
11176 @enumerate
11177 @item
11178 A test that will return false after the loop has repeated itself the
11179 correct number of times.
11180
11181 @item
11182 An expression the evaluation of which will return the value desired
11183 after being repeatedly evaluated.
11184
11185 @item
11186 An expression to change the value passed to the true-or-false-test so
11187 that the test returns false after the loop has repeated itself the right
11188 number of times.
11189 @end enumerate
11190
11191 @node dolist dotimes, Recursion, while, Loops & Recursion
11192 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11193 @section Save your time: @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
11194
11195 In addition to @code{while}, both @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
11196 provide for looping. Sometimes these are quicker to write than the
11197 equivalent @code{while} loop. Both are Lisp macros. (@xref{Macros, ,
11198 Macros, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}. )
11199
11200 @code{dolist} works like a @code{while} loop that `@sc{cdr}s down a
11201 list': @code{dolist} automatically shortens the list each time it
11202 loops---takes the @sc{cdr} of the list---and binds the @sc{car} of
11203 each shorter version of the list to the first of its arguments.
11204
11205 @code{dotimes} loops a specific number of times: you specify the number.
11206
11207 @menu
11208 * dolist::
11209 * dotimes::
11210 @end menu
11211
11212 @node dolist, dotimes, dolist dotimes, dolist dotimes
11213 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{dolist} Macro
11214 @findex dolist
11215
11216 Suppose, for example, you want to reverse a list, so that
11217 ``first'' ``second'' ``third'' becomes ``third'' ``second'' ``first''.
11218
11219 @need 1250
11220 In practice, you would use the @code{reverse} function, like this:
11221
11222 @smallexample
11223 @group
11224 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11225
11226 (reverse animals)
11227 @end group
11228 @end smallexample
11229
11230 @need 800
11231 @noindent
11232 Here is how you could reverse the list using a @code{while} loop:
11233
11234 @smallexample
11235 @group
11236 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11237
11238 (defun reverse-list-with-while (list)
11239 "Using while, reverse the order of LIST."
11240 (let (value) ; make sure list starts empty
11241 (while list
11242 (setq value (cons (car list) value))
11243 (setq list (cdr list)))
11244 value))
11245
11246 (reverse-list-with-while animals)
11247 @end group
11248 @end smallexample
11249
11250 @need 800
11251 @noindent
11252 And here is how you could use the @code{dolist} macro:
11253
11254 @smallexample
11255 @group
11256 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11257
11258 (defun reverse-list-with-dolist (list)
11259 "Using dolist, reverse the order of LIST."
11260 (let (value) ; make sure list starts empty
11261 (dolist (element list value)
11262 (setq value (cons element value)))))
11263
11264 (reverse-list-with-dolist animals)
11265 @end group
11266 @end smallexample
11267
11268 @need 1250
11269 @noindent
11270 In Info, you can place your cursor after the closing parenthesis of
11271 each expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}; in each case, you should see
11272
11273 @smallexample
11274 (tiger lion giraffe gazelle)
11275 @end smallexample
11276
11277 @noindent
11278 in the echo area.
11279
11280 For this example, the existing @code{reverse} function is obviously best.
11281 The @code{while} loop is just like our first example (@pxref{Loop
11282 Example, , A @code{while} Loop and a List}). The @code{while} first
11283 checks whether the list has elements; if so, it constructs a new list
11284 by adding the first element of the list to the existing list (which in
11285 the first iteration of the loop is @code{nil}). Since the second
11286 element is prepended in front of the first element, and the third
11287 element is prepended in front of the second element, the list is reversed.
11288
11289 In the expression using a @code{while} loop,
11290 the @w{@code{(setq list (cdr list))}}
11291 expression shortens the list, so the @code{while} loop eventually
11292 stops. In addition, it provides the @code{cons} expression with a new
11293 first element by creating a new and shorter list at each repetition of
11294 the loop.
11295
11296 The @code{dolist} expression does very much the same as the
11297 @code{while} expression, except that the @code{dolist} macro does some
11298 of the work you have to do when writing a @code{while} expression.
11299
11300 Like a @code{while} loop, a @code{dolist} loops. What is different is
11301 that it automatically shortens the list each time it loops --- it
11302 `@sc{cdr}s down the list' on its own --- and it automatically binds
11303 the @sc{car} of each shorter version of the list to the first of its
11304 arguments.
11305
11306 In the example, the @sc{car} of each shorter version of the list is
11307 referred to using the symbol @samp{element}, the list itself is called
11308 @samp{list}, and the value returned is called @samp{value}. The
11309 remainder of the @code{dolist} expression is the body.
11310
11311 The @code{dolist} expression binds the @sc{car} of each shorter
11312 version of the list to @code{element} and then evaluates the body of
11313 the expression; and repeats the loop. The result is returned in
11314 @code{value}.
11315
11316 @node dotimes, , dolist, dolist dotimes
11317 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{dotimes} Macro
11318 @findex dotimes
11319
11320 The @code{dotimes} macro is similar to @code{dolist}, except that it
11321 loops a specific number of times.
11322
11323 The first argument to @code{dotimes} is assigned the numbers 0, 1, 2
11324 and so forth each time around the loop, and the value of the third
11325 argument is returned. You need to provide the value of the second
11326 argument, which is how many times the macro loops.
11327
11328 @need 1250
11329 For example, the following binds the numbers from 0 up to, but not
11330 including, the number 3 to the first argument, @var{number}, and then
11331 constructs a list of the three numbers. (The first number is 0, the
11332 second number is 1, and the third number is 2; this makes a total of
11333 three numbers in all, starting with zero as the first number.)
11334
11335 @smallexample
11336 @group
11337 (let (value) ; otherwise a value is a void variable
11338 (dotimes (number 3 value)
11339 (setq value (cons number value))))
11340
11341 @result{} (2 1 0)
11342 @end group
11343 @end smallexample
11344
11345 @noindent
11346 @code{dotimes} returns @code{value}, so the way to use
11347 @code{dotimes} is to operate on some expression @var{number} number of
11348 times and then return the result, either as a list or an atom.
11349
11350 @need 1250
11351 Here is an example of a @code{defun} that uses @code{dotimes} to add
11352 up the number of pebbles in a triangle.
11353
11354 @smallexample
11355 @group
11356 (defun triangle-using-dotimes (number-of-rows)
11357 "Using dotimes, add up the number of pebbles in a triangle."
11358 (let ((total 0)) ; otherwise a total is a void variable
11359 (dotimes (number number-of-rows total)
11360 (setq total (+ total (1+ number))))))
11361
11362 (triangle-using-dotimes 4)
11363 @end group
11364 @end smallexample
11365
11366 @node Recursion, Looping exercise, dolist dotimes, Loops & Recursion
11367 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11368 @section Recursion
11369 @cindex Recursion
11370
11371 A recursive function contains code that tells the Lisp interpreter to
11372 call a program that runs exactly like itself, but with slightly
11373 different arguments. The code runs exactly the same because it has
11374 the same name. However, even though the program has the same name, it
11375 is not the same entity. It is different. In the jargon, it is a
11376 different `instance'.
11377
11378 Eventually, if the program is written correctly, the `slightly
11379 different arguments' will become sufficiently different from the first
11380 arguments that the final instance will stop.
11381
11382 @menu
11383 * Building Robots:: Same model, different serial number ...
11384 * Recursive Definition Parts:: Walk until you stop ...
11385 * Recursion with list:: Using a list as the test whether to recurse.
11386 * Recursive triangle function::
11387 * Recursion with cond::
11388 * Recursive Patterns:: Often used templates.
11389 * No Deferment:: Don't store up work ...
11390 * No deferment solution::
11391 @end menu
11392
11393 @node Building Robots, Recursive Definition Parts, Recursion, Recursion
11394 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11395 @subsection Building Robots: Extending the Metaphor
11396 @cindex Building robots
11397 @cindex Robots, building
11398
11399 It is sometimes helpful to think of a running program as a robot that
11400 does a job. In doing its job, a recursive function calls on a second
11401 robot to help it. The second robot is identical to the first in every
11402 way, except that the second robot helps the first and has been
11403 passed different arguments than the first.
11404
11405 In a recursive function, the second robot may call a third; and the
11406 third may call a fourth, and so on. Each of these is a different
11407 entity; but all are clones.
11408
11409 Since each robot has slightly different instructions---the arguments
11410 will differ from one robot to the next---the last robot should know
11411 when to stop.
11412
11413 Let's expand on the metaphor in which a computer program is a robot.
11414
11415 A function definition provides the blueprints for a robot. When you
11416 install a function definition, that is, when you evaluate a
11417 @code{defun} special form, you install the necessary equipment to
11418 build robots. It is as if you were in a factory, setting up an
11419 assembly line. Robots with the same name are built according to the
11420 same blueprints. So they have, as it were, the same `model number',
11421 but a different `serial number'.
11422
11423 We often say that a recursive function `calls itself'. What we mean
11424 is that the instructions in a recursive function cause the Lisp
11425 interpreter to run a different function that has the same name and
11426 does the same job as the first, but with different arguments.
11427
11428 It is important that the arguments differ from one instance to the
11429 next; otherwise, the process will never stop.
11430
11431 @node Recursive Definition Parts, Recursion with list, Building Robots, Recursion
11432 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11433 @subsection The Parts of a Recursive Definition
11434 @cindex Parts of a Recursive Definition
11435 @cindex Recursive Definition Parts
11436
11437 A recursive function typically contains a conditional expression which
11438 has three parts:
11439
11440 @enumerate
11441 @item
11442 A true-or-false-test that determines whether the function is called
11443 again, here called the @dfn{do-again-test}.
11444
11445 @item
11446 The name of the function. When this name is called, a new instance of
11447 the function---a new robot, as it were---is created and told what to do.
11448
11449 @item
11450 An expression that returns a different value each time the function is
11451 called, here called the @dfn{next-step-expression}. Consequently, the
11452 argument (or arguments) passed to the new instance of the function
11453 will be different from that passed to the previous instance. This
11454 causes the conditional expression, the @dfn{do-again-test}, to test
11455 false after the correct number of repetitions.
11456 @end enumerate
11457
11458 Recursive functions can be much simpler than any other kind of
11459 function. Indeed, when people first start to use them, they often look
11460 so mysteriously simple as to be incomprehensible. Like riding a
11461 bicycle, reading a recursive function definition takes a certain knack
11462 which is hard at first but then seems simple.
11463
11464 @need 1200
11465 There are several different common recursive patterns. A very simple
11466 pattern looks like this:
11467
11468 @smallexample
11469 @group
11470 (defun @var{name-of-recursive-function} (@var{argument-list})
11471 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
11472 (if @var{do-again-test}
11473 @var{body}@dots{}
11474 (@var{name-of-recursive-function}
11475 @var{next-step-expression})))
11476 @end group
11477 @end smallexample
11478
11479 Each time a recursive function is evaluated, a new instance of it is
11480 created and told what to do. The arguments tell the instance what to do.
11481
11482 An argument is bound to the value of the next-step-expression. Each
11483 instance runs with a different value of the next-step-expression.
11484
11485 The value in the next-step-expression is used in the do-again-test.
11486
11487 The value returned by the next-step-expression is passed to the new
11488 instance of the function, which evaluates it (or some
11489 transmogrification of it) to determine whether to continue or stop.
11490 The next-step-expression is designed so that the do-again-test returns
11491 false when the function should no longer be repeated.
11492
11493 The do-again-test is sometimes called the @dfn{stop condition},
11494 since it stops the repetitions when it tests false.
11495
11496 @node Recursion with list, Recursive triangle function, Recursive Definition Parts, Recursion
11497 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11498 @subsection Recursion with a List
11499
11500 The example of a @code{while} loop that printed the elements of a list
11501 of numbers can be written recursively. Here is the code, including
11502 an expression to set the value of the variable @code{animals} to a list.
11503
11504 If you are using GNU Emacs 20 or before, this example must be copied
11505 to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and each expression must be evaluated
11506 there. Use @kbd{C-u C-x C-e} to evaluate the
11507 @code{(print-elements-recursively animals)} expression so that the
11508 results are printed in the buffer; otherwise the Lisp interpreter will
11509 try to squeeze the results into the one line of the echo area.
11510
11511 Also, place your cursor immediately after the last closing parenthesis
11512 of the @code{print-elements-recursively} function, before the comment.
11513 Otherwise, the Lisp interpreter will try to evaluate the comment.
11514
11515 If you are using a more recent version of Emacs, you can evaluate this
11516 expression directly in Info.
11517
11518 @findex print-elements-recursively
11519 @smallexample
11520 @group
11521 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11522
11523 (defun print-elements-recursively (list)
11524 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own.
11525 Uses recursion."
11526 (when list ; @r{do-again-test}
11527 (print (car list)) ; @r{body}
11528 (print-elements-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11529 (cdr list)))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11530
11531 (print-elements-recursively animals)
11532 @end group
11533 @end smallexample
11534
11535 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function first tests whether
11536 there is any content in the list; if there is, the function prints the
11537 first element of the list, the @sc{car} of the list. Then the
11538 function `invokes itself', but gives itself as its argument, not the
11539 whole list, but the second and subsequent elements of the list, the
11540 @sc{cdr} of the list.
11541
11542 Put another way, if the list is not empty, the function invokes
11543 another instance of code that is similar to the initial code, but is a
11544 different thread of execution, with different arguments than the first
11545 instance.
11546
11547 Put in yet another way, if the list is not empty, the first robot
11548 assembles a second robot and tells it what to do; the second robot is
11549 a different individual from the first, but is the same model.
11550
11551 When the second evaluation occurs, the @code{when} expression is
11552 evaluated and if true, prints the first element of the list it
11553 receives as its argument (which is the second element of the original
11554 list). Then the function `calls itself' with the @sc{cdr} of the list
11555 it is invoked with, which (the second time around) is the @sc{cdr} of
11556 the @sc{cdr} of the original list.
11557
11558 Note that although we say that the function `calls itself', what we
11559 mean is that the Lisp interpreter assembles and instructs a new
11560 instance of the program. The new instance is a clone of the first,
11561 but is a separate individual.
11562
11563 Each time the function `invokes itself', it invokes itself on a
11564 shorter version of the original list. It creates a new instance that
11565 works on a shorter list.
11566
11567 Eventually, the function invokes itself on an empty list. It creates
11568 a new instance whose argument is @code{nil}. The conditional expression
11569 tests the value of @code{list}. Since the value of @code{list} is
11570 @code{nil}, the @code{when} expression tests false so the then-part is
11571 not evaluated. The function as a whole then returns @code{nil}.
11572
11573 @need 1200
11574 When you evaluate the expression @code{(print-elements-recursively
11575 animals)} in the @file{*scratch*} buffer, you see this result:
11576
11577 @smallexample
11578 @group
11579 gazelle
11580
11581 giraffe
11582
11583 lion
11584
11585 tiger
11586 nil
11587 @end group
11588 @end smallexample
11589
11590 @need 2000
11591 @node Recursive triangle function, Recursion with cond, Recursion with list, Recursion
11592 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11593 @subsection Recursion in Place of a Counter
11594 @findex triangle-recursively
11595
11596 @need 1200
11597 The @code{triangle} function described in a previous section can also
11598 be written recursively. It looks like this:
11599
11600 @smallexample
11601 @group
11602 (defun triangle-recursively (number)
11603 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
11604 Uses recursion."
11605 (if (= number 1) ; @r{do-again-test}
11606 1 ; @r{then-part}
11607 (+ number ; @r{else-part}
11608 (triangle-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11609 (1- number))))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11610
11611 (triangle-recursively 7)
11612 @end group
11613 @end smallexample
11614
11615 @noindent
11616 You can install this function by evaluating it and then try it by
11617 evaluating @code{(triangle-recursively 7)}. (Remember to put your
11618 cursor immediately after the last parenthesis of the function
11619 definition, before the comment.) The function evaluates to 28.
11620
11621 To understand how this function works, let's consider what happens in the
11622 various cases when the function is passed 1, 2, 3, or 4 as the value of
11623 its argument.
11624
11625 @menu
11626 * Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2::
11627 * Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4::
11628 @end menu
11629
11630 @node Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2, Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4, Recursive triangle function, Recursive triangle function
11631 @ifnottex
11632 @unnumberedsubsubsec An argument of 1 or 2
11633 @end ifnottex
11634
11635 First, what happens if the value of the argument is 1?
11636
11637 The function has an @code{if} expression after the documentation
11638 string. It tests whether the value of @code{number} is equal to 1; if
11639 so, Emacs evaluates the then-part of the @code{if} expression, which
11640 returns the number 1 as the value of the function. (A triangle with
11641 one row has one pebble in it.)
11642
11643 Suppose, however, that the value of the argument is 2. In this case,
11644 Emacs evaluates the else-part of the @code{if} expression.
11645
11646 @need 1200
11647 The else-part consists of an addition, the recursive call to
11648 @code{triangle-recursively} and a decrementing action; and it looks like
11649 this:
11650
11651 @smallexample
11652 (+ number (triangle-recursively (1- number)))
11653 @end smallexample
11654
11655 When Emacs evaluates this expression, the innermost expression is
11656 evaluated first; then the other parts in sequence. Here are the steps
11657 in detail:
11658
11659 @table @i
11660 @item Step 1 @w{ } Evaluate the innermost expression.
11661
11662 The innermost expression is @code{(1- number)} so Emacs decrements the
11663 value of @code{number} from 2 to 1.
11664
11665 @item Step 2 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11666
11667 The Lisp interpreter creates an individual instance of
11668 @code{triangle-recursively}. It does not matter that this function is
11669 contained within itself. Emacs passes the result Step 1 as the
11670 argument used by this instance of the @code{triangle-recursively}
11671 function
11672
11673 In this case, Emacs evaluates @code{triangle-recursively} with an
11674 argument of 1. This means that this evaluation of
11675 @code{triangle-recursively} returns 1.
11676
11677 @item Step 3 @w{ } Evaluate the value of @code{number}.
11678
11679 The variable @code{number} is the second element of the list that
11680 starts with @code{+}; its value is 2.
11681
11682 @item Step 4 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{+} expression.
11683
11684 The @code{+} expression receives two arguments, the first
11685 from the evaluation of @code{number} (Step 3) and the second from the
11686 evaluation of @code{triangle-recursively} (Step 2).
11687
11688 The result of the addition is the sum of 2 plus 1, and the number 3 is
11689 returned, which is correct. A triangle with two rows has three
11690 pebbles in it.
11691 @end table
11692
11693 @node Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4, , Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2, Recursive triangle function
11694 @unnumberedsubsubsec An argument of 3 or 4
11695
11696 Suppose that @code{triangle-recursively} is called with an argument of
11697 3.
11698
11699 @table @i
11700 @item Step 1 @w{ } Evaluate the do-again-test.
11701
11702 The @code{if} expression is evaluated first. This is the do-again
11703 test and returns false, so the else-part of the @code{if} expression
11704 is evaluated. (Note that in this example, the do-again-test causes
11705 the function to call itself when it tests false, not when it tests
11706 true.)
11707
11708 @item Step 2 @w{ } Evaluate the innermost expression of the else-part.
11709
11710 The innermost expression of the else-part is evaluated, which decrements
11711 3 to 2. This is the next-step-expression.
11712
11713 @item Step 3 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11714
11715 The number 2 is passed to the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11716
11717 We already know what happens when Emacs evaluates @code{triangle-recursively} with
11718 an argument of 2. After going through the sequence of actions described
11719 earlier, it returns a value of 3. So that is what will happen here.
11720
11721 @item Step 4 @w{ } Evaluate the addition.
11722
11723 3 will be passed as an argument to the addition and will be added to the
11724 number with which the function was called, which is 3.
11725 @end table
11726
11727 @noindent
11728 The value returned by the function as a whole will be 6.
11729
11730 Now that we know what will happen when @code{triangle-recursively} is
11731 called with an argument of 3, it is evident what will happen if it is
11732 called with an argument of 4:
11733
11734 @quotation
11735 @need 800
11736 In the recursive call, the evaluation of
11737
11738 @smallexample
11739 (triangle-recursively (1- 4))
11740 @end smallexample
11741
11742 @need 800
11743 @noindent
11744 will return the value of evaluating
11745
11746 @smallexample
11747 (triangle-recursively 3)
11748 @end smallexample
11749
11750 @noindent
11751 which is 6 and this value will be added to 4 by the addition in the
11752 third line.
11753 @end quotation
11754
11755 @noindent
11756 The value returned by the function as a whole will be 10.
11757
11758 Each time @code{triangle-recursively} is evaluated, it evaluates a
11759 version of itself---a different instance of itself---with a smaller
11760 argument, until the argument is small enough so that it does not
11761 evaluate itself.
11762
11763 Note that this particular design for a recursive function
11764 requires that operations be deferred.
11765
11766 Before @code{(triangle-recursively 7)} can calculate its answer, it
11767 must call @code{(triangle-recursively 6)}; and before
11768 @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} can calculate its answer, it must call
11769 @code{(triangle-recursively 5)}; and so on. That is to say, the
11770 calculation that @code{(triangle-recursively 7)} makes must be
11771 deferred until @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} makes its calculation;
11772 and @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} must defer until
11773 @code{(triangle-recursively 5)} completes; and so on.
11774
11775 If each of these instances of @code{triangle-recursively} are thought
11776 of as different robots, the first robot must wait for the second to
11777 complete its job, which must wait until the third completes, and so
11778 on.
11779
11780 There is a way around this kind of waiting, which we will discuss in
11781 @ref{No Deferment, , Recursion without Deferments}.
11782
11783 @node Recursion with cond, Recursive Patterns, Recursive triangle function, Recursion
11784 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11785 @subsection Recursion Example Using @code{cond}
11786 @findex cond
11787
11788 The version of @code{triangle-recursively} described earlier is written
11789 with the @code{if} special form. It can also be written using another
11790 special form called @code{cond}. The name of the special form
11791 @code{cond} is an abbreviation of the word @samp{conditional}.
11792
11793 Although the @code{cond} special form is not used as often in the
11794 Emacs Lisp sources as @code{if}, it is used often enough to justify
11795 explaining it.
11796
11797 @need 800
11798 The template for a @code{cond} expression looks like this:
11799
11800 @smallexample
11801 @group
11802 (cond
11803 @var{body}@dots{})
11804 @end group
11805 @end smallexample
11806
11807 @noindent
11808 where the @var{body} is a series of lists.
11809
11810 @need 800
11811 Written out more fully, the template looks like this:
11812
11813 @smallexample
11814 @group
11815 (cond
11816 (@var{first-true-or-false-test} @var{first-consequent})
11817 (@var{second-true-or-false-test} @var{second-consequent})
11818 (@var{third-true-or-false-test} @var{third-consequent})
11819 @dots{})
11820 @end group
11821 @end smallexample
11822
11823 When the Lisp interpreter evaluates the @code{cond} expression, it
11824 evaluates the first element (the @sc{car} or true-or-false-test) of
11825 the first expression in a series of expressions within the body of the
11826 @code{cond}.
11827
11828 If the true-or-false-test returns @code{nil} the rest of that
11829 expression, the consequent, is skipped and the true-or-false-test of the
11830 next expression is evaluated. When an expression is found whose
11831 true-or-false-test returns a value that is not @code{nil}, the
11832 consequent of that expression is evaluated. The consequent can be one
11833 or more expressions. If the consequent consists of more than one
11834 expression, the expressions are evaluated in sequence and the value of
11835 the last one is returned. If the expression does not have a consequent,
11836 the value of the true-or-false-test is returned.
11837
11838 If none of the true-or-false-tests test true, the @code{cond} expression
11839 returns @code{nil}.
11840
11841 @need 1250
11842 Written using @code{cond}, the @code{triangle} function looks like this:
11843
11844 @smallexample
11845 @group
11846 (defun triangle-using-cond (number)
11847 (cond ((<= number 0) 0)
11848 ((= number 1) 1)
11849 ((> number 1)
11850 (+ number (triangle-using-cond (1- number))))))
11851 @end group
11852 @end smallexample
11853
11854 @noindent
11855 In this example, the @code{cond} returns 0 if the number is less than or
11856 equal to 0, it returns 1 if the number is 1 and it evaluates @code{(+
11857 number (triangle-using-cond (1- number)))} if the number is greater than
11858 1.
11859
11860 @node Recursive Patterns, No Deferment, Recursion with cond, Recursion
11861 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11862 @subsection Recursive Patterns
11863 @cindex Recursive Patterns
11864
11865 Here are three common recursive patterns. Each involves a list.
11866 Recursion does not need to involve lists, but Lisp is designed for lists
11867 and this provides a sense of its primal capabilities.
11868
11869 @menu
11870 * Every::
11871 * Accumulate::
11872 * Keep::
11873 @end menu
11874
11875 @node Every, Accumulate, Recursive Patterns, Recursive Patterns
11876 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11877 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{every}
11878 @cindex Every, type of recursive pattern
11879 @cindex Recursive pattern: every
11880
11881 In the @code{every} recursive pattern, an action is performed on every
11882 element of a list.
11883
11884 @need 1500
11885 The basic pattern is:
11886
11887 @itemize @bullet
11888 @item
11889 If a list be empty, return @code{nil}.
11890 @item
11891 Else, act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list)
11892 @itemize @minus
11893 @item
11894 through a recursive call by the function on the rest (the
11895 @sc{cdr}) of the list,
11896 @item
11897 and, optionally, combine the acted-on element, using @code{cons},
11898 with the results of acting on the rest.
11899 @end itemize
11900 @end itemize
11901
11902 @need 1500
11903 Here is example:
11904
11905 @smallexample
11906 @group
11907 (defun square-each (numbers-list)
11908 "Square each of a NUMBERS LIST, recursively."
11909 (if (not numbers-list) ; do-again-test
11910 nil
11911 (cons
11912 (* (car numbers-list) (car numbers-list))
11913 (square-each (cdr numbers-list))))) ; next-step-expression
11914 @end group
11915
11916 @group
11917 (square-each '(1 2 3))
11918 @result{} (1 4 9)
11919 @end group
11920 @end smallexample
11921
11922 @need 1200
11923 @noindent
11924 If @code{numbers-list} is empty, do nothing. But if it has content,
11925 construct a list combining the square of the first number in the list
11926 with the result of the recursive call.
11927
11928 (The example follows the pattern exactly: @code{nil} is returned if
11929 the numbers' list is empty. In practice, you would write the
11930 conditional so it carries out the action when the numbers' list is not
11931 empty.)
11932
11933 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function (@pxref{Recursion with
11934 list, , Recursion with a List}) is another example of an @code{every}
11935 pattern, except in this case, rather than bring the results together
11936 using @code{cons}, we print each element of output.
11937
11938 @need 1250
11939 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function looks like this:
11940
11941 @smallexample
11942 @group
11943 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11944 @end group
11945
11946 @group
11947 (defun print-elements-recursively (list)
11948 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own.
11949 Uses recursion."
11950 (when list ; @r{do-again-test}
11951 (print (car list)) ; @r{body}
11952 (print-elements-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11953 (cdr list)))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11954
11955 (print-elements-recursively animals)
11956 @end group
11957 @end smallexample
11958
11959 @need 1500
11960 The pattern for @code{print-elements-recursively} is:
11961
11962 @itemize @bullet
11963 @item
11964 When the list is empty, do nothing.
11965 @item
11966 But when the list has at least one element,
11967 @itemize @minus
11968 @item
11969 act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list),
11970 @item
11971 and make a recursive call on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11972 @end itemize
11973 @end itemize
11974
11975 @node Accumulate, Keep, Every, Recursive Patterns
11976 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11977 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{accumulate}
11978 @cindex Accumulate, type of recursive pattern
11979 @cindex Recursive pattern: accumulate
11980
11981 Another recursive pattern is called the @code{accumulate} pattern. In
11982 the @code{accumulate} recursive pattern, an action is performed on
11983 every element of a list and the result of that action is accumulated
11984 with the results of performing the action on the other elements.
11985
11986 This is very like the `every' pattern using @code{cons}, except that
11987 @code{cons} is not used, but some other combiner.
11988
11989 @need 1500
11990 The pattern is:
11991
11992 @itemize @bullet
11993 @item
11994 If a list be empty, return zero or some other constant.
11995 @item
11996 Else, act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list),
11997 @itemize @minus
11998 @item
11999 and combine that acted-on element, using @code{+} or
12000 some other combining function, with
12001 @item
12002 a recursive call by the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
12003 @end itemize
12004 @end itemize
12005
12006 @need 1500
12007 Here is an example:
12008
12009 @smallexample
12010 @group
12011 (defun add-elements (numbers-list)
12012 "Add the elements of NUMBERS-LIST together."
12013 (if (not numbers-list)
12014 0
12015 (+ (car numbers-list) (add-elements (cdr numbers-list)))))
12016 @end group
12017
12018 @group
12019 (add-elements '(1 2 3 4))
12020 @result{} 10
12021 @end group
12022 @end smallexample
12023
12024 @xref{Files List, , Making a List of Files}, for an example of the
12025 accumulate pattern.
12026
12027 @node Keep, , Accumulate, Recursive Patterns
12028 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12029 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{keep}
12030 @cindex Keep, type of recursive pattern
12031 @cindex Recursive pattern: keep
12032
12033 A third recursive pattern is called the @code{keep} pattern.
12034 In the @code{keep} recursive pattern, each element of a list is tested;
12035 the element is acted on and the results are kept only if the element
12036 meets a criterion.
12037
12038 Again, this is very like the `every' pattern, except the element is
12039 skipped unless it meets a criterion.
12040
12041 @need 1500
12042 The pattern has three parts:
12043
12044 @itemize @bullet
12045 @item
12046 If a list be empty, return @code{nil}.
12047 @item
12048 Else, if the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list) passes
12049 a test
12050 @itemize @minus
12051 @item
12052 act on that element and combine it, using @code{cons} with
12053 @item
12054 a recursive call by the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
12055 @end itemize
12056 @item
12057 Otherwise, if the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list) fails
12058 the test
12059 @itemize @minus
12060 @item
12061 skip on that element,
12062 @item
12063 and, recursively call the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
12064 @end itemize
12065 @end itemize
12066
12067 @need 1500
12068 Here is an example that uses @code{cond}:
12069
12070 @smallexample
12071 @group
12072 (defun keep-three-letter-words (word-list)
12073 "Keep three letter words in WORD-LIST."
12074 (cond
12075 ;; First do-again-test: stop-condition
12076 ((not word-list) nil)
12077
12078 ;; Second do-again-test: when to act
12079 ((eq 3 (length (symbol-name (car word-list))))
12080 ;; combine acted-on element with recursive call on shorter list
12081 (cons (car word-list) (keep-three-letter-words (cdr word-list))))
12082
12083 ;; Third do-again-test: when to skip element;
12084 ;; recursively call shorter list with next-step expression
12085 (t (keep-three-letter-words (cdr word-list)))))
12086 @end group
12087
12088 @group
12089 (keep-three-letter-words '(one two three four five six))
12090 @result{} (one two six)
12091 @end group
12092 @end smallexample
12093
12094 It goes without saying that you need not use @code{nil} as the test for
12095 when to stop; and you can, of course, combine these patterns.
12096
12097 @node No Deferment, No deferment solution, Recursive Patterns, Recursion
12098 @subsection Recursion without Deferments
12099 @cindex Deferment in recursion
12100 @cindex Recursion without Deferments
12101
12102 Let's consider again what happens with the @code{triangle-recursively}
12103 function. We will find that the intermediate calculations are
12104 deferred until all can be done.
12105
12106 @need 800
12107 Here is the function definition:
12108
12109 @smallexample
12110 @group
12111 (defun triangle-recursively (number)
12112 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
12113 Uses recursion."
12114 (if (= number 1) ; @r{do-again-test}
12115 1 ; @r{then-part}
12116 (+ number ; @r{else-part}
12117 (triangle-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
12118 (1- number))))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
12119 @end group
12120 @end smallexample
12121
12122 What happens when we call this function with a argument of 7?
12123
12124 The first instance of the @code{triangle-recursively} function adds
12125 the number 7 to the value returned by a second instance of
12126 @code{triangle-recursively}, an instance that has been passed an
12127 argument of 6. That is to say, the first calculation is:
12128
12129 @smallexample
12130 (+ 7 (triangle-recursively 6))
12131 @end smallexample
12132
12133 @noindent
12134 The first instance of @code{triangle-recursively}---you may want to
12135 think of it as a little robot---cannot complete its job. It must hand
12136 off the calculation for @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} to a second
12137 instance of the program, to a second robot. This second individual is
12138 completely different from the first one; it is, in the jargon, a
12139 `different instantiation'. Or, put another way, it is a different
12140 robot. It is the same model as the first; it calculates triangle
12141 numbers recursively; but it has a different serial number.
12142
12143 And what does @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} return? It returns the
12144 number 6 added to the value returned by evaluating
12145 @code{triangle-recursively} with an argument of 5. Using the robot
12146 metaphor, it asks yet another robot to help it.
12147
12148 @need 800
12149 Now the total is:
12150
12151 @smallexample
12152 (+ 7 6 (triangle-recursively 5))
12153 @end smallexample
12154
12155 @need 800
12156 And what happens next?
12157
12158 @smallexample
12159 (+ 7 6 5 (triangle-recursively 4))
12160 @end smallexample
12161
12162 Each time @code{triangle-recursively} is called, except for the last
12163 time, it creates another instance of the program---another robot---and
12164 asks it to make a calculation.
12165
12166 @need 800
12167 Eventually, the full addition is set up and performed:
12168
12169 @smallexample
12170 (+ 7 6 5 4 3 2 1)
12171 @end smallexample
12172
12173 This design for the function defers the calculation of the first step
12174 until the second can be done, and defers that until the third can be
12175 done, and so on. Each deferment means the computer must remember what
12176 is being waited on. This is not a problem when there are only a few
12177 steps, as in this example. But it can be a problem when there are
12178 more steps.
12179
12180 @node No deferment solution, , No Deferment, Recursion
12181 @subsection No Deferment Solution
12182 @cindex No deferment solution
12183 @cindex Defermentless solution
12184 @cindex Solution without deferment
12185
12186 The solution to the problem of deferred operations is to write in a
12187 manner that does not defer operations@footnote{The phrase @dfn{tail
12188 recursive} is used to describe such a process, one that uses
12189 `constant space'.}. This requires
12190 writing to a different pattern, often one that involves writing two
12191 function definitions, an `initialization' function and a `helper'
12192 function.
12193
12194 The `initialization' function sets up the job; the `helper' function
12195 does the work.
12196
12197 @need 1200
12198 Here are the two function definitions for adding up numbers. They are
12199 so simple, I find them hard to understand.
12200
12201 @smallexample
12202 @group
12203 (defun triangle-initialization (number)
12204 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
12205 This is the `initialization' component of a two function
12206 duo that uses recursion."
12207 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 0 number))
12208 @end group
12209 @end smallexample
12210
12211 @smallexample
12212 @group
12213 (defun triangle-recursive-helper (sum counter number)
12214 "Return SUM, using COUNTER, through NUMBER inclusive.
12215 This is the `helper' component of a two function duo
12216 that uses recursion."
12217 (if (> counter number)
12218 sum
12219 (triangle-recursive-helper (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum}
12220 (1+ counter) ; @r{counter}
12221 number))) ; @r{number}
12222 @end group
12223 @end smallexample
12224
12225 @need 1250
12226 Install both function definitions by evaluating them, then call
12227 @code{triangle-initialization} with 2 rows:
12228
12229 @smallexample
12230 @group
12231 (triangle-initialization 2)
12232 @result{} 3
12233 @end group
12234 @end smallexample
12235
12236 The `initialization' function calls the first instance of the `helper'
12237 function with three arguments: zero, zero, and a number which is the
12238 number of rows in the triangle.
12239
12240 The first two arguments passed to the `helper' function are
12241 initialization values. These values are changed when
12242 @code{triangle-recursive-helper} invokes new instances.@footnote{The
12243 jargon is mildly confusing: @code{triangle-recursive-helper} uses a
12244 process that is iterative in a procedure that is recursive. The
12245 process is called iterative because the computer need only record the
12246 three values, @code{sum}, @code{counter}, and @code{number}; the
12247 procedure is recursive because the function `calls itself'. On the
12248 other hand, both the process and the procedure used by
12249 @code{triangle-recursively} are called recursive. The word
12250 `recursive' has different meanings in the two contexts.}
12251
12252 Let's see what happens when we have a triangle that has one row. (This
12253 triangle will have one pebble in it!)
12254
12255 @need 1200
12256 @code{triangle-initialization} will call its helper with
12257 the arguments @w{@code{0 0 1}}. That function will run the conditional
12258 test whether @code{(> counter number)}:
12259
12260 @smallexample
12261 (> 0 1)
12262 @end smallexample
12263
12264 @need 1200
12265 @noindent
12266 and find that the result is false, so it will invoke
12267 the else-part of the @code{if} clause:
12268
12269 @smallexample
12270 @group
12271 (triangle-recursive-helper
12272 (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum plus counter} @result{} @r{sum}
12273 (1+ counter) ; @r{increment counter} @result{} @r{counter}
12274 number) ; @r{number stays the same}
12275 @end group
12276 @end smallexample
12277
12278 @need 800
12279 @noindent
12280 which will first compute:
12281
12282 @smallexample
12283 @group
12284 (triangle-recursive-helper (+ 0 0) ; @r{sum}
12285 (1+ 0) ; @r{counter}
12286 1) ; @r{number}
12287 @exdent which is:
12288
12289 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 1 1)
12290 @end group
12291 @end smallexample
12292
12293 Again, @code{(> counter number)} will be false, so again, the Lisp
12294 interpreter will evaluate @code{triangle-recursive-helper}, creating a
12295 new instance with new arguments.
12296
12297 @need 800
12298 This new instance will be;
12299
12300 @smallexample
12301 @group
12302 (triangle-recursive-helper
12303 (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum plus counter} @result{} @r{sum}
12304 (1+ counter) ; @r{increment counter} @result{} @r{counter}
12305 number) ; @r{number stays the same}
12306
12307 @exdent which is:
12308
12309 (triangle-recursive-helper 1 2 1)
12310 @end group
12311 @end smallexample
12312
12313 In this case, the @code{(> counter number)} test will be true! So the
12314 instance will return the value of the sum, which will be 1, as
12315 expected.
12316
12317 Now, let's pass @code{triangle-initialization} an argument
12318 of 2, to find out how many pebbles there are in a triangle with two rows.
12319
12320 That function calls @code{(triangle-recursive-helper 0 0 2)}.
12321
12322 @need 800
12323 In stages, the instances called will be:
12324
12325 @smallexample
12326 @group
12327 @r{sum counter number}
12328 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 1 2)
12329
12330 (triangle-recursive-helper 1 2 2)
12331
12332 (triangle-recursive-helper 3 3 2)
12333 @end group
12334 @end smallexample
12335
12336 When the last instance is called, the @code{(> counter number)} test
12337 will be true, so the instance will return the value of @code{sum},
12338 which will be 3.
12339
12340 This kind of pattern helps when you are writing functions that can use
12341 many resources in a computer.
12342
12343 @need 1500
12344 @node Looping exercise, , Recursion, Loops & Recursion
12345 @section Looping Exercise
12346
12347 @itemize @bullet
12348 @item
12349 Write a function similar to @code{triangle} in which each row has a
12350 value which is the square of the row number. Use a @code{while} loop.
12351
12352 @item
12353 Write a function similar to @code{triangle} that multiplies instead of
12354 adds the values.
12355
12356 @item
12357 Rewrite these two functions recursively. Rewrite these functions
12358 using @code{cond}.
12359
12360 @c comma in printed title causes problem in Info cross reference
12361 @item
12362 Write a function for Texinfo mode that creates an index entry at the
12363 beginning of a paragraph for every @samp{@@dfn} within the paragraph.
12364 (In a Texinfo file, @samp{@@dfn} marks a definition. This book is
12365 written in Texinfo.)
12366
12367 Many of the functions you will need are described in two of the
12368 previous chapters, @ref{Cutting & Storing Text, , Cutting and Storing
12369 Text}, and @ref{Yanking, , Yanking Text Back}. If you use
12370 @code{forward-paragraph} to put the index entry at the beginning of
12371 the paragraph, you will have to use @w{@kbd{C-h f}}
12372 (@code{describe-function}) to find out how to make the command go
12373 backwards.
12374
12375 For more information, see
12376 @ifinfo
12377 @ref{Indicating, , Indicating Definitions, texinfo}.
12378 @end ifinfo
12379 @ifhtml
12380 @ref{Indicating, , Indicating, texinfo, Texinfo Manual}, which goes to
12381 a Texinfo manual in the current directory. Or, if you are on the
12382 Internet, see
12383 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/manual/texinfo/}
12384 @end ifhtml
12385 @iftex
12386 ``Indicating Definitions, Commands, etc.'' in @cite{Texinfo, The GNU
12387 Documentation Format}.
12388 @end iftex
12389 @end itemize
12390
12391 @node Regexp Search, Counting Words, Loops & Recursion, Top
12392 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12393 @chapter Regular Expression Searches
12394 @cindex Searches, illustrating
12395 @cindex Regular expression searches
12396 @cindex Patterns, searching for
12397 @cindex Motion by sentence and paragraph
12398 @cindex Sentences, movement by
12399 @cindex Paragraphs, movement by
12400
12401 Regular expression searches are used extensively in GNU Emacs. The
12402 two functions, @code{forward-sentence} and @code{forward-paragraph},
12403 illustrate these searches well. They use regular expressions to find
12404 where to move point. The phrase `regular expression' is often written
12405 as `regexp'.
12406
12407 Regular expression searches are described in @ref{Regexp Search, ,
12408 Regular Expression Search, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, as well as in
12409 @ref{Regular Expressions, , , elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
12410 Manual}. In writing this chapter, I am presuming that you have at
12411 least a mild acquaintance with them. The major point to remember is
12412 that regular expressions permit you to search for patterns as well as
12413 for literal strings of characters. For example, the code in
12414 @code{forward-sentence} searches for the pattern of possible
12415 characters that could mark the end of a sentence, and moves point to
12416 that spot.
12417
12418 Before looking at the code for the @code{forward-sentence} function, it
12419 is worth considering what the pattern that marks the end of a sentence
12420 must be. The pattern is discussed in the next section; following that
12421 is a description of the regular expression search function,
12422 @code{re-search-forward}. The @code{forward-sentence} function
12423 is described in the section following. Finally, the
12424 @code{forward-paragraph} function is described in the last section of
12425 this chapter. @code{forward-paragraph} is a complex function that
12426 introduces several new features.
12427
12428 @menu
12429 * sentence-end:: The regular expression for @code{sentence-end}.
12430 * re-search-forward:: Very similar to @code{search-forward}.
12431 * forward-sentence:: A straightforward example of regexp search.
12432 * forward-paragraph:: A somewhat complex example.
12433 * etags:: How to create your own @file{TAGS} table.
12434 * Regexp Review::
12435 * re-search Exercises::
12436 @end menu
12437
12438 @node sentence-end, re-search-forward, Regexp Search, Regexp Search
12439 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12440 @section The Regular Expression for @code{sentence-end}
12441 @findex sentence-end
12442
12443 The symbol @code{sentence-end} is bound to the pattern that marks the
12444 end of a sentence. What should this regular expression be?
12445
12446 Clearly, a sentence may be ended by a period, a question mark, or an
12447 exclamation mark. Indeed, in English, only clauses that end with one
12448 of those three characters should be considered the end of a sentence.
12449 This means that the pattern should include the character set:
12450
12451 @smallexample
12452 [.?!]
12453 @end smallexample
12454
12455 However, we do not want @code{forward-sentence} merely to jump to a
12456 period, a question mark, or an exclamation mark, because such a character
12457 might be used in the middle of a sentence. A period, for example, is
12458 used after abbreviations. So other information is needed.
12459
12460 According to convention, you type two spaces after every sentence, but
12461 only one space after a period, a question mark, or an exclamation mark in
12462 the body of a sentence. So a period, a question mark, or an exclamation
12463 mark followed by two spaces is a good indicator of an end of sentence.
12464 However, in a file, the two spaces may instead be a tab or the end of a
12465 line. This means that the regular expression should include these three
12466 items as alternatives.
12467
12468 @need 800
12469 This group of alternatives will look like this:
12470
12471 @smallexample
12472 @group
12473 \\($\\| \\| \\)
12474 ^ ^^
12475 TAB SPC
12476 @end group
12477 @end smallexample
12478
12479 @noindent
12480 Here, @samp{$} indicates the end of the line, and I have pointed out
12481 where the tab and two spaces are inserted in the expression. Both are
12482 inserted by putting the actual characters into the expression.
12483
12484 Two backslashes, @samp{\\}, are required before the parentheses and
12485 vertical bars: the first backslash quotes the following backslash in
12486 Emacs; and the second indicates that the following character, the
12487 parenthesis or the vertical bar, is special.
12488
12489 @need 1000
12490 Also, a sentence may be followed by one or more carriage returns, like
12491 this:
12492
12493 @smallexample
12494 @group
12495 [
12496 ]*
12497 @end group
12498 @end smallexample
12499
12500 @noindent
12501 Like tabs and spaces, a carriage return is inserted into a regular
12502 expression by inserting it literally. The asterisk indicates that the
12503 @key{RET} is repeated zero or more times.
12504
12505 But a sentence end does not consist only of a period, a question mark or
12506 an exclamation mark followed by appropriate space: a closing quotation
12507 mark or a closing brace of some kind may precede the space. Indeed more
12508 than one such mark or brace may precede the space. These require a
12509 expression that looks like this:
12510
12511 @smallexample
12512 []\"')@}]*
12513 @end smallexample
12514
12515 In this expression, the first @samp{]} is the first character in the
12516 expression; the second character is @samp{"}, which is preceded by a
12517 @samp{\} to tell Emacs the @samp{"} is @emph{not} special. The last
12518 three characters are @samp{'}, @samp{)}, and @samp{@}}.
12519
12520 All this suggests what the regular expression pattern for matching the
12521 end of a sentence should be; and, indeed, if we evaluate
12522 @code{sentence-end} we find that it returns the following value:
12523
12524 @smallexample
12525 @group
12526 sentence-end
12527 @result{} "[.?!][]\"')@}]*\\($\\| \\| \\)[
12528 ]*"
12529 @end group
12530 @end smallexample
12531
12532 @noindent
12533 (Well, not in GNU Emacs 22; that is because of an effort to make the
12534 process simpler and to handle more glyphs and languages. When the
12535 value of @code{sentence-end} is @code{nil}, then use the value defined
12536 by the function @code{sentence-end}. (Here is a use of the difference
12537 between a value and a function in Emacs Lisp.) The function returns a
12538 value constructed from the variables @code{sentence-end-base},
12539 @code{sentence-end-double-space}, @code{sentence-end-without-period},
12540 and @code{sentence-end-without-space}. The critical variable is
12541 @code{sentence-end-base}; its global value is similar to the one
12542 described above but it also contains two additional quotation marks.
12543 These have differing degrees of curliness. The
12544 @code{sentence-end-without-period} variable, when true, tells Emacs
12545 that a sentence may end without a period, such as text in Thai.)
12546
12547 @ignore
12548 @noindent
12549 (Note that here the @key{TAB}, two spaces, and @key{RET} are shown
12550 literally in the pattern.)
12551
12552 This regular expression can be deciphered as follows:
12553
12554 @table @code
12555 @item [.?!]
12556 The first part of the pattern is the three characters, a period, a question
12557 mark and an exclamation mark, within square brackets. The pattern must
12558 begin with one or other of these characters.
12559
12560 @item []\"')@}]*
12561 The second part of the pattern is the group of closing braces and
12562 quotation marks, which can appear zero or more times. These may follow
12563 the period, question mark or exclamation mark. In a regular expression,
12564 the backslash, @samp{\}, followed by the double quotation mark,
12565 @samp{"}, indicates the class of string-quote characters. Usually, the
12566 double quotation mark is the only character in this class. The
12567 asterisk, @samp{*}, indicates that the items in the previous group (the
12568 group surrounded by square brackets, @samp{[]}) may be repeated zero or
12569 more times.
12570
12571 @item \\($\\| \\| \\)
12572 The third part of the pattern is one or other of: either the end of a
12573 line, or two blank spaces, or a tab. The double back-slashes are used
12574 to prevent Emacs from reading the parentheses and vertical bars as part
12575 of the search pattern; the parentheses are used to mark the group and
12576 the vertical bars are used to indicated that the patterns to either side
12577 of them are alternatives. The dollar sign is used to indicate the end
12578 of a line and both the two spaces and the tab are each inserted as is to
12579 indicate what they are.
12580
12581 @item [@key{RET}]*
12582 Finally, the last part of the pattern indicates that the end of the line
12583 or the whitespace following the period, question mark or exclamation
12584 mark may, but need not, be followed by one or more carriage returns. In
12585 the pattern, the carriage return is inserted as an actual carriage
12586 return between square brackets but here it is shown as @key{RET}.
12587 @end table
12588 @end ignore
12589
12590 @node re-search-forward, forward-sentence, sentence-end, Regexp Search
12591 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12592 @section The @code{re-search-forward} Function
12593 @findex re-search-forward
12594
12595 The @code{re-search-forward} function is very like the
12596 @code{search-forward} function. (@xref{search-forward, , The
12597 @code{search-forward} Function}.)
12598
12599 @code{re-search-forward} searches for a regular expression. If the
12600 search is successful, it leaves point immediately after the last
12601 character in the target. If the search is backwards, it leaves point
12602 just before the first character in the target. You may tell
12603 @code{re-search-forward} to return @code{t} for true. (Moving point
12604 is therefore a `side effect'.)
12605
12606 Like @code{search-forward}, the @code{re-search-forward} function takes
12607 four arguments:
12608
12609 @enumerate
12610 @item
12611 The first argument is the regular expression that the function searches
12612 for. The regular expression will be a string between quotations marks.
12613
12614 @item
12615 The optional second argument limits how far the function will search; it is a
12616 bound, which is specified as a position in the buffer.
12617
12618 @item
12619 The optional third argument specifies how the function responds to
12620 failure: @code{nil} as the third argument causes the function to
12621 signal an error (and print a message) when the search fails; any other
12622 value causes it to return @code{nil} if the search fails and @code{t}
12623 if the search succeeds.
12624
12625 @item
12626 The optional fourth argument is the repeat count. A negative repeat
12627 count causes @code{re-search-forward} to search backwards.
12628 @end enumerate
12629
12630 @need 800
12631 The template for @code{re-search-forward} looks like this:
12632
12633 @smallexample
12634 @group
12635 (re-search-forward "@var{regular-expression}"
12636 @var{limit-of-search}
12637 @var{what-to-do-if-search-fails}
12638 @var{repeat-count})
12639 @end group
12640 @end smallexample
12641
12642 The second, third, and fourth arguments are optional. However, if you
12643 want to pass a value to either or both of the last two arguments, you
12644 must also pass a value to all the preceding arguments. Otherwise, the
12645 Lisp interpreter will mistake which argument you are passing the value
12646 to.
12647
12648 @need 1200
12649 In the @code{forward-sentence} function, the regular expression will be
12650 the value of the variable @code{sentence-end}. In simple form, that is:
12651
12652 @smallexample
12653 @group
12654 "[.?!][]\"')@}]*\\($\\| \\| \\)[
12655 ]*"
12656 @end group
12657 @end smallexample
12658
12659 @noindent
12660 The limit of the search will be the end of the paragraph (since a
12661 sentence cannot go beyond a paragraph). If the search fails, the
12662 function will return @code{nil}; and the repeat count will be provided
12663 by the argument to the @code{forward-sentence} function.
12664
12665 @node forward-sentence, forward-paragraph, re-search-forward, Regexp Search
12666 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12667 @section @code{forward-sentence}
12668 @findex forward-sentence
12669
12670 The command to move the cursor forward a sentence is a straightforward
12671 illustration of how to use regular expression searches in Emacs Lisp.
12672 Indeed, the function looks longer and more complicated than it is; this
12673 is because the function is designed to go backwards as well as forwards;
12674 and, optionally, over more than one sentence. The function is usually
12675 bound to the key command @kbd{M-e}.
12676
12677 @menu
12678 * Complete forward-sentence::
12679 * fwd-sentence while loops:: Two @code{while} loops.
12680 * fwd-sentence re-search:: A regular expression search.
12681 @end menu
12682
12683 @node Complete forward-sentence, fwd-sentence while loops, forward-sentence, forward-sentence
12684 @ifnottex
12685 @unnumberedsubsec Complete @code{forward-sentence} function definition
12686 @end ifnottex
12687
12688 @need 1250
12689 Here is the code for @code{forward-sentence}:
12690
12691 @c in GNU Emacs 22
12692 @smallexample
12693 @group
12694 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12695 "Move forward to next `sentence-end'. With argument, repeat.
12696 With negative argument, move backward repeatedly to `sentence-beginning'.
12697
12698 The variable `sentence-end' is a regular expression that matches ends of
12699 sentences. Also, every paragraph boundary terminates sentences as well."
12700 @end group
12701 @group
12702 (interactive "p")
12703 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12704 (let ((opoint (point))
12705 (sentence-end (sentence-end)))
12706 (while (< arg 0)
12707 (let ((pos (point))
12708 (par-beg (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12709 (if (and (re-search-backward sentence-end par-beg t)
12710 (or (< (match-end 0) pos)
12711 (re-search-backward sentence-end par-beg t)))
12712 (goto-char (match-end 0))
12713 (goto-char par-beg)))
12714 (setq arg (1+ arg)))
12715 @end group
12716 @group
12717 (while (> arg 0)
12718 (let ((par-end (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12719 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12720 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12721 (goto-char par-end)))
12722 (setq arg (1- arg)))
12723 (constrain-to-field nil opoint t)))
12724 @end group
12725 @end smallexample
12726
12727 @ignore
12728 GNU Emacs 21
12729 @smallexample
12730 @group
12731 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12732 "Move forward to next sentence-end. With argument, repeat.
12733 With negative argument, move backward repeatedly to sentence-beginning.
12734 Sentence ends are identified by the value of sentence-end
12735 treated as a regular expression. Also, every paragraph boundary
12736 terminates sentences as well."
12737 @end group
12738 @group
12739 (interactive "p")
12740 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12741 (while (< arg 0)
12742 (let ((par-beg
12743 (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12744 (if (re-search-backward
12745 (concat sentence-end "[^ \t\n]") par-beg t)
12746 (goto-char (1- (match-end 0)))
12747 (goto-char par-beg)))
12748 (setq arg (1+ arg)))
12749 (while (> arg 0)
12750 (let ((par-end
12751 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12752 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12753 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12754 (goto-char par-end)))
12755 (setq arg (1- arg))))
12756 @end group
12757 @end smallexample
12758 @end ignore
12759
12760 The function looks long at first sight and it is best to look at its
12761 skeleton first, and then its muscle. The way to see the skeleton is to
12762 look at the expressions that start in the left-most columns:
12763
12764 @smallexample
12765 @group
12766 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12767 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
12768 (interactive "p")
12769 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12770 (let ((opoint (point)) (sentence-end (sentence-end)))
12771 (while (< arg 0)
12772 (let ((pos (point))
12773 (par-beg (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12774 @var{rest-of-body-of-while-loop-when-going-backwards}
12775 (while (> arg 0)
12776 (let ((par-end (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12777 @var{rest-of-body-of-while-loop-when-going-forwards}
12778 @var{handle-forms-and-equivalent}
12779 @end group
12780 @end smallexample
12781
12782 This looks much simpler! The function definition consists of
12783 documentation, an @code{interactive} expression, an @code{or}
12784 expression, a @code{let} expression, and @code{while} loops.
12785
12786 Let's look at each of these parts in turn.
12787
12788 We note that the documentation is thorough and understandable.
12789
12790 The function has an @code{interactive "p"} declaration. This means
12791 that the processed prefix argument, if any, is passed to the
12792 function as its argument. (This will be a number.) If the function
12793 is not passed an argument (it is optional) then the argument
12794 @code{arg} will be bound to 1.
12795
12796 When @code{forward-sentence} is called non-interactively without an
12797 argument, @code{arg} is bound to @code{nil}. The @code{or} expression
12798 handles this. What it does is either leave the value of @code{arg} as
12799 it is, but only if @code{arg} is bound to a value; or it sets the
12800 value of @code{arg} to 1, in the case when @code{arg} is bound to
12801 @code{nil}.
12802
12803 Next is a @code{let}. That specifies the values of two local
12804 variables, @code{point} and @code{sentence-end}. The local value of
12805 point, from before the search, is used in the
12806 @code{constrain-to-field} function which handles forms and
12807 equivalents. The @code{sentence-end} variable is set by the
12808 @code{sentence-end} function.
12809
12810 @node fwd-sentence while loops, fwd-sentence re-search, Complete forward-sentence, forward-sentence
12811 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{while} loops
12812
12813 Two @code{while} loops follow. The first @code{while} has a
12814 true-or-false-test that tests true if the prefix argument for
12815 @code{forward-sentence} is a negative number. This is for going
12816 backwards. The body of this loop is similar to the body of the second
12817 @code{while} clause, but it is not exactly the same. We will skip
12818 this @code{while} loop and concentrate on the second @code{while}
12819 loop.
12820
12821 @need 1500
12822 The second @code{while} loop is for moving point forward. Its skeleton
12823 looks like this:
12824
12825 @smallexample
12826 @group
12827 (while (> arg 0) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
12828 (let @var{varlist}
12829 (if (@var{true-or-false-test})
12830 @var{then-part}
12831 @var{else-part}
12832 (setq arg (1- arg)))) ; @code{while} @r{loop decrementer}
12833 @end group
12834 @end smallexample
12835
12836 The @code{while} loop is of the decrementing kind.
12837 (@xref{Decrementing Loop, , A Loop with a Decrementing Counter}.) It
12838 has a true-or-false-test that tests true so long as the counter (in
12839 this case, the variable @code{arg}) is greater than zero; and it has a
12840 decrementer that subtracts 1 from the value of the counter every time
12841 the loop repeats.
12842
12843 If no prefix argument is given to @code{forward-sentence}, which is
12844 the most common way the command is used, this @code{while} loop will
12845 run once, since the value of @code{arg} will be 1.
12846
12847 The body of the @code{while} loop consists of a @code{let} expression,
12848 which creates and binds a local variable, and has, as its body, an
12849 @code{if} expression.
12850
12851 @need 1250
12852 The body of the @code{while} loop looks like this:
12853
12854 @smallexample
12855 @group
12856 (let ((par-end
12857 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12858 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12859 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12860 (goto-char par-end)))
12861 @end group
12862 @end smallexample
12863
12864 The @code{let} expression creates and binds the local variable
12865 @code{par-end}. As we shall see, this local variable is designed to
12866 provide a bound or limit to the regular expression search. If the
12867 search fails to find a proper sentence ending in the paragraph, it will
12868 stop on reaching the end of the paragraph.
12869
12870 But first, let us examine how @code{par-end} is bound to the value of
12871 the end of the paragraph. What happens is that the @code{let} sets the
12872 value of @code{par-end} to the value returned when the Lisp interpreter
12873 evaluates the expression
12874
12875 @smallexample
12876 @group
12877 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))
12878 @end group
12879 @end smallexample
12880
12881 @noindent
12882 In this expression, @code{(end-of-paragraph-text)} moves point to the
12883 end of the paragraph, @code{(point)} returns the value of point, and then
12884 @code{save-excursion} restores point to its original position. Thus,
12885 the @code{let} binds @code{par-end} to the value returned by the
12886 @code{save-excursion} expression, which is the position of the end of
12887 the paragraph. (The @code{end-of-paragraph-text} function uses
12888 @code{forward-paragraph}, which we will discuss shortly.)
12889
12890 @need 1200
12891 Emacs next evaluates the body of the @code{let}, which is an @code{if}
12892 expression that looks like this:
12893
12894 @smallexample
12895 @group
12896 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t) ; @r{if-part}
12897 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n") ; @r{then-part}
12898 (goto-char par-end))) ; @r{else-part}
12899 @end group
12900 @end smallexample
12901
12902 The @code{if} tests whether its first argument is true and if so,
12903 evaluates its then-part; otherwise, the Emacs Lisp interpreter
12904 evaluates the else-part. The true-or-false-test of the @code{if}
12905 expression is the regular expression search.
12906
12907 It may seem odd to have what looks like the `real work' of
12908 the @code{forward-sentence} function buried here, but this is a common
12909 way this kind of operation is carried out in Lisp.
12910
12911 @node fwd-sentence re-search, , fwd-sentence while loops, forward-sentence
12912 @unnumberedsubsec The regular expression search
12913
12914 The @code{re-search-forward} function searches for the end of the
12915 sentence, that is, for the pattern defined by the @code{sentence-end}
12916 regular expression. If the pattern is found---if the end of the sentence is
12917 found---then the @code{re-search-forward} function does two things:
12918
12919 @enumerate
12920 @item
12921 The @code{re-search-forward} function carries out a side effect, which
12922 is to move point to the end of the occurrence found.
12923
12924 @item
12925 The @code{re-search-forward} function returns a value of true. This is
12926 the value received by the @code{if}, and means that the search was
12927 successful.
12928 @end enumerate
12929
12930 @noindent
12931 The side effect, the movement of point, is completed before the
12932 @code{if} function is handed the value returned by the successful
12933 conclusion of the search.
12934
12935 When the @code{if} function receives the value of true from a successful
12936 call to @code{re-search-forward}, the @code{if} evaluates the then-part,
12937 which is the expression @code{(skip-chars-backward " \t\n")}. This
12938 expression moves backwards over any blank spaces, tabs or carriage
12939 returns until a printed character is found and then leaves point after
12940 the character. Since point has already been moved to the end of the
12941 pattern that marks the end of the sentence, this action leaves point
12942 right after the closing printed character of the sentence, which is
12943 usually a period.
12944
12945 On the other hand, if the @code{re-search-forward} function fails to
12946 find a pattern marking the end of the sentence, the function returns
12947 false. The false then causes the @code{if} to evaluate its third
12948 argument, which is @code{(goto-char par-end)}: it moves point to the
12949 end of the paragraph.
12950
12951 (And if the text is in a form or equivalent, and point may not move
12952 fully, then the @code{constrain-to-field} function comes into play.)
12953
12954 Regular expression searches are exceptionally useful and the pattern
12955 illustrated by @code{re-search-forward}, in which the search is the
12956 test of an @code{if} expression, is handy. You will see or write code
12957 incorporating this pattern often.
12958
12959 @node forward-paragraph, etags, forward-sentence, Regexp Search
12960 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12961 @section @code{forward-paragraph}: a Goldmine of Functions
12962 @findex forward-paragraph
12963
12964 @ignore
12965 @c in GNU Emacs 22
12966 (defun forward-paragraph (&optional arg)
12967 "Move forward to end of paragraph.
12968 With argument ARG, do it ARG times;
12969 a negative argument ARG = -N means move backward N paragraphs.
12970
12971 A line which `paragraph-start' matches either separates paragraphs
12972 \(if `paragraph-separate' matches it also) or is the first line of a paragraph.
12973 A paragraph end is the beginning of a line which is not part of the paragraph
12974 to which the end of the previous line belongs, or the end of the buffer.
12975 Returns the count of paragraphs left to move."
12976 (interactive "p")
12977 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12978 (let* ((opoint (point))
12979 (fill-prefix-regexp
12980 (and fill-prefix (not (equal fill-prefix ""))
12981 (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
12982 (regexp-quote fill-prefix)))
12983 ;; Remove ^ from paragraph-start and paragraph-sep if they are there.
12984 ;; These regexps shouldn't be anchored, because we look for them
12985 ;; starting at the left-margin. This allows paragraph commands to
12986 ;; work normally with indented text.
12987 ;; This hack will not find problem cases like "whatever\\|^something".
12988 (parstart (if (and (not (equal "" paragraph-start))
12989 (equal ?^ (aref paragraph-start 0)))
12990 (substring paragraph-start 1)
12991 paragraph-start))
12992 (parsep (if (and (not (equal "" paragraph-separate))
12993 (equal ?^ (aref paragraph-separate 0)))
12994 (substring paragraph-separate 1)
12995 paragraph-separate))
12996 (parsep
12997 (if fill-prefix-regexp
12998 (concat parsep "\\|"
12999 fill-prefix-regexp "[ \t]*$")
13000 parsep))
13001 ;; This is used for searching.
13002 (sp-parstart (concat "^[ \t]*\\(?:" parstart "\\|" parsep "\\)"))
13003 start found-start)
13004 (while (and (< arg 0) (not (bobp)))
13005 (if (and (not (looking-at parsep))
13006 (re-search-backward "^\n" (max (1- (point)) (point-min)) t)
13007 (looking-at parsep))
13008 (setq arg (1+ arg))
13009 (setq start (point))
13010 ;; Move back over paragraph-separating lines.
13011 (forward-char -1) (beginning-of-line)
13012 (while (and (not (bobp))
13013 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13014 (looking-at parsep)))
13015 (forward-line -1))
13016 (if (bobp)
13017 nil
13018 (setq arg (1+ arg))
13019 ;; Go to end of the previous (non-separating) line.
13020 (end-of-line)
13021 ;; Search back for line that starts or separates paragraphs.
13022 (if (if fill-prefix-regexp
13023 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
13024 (let (multiple-lines)
13025 (while (and (progn (beginning-of-line) (not (bobp)))
13026 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13027 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13028 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13029 (unless (= (point) start)
13030 (setq multiple-lines t))
13031 (forward-line -1))
13032 (move-to-left-margin)
13033 ;; This deleted code caused a long hanging-indent line
13034 ;; not to be filled together with the following lines.
13035 ;; ;; Don't move back over a line before the paragraph
13036 ;; ;; which doesn't start with fill-prefix
13037 ;; ;; unless that is the only line we've moved over.
13038 ;; (and (not (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13039 ;; multiple-lines
13040 ;; (forward-line 1))
13041 (not (bobp)))
13042 (while (and (re-search-backward sp-parstart nil 1)
13043 (setq found-start t)
13044 ;; Found a candidate, but need to check if it is a
13045 ;; REAL parstart.
13046 (progn (setq start (point))
13047 (move-to-left-margin)
13048 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13049 (not (and (looking-at parstart)
13050 (or (not use-hard-newlines)
13051 (bobp)
13052 (get-text-property
13053 (1- start) 'hard)))))
13054 (setq found-start nil)
13055 (goto-char start))
13056 found-start)
13057 ;; Found one.
13058 (progn
13059 ;; Move forward over paragraph separators.
13060 ;; We know this cannot reach the place we started
13061 ;; because we know we moved back over a non-separator.
13062 (while (and (not (eobp))
13063 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13064 (looking-at parsep)))
13065 (forward-line 1))
13066 ;; If line before paragraph is just margin, back up to there.
13067 (end-of-line 0)
13068 (if (> (current-column) (current-left-margin))
13069 (forward-char 1)
13070 (skip-chars-backward " \t")
13071 (if (not (bolp))
13072 (forward-line 1))))
13073 ;; No starter or separator line => use buffer beg.
13074 (goto-char (point-min))))))
13075
13076 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13077 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13078 (while (and (not (eobp))
13079 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13080 (looking-at parsep))
13081 (forward-line 1))
13082 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13083 ;; ... and one more line.
13084 (forward-line 1)
13085 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13086 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
13087 (while (and (not (eobp))
13088 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13089 (not (looking-at parsep))
13090 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13091 (forward-line 1))
13092 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13093 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13094 (goto-char start)
13095 (not (eobp)))
13096 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13097 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13098 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13099 (and use-hard-newlines
13100 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13101 (forward-char 1))
13102 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13103 (goto-char start))))
13104 (constrain-to-field nil opoint t)
13105 ;; Return the number of steps that could not be done.
13106 arg))
13107 @end ignore
13108
13109 The @code{forward-paragraph} function moves point forward to the end
13110 of the paragraph. It is usually bound to @kbd{M-@}} and makes use of a
13111 number of functions that are important in themselves, including
13112 @code{let*}, @code{match-beginning}, and @code{looking-at}.
13113
13114 The function definition for @code{forward-paragraph} is considerably
13115 longer than the function definition for @code{forward-sentence}
13116 because it works with a paragraph, each line of which may begin with a
13117 fill prefix.
13118
13119 A fill prefix consists of a string of characters that are repeated at
13120 the beginning of each line. For example, in Lisp code, it is a
13121 convention to start each line of a paragraph-long comment with
13122 @samp{;;; }. In Text mode, four blank spaces make up another common
13123 fill prefix, creating an indented paragraph. (@xref{Fill Prefix, , ,
13124 emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for more information about fill
13125 prefixes.)
13126
13127 The existence of a fill prefix means that in addition to being able to
13128 find the end of a paragraph whose lines begin on the left-most
13129 column, the @code{forward-paragraph} function must be able to find the
13130 end of a paragraph when all or many of the lines in the buffer begin
13131 with the fill prefix.
13132
13133 Moreover, it is sometimes practical to ignore a fill prefix that
13134 exists, especially when blank lines separate paragraphs.
13135 This is an added complication.
13136
13137 @menu
13138 * forward-paragraph in brief:: Key parts of the function definition.
13139 * fwd-para let:: The @code{let*} expression.
13140 * fwd-para while:: The forward motion @code{while} loop.
13141 @end menu
13142
13143 @node forward-paragraph in brief, fwd-para let, forward-paragraph, forward-paragraph
13144 @ifnottex
13145 @unnumberedsubsec Shortened @code{forward-paragraph} function definition
13146 @end ifnottex
13147
13148 Rather than print all of the @code{forward-paragraph} function, we
13149 will only print parts of it. Read without preparation, the function
13150 can be daunting!
13151
13152 @need 800
13153 In outline, the function looks like this:
13154
13155 @smallexample
13156 @group
13157 (defun forward-paragraph (&optional arg)
13158 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
13159 (interactive "p")
13160 (or arg (setq arg 1))
13161 (let*
13162 @var{varlist}
13163 (while (and (< arg 0) (not (bobp))) ; @r{backward-moving-code}
13164 @dots{}
13165 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp))) ; @r{forward-moving-code}
13166 @dots{}
13167 @end group
13168 @end smallexample
13169
13170 The first parts of the function are routine: the function's argument
13171 list consists of one optional argument. Documentation follows.
13172
13173 The lower case @samp{p} in the @code{interactive} declaration means
13174 that the processed prefix argument, if any, is passed to the function.
13175 This will be a number, and is the repeat count of how many paragraphs
13176 point will move. The @code{or} expression in the next line handles
13177 the common case when no argument is passed to the function, which occurs
13178 if the function is called from other code rather than interactively.
13179 This case was described earlier. (@xref{forward-sentence, The
13180 @code{forward-sentence} function}.) Now we reach the end of the
13181 familiar part of this function.
13182
13183 @node fwd-para let, fwd-para while, forward-paragraph in brief, forward-paragraph
13184 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{let*} expression
13185
13186 The next line of the @code{forward-paragraph} function begins a
13187 @code{let*} expression. This is a different than @code{let}. The
13188 symbol is @code{let*} not @code{let}.
13189
13190 The @code{let*} special form is like @code{let} except that Emacs sets
13191 each variable in sequence, one after another, and variables in the
13192 latter part of the varlist can make use of the values to which Emacs
13193 set variables in the earlier part of the varlist.
13194
13195 @ignore
13196 ( refappend save-excursion, , code save-excursion in code append-to-buffer .)
13197 @end ignore
13198
13199 (@ref{append save-excursion, , @code{save-excursion} in @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
13200
13201 In the @code{let*} expression in this function, Emacs binds a total of
13202 seven variables: @code{opoint}, @code{fill-prefix-regexp},
13203 @code{parstart}, @code{parsep}, @code{sp-parstart}, @code{start}, and
13204 @code{found-start}.
13205
13206 The variable @code{parsep} appears twice, first, to remove instances
13207 of @samp{^}, and second, to handle fill prefixes.
13208
13209 The variable @code{opoint} is just the value of @code{point}. As you
13210 can guess, it is used in a @code{constrain-to-field} expression, just
13211 as in @code{forward-sentence}.
13212
13213 The variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is set to the value returned by
13214 evaluating the following list:
13215
13216 @smallexample
13217 @group
13218 (and fill-prefix
13219 (not (equal fill-prefix ""))
13220 (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
13221 (regexp-quote fill-prefix))
13222 @end group
13223 @end smallexample
13224
13225 @noindent
13226 This is an expression whose first element is the @code{and} special form.
13227
13228 As we learned earlier (@pxref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new}
13229 function}), the @code{and} special form evaluates each of its
13230 arguments until one of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, in
13231 which case the @code{and} expression returns @code{nil}; however, if
13232 none of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, the value
13233 resulting from evaluating the last argument is returned. (Since such
13234 a value is not @code{nil}, it is considered true in Lisp.) In other
13235 words, an @code{and} expression returns a true value only if all its
13236 arguments are true.
13237 @findex and
13238
13239 In this case, the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is bound to a
13240 non-@code{nil} value only if the following four expressions produce a
13241 true (i.e., a non-@code{nil}) value when they are evaluated; otherwise,
13242 @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is bound to @code{nil}.
13243
13244 @table @code
13245 @item fill-prefix
13246 When this variable is evaluated, the value of the fill prefix, if any,
13247 is returned. If there is no fill prefix, this variable returns
13248 @code{nil}.
13249
13250 @item (not (equal fill-prefix "")
13251 This expression checks whether an existing fill prefix is an empty
13252 string, that is, a string with no characters in it. An empty string is
13253 not a useful fill prefix.
13254
13255 @item (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
13256 This expression returns @code{nil} if the variable
13257 @code{paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix} has been turned on by being set to a
13258 true value such as @code{t}.
13259
13260 @item (regexp-quote fill-prefix)
13261 This is the last argument to the @code{and} special form. If all the
13262 arguments to the @code{and} are true, the value resulting from
13263 evaluating this expression will be returned by the @code{and} expression
13264 and bound to the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp},
13265 @end table
13266
13267 @findex regexp-quote
13268 @noindent
13269 The result of evaluating this @code{and} expression successfully is that
13270 @code{fill-prefix-regexp} will be bound to the value of
13271 @code{fill-prefix} as modified by the @code{regexp-quote} function.
13272 What @code{regexp-quote} does is read a string and return a regular
13273 expression that will exactly match the string and match nothing else.
13274 This means that @code{fill-prefix-regexp} will be set to a value that
13275 will exactly match the fill prefix if the fill prefix exists.
13276 Otherwise, the variable will be set to @code{nil}.
13277
13278 The next two local variables in the @code{let*} expression are
13279 designed to remove instances of @samp{^} from @code{parstart} and
13280 @code{parsep}, the local variables which indicate the paragraph start
13281 and the paragraph separator. The next expression sets @code{parsep}
13282 again. That is to handle fill prefixes.
13283
13284 This is the setting that requires the definition call @code{let*}
13285 rather than @code{let}. The true-or-false-test for the @code{if}
13286 depends on whether the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} evaluates to
13287 @code{nil} or some other value.
13288
13289 If @code{fill-prefix-regexp} does not have a value, Emacs evaluates
13290 the else-part of the @code{if} expression and binds @code{parsep} to
13291 its local value. (@code{parsep} is a regular expression that matches
13292 what separates paragraphs.)
13293
13294 But if @code{fill-prefix-regexp} does have a value, Emacs evaluates
13295 the then-part of the @code{if} expression and binds @code{parsep} to a
13296 regular expression that includes the @code{fill-prefix-regexp} as part
13297 of the pattern.
13298
13299 Specifically, @code{parsep} is set to the original value of the
13300 paragraph separate regular expression concatenated with an alternative
13301 expression that consists of the @code{fill-prefix-regexp} followed by
13302 optional whitespace to the end of the line. The whitespace is defined
13303 by @w{@code{"[ \t]*$"}}.) The @samp{\\|} defines this portion of the
13304 regexp as an alternative to @code{parsep}.
13305
13306 According to a comment in the code, the next local variable,
13307 @code{sp-parstart}, is used for searching, and then the final two,
13308 @code{start} and @code{found-start}, are set to @code{nil}.
13309
13310 Now we get into the body of the @code{let*}. The first part of the body
13311 of the @code{let*} deals with the case when the function is given a
13312 negative argument and is therefore moving backwards. We will skip this
13313 section.
13314
13315 @node fwd-para while, , fwd-para let, forward-paragraph
13316 @unnumberedsubsec The forward motion @code{while} loop
13317
13318 The second part of the body of the @code{let*} deals with forward
13319 motion. It is a @code{while} loop that repeats itself so long as the
13320 value of @code{arg} is greater than zero. In the most common use of
13321 the function, the value of the argument is 1, so the body of the
13322 @code{while} loop is evaluated exactly once, and the cursor moves
13323 forward one paragraph.
13324
13325 @ignore
13326 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13327
13328 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13329 (while (and (not (eobp))
13330 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13331 (looking-at parsep))
13332 (forward-line 1))
13333 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13334 ;; ... and one more line.
13335 (forward-line 1)
13336
13337 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13338 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
13339 (while (and (not (eobp))
13340 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13341 (not (looking-at parsep))
13342 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13343 (forward-line 1))
13344
13345 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13346 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13347 (goto-char start)
13348 (not (eobp)))
13349 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13350 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13351 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13352 (and use-hard-newlines
13353 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13354 (forward-char 1))
13355
13356 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13357 (goto-char start))))
13358 @end ignore
13359
13360 This part handles three situations: when point is between paragraphs,
13361 when there is a fill prefix and when there is no fill prefix.
13362
13363 @need 800
13364 The @code{while} loop looks like this:
13365
13366 @smallexample
13367 @group
13368 ;; @r{going forwards and not at the end of the buffer}
13369 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13370
13371 ;; @r{between paragraphs}
13372 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13373 (while (and (not (eobp))
13374 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13375 (looking-at parsep))
13376 (forward-line 1))
13377 ;; @r{This decrements the loop}
13378 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13379 ;; ... and one more line.
13380 (forward-line 1)
13381 @end group
13382
13383 @group
13384 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13385 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart;
13386 ;; we go forward line by line
13387 (while (and (not (eobp))
13388 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13389 (not (looking-at parsep))
13390 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13391 (forward-line 1))
13392 @end group
13393
13394 @group
13395 ;; There is no fill prefix;
13396 ;; we go forward character by character
13397 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13398 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13399 (goto-char start)
13400 (not (eobp)))
13401 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13402 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13403 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13404 (and use-hard-newlines
13405 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13406 (forward-char 1))
13407 @end group
13408
13409 @group
13410 ;; and if there is no fill prefix and if we are not at the end,
13411 ;; go to whatever was found in the regular expression search
13412 ;; for sp-parstart
13413 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13414 (goto-char start))))
13415 @end group
13416 @end smallexample
13417
13418 @findex eobp
13419 We can see that this is a decrementing counter @code{while} loop,
13420 using the expression @code{(setq arg (1- arg))} as the decrementer.
13421 That expression is not far from the @code{while}, but is hidden in
13422 another Lisp macro, an @code{unless} macro. Unless we are at the end
13423 of the buffer --- that is what the @code{eobp} function determines; it
13424 is an abbreviation of @samp{End Of Buffer P} --- we decrease the value
13425 of @code{arg} by one.
13426
13427 (If we are at the end of the buffer, we cannot go forward any more and
13428 the next loop of the @code{while} expression will test false since the
13429 test is an @code{and} with @code{(not (eobp))}. The @code{not}
13430 function means exactly as you expect; it is another name for
13431 @code{null}, a function that returns true when its argument is false.)
13432
13433 Interestingly, the loop count is not decremented until we leave the
13434 space between paragraphs, unless we come to the end of buffer or stop
13435 seeing the local value of the paragraph separator.
13436
13437 That second @code{while} also has a @code{(move-to-left-margin)}
13438 expression. The function is self-explanatory. It is inside a
13439 @code{progn} expression and not the last element of its body, so it is
13440 only invoked for its side effect, which is to move point to the left
13441 margin of the current line.
13442
13443 @findex looking-at
13444 The @code{looking-at} function is also self-explanatory; it returns
13445 true if the text after point matches the regular expression given as
13446 its argument.
13447
13448 The rest of the body of the loop looks difficult at first, but makes
13449 sense as you come to understand it.
13450
13451 @need 800
13452 First consider what happens if there is a fill prefix:
13453
13454 @smallexample
13455 @group
13456 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13457 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart;
13458 ;; we go forward line by line
13459 (while (and (not (eobp))
13460 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13461 (not (looking-at parsep))
13462 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13463 (forward-line 1))
13464 @end group
13465 @end smallexample
13466
13467 @noindent
13468 This expression moves point forward line by line so long
13469 as four conditions are true:
13470
13471 @enumerate
13472 @item
13473 Point is not at the end of the buffer.
13474
13475 @item
13476 We can move to the left margin of the text and are
13477 not at the end of the buffer.
13478
13479 @item
13480 The text following point does not separate paragraphs.
13481
13482 @item
13483 The pattern following point is the fill prefix regular expression.
13484 @end enumerate
13485
13486 The last condition may be puzzling, until you remember that point was
13487 moved to the beginning of the line early in the @code{forward-paragraph}
13488 function. This means that if the text has a fill prefix, the
13489 @code{looking-at} function will see it.
13490
13491 @need 1250
13492 Consider what happens when there is no fill prefix.
13493
13494 @smallexample
13495 @group
13496 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13497 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13498 (goto-char start)
13499 (not (eobp)))
13500 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13501 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13502 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13503 (and use-hard-newlines
13504 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13505 (forward-char 1))
13506 @end group
13507 @end smallexample
13508
13509 @noindent
13510 This @code{while} loop has us searching forward for
13511 @code{sp-parstart}, which is the combination of possible whitespace
13512 with a the local value of the start of a paragraph or of a paragraph
13513 separator. (The latter two are within an expression starting
13514 @code{\(?:} so that they are not referenced by the
13515 @code{match-beginning} function.)
13516
13517 @need 800
13518 The two expressions,
13519
13520 @smallexample
13521 @group
13522 (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13523 (goto-char start)
13524 @end group
13525 @end smallexample
13526
13527 @noindent
13528 mean go to the start of the text matched by the regular expression
13529 search.
13530
13531 The @code{(match-beginning 0)} expression is new. It returns a number
13532 specifying the location of the start of the text that was matched by
13533 the last search.
13534
13535 The @code{match-beginning} function is used here because of a
13536 characteristic of a forward search: a successful forward search,
13537 regardless of whether it is a plain search or a regular expression
13538 search, moves point to the end of the text that is found. In this
13539 case, a successful search moves point to the end of the pattern for
13540 @code{sp-parstart}.
13541
13542 However, we want to put point at the end of the current paragraph, not
13543 somewhere else. Indeed, since the search possibly includes the
13544 paragraph separator, point may end up at the beginning of the next one
13545 unless we use an expression that includes @code{match-beginning}.
13546
13547 @findex match-beginning
13548 When given an argument of 0, @code{match-beginning} returns the
13549 position that is the start of the text matched by the most recent
13550 search. In this case, the most recent search looks for
13551 @code{sp-parstart}. The @code{(match-beginning 0)} expression returns
13552 the beginning position of that pattern, rather than the end position
13553 of that pattern.
13554
13555 (Incidentally, when passed a positive number as an argument, the
13556 @code{match-beginning} function returns the location of point at that
13557 parenthesized expression in the last search unless that parenthesized
13558 expression begins with @code{\(?:}. I don't know why @code{\(?:}
13559 appears here since the argument is 0.)
13560
13561 @need 1250
13562 The last expression when there is no fill prefix is
13563
13564 @smallexample
13565 @group
13566 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13567 (goto-char start))))
13568 @end group
13569 @end smallexample
13570
13571 @noindent
13572 This says that if there is no fill prefix and if we are not at the
13573 end, point should move to the beginning of whatever was found by the
13574 regular expression search for @code{sp-parstart}.
13575
13576 The full definition for the @code{forward-paragraph} function not only
13577 includes code for going forwards, but also code for going backwards.
13578
13579 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs and you want to see the
13580 whole function, you can type @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function})
13581 and the name of the function. This gives you the function
13582 documentation and the name of the library containing the function's
13583 source. Place point over the name of the library and press the RET
13584 key; you will be taken directly to the source. (Be sure to install
13585 your sources! Without them, you are like a person who tries to drive
13586 a car with his eyes shut!)
13587
13588 @node etags, Regexp Review, forward-paragraph, Regexp Search
13589 @section Create Your Own @file{TAGS} File
13590 @findex etags
13591 @cindex @file{TAGS} file, create own
13592
13593 Besides @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}), another way to see the
13594 source of a function is to type @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) and the
13595 name of the function when prompted for it. This is a good habit to
13596 get into. The @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) command takes you directly
13597 to the source for a function, variable, or node. The function depends
13598 on tags tables to tell it where to go.
13599
13600 If the @code{find-tag} function first asks you for the name of a
13601 @file{TAGS} table, give it the name of a @file{TAGS} file such as
13602 @file{/usr/local/src/emacs/src/TAGS}. (The exact path to your
13603 @file{TAGS} file depends on how your copy of Emacs was installed. I
13604 just told you the location that provides both my C and my Emacs Lisp
13605 sources.)
13606
13607 You can also create your own @file{TAGS} file for directories that
13608 lack one.
13609
13610 You often need to build and install tags tables yourself. They are
13611 not built automatically. A tags table is called a @file{TAGS} file;
13612 the name is in upper case letters.
13613
13614 You can create a @file{TAGS} file by calling the @code{etags} program
13615 that comes as a part of the Emacs distribution. Usually, @code{etags}
13616 is compiled and installed when Emacs is built. (@code{etags} is not
13617 an Emacs Lisp function or a part of Emacs; it is a C program.)
13618
13619 @need 1250
13620 To create a @file{TAGS} file, first switch to the directory in which
13621 you want to create the file. In Emacs you can do this with the
13622 @kbd{M-x cd} command, or by visiting a file in the directory, or by
13623 listing the directory with @kbd{C-x d} (@code{dired}). Then run the
13624 compile command, with @w{@code{etags *.el}} as the command to execute
13625
13626 @smallexample
13627 M-x compile RET etags *.el RET
13628 @end smallexample
13629
13630 @noindent
13631 to create a @file{TAGS} file for Emacs Lisp.
13632
13633 For example, if you have a large number of files in your
13634 @file{~/emacs} directory, as I do---I have 137 @file{.el} files in it,
13635 of which I load 12---you can create a @file{TAGS} file for the Emacs
13636 Lisp files in that directory.
13637
13638 @need 1250
13639 The @code{etags} program takes all the usual shell `wildcards'. For
13640 example, if you have two directories for which you want a single
13641 @file{TAGS} file, type @w{@code{etags *.el ../elisp/*.el}}, where
13642 @file{../elisp/} is the second directory:
13643
13644 @smallexample
13645 M-x compile RET etags *.el ../elisp/*.el RET
13646 @end smallexample
13647
13648 @need 1250
13649 Type
13650
13651 @smallexample
13652 M-x compile RET etags --help RET
13653 @end smallexample
13654
13655 @noindent
13656 to see a list of the options accepted by @code{etags} as well as a
13657 list of supported languages.
13658
13659 The @code{etags} program handles more than 20 languages, including
13660 Emacs Lisp, Common Lisp, Scheme, C, C++, Ada, Fortran, HTML, Java,
13661 LaTeX, Pascal, Perl, Postscript, Python, TeX, Texinfo, makefiles, and
13662 most assemblers. The program has no switches for specifying the
13663 language; it recognizes the language in an input file according to its
13664 file name and contents.
13665
13666 @file{etags} is very helpful when you are writing code yourself and
13667 want to refer back to functions you have already written. Just run
13668 @code{etags} again at intervals as you write new functions, so they
13669 become part of the @file{TAGS} file.
13670
13671 If you think an appropriate @file{TAGS} file already exists for what
13672 you want, but do not know where it is, you can use the @code{locate}
13673 program to attempt to find it.
13674
13675 Type @w{@kbd{M-x locate @key{RET} TAGS @key{RET}}} and Emacs will list
13676 for you the full path names of all your @file{TAGS} files. On my
13677 system, this command lists 34 @file{TAGS} files. On the other hand, a
13678 `plain vanilla' system I recently installed did not contain any
13679 @file{TAGS} files.
13680
13681 If the tags table you want has been created, you can use the @code{M-x
13682 visit-tags-table} command to specify it. Otherwise, you will need to
13683 create the tag table yourself and then use @code{M-x
13684 visit-tags-table}.
13685
13686 @subsubheading Building Tags in the Emacs sources
13687 @cindex Building Tags in the Emacs sources
13688 @cindex Tags in the Emacs sources
13689 @findex make tags
13690
13691 The GNU Emacs sources come with a @file{Makefile} that contains a
13692 sophisticated @code{etags} command that creates, collects, and merges
13693 tags tables from all over the Emacs sources and puts the information
13694 into one @file{TAGS} file in the @file{src/} directory. (The
13695 @file{src/} directory is below the top level of your Emacs directory.)
13696
13697 @need 1250
13698 To build this @file{TAGS} file, go to the top level of your Emacs
13699 source directory and run the compile command @code{make tags}:
13700
13701 @smallexample
13702 M-x compile RET make tags RET
13703 @end smallexample
13704
13705 @noindent
13706 (The @code{make tags} command works well with the GNU Emacs sources,
13707 as well as with some other source packages.)
13708
13709 For more information, see @ref{Tags, , Tag Tables, emacs, The GNU Emacs
13710 Manual}.
13711
13712 @node Regexp Review, re-search Exercises, etags, Regexp Search
13713 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
13714 @section Review
13715
13716 Here is a brief summary of some recently introduced functions.
13717
13718 @table @code
13719 @item while
13720 Repeatedly evaluate the body of the expression so long as the first
13721 element of the body tests true. Then return @code{nil}. (The
13722 expression is evaluated only for its side effects.)
13723
13724 @need 1250
13725 For example:
13726
13727 @smallexample
13728 @group
13729 (let ((foo 2))
13730 (while (> foo 0)
13731 (insert (format "foo is %d.\n" foo))
13732 (setq foo (1- foo))))
13733
13734 @result{} foo is 2.
13735 foo is 1.
13736 nil
13737 @end group
13738 @end smallexample
13739
13740 @noindent
13741 (The @code{insert} function inserts its arguments at point; the
13742 @code{format} function returns a string formatted from its arguments
13743 the way @code{message} formats its arguments; @code{\n} produces a new
13744 line.)
13745
13746 @item re-search-forward
13747 Search for a pattern, and if the pattern is found, move point to rest
13748 just after it.
13749
13750 @noindent
13751 Takes four arguments, like @code{search-forward}:
13752
13753 @enumerate
13754 @item
13755 A regular expression that specifies the pattern to search for.
13756 (Remember to put quotation marks around this argument!)
13757
13758 @item
13759 Optionally, the limit of the search.
13760
13761 @item
13762 Optionally, what to do if the search fails, return @code{nil} or an
13763 error message.
13764
13765 @item
13766 Optionally, how many times to repeat the search; if negative, the
13767 search goes backwards.
13768 @end enumerate
13769
13770 @item let*
13771 Bind some variables locally to particular values,
13772 and then evaluate the remaining arguments, returning the value of the
13773 last one. While binding the local variables, use the local values of
13774 variables bound earlier, if any.
13775
13776 @need 1250
13777 For example:
13778
13779 @smallexample
13780 @group
13781 (let* ((foo 7)
13782 (bar (* 3 foo)))
13783 (message "`bar' is %d." bar))
13784 @result{} `bar' is 21.
13785 @end group
13786 @end smallexample
13787
13788 @item match-beginning
13789 Return the position of the start of the text found by the last regular
13790 expression search.
13791
13792 @item looking-at
13793 Return @code{t} for true if the text after point matches the argument,
13794 which should be a regular expression.
13795
13796 @item eobp
13797 Return @code{t} for true if point is at the end of the accessible part
13798 of a buffer. The end of the accessible part is the end of the buffer
13799 if the buffer is not narrowed; it is the end of the narrowed part if
13800 the buffer is narrowed.
13801 @end table
13802
13803 @need 1500
13804 @node re-search Exercises, , Regexp Review, Regexp Search
13805 @section Exercises with @code{re-search-forward}
13806
13807 @itemize @bullet
13808 @item
13809 Write a function to search for a regular expression that matches two
13810 or more blank lines in sequence.
13811
13812 @item
13813 Write a function to search for duplicated words, such as `the the'.
13814 @xref{Regexps, , Syntax of Regular Expressions, emacs, The GNU Emacs
13815 Manual}, for information on how to write a regexp (a regular
13816 expression) to match a string that is composed of two identical
13817 halves. You can devise several regexps; some are better than others.
13818 The function I use is described in an appendix, along with several
13819 regexps. @xref{the-the, , @code{the-the} Duplicated Words Function}.
13820 @end itemize
13821
13822 @node Counting Words, Words in a defun, Regexp Search, Top
13823 @chapter Counting: Repetition and Regexps
13824 @cindex Repetition for word counting
13825 @cindex Regular expressions for word counting
13826
13827 Repetition and regular expression searches are powerful tools that you
13828 often use when you write code in Emacs Lisp. This chapter illustrates
13829 the use of regular expression searches through the construction of
13830 word count commands using @code{while} loops and recursion.
13831
13832 @menu
13833 * Why Count Words::
13834 * @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: Use a regexp, but find a problem.
13835 * recursive-count-words:: Start with case of no words in region.
13836 * Counting Exercise::
13837 @end menu
13838
13839 @node Why Count Words, @value{COUNT-WORDS}, Counting Words, Counting Words
13840 @ifnottex
13841 @unnumberedsec Counting words
13842 @end ifnottex
13843
13844 The standard Emacs distribution contains functions for counting the
13845 number of lines and words within a region.
13846
13847 Certain types of writing ask you to count words. Thus, if you write
13848 an essay, you may be limited to 800 words; if you write a novel, you
13849 may discipline yourself to write 1000 words a day. It seems odd, but
13850 for a long time, Emacs lacked a word count command. Perhaps people used
13851 Emacs mostly for code or types of documentation that did not require
13852 word counts; or perhaps they restricted themselves to the operating
13853 system word count command, @code{wc}. Alternatively, people may have
13854 followed the publishers' convention and computed a word count by
13855 dividing the number of characters in a document by five.
13856
13857 There are many ways to implement a command to count words. Here are
13858 some examples, which you may wish to compare with the standard Emacs
13859 command, @code{count-words-region}.
13860
13861 @node @value{COUNT-WORDS}, recursive-count-words, Why Count Words, Counting Words
13862 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
13863 @section The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} Function
13864 @findex @value{COUNT-WORDS}
13865
13866 A word count command could count words in a line, paragraph, region,
13867 or buffer. What should the command cover? You could design the
13868 command to count the number of words in a complete buffer. However,
13869 the Emacs tradition encourages flexibility---you may want to count
13870 words in just a section, rather than all of a buffer. So it makes
13871 more sense to design the command to count the number of words in a
13872 region. Once you have a command to count words in a region, you can,
13873 if you wish, count words in a whole buffer by marking it with
13874 @w{@kbd{C-x h}} (@code{mark-whole-buffer}).
13875
13876 Clearly, counting words is a repetitive act: starting from the
13877 beginning of the region, you count the first word, then the second
13878 word, then the third word, and so on, until you reach the end of the
13879 region. This means that word counting is ideally suited to recursion
13880 or to a @code{while} loop.
13881
13882 @menu
13883 * Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: The definition using a @code{while} loop.
13884 * Whitespace Bug:: The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
13885 @end menu
13886
13887 @node Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}, Whitespace Bug, @value{COUNT-WORDS}, @value{COUNT-WORDS}
13888 @ifnottex
13889 @unnumberedsubsec Designing @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13890 @end ifnottex
13891
13892 First, we will implement the word count command with a @code{while}
13893 loop, then with recursion. The command will, of course, be
13894 interactive.
13895
13896 @need 800
13897 The template for an interactive function definition is, as always:
13898
13899 @smallexample
13900 @group
13901 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
13902 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
13903 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
13904 @var{body}@dots{})
13905 @end group
13906 @end smallexample
13907
13908 What we need to do is fill in the slots.
13909
13910 The name of the function should be self-explanatory and similar to the
13911 existing @code{count-lines-region} name. This makes the name easier
13912 to remember. @code{count-words-region} is the obvious choice. Since
13913 that name is now used for the standard Emacs command to count words, we
13914 will name our implementation @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
13915
13916 The function counts words within a region. This means that the
13917 argument list must contain symbols that are bound to the two
13918 positions, the beginning and end of the region. These two positions
13919 can be called @samp{beginning} and @samp{end} respectively. The first
13920 line of the documentation should be a single sentence, since that is
13921 all that is printed as documentation by a command such as
13922 @code{apropos}. The interactive expression will be of the form
13923 @samp{(interactive "r")}, since that will cause Emacs to pass the
13924 beginning and end of the region to the function's argument list. All
13925 this is routine.
13926
13927 The body of the function needs to be written to do three tasks:
13928 first, to set up conditions under which the @code{while} loop can
13929 count words, second, to run the @code{while} loop, and third, to send
13930 a message to the user.
13931
13932 When a user calls @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}, point may be at the
13933 beginning or the end of the region. However, the counting process
13934 must start at the beginning of the region. This means we will want
13935 to put point there if it is not already there. Executing
13936 @code{(goto-char beginning)} ensures this. Of course, we will want to
13937 return point to its expected position when the function finishes its
13938 work. For this reason, the body must be enclosed in a
13939 @code{save-excursion} expression.
13940
13941 The central part of the body of the function consists of a
13942 @code{while} loop in which one expression jumps point forward word by
13943 word, and another expression counts those jumps. The true-or-false-test
13944 of the @code{while} loop should test true so long as point should jump
13945 forward, and false when point is at the end of the region.
13946
13947 We could use @code{(forward-word 1)} as the expression for moving point
13948 forward word by word, but it is easier to see what Emacs identifies as a
13949 `word' if we use a regular expression search.
13950
13951 A regular expression search that finds the pattern for which it is
13952 searching leaves point after the last character matched. This means
13953 that a succession of successful word searches will move point forward
13954 word by word.
13955
13956 As a practical matter, we want the regular expression search to jump
13957 over whitespace and punctuation between words as well as over the
13958 words themselves. A regexp that refuses to jump over interword
13959 whitespace would never jump more than one word! This means that
13960 the regexp should include the whitespace and punctuation that follows
13961 a word, if any, as well as the word itself. (A word may end a buffer
13962 and not have any following whitespace or punctuation, so that part of
13963 the regexp must be optional.)
13964
13965 Thus, what we want for the regexp is a pattern defining one or more
13966 word constituent characters followed, optionally, by one or more
13967 characters that are not word constituents. The regular expression for
13968 this is:
13969
13970 @smallexample
13971 \w+\W*
13972 @end smallexample
13973
13974 @noindent
13975 The buffer's syntax table determines which characters are and are not
13976 word constituents. (@xref{Syntax, , What Constitutes a Word or
13977 Symbol?}, for more about syntax. Also, see @ref{Syntax, Syntax, The
13978 Syntax Table, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, and @ref{Syntax Tables, ,
13979 Syntax Tables, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
13980
13981 @need 800
13982 The search expression looks like this:
13983
13984 @smallexample
13985 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
13986 @end smallexample
13987
13988 @noindent
13989 (Note that paired backslashes precede the @samp{w} and @samp{W}. A
13990 single backslash has special meaning to the Emacs Lisp interpreter.
13991 It indicates that the following character is interpreted differently
13992 than usual. For example, the two characters, @samp{\n}, stand for
13993 @samp{newline}, rather than for a backslash followed by @samp{n}. Two
13994 backslashes in a row stand for an ordinary, `unspecial' backslash, so
13995 Emacs Lisp interpreter ends of seeing a single backslash followed by a
13996 letter. So it discovers the letter is special.)
13997
13998 We need a counter to count how many words there are; this variable
13999 must first be set to 0 and then incremented each time Emacs goes
14000 around the @code{while} loop. The incrementing expression is simply:
14001
14002 @smallexample
14003 (setq count (1+ count))
14004 @end smallexample
14005
14006 Finally, we want to tell the user how many words there are in the
14007 region. The @code{message} function is intended for presenting this
14008 kind of information to the user. The message has to be phrased so
14009 that it reads properly regardless of how many words there are in the
14010 region: we don't want to say that ``there are 1 words in the region''.
14011 The conflict between singular and plural is ungrammatical. We can
14012 solve this problem by using a conditional expression that evaluates
14013 different messages depending on the number of words in the region.
14014 There are three possibilities: no words in the region, one word in the
14015 region, and more than one word. This means that the @code{cond}
14016 special form is appropriate.
14017
14018 @need 1500
14019 All this leads to the following function definition:
14020
14021 @smallexample
14022 @group
14023 ;;; @r{First version; has bugs!}
14024 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14025 "Print number of words in the region.
14026 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent
14027 character followed by at least one character that
14028 is not a word-constituent. The buffer's syntax
14029 table determines which characters these are."
14030 (interactive "r")
14031 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14032 @end group
14033
14034 @group
14035 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14036 (save-excursion
14037 (goto-char beginning)
14038 (let ((count 0))
14039 @end group
14040
14041 @group
14042 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
14043 (while (< (point) end)
14044 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
14045 (setq count (1+ count)))
14046 @end group
14047
14048 @group
14049 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14050 (cond ((zerop count)
14051 (message
14052 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14053 ((= 1 count)
14054 (message
14055 "The region has 1 word."))
14056 (t
14057 (message
14058 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14059 @end group
14060 @end smallexample
14061
14062 @noindent
14063 As written, the function works, but not in all circumstances.
14064
14065 @node Whitespace Bug, , Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}, @value{COUNT-WORDS}
14066 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
14067 @subsection The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14068
14069 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} command described in the preceding
14070 section has two bugs, or rather, one bug with two manifestations.
14071 First, if you mark a region containing only whitespace in the middle
14072 of some text, the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} command tells you that the
14073 region contains one word! Second, if you mark a region containing
14074 only whitespace at the end of the buffer or the accessible portion of
14075 a narrowed buffer, the command displays an error message that looks
14076 like this:
14077
14078 @smallexample
14079 Search failed: "\\w+\\W*"
14080 @end smallexample
14081
14082 If you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can test for these
14083 bugs yourself.
14084
14085 First, evaluate the function in the usual manner to install it.
14086 @ifinfo
14087 Here is a copy of the definition. Place your cursor after the closing
14088 parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e} to install it.
14089
14090 @smallexample
14091 @group
14092 ;; @r{First version; has bugs!}
14093 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14094 "Print number of words in the region.
14095 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent character followed
14096 by at least one character that is not a word-constituent. The buffer's
14097 syntax table determines which characters these are."
14098 @end group
14099 @group
14100 (interactive "r")
14101 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14102 @end group
14103
14104 @group
14105 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14106 (save-excursion
14107 (goto-char beginning)
14108 (let ((count 0))
14109 @end group
14110
14111 @group
14112 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
14113 (while (< (point) end)
14114 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
14115 (setq count (1+ count)))
14116 @end group
14117
14118 @group
14119 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14120 (cond ((zerop count)
14121 (message "The region does NOT have any words."))
14122 ((= 1 count) (message "The region has 1 word."))
14123 (t (message "The region has %d words." count))))))
14124 @end group
14125 @end smallexample
14126 @end ifinfo
14127
14128 @need 1000
14129 If you wish, you can also install this keybinding by evaluating it:
14130
14131 @smallexample
14132 (global-set-key "\C-c=" '@value{COUNT-WORDS})
14133 @end smallexample
14134
14135 To conduct the first test, set mark and point to the beginning and end
14136 of the following line and then type @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x
14137 @value{COUNT-WORDS}} if you have not bound @kbd{C-c =}):
14138
14139 @smallexample
14140 one two three
14141 @end smallexample
14142
14143 @noindent
14144 Emacs will tell you, correctly, that the region has three words.
14145
14146 Repeat the test, but place mark at the beginning of the line and place
14147 point just @emph{before} the word @samp{one}. Again type the command
14148 @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}). Emacs should tell you
14149 that the region has no words, since it is composed only of the
14150 whitespace at the beginning of the line. But instead Emacs tells you
14151 that the region has one word!
14152
14153 For the third test, copy the sample line to the end of the
14154 @file{*scratch*} buffer and then type several spaces at the end of the
14155 line. Place mark right after the word @samp{three} and point at the
14156 end of line. (The end of the line will be the end of the buffer.)
14157 Type @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}) as you did before.
14158 Again, Emacs should tell you that the region has no words, since it is
14159 composed only of the whitespace at the end of the line. Instead,
14160 Emacs displays an error message saying @samp{Search failed}.
14161
14162 The two bugs stem from the same problem.
14163
14164 Consider the first manifestation of the bug, in which the command
14165 tells you that the whitespace at the beginning of the line contains
14166 one word. What happens is this: The @code{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14167 command moves point to the beginning of the region. The @code{while}
14168 tests whether the value of point is smaller than the value of
14169 @code{end}, which it is. Consequently, the regular expression search
14170 looks for and finds the first word. It leaves point after the word.
14171 @code{count} is set to one. The @code{while} loop repeats; but this
14172 time the value of point is larger than the value of @code{end}, the
14173 loop is exited; and the function displays a message saying the number
14174 of words in the region is one. In brief, the regular expression
14175 search looks for and finds the word even though it is outside
14176 the marked region.
14177
14178 In the second manifestation of the bug, the region is whitespace at
14179 the end of the buffer. Emacs says @samp{Search failed}. What happens
14180 is that the true-or-false-test in the @code{while} loop tests true, so
14181 the search expression is executed. But since there are no more words
14182 in the buffer, the search fails.
14183
14184 In both manifestations of the bug, the search extends or attempts to
14185 extend outside of the region.
14186
14187 The solution is to limit the search to the region---this is a fairly
14188 simple action, but as you may have come to expect, it is not quite as
14189 simple as you might think.
14190
14191 As we have seen, the @code{re-search-forward} function takes a search
14192 pattern as its first argument. But in addition to this first,
14193 mandatory argument, it accepts three optional arguments. The optional
14194 second argument bounds the search. The optional third argument, if
14195 @code{t}, causes the function to return @code{nil} rather than signal
14196 an error if the search fails. The optional fourth argument is a
14197 repeat count. (In Emacs, you can see a function's documentation by
14198 typing @kbd{C-h f}, the name of the function, and then @key{RET}.)
14199
14200 In the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition, the value of the end of
14201 the region is held by the variable @code{end} which is passed as an
14202 argument to the function. Thus, we can add @code{end} as an argument
14203 to the regular expression search expression:
14204
14205 @smallexample
14206 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end)
14207 @end smallexample
14208
14209 However, if you make only this change to the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14210 definition and then test the new version of the definition on a
14211 stretch of whitespace, you will receive an error message saying
14212 @samp{Search failed}.
14213
14214 What happens is this: the search is limited to the region, and fails
14215 as you expect because there are no word-constituent characters in the
14216 region. Since it fails, we receive an error message. But we do not
14217 want to receive an error message in this case; we want to receive the
14218 message that "The region does NOT have any words."
14219
14220 The solution to this problem is to provide @code{re-search-forward}
14221 with a third argument of @code{t}, which causes the function to return
14222 @code{nil} rather than signal an error if the search fails.
14223
14224 However, if you make this change and try it, you will see the message
14225 ``Counting words in region ... '' and @dots{} you will keep on seeing
14226 that message @dots{}, until you type @kbd{C-g} (@code{keyboard-quit}).
14227
14228 Here is what happens: the search is limited to the region, as before,
14229 and it fails because there are no word-constituent characters in the
14230 region, as expected. Consequently, the @code{re-search-forward}
14231 expression returns @code{nil}. It does nothing else. In particular,
14232 it does not move point, which it does as a side effect if it finds the
14233 search target. After the @code{re-search-forward} expression returns
14234 @code{nil}, the next expression in the @code{while} loop is evaluated.
14235 This expression increments the count. Then the loop repeats. The
14236 true-or-false-test tests true because the value of point is still less
14237 than the value of end, since the @code{re-search-forward} expression
14238 did not move point. @dots{} and the cycle repeats @dots{}
14239
14240 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition requires yet another
14241 modification, to cause the true-or-false-test of the @code{while} loop
14242 to test false if the search fails. Put another way, there are two
14243 conditions that must be satisfied in the true-or-false-test before the
14244 word count variable is incremented: point must still be within the
14245 region and the search expression must have found a word to count.
14246
14247 Since both the first condition and the second condition must be true
14248 together, the two expressions, the region test and the search
14249 expression, can be joined with an @code{and} special form and embedded in
14250 the @code{while} loop as the true-or-false-test, like this:
14251
14252 @smallexample
14253 (and (< (point) end) (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end t))
14254 @end smallexample
14255
14256 @c colon in printed section title causes problem in Info cross reference
14257 @c also trouble with an overfull hbox
14258 @iftex
14259 @noindent
14260 (For information about @code{and}, see
14261 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.)
14262 @end iftex
14263 @ifinfo
14264 @noindent
14265 (@xref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, for
14266 information about @code{and}.)
14267 @end ifinfo
14268
14269 The @code{re-search-forward} expression returns @code{t} if the search
14270 succeeds and as a side effect moves point. Consequently, as words are
14271 found, point is moved through the region. When the search expression
14272 fails to find another word, or when point reaches the end of the
14273 region, the true-or-false-test tests false, the @code{while} loop
14274 exits, and the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function displays one or
14275 other of its messages.
14276
14277 After incorporating these final changes, the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14278 works without bugs (or at least, without bugs that I have found!).
14279 Here is what it looks like:
14280
14281 @smallexample
14282 @group
14283 ;;; @r{Final version:} @code{while}
14284 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14285 "Print number of words in the region."
14286 (interactive "r")
14287 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14288 @end group
14289
14290 @group
14291 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14292 (save-excursion
14293 (let ((count 0))
14294 (goto-char beginning)
14295 @end group
14296
14297 @group
14298 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
14299 (while (and (< (point) end)
14300 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end t))
14301 (setq count (1+ count)))
14302 @end group
14303
14304 @group
14305 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14306 (cond ((zerop count)
14307 (message
14308 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14309 ((= 1 count)
14310 (message
14311 "The region has 1 word."))
14312 (t
14313 (message
14314 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14315 @end group
14316 @end smallexample
14317
14318 @node recursive-count-words, Counting Exercise, @value{COUNT-WORDS}, Counting Words
14319 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
14320 @section Count Words Recursively
14321 @cindex Count words recursively
14322 @cindex Recursively counting words
14323 @cindex Words, counted recursively
14324
14325 You can write the function for counting words recursively as well as
14326 with a @code{while} loop. Let's see how this is done.
14327
14328 First, we need to recognize that the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14329 function has three jobs: it sets up the appropriate conditions for
14330 counting to occur; it counts the words in the region; and it sends a
14331 message to the user telling how many words there are.
14332
14333 If we write a single recursive function to do everything, we will
14334 receive a message for every recursive call. If the region contains 13
14335 words, we will receive thirteen messages, one right after the other.
14336 We don't want this! Instead, we must write two functions to do the
14337 job, one of which (the recursive function) will be used inside of the
14338 other. One function will set up the conditions and display the
14339 message; the other will return the word count.
14340
14341 Let us start with the function that causes the message to be displayed.
14342 We can continue to call this @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14343
14344 This is the function that the user will call. It will be interactive.
14345 Indeed, it will be similar to our previous versions of this
14346 function, except that it will call @code{recursive-count-words} to
14347 determine how many words are in the region.
14348
14349 @need 1250
14350 We can readily construct a template for this function, based on our
14351 previous versions:
14352
14353 @smallexample
14354 @group
14355 ;; @r{Recursive version; uses regular expression search}
14356 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14357 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14358 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
14359 @end group
14360 @group
14361
14362 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14363 (@var{explanatory message})
14364 (@var{set-up functions}@dots{}
14365 @end group
14366 @group
14367
14368 ;;; @r{2. Count the words.}
14369 @var{recursive call}
14370 @end group
14371 @group
14372
14373 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14374 @var{message providing word count}))
14375 @end group
14376 @end smallexample
14377
14378 The definition looks straightforward, except that somehow the count
14379 returned by the recursive call must be passed to the message
14380 displaying the word count. A little thought suggests that this can be
14381 done by making use of a @code{let} expression: we can bind a variable
14382 in the varlist of a @code{let} expression to the number of words in
14383 the region, as returned by the recursive call; and then the
14384 @code{cond} expression, using binding, can display the value to the
14385 user.
14386
14387 Often, one thinks of the binding within a @code{let} expression as
14388 somehow secondary to the `primary' work of a function. But in this
14389 case, what you might consider the `primary' job of the function,
14390 counting words, is done within the @code{let} expression.
14391
14392 @need 1250
14393 Using @code{let}, the function definition looks like this:
14394
14395 @smallexample
14396 @group
14397 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14398 "Print number of words in the region."
14399 (interactive "r")
14400 @end group
14401
14402 @group
14403 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14404 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14405 (save-excursion
14406 (goto-char beginning)
14407 @end group
14408
14409 @group
14410 ;;; @r{2. Count the words.}
14411 (let ((count (recursive-count-words end)))
14412 @end group
14413
14414 @group
14415 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14416 (cond ((zerop count)
14417 (message
14418 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14419 ((= 1 count)
14420 (message
14421 "The region has 1 word."))
14422 (t
14423 (message
14424 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14425 @end group
14426 @end smallexample
14427
14428 Next, we need to write the recursive counting function.
14429
14430 A recursive function has at least three parts: the `do-again-test', the
14431 `next-step-expression', and the recursive call.
14432
14433 The do-again-test determines whether the function will or will not be
14434 called again. Since we are counting words in a region and can use a
14435 function that moves point forward for every word, the do-again-test
14436 can check whether point is still within the region. The do-again-test
14437 should find the value of point and determine whether point is before,
14438 at, or after the value of the end of the region. We can use the
14439 @code{point} function to locate point. Clearly, we must pass the
14440 value of the end of the region to the recursive counting function as an
14441 argument.
14442
14443 In addition, the do-again-test should also test whether the search finds a
14444 word. If it does not, the function should not call itself again.
14445
14446 The next-step-expression changes a value so that when the recursive
14447 function is supposed to stop calling itself, it stops. More
14448 precisely, the next-step-expression changes a value so that at the
14449 right time, the do-again-test stops the recursive function from
14450 calling itself again. In this case, the next-step-expression can be
14451 the expression that moves point forward, word by word.
14452
14453 The third part of a recursive function is the recursive call.
14454
14455 Somewhere, also, we also need a part that does the `work' of the
14456 function, a part that does the counting. A vital part!
14457
14458 @need 1250
14459 But already, we have an outline of the recursive counting function:
14460
14461 @smallexample
14462 @group
14463 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14464 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14465 @var{do-again-test}
14466 @var{next-step-expression}
14467 @var{recursive call})
14468 @end group
14469 @end smallexample
14470
14471 Now we need to fill in the slots. Let's start with the simplest cases
14472 first: if point is at or beyond the end of the region, there cannot
14473 be any words in the region, so the function should return zero.
14474 Likewise, if the search fails, there are no words to count, so the
14475 function should return zero.
14476
14477 On the other hand, if point is within the region and the search
14478 succeeds, the function should call itself again.
14479
14480 @need 800
14481 Thus, the do-again-test should look like this:
14482
14483 @smallexample
14484 @group
14485 (and (< (point) region-end)
14486 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14487 @end group
14488 @end smallexample
14489
14490 Note that the search expression is part of the do-again-test---the
14491 function returns @code{t} if its search succeeds and @code{nil} if it
14492 fails. (@xref{Whitespace Bug, , The Whitespace Bug in
14493 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}}, for an explanation of how
14494 @code{re-search-forward} works.)
14495
14496 The do-again-test is the true-or-false test of an @code{if} clause.
14497 Clearly, if the do-again-test succeeds, the then-part of the @code{if}
14498 clause should call the function again; but if it fails, the else-part
14499 should return zero since either point is outside the region or the
14500 search failed because there were no words to find.
14501
14502 But before considering the recursive call, we need to consider the
14503 next-step-expression. What is it? Interestingly, it is the search
14504 part of the do-again-test.
14505
14506 In addition to returning @code{t} or @code{nil} for the
14507 do-again-test, @code{re-search-forward} moves point forward as a side
14508 effect of a successful search. This is the action that changes the
14509 value of point so that the recursive function stops calling itself
14510 when point completes its movement through the region. Consequently,
14511 the @code{re-search-forward} expression is the next-step-expression.
14512
14513 @need 1200
14514 In outline, then, the body of the @code{recursive-count-words}
14515 function looks like this:
14516
14517 @smallexample
14518 @group
14519 (if @var{do-again-test-and-next-step-combined}
14520 ;; @r{then}
14521 @var{recursive-call-returning-count}
14522 ;; @r{else}
14523 @var{return-zero})
14524 @end group
14525 @end smallexample
14526
14527 How to incorporate the mechanism that counts?
14528
14529 If you are not used to writing recursive functions, a question like
14530 this can be troublesome. But it can and should be approached
14531 systematically.
14532
14533 We know that the counting mechanism should be associated in some way
14534 with the recursive call. Indeed, since the next-step-expression moves
14535 point forward by one word, and since a recursive call is made for
14536 each word, the counting mechanism must be an expression that adds one
14537 to the value returned by a call to @code{recursive-count-words}.
14538
14539 @need 800
14540 Consider several cases:
14541
14542 @itemize @bullet
14543 @item
14544 If there are two words in the region, the function should return
14545 a value resulting from adding one to the value returned when it counts
14546 the first word, plus the number returned when it counts the remaining
14547 words in the region, which in this case is one.
14548
14549 @item
14550 If there is one word in the region, the function should return
14551 a value resulting from adding one to the value returned when it counts
14552 that word, plus the number returned when it counts the remaining
14553 words in the region, which in this case is zero.
14554
14555 @item
14556 If there are no words in the region, the function should return zero.
14557 @end itemize
14558
14559 From the sketch we can see that the else-part of the @code{if} returns
14560 zero for the case of no words. This means that the then-part of the
14561 @code{if} must return a value resulting from adding one to the value
14562 returned from a count of the remaining words.
14563
14564 @need 1200
14565 The expression will look like this, where @code{1+} is a function that
14566 adds one to its argument.
14567
14568 @smallexample
14569 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14570 @end smallexample
14571
14572 @need 1200
14573 The whole @code{recursive-count-words} function will then look like
14574 this:
14575
14576 @smallexample
14577 @group
14578 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14579 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14580
14581 ;;; @r{1. do-again-test}
14582 (if (and (< (point) region-end)
14583 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14584 @end group
14585
14586 @group
14587 ;;; @r{2. then-part: the recursive call}
14588 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14589
14590 ;;; @r{3. else-part}
14591 0))
14592 @end group
14593 @end smallexample
14594
14595 @need 1250
14596 Let's examine how this works:
14597
14598 If there are no words in the region, the else part of the @code{if}
14599 expression is evaluated and consequently the function returns zero.
14600
14601 If there is one word in the region, the value of point is less than
14602 the value of @code{region-end} and the search succeeds. In this case,
14603 the true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression tests true, and the
14604 then-part of the @code{if} expression is evaluated. The counting
14605 expression is evaluated. This expression returns a value (which will
14606 be the value returned by the whole function) that is the sum of one
14607 added to the value returned by a recursive call.
14608
14609 Meanwhile, the next-step-expression has caused point to jump over the
14610 first (and in this case only) word in the region. This means that
14611 when @code{(recursive-count-words region-end)} is evaluated a second
14612 time, as a result of the recursive call, the value of point will be
14613 equal to or greater than the value of region end. So this time,
14614 @code{recursive-count-words} will return zero. The zero will be added
14615 to one, and the original evaluation of @code{recursive-count-words}
14616 will return one plus zero, which is one, which is the correct amount.
14617
14618 Clearly, if there are two words in the region, the first call to
14619 @code{recursive-count-words} returns one added to the value returned
14620 by calling @code{recursive-count-words} on a region containing the
14621 remaining word---that is, it adds one to one, producing two, which is
14622 the correct amount.
14623
14624 Similarly, if there are three words in the region, the first call to
14625 @code{recursive-count-words} returns one added to the value returned
14626 by calling @code{recursive-count-words} on a region containing the
14627 remaining two words---and so on and so on.
14628
14629 @need 1250
14630 @noindent
14631 With full documentation the two functions look like this:
14632
14633 @need 1250
14634 @noindent
14635 The recursive function:
14636
14637 @findex recursive-count-words
14638 @smallexample
14639 @group
14640 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14641 "Number of words between point and REGION-END."
14642 @end group
14643
14644 @group
14645 ;;; @r{1. do-again-test}
14646 (if (and (< (point) region-end)
14647 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14648 @end group
14649
14650 @group
14651 ;;; @r{2. then-part: the recursive call}
14652 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14653
14654 ;;; @r{3. else-part}
14655 0))
14656 @end group
14657 @end smallexample
14658
14659 @need 800
14660 @noindent
14661 The wrapper:
14662
14663 @smallexample
14664 @group
14665 ;;; @r{Recursive version}
14666 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14667 "Print number of words in the region.
14668 @end group
14669
14670 @group
14671 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent
14672 character followed by at least one character that is
14673 not a word-constituent. The buffer's syntax table
14674 determines which characters these are."
14675 @end group
14676 @group
14677 (interactive "r")
14678 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14679 (save-excursion
14680 (goto-char beginning)
14681 (let ((count (recursive-count-words end)))
14682 @end group
14683 @group
14684 (cond ((zerop count)
14685 (message
14686 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14687 @end group
14688 @group
14689 ((= 1 count)
14690 (message "The region has 1 word."))
14691 (t
14692 (message
14693 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14694 @end group
14695 @end smallexample
14696
14697 @node Counting Exercise, , recursive-count-words, Counting Words
14698 @section Exercise: Counting Punctuation
14699
14700 Using a @code{while} loop, write a function to count the number of
14701 punctuation marks in a region---period, comma, semicolon, colon,
14702 exclamation mark, and question mark. Do the same using recursion.
14703
14704 @node Words in a defun, Readying a Graph, Counting Words, Top
14705 @chapter Counting Words in a @code{defun}
14706 @cindex Counting words in a @code{defun}
14707 @cindex Word counting in a @code{defun}
14708
14709 Our next project is to count the number of words in a function
14710 definition. Clearly, this can be done using some variant of
14711 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}. @xref{Counting Words, , Counting Words:
14712 Repetition and Regexps}. If we are just going to count the words in
14713 one definition, it is easy enough to mark the definition with the
14714 @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{mark-defun}) command, and then call
14715 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14716
14717 However, I am more ambitious: I want to count the words and symbols in
14718 every definition in the Emacs sources and then print a graph that
14719 shows how many functions there are of each length: how many contain 40
14720 to 49 words or symbols, how many contain 50 to 59 words or symbols,
14721 and so on. I have often been curious how long a typical function is,
14722 and this will tell.
14723
14724 @menu
14725 * Divide and Conquer::
14726 * Words and Symbols:: What to count?
14727 * Syntax:: What constitutes a word or symbol?
14728 * count-words-in-defun:: Very like @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14729 * Several defuns:: Counting several defuns in a file.
14730 * Find a File:: Do you want to look at a file?
14731 * lengths-list-file:: A list of the lengths of many definitions.
14732 * Several files:: Counting in definitions in different files.
14733 * Several files recursively:: Recursively counting in different files.
14734 * Prepare the data:: Prepare the data for display in a graph.
14735 @end menu
14736
14737 @node Divide and Conquer, Words and Symbols, Words in a defun, Words in a defun
14738 @ifnottex
14739 @unnumberedsec Divide and Conquer
14740 @end ifnottex
14741
14742 Described in one phrase, the histogram project is daunting; but
14743 divided into numerous small steps, each of which we can take one at a
14744 time, the project becomes less fearsome. Let us consider what the
14745 steps must be:
14746
14747 @itemize @bullet
14748 @item
14749 First, write a function to count the words in one definition. This
14750 includes the problem of handling symbols as well as words.
14751
14752 @item
14753 Second, write a function to list the numbers of words in each function
14754 in a file. This function can use the @code{count-words-in-defun}
14755 function.
14756
14757 @item
14758 Third, write a function to list the numbers of words in each function
14759 in each of several files. This entails automatically finding the
14760 various files, switching to them, and counting the words in the
14761 definitions within them.
14762
14763 @item
14764 Fourth, write a function to convert the list of numbers that we
14765 created in step three to a form that will be suitable for printing as
14766 a graph.
14767
14768 @item
14769 Fifth, write a function to print the results as a graph.
14770 @end itemize
14771
14772 This is quite a project! But if we take each step slowly, it will not
14773 be difficult.
14774
14775 @node Words and Symbols, Syntax, Divide and Conquer, Words in a defun
14776 @section What to Count?
14777 @cindex Words and symbols in defun
14778
14779 When we first start thinking about how to count the words in a
14780 function definition, the first question is (or ought to be) what are
14781 we going to count? When we speak of `words' with respect to a Lisp
14782 function definition, we are actually speaking, in large part, of
14783 `symbols'. For example, the following @code{multiply-by-seven}
14784 function contains the five symbols @code{defun},
14785 @code{multiply-by-seven}, @code{number}, @code{*}, and @code{7}. In
14786 addition, in the documentation string, it contains the four words
14787 @samp{Multiply}, @samp{NUMBER}, @samp{by}, and @samp{seven}. The
14788 symbol @samp{number} is repeated, so the definition contains a total
14789 of ten words and symbols.
14790
14791 @smallexample
14792 @group
14793 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
14794 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
14795 (* 7 number))
14796 @end group
14797 @end smallexample
14798
14799 @noindent
14800 However, if we mark the @code{multiply-by-seven} definition with
14801 @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{mark-defun}), and then call
14802 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} on it, we will find that
14803 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} claims the definition has eleven words, not
14804 ten! Something is wrong!
14805
14806 The problem is twofold: @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} does not count the
14807 @samp{*} as a word, and it counts the single symbol,
14808 @code{multiply-by-seven}, as containing three words. The hyphens are
14809 treated as if they were interword spaces rather than intraword
14810 connectors: @samp{multiply-by-seven} is counted as if it were written
14811 @samp{multiply by seven}.
14812
14813 The cause of this confusion is the regular expression search within
14814 the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition that moves point forward word
14815 by word. In the canonical version of @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}, the
14816 regexp is:
14817
14818 @smallexample
14819 "\\w+\\W*"
14820 @end smallexample
14821
14822 @noindent
14823 This regular expression is a pattern defining one or more word
14824 constituent characters possibly followed by one or more characters
14825 that are not word constituents. What is meant by `word constituent
14826 characters' brings us to the issue of syntax, which is worth a section
14827 of its own.
14828
14829 @node Syntax, count-words-in-defun, Words and Symbols, Words in a defun
14830 @section What Constitutes a Word or Symbol?
14831 @cindex Syntax categories and tables
14832
14833 Emacs treats different characters as belonging to different
14834 @dfn{syntax categories}. For example, the regular expression,
14835 @samp{\\w+}, is a pattern specifying one or more @emph{word
14836 constituent} characters. Word constituent characters are members of
14837 one syntax category. Other syntax categories include the class of
14838 punctuation characters, such as the period and the comma, and the
14839 class of whitespace characters, such as the blank space and the tab
14840 character. (For more information, see @ref{Syntax, Syntax, The Syntax
14841 Table, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, and @ref{Syntax Tables, , Syntax
14842 Tables, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
14843
14844 Syntax tables specify which characters belong to which categories.
14845 Usually, a hyphen is not specified as a `word constituent character'.
14846 Instead, it is specified as being in the `class of characters that are
14847 part of symbol names but not words.' This means that the
14848 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function treats it in the same way it treats
14849 an interword white space, which is why @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14850 counts @samp{multiply-by-seven} as three words.
14851
14852 There are two ways to cause Emacs to count @samp{multiply-by-seven} as
14853 one symbol: modify the syntax table or modify the regular expression.
14854
14855 We could redefine a hyphen as a word constituent character by
14856 modifying the syntax table that Emacs keeps for each mode. This
14857 action would serve our purpose, except that a hyphen is merely the
14858 most common character within symbols that is not typically a word
14859 constituent character; there are others, too.
14860
14861 Alternatively, we can redefine the regular expression used in the
14862 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition so as to include symbols. This
14863 procedure has the merit of clarity, but the task is a little tricky.
14864
14865 @need 1200
14866 The first part is simple enough: the pattern must match ``at least one
14867 character that is a word or symbol constituent''. Thus:
14868
14869 @smallexample
14870 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+"
14871 @end smallexample
14872
14873 @noindent
14874 The @samp{\\(} is the first part of the grouping construct that
14875 includes the @samp{\\w} and the @samp{\\s_} as alternatives, separated
14876 by the @samp{\\|}. The @samp{\\w} matches any word-constituent
14877 character and the @samp{\\s_} matches any character that is part of a
14878 symbol name but not a word-constituent character. The @samp{+}
14879 following the group indicates that the word or symbol constituent
14880 characters must be matched at least once.
14881
14882 However, the second part of the regexp is more difficult to design.
14883 What we want is to follow the first part with ``optionally one or more
14884 characters that are not constituents of a word or symbol''. At first,
14885 I thought I could define this with the following:
14886
14887 @smallexample
14888 "\\(\\W\\|\\S_\\)*"
14889 @end smallexample
14890
14891 @noindent
14892 The upper case @samp{W} and @samp{S} match characters that are
14893 @emph{not} word or symbol constituents. Unfortunately, this
14894 expression matches any character that is either not a word constituent
14895 or not a symbol constituent. This matches any character!
14896
14897 I then noticed that every word or symbol in my test region was
14898 followed by white space (blank space, tab, or newline). So I tried
14899 placing a pattern to match one or more blank spaces after the pattern
14900 for one or more word or symbol constituents. This failed, too. Words
14901 and symbols are often separated by whitespace, but in actual code
14902 parentheses may follow symbols and punctuation may follow words. So
14903 finally, I designed a pattern in which the word or symbol constituents
14904 are followed optionally by characters that are not white space and
14905 then followed optionally by white space.
14906
14907 @need 800
14908 Here is the full regular expression:
14909
14910 @smallexample
14911 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
14912 @end smallexample
14913
14914 @node count-words-in-defun, Several defuns, Syntax, Words in a defun
14915 @section The @code{count-words-in-defun} Function
14916 @cindex Counting words in a @code{defun}
14917
14918 We have seen that there are several ways to write a
14919 @code{count-words-region} function. To write a
14920 @code{count-words-in-defun}, we need merely adapt one of these
14921 versions.
14922
14923 The version that uses a @code{while} loop is easy to understand, so I
14924 am going to adapt that. Because @code{count-words-in-defun} will be
14925 part of a more complex program, it need not be interactive and it need
14926 not display a message but just return the count. These considerations
14927 simplify the definition a little.
14928
14929 On the other hand, @code{count-words-in-defun} will be used within a
14930 buffer that contains function definitions. Consequently, it is
14931 reasonable to ask that the function determine whether it is called
14932 when point is within a function definition, and if it is, to return
14933 the count for that definition. This adds complexity to the
14934 definition, but saves us from needing to pass arguments to the
14935 function.
14936
14937 @need 1250
14938 These considerations lead us to prepare the following template:
14939
14940 @smallexample
14941 @group
14942 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
14943 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14944 (@var{set up}@dots{}
14945 (@var{while loop}@dots{})
14946 @var{return count})
14947 @end group
14948 @end smallexample
14949
14950 @noindent
14951 As usual, our job is to fill in the slots.
14952
14953 First, the set up.
14954
14955 We are presuming that this function will be called within a buffer
14956 containing function definitions. Point will either be within a
14957 function definition or not. For @code{count-words-in-defun} to work,
14958 point must move to the beginning of the definition, a counter must
14959 start at zero, and the counting loop must stop when point reaches the
14960 end of the definition.
14961
14962 The @code{beginning-of-defun} function searches backwards for an
14963 opening delimiter such as a @samp{(} at the beginning of a line, and
14964 moves point to that position, or else to the limit of the search. In
14965 practice, this means that @code{beginning-of-defun} moves point to the
14966 beginning of an enclosing or preceding function definition, or else to
14967 the beginning of the buffer. We can use @code{beginning-of-defun} to
14968 place point where we wish to start.
14969
14970 The @code{while} loop requires a counter to keep track of the words or
14971 symbols being counted. A @code{let} expression can be used to create
14972 a local variable for this purpose, and bind it to an initial value of zero.
14973
14974 The @code{end-of-defun} function works like @code{beginning-of-defun}
14975 except that it moves point to the end of the definition.
14976 @code{end-of-defun} can be used as part of an expression that
14977 determines the position of the end of the definition.
14978
14979 The set up for @code{count-words-in-defun} takes shape rapidly: first
14980 we move point to the beginning of the definition, then we create a
14981 local variable to hold the count, and finally, we record the position
14982 of the end of the definition so the @code{while} loop will know when to stop
14983 looping.
14984
14985 @need 1250
14986 The code looks like this:
14987
14988 @smallexample
14989 @group
14990 (beginning-of-defun)
14991 (let ((count 0)
14992 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
14993 @end group
14994 @end smallexample
14995
14996 @noindent
14997 The code is simple. The only slight complication is likely to concern
14998 @code{end}: it is bound to the position of the end of the definition
14999 by a @code{save-excursion} expression that returns the value of point
15000 after @code{end-of-defun} temporarily moves it to the end of the
15001 definition.
15002
15003 The second part of the @code{count-words-in-defun}, after the set up,
15004 is the @code{while} loop.
15005
15006 The loop must contain an expression that jumps point forward word by
15007 word and symbol by symbol, and another expression that counts the
15008 jumps. The true-or-false-test for the @code{while} loop should test
15009 true so long as point should jump forward, and false when point is at
15010 the end of the definition. We have already redefined the regular
15011 expression for this (@pxref{Syntax}), so the loop is straightforward:
15012
15013 @smallexample
15014 @group
15015 (while (and (< (point) end)
15016 (re-search-forward
15017 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*" end t)
15018 (setq count (1+ count)))
15019 @end group
15020 @end smallexample
15021
15022 The third part of the function definition returns the count of words
15023 and symbols. This part is the last expression within the body of the
15024 @code{let} expression, and can be, very simply, the local variable
15025 @code{count}, which when evaluated returns the count.
15026
15027 @need 1250
15028 Put together, the @code{count-words-in-defun} definition looks like this:
15029
15030 @findex count-words-in-defun
15031 @smallexample
15032 @group
15033 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
15034 "Return the number of words and symbols in a defun."
15035 (beginning-of-defun)
15036 (let ((count 0)
15037 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
15038 @end group
15039 @group
15040 (while
15041 (and (< (point) end)
15042 (re-search-forward
15043 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
15044 end t))
15045 (setq count (1+ count)))
15046 count))
15047 @end group
15048 @end smallexample
15049
15050 How to test this? The function is not interactive, but it is easy to
15051 put a wrapper around the function to make it interactive; we can use
15052 almost the same code as for the recursive version of
15053 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}:
15054
15055 @smallexample
15056 @group
15057 ;;; @r{Interactive version.}
15058 (defun count-words-defun ()
15059 "Number of words and symbols in a function definition."
15060 (interactive)
15061 (message
15062 "Counting words and symbols in function definition ... ")
15063 @end group
15064 @group
15065 (let ((count (count-words-in-defun)))
15066 (cond
15067 ((zerop count)
15068 (message
15069 "The definition does NOT have any words or symbols."))
15070 @end group
15071 @group
15072 ((= 1 count)
15073 (message
15074 "The definition has 1 word or symbol."))
15075 (t
15076 (message
15077 "The definition has %d words or symbols." count)))))
15078 @end group
15079 @end smallexample
15080
15081 @need 800
15082 @noindent
15083 Let's re-use @kbd{C-c =} as a convenient keybinding:
15084
15085 @smallexample
15086 (global-set-key "\C-c=" 'count-words-defun)
15087 @end smallexample
15088
15089 Now we can try out @code{count-words-defun}: install both
15090 @code{count-words-in-defun} and @code{count-words-defun}, and set the
15091 keybinding, and then place the cursor within the following definition:
15092
15093 @smallexample
15094 @group
15095 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
15096 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
15097 (* 7 number))
15098 @result{} 10
15099 @end group
15100 @end smallexample
15101
15102 @noindent
15103 Success! The definition has 10 words and symbols.
15104
15105 The next problem is to count the numbers of words and symbols in
15106 several definitions within a single file.
15107
15108 @node Several defuns, Find a File, count-words-in-defun, Words in a defun
15109 @section Count Several @code{defuns} Within a File
15110
15111 A file such as @file{simple.el} may have a hundred or more function
15112 definitions within it. Our long term goal is to collect statistics on
15113 many files, but as a first step, our immediate goal is to collect
15114 statistics on one file.
15115
15116 The information will be a series of numbers, each number being the
15117 length of a function definition. We can store the numbers in a list.
15118
15119 We know that we will want to incorporate the information regarding one
15120 file with information about many other files; this means that the
15121 function for counting definition lengths within one file need only
15122 return the list of lengths. It need not and should not display any
15123 messages.
15124
15125 The word count commands contain one expression to jump point forward
15126 word by word and another expression to count the jumps. The function
15127 to return the lengths of definitions can be designed to work the same
15128 way, with one expression to jump point forward definition by
15129 definition and another expression to construct the lengths' list.
15130
15131 This statement of the problem makes it elementary to write the
15132 function definition. Clearly, we will start the count at the
15133 beginning of the file, so the first command will be @code{(goto-char
15134 (point-min))}. Next, we start the @code{while} loop; and the
15135 true-or-false test of the loop can be a regular expression search for
15136 the next function definition---so long as the search succeeds, point
15137 is moved forward and then the body of the loop is evaluated. The body
15138 needs an expression that constructs the lengths' list. @code{cons},
15139 the list construction command, can be used to create the list. That
15140 is almost all there is to it.
15141
15142 @need 800
15143 Here is what this fragment of code looks like:
15144
15145 @smallexample
15146 @group
15147 (goto-char (point-min))
15148 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
15149 (setq lengths-list
15150 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
15151 @end group
15152 @end smallexample
15153
15154 What we have left out is the mechanism for finding the file that
15155 contains the function definitions.
15156
15157 In previous examples, we either used this, the Info file, or we
15158 switched back and forth to some other buffer, such as the
15159 @file{*scratch*} buffer.
15160
15161 Finding a file is a new process that we have not yet discussed.
15162
15163 @node Find a File, lengths-list-file, Several defuns, Words in a defun
15164 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
15165 @section Find a File
15166 @cindex Find a File
15167
15168 To find a file in Emacs, you use the @kbd{C-x C-f} (@code{find-file})
15169 command. This command is almost, but not quite right for the lengths
15170 problem.
15171
15172 @need 1200
15173 Let's look at the source for @code{find-file}:
15174
15175 @smallexample
15176 @group
15177 (defun find-file (filename)
15178 "Edit file FILENAME.
15179 Switch to a buffer visiting file FILENAME,
15180 creating one if none already exists."
15181 (interactive "FFind file: ")
15182 (switch-to-buffer (find-file-noselect filename)))
15183 @end group
15184 @end smallexample
15185
15186 @noindent
15187 (The most recent version of the @code{find-file} function definition
15188 permits you to specify optional wildcards to visit multiple files; that
15189 makes the definition more complex and we will not discuss it here,
15190 since it is not relevant. You can see its source using either
15191 @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) or @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}).)
15192
15193 @ignore
15194 In Emacs 22
15195 (defun find-file (filename &optional wildcards)
15196 "Edit file FILENAME.
15197 Switch to a buffer visiting file FILENAME,
15198 creating one if none already exists.
15199 Interactively, the default if you just type RET is the current directory,
15200 but the visited file name is available through the minibuffer history:
15201 type M-n to pull it into the minibuffer.
15202
15203 Interactively, or if WILDCARDS is non-nil in a call from Lisp,
15204 expand wildcards (if any) and visit multiple files. You can
15205 suppress wildcard expansion by setting `find-file-wildcards' to nil.
15206
15207 To visit a file without any kind of conversion and without
15208 automatically choosing a major mode, use \\[find-file-literally]."
15209 (interactive (find-file-read-args "Find file: " nil))
15210 (let ((value (find-file-noselect filename nil nil wildcards)))
15211 (if (listp value)
15212 (mapcar 'switch-to-buffer (nreverse value))
15213 (switch-to-buffer value))))
15214 @end ignore
15215
15216 The definition I am showing possesses short but complete documentation
15217 and an interactive specification that prompts you for a file name when
15218 you use the command interactively. The body of the definition
15219 contains two functions, @code{find-file-noselect} and
15220 @code{switch-to-buffer}.
15221
15222 According to its documentation as shown by @kbd{C-h f} (the
15223 @code{describe-function} command), the @code{find-file-noselect}
15224 function reads the named file into a buffer and returns the buffer.
15225 (Its most recent version includes an optional wildcards argument,
15226 too, as well as another to read a file literally and an other you
15227 suppress warning messages. These optional arguments are irrelevant.)
15228
15229 However, the @code{find-file-noselect} function does not select the
15230 buffer in which it puts the file. Emacs does not switch its attention
15231 (or yours if you are using @code{find-file-noselect}) to the selected
15232 buffer. That is what @code{switch-to-buffer} does: it switches the
15233 buffer to which Emacs attention is directed; and it switches the
15234 buffer displayed in the window to the new buffer. We have discussed
15235 buffer switching elsewhere. (@xref{Switching Buffers}.)
15236
15237 In this histogram project, we do not need to display each file on the
15238 screen as the program determines the length of each definition within
15239 it. Instead of employing @code{switch-to-buffer}, we can work with
15240 @code{set-buffer}, which redirects the attention of the computer
15241 program to a different buffer but does not redisplay it on the screen.
15242 So instead of calling on @code{find-file} to do the job, we must write
15243 our own expression.
15244
15245 The task is easy: use @code{find-file-noselect} and @code{set-buffer}.
15246
15247 @node lengths-list-file, Several files, Find a File, Words in a defun
15248 @section @code{lengths-list-file} in Detail
15249
15250 The core of the @code{lengths-list-file} function is a @code{while}
15251 loop containing a function to move point forward `defun by defun' and
15252 a function to count the number of words and symbols in each defun.
15253 This core must be surrounded by functions that do various other tasks,
15254 including finding the file, and ensuring that point starts out at the
15255 beginning of the file. The function definition looks like this:
15256 @findex lengths-list-file
15257
15258 @smallexample
15259 @group
15260 (defun lengths-list-file (filename)
15261 "Return list of definitions' lengths within FILE.
15262 The returned list is a list of numbers.
15263 Each number is the number of words or
15264 symbols in one function definition."
15265 @end group
15266 @group
15267 (message "Working on `%s' ... " filename)
15268 (save-excursion
15269 (let ((buffer (find-file-noselect filename))
15270 (lengths-list))
15271 (set-buffer buffer)
15272 (setq buffer-read-only t)
15273 (widen)
15274 (goto-char (point-min))
15275 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
15276 (setq lengths-list
15277 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
15278 (kill-buffer buffer)
15279 lengths-list)))
15280 @end group
15281 @end smallexample
15282
15283 @noindent
15284 The function is passed one argument, the name of the file on which it
15285 will work. It has four lines of documentation, but no interactive
15286 specification. Since people worry that a computer is broken if they
15287 don't see anything going on, the first line of the body is a
15288 message.
15289
15290 The next line contains a @code{save-excursion} that returns Emacs'
15291 attention to the current buffer when the function completes. This is
15292 useful in case you embed this function in another function that
15293 presumes point is restored to the original buffer.
15294
15295 In the varlist of the @code{let} expression, Emacs finds the file and
15296 binds the local variable @code{buffer} to the buffer containing the
15297 file. At the same time, Emacs creates @code{lengths-list} as a local
15298 variable.
15299
15300 Next, Emacs switches its attention to the buffer.
15301
15302 In the following line, Emacs makes the buffer read-only. Ideally,
15303 this line is not necessary. None of the functions for counting words
15304 and symbols in a function definition should change the buffer.
15305 Besides, the buffer is not going to be saved, even if it were changed.
15306 This line is entirely the consequence of great, perhaps excessive,
15307 caution. The reason for the caution is that this function and those
15308 it calls work on the sources for Emacs and it is inconvenient if they
15309 are inadvertently modified. It goes without saying that I did not
15310 realize a need for this line until an experiment went awry and started
15311 to modify my Emacs source files @dots{}
15312
15313 Next comes a call to widen the buffer if it is narrowed. This
15314 function is usually not needed---Emacs creates a fresh buffer if none
15315 already exists; but if a buffer visiting the file already exists Emacs
15316 returns that one. In this case, the buffer may be narrowed and must
15317 be widened. If we wanted to be fully `user-friendly', we would
15318 arrange to save the restriction and the location of point, but we
15319 won't.
15320
15321 The @code{(goto-char (point-min))} expression moves point to the
15322 beginning of the buffer.
15323
15324 Then comes a @code{while} loop in which the `work' of the function is
15325 carried out. In the loop, Emacs determines the length of each
15326 definition and constructs a lengths' list containing the information.
15327
15328 Emacs kills the buffer after working through it. This is to save
15329 space inside of Emacs. My version of GNU Emacs 19 contained over 300
15330 source files of interest; GNU Emacs 22 contains over a thousand source
15331 files. Another function will apply @code{lengths-list-file} to each
15332 of the files.
15333
15334 Finally, the last expression within the @code{let} expression is the
15335 @code{lengths-list} variable; its value is returned as the value of
15336 the whole function.
15337
15338 You can try this function by installing it in the usual fashion. Then
15339 place your cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x
15340 C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}).
15341
15342 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15343 @smallexample
15344 (lengths-list-file
15345 "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/debug.el")
15346 @end smallexample
15347
15348 @noindent
15349 (You may need to change the pathname of the file; the one here is for
15350 GNU Emacs version 22.1.1. To change the expression, copy it to
15351 the @file{*scratch*} buffer and edit it.
15352
15353 @need 1200
15354 @noindent
15355 (Also, to see the full length of the list, rather than a truncated
15356 version, you may have to evaluate the following:
15357
15358 @smallexample
15359 (custom-set-variables '(eval-expression-print-length nil))
15360 @end smallexample
15361
15362 @noindent
15363 (@xref{defcustom, , Specifying Variables using @code{defcustom}}.
15364 Then evaluate the @code{lengths-list-file} expression.)
15365
15366 @need 1200
15367 The lengths' list for @file{debug.el} takes less than a second to
15368 produce and looks like this in GNU Emacs 22:
15369
15370 @smallexample
15371 (83 113 105 144 289 22 30 97 48 89 25 52 52 88 28 29 77 49 43 290 232 587)
15372 @end smallexample
15373
15374 @need 1500
15375 (Using my old machine, the version 19 lengths' list for @file{debug.el}
15376 took seven seconds to produce and looked like this:
15377
15378 @smallexample
15379 (75 41 80 62 20 45 44 68 45 12 34 235)
15380 @end smallexample
15381
15382 (The newer version of @file{debug.el} contains more defuns than the
15383 earlier one; and my new machine is much faster than the old one.)
15384
15385 Note that the length of the last definition in the file is first in
15386 the list.
15387
15388 @node Several files, Several files recursively, lengths-list-file, Words in a defun
15389 @section Count Words in @code{defuns} in Different Files
15390
15391 In the previous section, we created a function that returns a list of
15392 the lengths of each definition in a file. Now, we want to define a
15393 function to return a master list of the lengths of the definitions in
15394 a list of files.
15395
15396 Working on each of a list of files is a repetitious act, so we can use
15397 either a @code{while} loop or recursion.
15398
15399 @menu
15400 * lengths-list-many-files:: Return a list of the lengths of defuns.
15401 * append:: Attach one list to another.
15402 @end menu
15403
15404 @node lengths-list-many-files, append, Several files, Several files
15405 @ifnottex
15406 @unnumberedsubsec Determine the lengths of @code{defuns}
15407 @end ifnottex
15408
15409 The design using a @code{while} loop is routine. The argument passed
15410 the function is a list of files. As we saw earlier (@pxref{Loop
15411 Example}), you can write a @code{while} loop so that the body of the
15412 loop is evaluated if such a list contains elements, but to exit the
15413 loop if the list is empty. For this design to work, the body of the
15414 loop must contain an expression that shortens the list each time the
15415 body is evaluated, so that eventually the list is empty. The usual
15416 technique is to set the value of the list to the value of the @sc{cdr}
15417 of the list each time the body is evaluated.
15418
15419 @need 800
15420 The template looks like this:
15421
15422 @smallexample
15423 @group
15424 (while @var{test-whether-list-is-empty}
15425 @var{body}@dots{}
15426 @var{set-list-to-cdr-of-list})
15427 @end group
15428 @end smallexample
15429
15430 Also, we remember that a @code{while} loop returns @code{nil} (the
15431 result of evaluating the true-or-false-test), not the result of any
15432 evaluation within its body. (The evaluations within the body of the
15433 loop are done for their side effects.) However, the expression that
15434 sets the lengths' list is part of the body---and that is the value
15435 that we want returned by the function as a whole. To do this, we
15436 enclose the @code{while} loop within a @code{let} expression, and
15437 arrange that the last element of the @code{let} expression contains
15438 the value of the lengths' list. (@xref{Incrementing Example, , Loop
15439 Example with an Incrementing Counter}.)
15440
15441 @findex lengths-list-many-files
15442 @need 1250
15443 These considerations lead us directly to the function itself:
15444
15445 @smallexample
15446 @group
15447 ;;; @r{Use @code{while} loop.}
15448 (defun lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
15449 "Return list of lengths of defuns in LIST-OF-FILES."
15450 @end group
15451 @group
15452 (let (lengths-list)
15453
15454 ;;; @r{true-or-false-test}
15455 (while list-of-files
15456 (setq lengths-list
15457 (append
15458 lengths-list
15459
15460 ;;; @r{Generate a lengths' list.}
15461 (lengths-list-file
15462 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))))
15463 @end group
15464
15465 @group
15466 ;;; @r{Make files' list shorter.}
15467 (setq list-of-files (cdr list-of-files)))
15468
15469 ;;; @r{Return final value of lengths' list.}
15470 lengths-list))
15471 @end group
15472 @end smallexample
15473
15474 @code{expand-file-name} is a built-in function that converts a file
15475 name to the absolute, long, path name form. The function employs the
15476 name of the directory in which the function is called.
15477
15478 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15479 @need 1500
15480 Thus, if @code{expand-file-name} is called on @code{debug.el} when
15481 Emacs is visiting the
15482 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/} directory,
15483
15484 @smallexample
15485 debug.el
15486 @end smallexample
15487
15488 @need 800
15489 @noindent
15490 becomes
15491
15492 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15493 @smallexample
15494 /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/debug.el
15495 @end smallexample
15496
15497 The only other new element of this function definition is the as yet
15498 unstudied function @code{append}, which merits a short section for
15499 itself.
15500
15501 @node append, , lengths-list-many-files, Several files
15502 @subsection The @code{append} Function
15503
15504 @need 800
15505 The @code{append} function attaches one list to another. Thus,
15506
15507 @smallexample
15508 (append '(1 2 3 4) '(5 6 7 8))
15509 @end smallexample
15510
15511 @need 800
15512 @noindent
15513 produces the list
15514
15515 @smallexample
15516 (1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8)
15517 @end smallexample
15518
15519 This is exactly how we want to attach two lengths' lists produced by
15520 @code{lengths-list-file} to each other. The results contrast with
15521 @code{cons},
15522
15523 @smallexample
15524 (cons '(1 2 3 4) '(5 6 7 8))
15525 @end smallexample
15526
15527 @need 1250
15528 @noindent
15529 which constructs a new list in which the first argument to @code{cons}
15530 becomes the first element of the new list:
15531
15532 @smallexample
15533 ((1 2 3 4) 5 6 7 8)
15534 @end smallexample
15535
15536 @node Several files recursively, Prepare the data, Several files, Words in a defun
15537 @section Recursively Count Words in Different Files
15538
15539 Besides a @code{while} loop, you can work on each of a list of files
15540 with recursion. A recursive version of @code{lengths-list-many-files}
15541 is short and simple.
15542
15543 The recursive function has the usual parts: the `do-again-test', the
15544 `next-step-expression', and the recursive call. The `do-again-test'
15545 determines whether the function should call itself again, which it
15546 will do if the @code{list-of-files} contains any remaining elements;
15547 the `next-step-expression' resets the @code{list-of-files} to the
15548 @sc{cdr} of itself, so eventually the list will be empty; and the
15549 recursive call calls itself on the shorter list. The complete
15550 function is shorter than this description!
15551 @findex recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15552
15553 @smallexample
15554 @group
15555 (defun recursive-lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
15556 "Return list of lengths of each defun in LIST-OF-FILES."
15557 (if list-of-files ; @r{do-again-test}
15558 (append
15559 (lengths-list-file
15560 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))
15561 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15562 (cdr list-of-files)))))
15563 @end group
15564 @end smallexample
15565
15566 @noindent
15567 In a sentence, the function returns the lengths' list for the first of
15568 the @code{list-of-files} appended to the result of calling itself on
15569 the rest of the @code{list-of-files}.
15570
15571 Here is a test of @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files}, along with
15572 the results of running @code{lengths-list-file} on each of the files
15573 individually.
15574
15575 Install @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} and
15576 @code{lengths-list-file}, if necessary, and then evaluate the
15577 following expressions. You may need to change the files' pathnames;
15578 those here work when this Info file and the Emacs sources are located
15579 in their customary places. To change the expressions, copy them to
15580 the @file{*scratch*} buffer, edit them, and then evaluate them.
15581
15582 The results are shown after the @samp{@result{}}. (These results are
15583 for files from Emacs version 22.1.1; files from other versions of
15584 Emacs may produce different results.)
15585
15586 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15587 @smallexample
15588 @group
15589 (cd "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/")
15590
15591 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/macros.el")
15592 @result{} (283 263 480 90)
15593 @end group
15594
15595 @group
15596 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el")
15597 @result{} (38 32 29 95 178 180 321 218 324)
15598 @end group
15599
15600 @group
15601 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/makesum.el")
15602 @result{} (85 181)
15603 @end group
15604
15605 @group
15606 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15607 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15608 "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el"
15609 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15610 @result{} (283 263 480 90 38 32 29 95 178 180 321 218 324 85 181)
15611 @end group
15612 @end smallexample
15613
15614 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function produces the
15615 output we want.
15616
15617 The next step is to prepare the data in the list for display in a graph.
15618
15619 @node Prepare the data, , Several files recursively, Words in a defun
15620 @section Prepare the Data for Display in a Graph
15621
15622 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function returns a list
15623 of numbers. Each number records the length of a function definition.
15624 What we need to do now is transform this data into a list of numbers
15625 suitable for generating a graph. The new list will tell how many
15626 functions definitions contain less than 10 words and
15627 symbols, how many contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how
15628 many contain between 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
15629
15630 In brief, we need to go through the lengths' list produced by the
15631 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function and count the number
15632 of defuns within each range of lengths, and produce a list of those
15633 numbers.
15634
15635 @menu
15636 * Data for Display in Detail::
15637 * Sorting:: Sorting lists.
15638 * Files List:: Making a list of files.
15639 * Counting function definitions::
15640 @end menu
15641
15642 @node Data for Display in Detail, Sorting, Prepare the data, Prepare the data
15643 @ifnottex
15644 @unnumberedsubsec The Data for Display in Detail
15645 @end ifnottex
15646
15647 Based on what we have done before, we can readily foresee that it
15648 should not be too hard to write a function that `@sc{cdr}s' down the
15649 lengths' list, looks at each element, determines which length range it
15650 is in, and increments a counter for that range.
15651
15652 However, before beginning to write such a function, we should consider
15653 the advantages of sorting the lengths' list first, so the numbers are
15654 ordered from smallest to largest. First, sorting will make it easier
15655 to count the numbers in each range, since two adjacent numbers will
15656 either be in the same length range or in adjacent ranges. Second, by
15657 inspecting a sorted list, we can discover the highest and lowest
15658 number, and thereby determine the largest and smallest length range
15659 that we will need.
15660
15661 @node Sorting, Files List, Data for Display in Detail, Prepare the data
15662 @subsection Sorting Lists
15663 @findex sort
15664
15665 Emacs contains a function to sort lists, called (as you might guess)
15666 @code{sort}. The @code{sort} function takes two arguments, the list
15667 to be sorted, and a predicate that determines whether the first of
15668 two list elements is ``less'' than the second.
15669
15670 As we saw earlier (@pxref{Wrong Type of Argument, , Using the Wrong
15671 Type Object as an Argument}), a predicate is a function that
15672 determines whether some property is true or false. The @code{sort}
15673 function will reorder a list according to whatever property the
15674 predicate uses; this means that @code{sort} can be used to sort
15675 non-numeric lists by non-numeric criteria---it can, for example,
15676 alphabetize a list.
15677
15678 @need 1250
15679 The @code{<} function is used when sorting a numeric list. For example,
15680
15681 @smallexample
15682 (sort '(4 8 21 17 33 7 21 7) '<)
15683 @end smallexample
15684
15685 @need 800
15686 @noindent
15687 produces this:
15688
15689 @smallexample
15690 (4 7 7 8 17 21 21 33)
15691 @end smallexample
15692
15693 @noindent
15694 (Note that in this example, both the arguments are quoted so that the
15695 symbols are not evaluated before being passed to @code{sort} as
15696 arguments.)
15697
15698 Sorting the list returned by the
15699 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function is straightforward;
15700 it uses the @code{<} function:
15701
15702 @ignore
15703 2006 Oct 29
15704 In GNU Emacs 22, eval
15705 (progn
15706 (cd "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.0.50/")
15707 (sort
15708 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15709 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15710 "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el"
15711 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15712 '<))
15713
15714 @end ignore
15715
15716 @smallexample
15717 @group
15718 (sort
15719 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15720 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15721 "./lisp/mailalias.el"
15722 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15723 '<)
15724 @end group
15725 @end smallexample
15726
15727 @need 800
15728 @noindent
15729 which produces:
15730
15731 @smallexample
15732 (29 32 38 85 90 95 178 180 181 218 263 283 321 324 480)
15733 @end smallexample
15734
15735 @noindent
15736 (Note that in this example, the first argument to @code{sort} is not
15737 quoted, since the expression must be evaluated so as to produce the
15738 list that is passed to @code{sort}.)
15739
15740 @node Files List, Counting function definitions, Sorting, Prepare the data
15741 @subsection Making a List of Files
15742
15743 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function requires a list
15744 of files as its argument. For our test examples, we constructed such
15745 a list by hand; but the Emacs Lisp source directory is too large for
15746 us to do for that. Instead, we will write a function to do the job
15747 for us. In this function, we will use both a @code{while} loop and a
15748 recursive call.
15749
15750 @findex directory-files
15751 We did not have to write a function like this for older versions of
15752 GNU Emacs, since they placed all the @samp{.el} files in one
15753 directory. Instead, we were able to use the @code{directory-files}
15754 function, which lists the names of files that match a specified
15755 pattern within a single directory.
15756
15757 However, recent versions of Emacs place Emacs Lisp files in
15758 sub-directories of the top level @file{lisp} directory. This
15759 re-arrangement eases navigation. For example, all the mail related
15760 files are in a @file{lisp} sub-directory called @file{mail}. But at
15761 the same time, this arrangement forces us to create a file listing
15762 function that descends into the sub-directories.
15763
15764 @findex files-in-below-directory
15765 We can create this function, called @code{files-in-below-directory},
15766 using familiar functions such as @code{car}, @code{nthcdr}, and
15767 @code{substring} in conjunction with an existing function called
15768 @code{directory-files-and-attributes}. This latter function not only
15769 lists all the filenames in a directory, including the names
15770 of sub-directories, but also their attributes.
15771
15772 To restate our goal: to create a function that will enable us
15773 to feed filenames to @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files}
15774 as a list that looks like this (but with more elements):
15775
15776 @smallexample
15777 @group
15778 ("./lisp/macros.el"
15779 "./lisp/mail/rmail.el"
15780 "./lisp/makesum.el")
15781 @end group
15782 @end smallexample
15783
15784 The @code{directory-files-and-attributes} function returns a list of
15785 lists. Each of the lists within the main list consists of 13
15786 elements. The first element is a string that contains the name of the
15787 file -- which, in GNU/Linux, may be a `directory file', that is to
15788 say, a file with the special attributes of a directory. The second
15789 element of the list is @code{t} for a directory, a string
15790 for symbolic link (the string is the name linked to), or @code{nil}.
15791
15792 For example, the first @samp{.el} file in the @file{lisp/} directory
15793 is @file{abbrev.el}. Its name is
15794 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/abbrev.el} and it is not a
15795 directory or a symbolic link.
15796
15797 @need 1000
15798 This is how @code{directory-files-and-attributes} lists that file and
15799 its attributes:
15800
15801 @smallexample
15802 @group
15803 ("abbrev.el"
15804 nil
15805 1
15806 1000
15807 100
15808 @end group
15809 @group
15810 (17733 259)
15811 (17491 28834)
15812 (17596 62124)
15813 13157
15814 "-rw-rw-r--"
15815 @end group
15816 @group
15817 nil
15818 2971624
15819 773)
15820 @end group
15821 @end smallexample
15822
15823 @need 1200
15824 On the other hand, @file{mail/} is a directory within the @file{lisp/}
15825 directory. The beginning of its listing looks like this:
15826
15827 @smallexample
15828 @group
15829 ("mail"
15830 t
15831 @dots{}
15832 )
15833 @end group
15834 @end smallexample
15835
15836 (To learn about the different attributes, look at the documentation of
15837 @code{file-attributes}. Bear in mind that the @code{file-attributes}
15838 function does not list the filename, so its first element is
15839 @code{directory-files-and-attributes}'s second element.)
15840
15841 We will want our new function, @code{files-in-below-directory}, to
15842 list the @samp{.el} files in the directory it is told to check, and in
15843 any directories below that directory.
15844
15845 This gives us a hint on how to construct
15846 @code{files-in-below-directory}: within a directory, the function
15847 should add @samp{.el} filenames to a list; and if, within a directory,
15848 the function comes upon a sub-directory, it should go into that
15849 sub-directory and repeat its actions.
15850
15851 However, we should note that every directory contains a name that
15852 refers to itself, called @file{.}, (``dot'') and a name that refers to
15853 its parent directory, called @file{..} (``double dot''). (In
15854 @file{/}, the root directory, @file{..} refers to itself, since
15855 @file{/} has no parent.) Clearly, we do not want our
15856 @code{files-in-below-directory} function to enter those directories,
15857 since they always lead us, directly or indirectly, to the current
15858 directory.
15859
15860 Consequently, our @code{files-in-below-directory} function must do
15861 several tasks:
15862
15863 @itemize @bullet
15864 @item
15865 Check to see whether it is looking at a filename that ends in
15866 @samp{.el}; and if so, add its name to a list.
15867
15868 @item
15869 Check to see whether it is looking at a filename that is the name of a
15870 directory; and if so,
15871
15872 @itemize @minus
15873 @item
15874 Check to see whether it is looking at @file{.} or @file{..}; and if
15875 so skip it.
15876
15877 @item
15878 Or else, go into that directory and repeat the process.
15879 @end itemize
15880 @end itemize
15881
15882 Let's write a function definition to do these tasks. We will use a
15883 @code{while} loop to move from one filename to another within a
15884 directory, checking what needs to be done; and we will use a recursive
15885 call to repeat the actions on each sub-directory. The recursive
15886 pattern is `accumulate'
15887 (@pxref{Accumulate, , Recursive Pattern: @emph{accumulate}}),
15888 using @code{append} as the combiner.
15889
15890 @ignore
15891 (directory-files "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/" t "\\.el$")
15892 (shell-command "find /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/ -name '*.el'")
15893
15894 (directory-files "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/" t "\\.el$")
15895 (shell-command "find /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/ -name '*.el'")
15896 @end ignore
15897
15898 @c /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/
15899
15900 @need 800
15901 Here is the function:
15902
15903 @smallexample
15904 @group
15905 (defun files-in-below-directory (directory)
15906 "List the .el files in DIRECTORY and in its sub-directories."
15907 ;; Although the function will be used non-interactively,
15908 ;; it will be easier to test if we make it interactive.
15909 ;; The directory will have a name such as
15910 ;; "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/"
15911 (interactive "DDirectory name: ")
15912 @end group
15913 @group
15914 (let (el-files-list
15915 (current-directory-list
15916 (directory-files-and-attributes directory t)))
15917 ;; while we are in the current directory
15918 (while current-directory-list
15919 @end group
15920 @group
15921 (cond
15922 ;; check to see whether filename ends in `.el'
15923 ;; and if so, append its name to a list.
15924 ((equal ".el" (substring (car (car current-directory-list)) -3))
15925 (setq el-files-list
15926 (cons (car (car current-directory-list)) el-files-list)))
15927 @end group
15928 @group
15929 ;; check whether filename is that of a directory
15930 ((eq t (car (cdr (car current-directory-list))))
15931 ;; decide whether to skip or recurse
15932 (if
15933 (equal "."
15934 (substring (car (car current-directory-list)) -1))
15935 ;; then do nothing since filename is that of
15936 ;; current directory or parent, "." or ".."
15937 ()
15938 @end group
15939 @group
15940 ;; else descend into the directory and repeat the process
15941 (setq el-files-list
15942 (append
15943 (files-in-below-directory
15944 (car (car current-directory-list)))
15945 el-files-list)))))
15946 ;; move to the next filename in the list; this also
15947 ;; shortens the list so the while loop eventually comes to an end
15948 (setq current-directory-list (cdr current-directory-list)))
15949 ;; return the filenames
15950 el-files-list))
15951 @end group
15952 @end smallexample
15953
15954 @c (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/")
15955 @c (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/")
15956
15957 The @code{files-in-below-directory} @code{directory-files} function
15958 takes one argument, the name of a directory.
15959
15960 @need 1250
15961 Thus, on my system,
15962
15963 @c (length (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/"))
15964
15965 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15966 @smallexample
15967 @group
15968 (length
15969 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/"))
15970 @end group
15971 @end smallexample
15972
15973 @noindent
15974 tells me that in and below my Lisp sources directory are 1031
15975 @samp{.el} files.
15976
15977 @code{files-in-below-directory} returns a list in reverse alphabetical
15978 order. An expression to sort the list in alphabetical order looks
15979 like this:
15980
15981 @smallexample
15982 @group
15983 (sort
15984 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/")
15985 'string-lessp)
15986 @end group
15987 @end smallexample
15988
15989 @ignore
15990 (defun test ()
15991 "Test how long it takes to find lengths of all sorted elisp defuns."
15992 (insert "\n" (current-time-string) "\n")
15993 (sit-for 0)
15994 (sort
15995 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15996 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/"))
15997 '<)
15998 (insert (format "%s" (current-time-string))))
15999 @end ignore
16000
16001 @node Counting function definitions, , Files List, Prepare the data
16002 @subsection Counting function definitions
16003
16004 Our immediate goal is to generate a list that tells us how many
16005 function definitions contain fewer than 10 words and symbols, how many
16006 contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how many contain between
16007 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
16008
16009 With a sorted list of numbers, this is easy: count how many elements
16010 of the list are smaller than 10, then, after moving past the numbers
16011 just counted, count how many are smaller than 20, then, after moving
16012 past the numbers just counted, count how many are smaller than 30, and
16013 so on. Each of the numbers, 10, 20, 30, 40, and the like, is one
16014 larger than the top of that range. We can call the list of such
16015 numbers the @code{top-of-ranges} list.
16016
16017 @need 1200
16018 If we wished, we could generate this list automatically, but it is
16019 simpler to write a list manually. Here it is:
16020 @vindex top-of-ranges
16021
16022 @smallexample
16023 @group
16024 (defvar top-of-ranges
16025 '(10 20 30 40 50
16026 60 70 80 90 100
16027 110 120 130 140 150
16028 160 170 180 190 200
16029 210 220 230 240 250
16030 260 270 280 290 300)
16031 "List specifying ranges for `defuns-per-range'.")
16032 @end group
16033 @end smallexample
16034
16035 To change the ranges, we edit this list.
16036
16037 Next, we need to write the function that creates the list of the
16038 number of definitions within each range. Clearly, this function must
16039 take the @code{sorted-lengths} and the @code{top-of-ranges} lists
16040 as arguments.
16041
16042 The @code{defuns-per-range} function must do two things again and
16043 again: it must count the number of definitions within a range
16044 specified by the current top-of-range value; and it must shift to the
16045 next higher value in the @code{top-of-ranges} list after counting the
16046 number of definitions in the current range. Since each of these
16047 actions is repetitive, we can use @code{while} loops for the job.
16048 One loop counts the number of definitions in the range defined by the
16049 current top-of-range value, and the other loop selects each of the
16050 top-of-range values in turn.
16051
16052 Several entries of the @code{sorted-lengths} list are counted for each
16053 range; this means that the loop for the @code{sorted-lengths} list
16054 will be inside the loop for the @code{top-of-ranges} list, like a
16055 small gear inside a big gear.
16056
16057 The inner loop counts the number of definitions within the range. It
16058 is a simple counting loop of the type we have seen before.
16059 (@xref{Incrementing Loop, , A loop with an incrementing counter}.)
16060 The true-or-false test of the loop tests whether the value from the
16061 @code{sorted-lengths} list is smaller than the current value of the
16062 top of the range. If it is, the function increments the counter and
16063 tests the next value from the @code{sorted-lengths} list.
16064
16065 @need 1250
16066 The inner loop looks like this:
16067
16068 @smallexample
16069 @group
16070 (while @var{length-element-smaller-than-top-of-range}
16071 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
16072 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
16073 @end group
16074 @end smallexample
16075
16076 The outer loop must start with the lowest value of the
16077 @code{top-of-ranges} list, and then be set to each of the succeeding
16078 higher values in turn. This can be done with a loop like this:
16079
16080 @smallexample
16081 @group
16082 (while top-of-ranges
16083 @var{body-of-loop}@dots{}
16084 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges)))
16085 @end group
16086 @end smallexample
16087
16088 @need 1200
16089 Put together, the two loops look like this:
16090
16091 @smallexample
16092 @group
16093 (while top-of-ranges
16094
16095 ;; @r{Count the number of elements within the current range.}
16096 (while @var{length-element-smaller-than-top-of-range}
16097 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
16098 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
16099
16100 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
16101 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges)))
16102 @end group
16103 @end smallexample
16104
16105 In addition, in each circuit of the outer loop, Emacs should record
16106 the number of definitions within that range (the value of
16107 @code{number-within-range}) in a list. We can use @code{cons} for
16108 this purpose. (@xref{cons, , @code{cons}}.)
16109
16110 The @code{cons} function works fine, except that the list it
16111 constructs will contain the number of definitions for the highest
16112 range at its beginning and the number of definitions for the lowest
16113 range at its end. This is because @code{cons} attaches new elements
16114 of the list to the beginning of the list, and since the two loops are
16115 working their way through the lengths' list from the lower end first,
16116 the @code{defuns-per-range-list} will end up largest number first.
16117 But we will want to print our graph with smallest values first and the
16118 larger later. The solution is to reverse the order of the
16119 @code{defuns-per-range-list}. We can do this using the
16120 @code{nreverse} function, which reverses the order of a list.
16121 @findex nreverse
16122
16123 @need 800
16124 For example,
16125
16126 @smallexample
16127 (nreverse '(1 2 3 4))
16128 @end smallexample
16129
16130 @need 800
16131 @noindent
16132 produces:
16133
16134 @smallexample
16135 (4 3 2 1)
16136 @end smallexample
16137
16138 Note that the @code{nreverse} function is ``destructive''---that is,
16139 it changes the list to which it is applied; this contrasts with the
16140 @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions, which are non-destructive. In
16141 this case, we do not want the original @code{defuns-per-range-list},
16142 so it does not matter that it is destroyed. (The @code{reverse}
16143 function provides a reversed copy of a list, leaving the original list
16144 as is.)
16145 @findex reverse
16146
16147 @need 1250
16148 Put all together, the @code{defuns-per-range} looks like this:
16149
16150 @smallexample
16151 @group
16152 (defun defuns-per-range (sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
16153 "SORTED-LENGTHS defuns in each TOP-OF-RANGES range."
16154 (let ((top-of-range (car top-of-ranges))
16155 (number-within-range 0)
16156 defuns-per-range-list)
16157 @end group
16158
16159 @group
16160 ;; @r{Outer loop.}
16161 (while top-of-ranges
16162 @end group
16163
16164 @group
16165 ;; @r{Inner loop.}
16166 (while (and
16167 ;; @r{Need number for numeric test.}
16168 (car sorted-lengths)
16169 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
16170 @end group
16171
16172 @group
16173 ;; @r{Count number of definitions within current range.}
16174 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
16175 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
16176
16177 ;; @r{Exit inner loop but remain within outer loop.}
16178 @end group
16179
16180 @group
16181 (setq defuns-per-range-list
16182 (cons number-within-range defuns-per-range-list))
16183 (setq number-within-range 0) ; @r{Reset count to zero.}
16184 @end group
16185
16186 @group
16187 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
16188 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges))
16189 ;; @r{Specify next top of range value.}
16190 (setq top-of-range (car top-of-ranges)))
16191 @end group
16192
16193 @group
16194 ;; @r{Exit outer loop and count the number of defuns larger than}
16195 ;; @r{ the largest top-of-range value.}
16196 (setq defuns-per-range-list
16197 (cons
16198 (length sorted-lengths)
16199 defuns-per-range-list))
16200 @end group
16201
16202 @group
16203 ;; @r{Return a list of the number of definitions within each range,}
16204 ;; @r{ smallest to largest.}
16205 (nreverse defuns-per-range-list)))
16206 @end group
16207 @end smallexample
16208
16209 @need 1200
16210 @noindent
16211 The function is straightforward except for one subtle feature. The
16212 true-or-false test of the inner loop looks like this:
16213
16214 @smallexample
16215 @group
16216 (and (car sorted-lengths)
16217 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
16218 @end group
16219 @end smallexample
16220
16221 @need 800
16222 @noindent
16223 instead of like this:
16224
16225 @smallexample
16226 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range)
16227 @end smallexample
16228
16229 The purpose of the test is to determine whether the first item in the
16230 @code{sorted-lengths} list is less than the value of the top of the
16231 range.
16232
16233 The simple version of the test works fine unless the
16234 @code{sorted-lengths} list has a @code{nil} value. In that case, the
16235 @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression function returns
16236 @code{nil}. The @code{<} function cannot compare a number to
16237 @code{nil}, which is an empty list, so Emacs signals an error and
16238 stops the function from attempting to continue to execute.
16239
16240 The @code{sorted-lengths} list always becomes @code{nil} when the
16241 counter reaches the end of the list. This means that any attempt to
16242 use the @code{defuns-per-range} function with the simple version of
16243 the test will fail.
16244
16245 We solve the problem by using the @code{(car sorted-lengths)}
16246 expression in conjunction with the @code{and} expression. The
16247 @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression returns a non-@code{nil}
16248 value so long as the list has at least one number within it, but
16249 returns @code{nil} if the list is empty. The @code{and} expression
16250 first evaluates the @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression, and
16251 if it is @code{nil}, returns false @emph{without} evaluating the
16252 @code{<} expression. But if the @code{(car sorted-lengths)}
16253 expression returns a non-@code{nil} value, the @code{and} expression
16254 evaluates the @code{<} expression, and returns that value as the value
16255 of the @code{and} expression.
16256
16257 @c colon in printed section title causes problem in Info cross reference
16258 This way, we avoid an error.
16259 @iftex
16260 @noindent
16261 (For information about @code{and}, see
16262 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.)
16263 @end iftex
16264 @ifinfo
16265 @noindent
16266 (@xref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, for
16267 information about @code{and}.)
16268 @end ifinfo
16269
16270 Here is a short test of the @code{defuns-per-range} function. First,
16271 evaluate the expression that binds (a shortened)
16272 @code{top-of-ranges} list to the list of values, then evaluate the
16273 expression for binding the @code{sorted-lengths} list, and then
16274 evaluate the @code{defuns-per-range} function.
16275
16276 @smallexample
16277 @group
16278 ;; @r{(Shorter list than we will use later.)}
16279 (setq top-of-ranges
16280 '(110 120 130 140 150
16281 160 170 180 190 200))
16282
16283 (setq sorted-lengths
16284 '(85 86 110 116 122 129 154 176 179 200 265 300 300))
16285
16286 (defuns-per-range sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
16287 @end group
16288 @end smallexample
16289
16290 @need 800
16291 @noindent
16292 The list returned looks like this:
16293
16294 @smallexample
16295 (2 2 2 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 4)
16296 @end smallexample
16297
16298 @noindent
16299 Indeed, there are two elements of the @code{sorted-lengths} list
16300 smaller than 110, two elements between 110 and 119, two elements
16301 between 120 and 129, and so on. There are four elements with a value
16302 of 200 or larger.
16303
16304 @c The next step is to turn this numbers' list into a graph.
16305 @node Readying a Graph, Emacs Initialization, Words in a defun, Top
16306 @chapter Readying a Graph
16307 @cindex Readying a graph
16308 @cindex Graph prototype
16309 @cindex Prototype graph
16310 @cindex Body of graph
16311
16312 Our goal is to construct a graph showing the numbers of function
16313 definitions of various lengths in the Emacs lisp sources.
16314
16315 As a practical matter, if you were creating a graph, you would
16316 probably use a program such as @code{gnuplot} to do the job.
16317 (@code{gnuplot} is nicely integrated into GNU Emacs.) In this case,
16318 however, we create one from scratch, and in the process we will
16319 re-acquaint ourselves with some of what we learned before and learn
16320 more.
16321
16322 In this chapter, we will first write a simple graph printing function.
16323 This first definition will be a @dfn{prototype}, a rapidly written
16324 function that enables us to reconnoiter this unknown graph-making
16325 territory. We will discover dragons, or find that they are myth.
16326 After scouting the terrain, we will feel more confident and enhance
16327 the function to label the axes automatically.
16328
16329 @menu
16330 * Columns of a graph::
16331 * graph-body-print:: How to print the body of a graph.
16332 * recursive-graph-body-print::
16333 * Printed Axes::
16334 * Line Graph Exercise::
16335 @end menu
16336
16337 @node Columns of a graph, graph-body-print, Readying a Graph, Readying a Graph
16338 @ifnottex
16339 @unnumberedsec Printing the Columns of a Graph
16340 @end ifnottex
16341
16342 Since Emacs is designed to be flexible and work with all kinds of
16343 terminals, including character-only terminals, the graph will need to
16344 be made from one of the `typewriter' symbols. An asterisk will do; as
16345 we enhance the graph-printing function, we can make the choice of
16346 symbol a user option.
16347
16348 We can call this function @code{graph-body-print}; it will take a
16349 @code{numbers-list} as its only argument. At this stage, we will not
16350 label the graph, but only print its body.
16351
16352 The @code{graph-body-print} function inserts a vertical column of
16353 asterisks for each element in the @code{numbers-list}. The height of
16354 each line is determined by the value of that element of the
16355 @code{numbers-list}.
16356
16357 Inserting columns is a repetitive act; that means that this function can
16358 be written either with a @code{while} loop or recursively.
16359
16360 Our first challenge is to discover how to print a column of asterisks.
16361 Usually, in Emacs, we print characters onto a screen horizontally,
16362 line by line, by typing. We have two routes we can follow: write our
16363 own column-insertion function or discover whether one exists in Emacs.
16364
16365 To see whether there is one in Emacs, we can use the @kbd{M-x apropos}
16366 command. This command is like the @kbd{C-h a} (@code{command-apropos})
16367 command, except that the latter finds only those functions that are
16368 commands. The @kbd{M-x apropos} command lists all symbols that match
16369 a regular expression, including functions that are not interactive.
16370 @findex apropos
16371
16372 What we want to look for is some command that prints or inserts
16373 columns. Very likely, the name of the function will contain either
16374 the word `print' or the word `insert' or the word `column'.
16375 Therefore, we can simply type @kbd{M-x apropos RET
16376 print\|insert\|column RET} and look at the result. On my system, this
16377 command once too takes quite some time, and then produced a list of 79
16378 functions and variables. Now it does not take much time at all and
16379 produces a list of 211 functions and variables. Scanning down the
16380 list, the only function that looks as if it might do the job is
16381 @code{insert-rectangle}.
16382
16383 @need 1200
16384 Indeed, this is the function we want; its documentation says:
16385
16386 @smallexample
16387 @group
16388 insert-rectangle:
16389 Insert text of RECTANGLE with upper left corner at point.
16390 RECTANGLE's first line is inserted at point,
16391 its second line is inserted at a point vertically under point, etc.
16392 RECTANGLE should be a list of strings.
16393 After this command, the mark is at the upper left corner
16394 and point is at the lower right corner.
16395 @end group
16396 @end smallexample
16397
16398 We can run a quick test, to make sure it does what we expect of it.
16399
16400 Here is the result of placing the cursor after the
16401 @code{insert-rectangle} expression and typing @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}
16402 (@code{eval-last-sexp}). The function inserts the strings
16403 @samp{"first"}, @samp{"second"}, and @samp{"third"} at and below
16404 point. Also the function returns @code{nil}.
16405
16406 @smallexample
16407 @group
16408 (insert-rectangle '("first" "second" "third"))first
16409 second
16410 thirdnil
16411 @end group
16412 @end smallexample
16413
16414 @noindent
16415 Of course, we won't be inserting the text of the
16416 @code{insert-rectangle} expression itself into the buffer in which we
16417 are making the graph, but will call the function from our program. We
16418 shall, however, have to make sure that point is in the buffer at the
16419 place where the @code{insert-rectangle} function will insert its
16420 column of strings.
16421
16422 If you are reading this in Info, you can see how this works by
16423 switching to another buffer, such as the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
16424 placing point somewhere in the buffer, typing @kbd{M-:}, typing the
16425 @code{insert-rectangle} expression into the minibuffer at the prompt,
16426 and then typing @key{RET}. This causes Emacs to evaluate the
16427 expression in the minibuffer, but to use as the value of point the
16428 position of point in the @file{*scratch*} buffer. (@kbd{M-:} is the
16429 keybinding for @code{eval-expression}. Also, @code{nil} does not
16430 appear in the @file{*scratch*} buffer since the expression is
16431 evaluated in the minibuffer.)
16432
16433 We find when we do this that point ends up at the end of the last
16434 inserted line---that is to say, this function moves point as a
16435 side-effect. If we were to repeat the command, with point at this
16436 position, the next insertion would be below and to the right of the
16437 previous insertion. We don't want this! If we are going to make a
16438 bar graph, the columns need to be beside each other.
16439
16440 So we discover that each cycle of the column-inserting @code{while}
16441 loop must reposition point to the place we want it, and that place
16442 will be at the top, not the bottom, of the column. Moreover, we
16443 remember that when we print a graph, we do not expect all the columns
16444 to be the same height. This means that the top of each column may be
16445 at a different height from the previous one. We cannot simply
16446 reposition point to the same line each time, but moved over to the
16447 right---or perhaps we can@dots{}
16448
16449 We are planning to make the columns of the bar graph out of asterisks.
16450 The number of asterisks in the column is the number specified by the
16451 current element of the @code{numbers-list}. We need to construct a
16452 list of asterisks of the right length for each call to
16453 @code{insert-rectangle}. If this list consists solely of the requisite
16454 number of asterisks, then we will have position point the right number
16455 of lines above the base for the graph to print correctly. This could
16456 be difficult.
16457
16458 Alternatively, if we can figure out some way to pass
16459 @code{insert-rectangle} a list of the same length each time, then we
16460 can place point on the same line each time, but move it over one
16461 column to the right for each new column. If we do this, however, some
16462 of the entries in the list passed to @code{insert-rectangle} must be
16463 blanks rather than asterisks. For example, if the maximum height of
16464 the graph is 5, but the height of the column is 3, then
16465 @code{insert-rectangle} requires an argument that looks like this:
16466
16467 @smallexample
16468 (" " " " "*" "*" "*")
16469 @end smallexample
16470
16471 This last proposal is not so difficult, so long as we can determine
16472 the column height. There are two ways for us to specify the column
16473 height: we can arbitrarily state what it will be, which would work
16474 fine for graphs of that height; or we can search through the list of
16475 numbers and use the maximum height of the list as the maximum height
16476 of the graph. If the latter operation were difficult, then the former
16477 procedure would be easiest, but there is a function built into Emacs
16478 that determines the maximum of its arguments. We can use that
16479 function. The function is called @code{max} and it returns the
16480 largest of all its arguments, which must be numbers. Thus, for
16481 example,
16482
16483 @smallexample
16484 (max 3 4 6 5 7 3)
16485 @end smallexample
16486
16487 @noindent
16488 returns 7. (A corresponding function called @code{min} returns the
16489 smallest of all its arguments.)
16490 @findex max
16491 @findex min
16492
16493 However, we cannot simply call @code{max} on the @code{numbers-list};
16494 the @code{max} function expects numbers as its argument, not a list of
16495 numbers. Thus, the following expression,
16496
16497 @smallexample
16498 (max '(3 4 6 5 7 3))
16499 @end smallexample
16500
16501 @need 800
16502 @noindent
16503 produces the following error message;
16504
16505 @smallexample
16506 Wrong type of argument: number-or-marker-p, (3 4 6 5 7 3)
16507 @end smallexample
16508
16509 @findex apply
16510 We need a function that passes a list of arguments to a function.
16511 This function is @code{apply}. This function `applies' its first
16512 argument (a function) to its remaining arguments, the last of which
16513 may be a list.
16514
16515 @need 1250
16516 For example,
16517
16518 @smallexample
16519 (apply 'max 3 4 7 3 '(4 8 5))
16520 @end smallexample
16521
16522 @noindent
16523 returns 8.
16524
16525 (Incidentally, I don't know how you would learn of this function
16526 without a book such as this. It is possible to discover other
16527 functions, like @code{search-forward} or @code{insert-rectangle}, by
16528 guessing at a part of their names and then using @code{apropos}. Even
16529 though its base in metaphor is clear---`apply' its first argument to
16530 the rest---I doubt a novice would come up with that particular word
16531 when using @code{apropos} or other aid. Of course, I could be wrong;
16532 after all, the function was first named by someone who had to invent
16533 it.)
16534
16535 The second and subsequent arguments to @code{apply} are optional, so
16536 we can use @code{apply} to call a function and pass the elements of a
16537 list to it, like this, which also returns 8:
16538
16539 @smallexample
16540 (apply 'max '(4 8 5))
16541 @end smallexample
16542
16543 This latter way is how we will use @code{apply}. The
16544 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function returns a numbers'
16545 list to which we can apply @code{max} (we could also apply @code{max} to
16546 the sorted numbers' list; it does not matter whether the list is
16547 sorted or not.)
16548
16549 @need 800
16550 Hence, the operation for finding the maximum height of the graph is this:
16551
16552 @smallexample
16553 (setq max-graph-height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16554 @end smallexample
16555
16556 Now we can return to the question of how to create a list of strings
16557 for a column of the graph. Told the maximum height of the graph
16558 and the number of asterisks that should appear in the column, the
16559 function should return a list of strings for the
16560 @code{insert-rectangle} command to insert.
16561
16562 Each column is made up of asterisks or blanks. Since the function is
16563 passed the value of the height of the column and the number of
16564 asterisks in the column, the number of blanks can be found by
16565 subtracting the number of asterisks from the height of the column.
16566 Given the number of blanks and the number of asterisks, two
16567 @code{while} loops can be used to construct the list:
16568
16569 @smallexample
16570 @group
16571 ;;; @r{First version.}
16572 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
16573 "Return list of strings that is one column of a graph."
16574 (let ((insert-list nil)
16575 (number-of-top-blanks
16576 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
16577 @end group
16578
16579 @group
16580 ;; @r{Fill in asterisks.}
16581 (while (> actual-height 0)
16582 (setq insert-list (cons "*" insert-list))
16583 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
16584 @end group
16585
16586 @group
16587 ;; @r{Fill in blanks.}
16588 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
16589 (setq insert-list (cons " " insert-list))
16590 (setq number-of-top-blanks
16591 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
16592 @end group
16593
16594 @group
16595 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
16596 insert-list))
16597 @end group
16598 @end smallexample
16599
16600 If you install this function and then evaluate the following
16601 expression you will see that it returns the list as desired:
16602
16603 @smallexample
16604 (column-of-graph 5 3)
16605 @end smallexample
16606
16607 @need 800
16608 @noindent
16609 returns
16610
16611 @smallexample
16612 (" " " " "*" "*" "*")
16613 @end smallexample
16614
16615 As written, @code{column-of-graph} contains a major flaw: the symbols
16616 used for the blank and for the marked entries in the column are
16617 `hard-coded' as a space and asterisk. This is fine for a prototype,
16618 but you, or another user, may wish to use other symbols. For example,
16619 in testing the graph function, you many want to use a period in place
16620 of the space, to make sure the point is being repositioned properly
16621 each time the @code{insert-rectangle} function is called; or you might
16622 want to substitute a @samp{+} sign or other symbol for the asterisk.
16623 You might even want to make a graph-column that is more than one
16624 display column wide. The program should be more flexible. The way to
16625 do that is to replace the blank and the asterisk with two variables
16626 that we can call @code{graph-blank} and @code{graph-symbol} and define
16627 those variables separately.
16628
16629 Also, the documentation is not well written. These considerations
16630 lead us to the second version of the function:
16631
16632 @smallexample
16633 @group
16634 (defvar graph-symbol "*"
16635 "String used as symbol in graph, usually an asterisk.")
16636 @end group
16637
16638 @group
16639 (defvar graph-blank " "
16640 "String used as blank in graph, usually a blank space.
16641 graph-blank must be the same number of columns wide
16642 as graph-symbol.")
16643 @end group
16644 @end smallexample
16645
16646 @noindent
16647 (For an explanation of @code{defvar}, see
16648 @ref{defvar, , Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}}.)
16649
16650 @smallexample
16651 @group
16652 ;;; @r{Second version.}
16653 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
16654 "Return MAX-GRAPH-HEIGHT strings; ACTUAL-HEIGHT are graph-symbols.
16655
16656 @end group
16657 @group
16658 The graph-symbols are contiguous entries at the end
16659 of the list.
16660 The list will be inserted as one column of a graph.
16661 The strings are either graph-blank or graph-symbol."
16662 @end group
16663
16664 @group
16665 (let ((insert-list nil)
16666 (number-of-top-blanks
16667 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
16668 @end group
16669
16670 @group
16671 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-symbols}.}
16672 (while (> actual-height 0)
16673 (setq insert-list (cons graph-symbol insert-list))
16674 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
16675 @end group
16676
16677 @group
16678 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-blanks}.}
16679 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
16680 (setq insert-list (cons graph-blank insert-list))
16681 (setq number-of-top-blanks
16682 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
16683
16684 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
16685 insert-list))
16686 @end group
16687 @end smallexample
16688
16689 If we wished, we could rewrite @code{column-of-graph} a third time to
16690 provide optionally for a line graph as well as for a bar graph. This
16691 would not be hard to do. One way to think of a line graph is that it
16692 is no more than a bar graph in which the part of each bar that is
16693 below the top is blank. To construct a column for a line graph, the
16694 function first constructs a list of blanks that is one shorter than
16695 the value, then it uses @code{cons} to attach a graph symbol to the
16696 list; then it uses @code{cons} again to attach the `top blanks' to
16697 the list.
16698
16699 It is easy to see how to write such a function, but since we don't
16700 need it, we will not do it. But the job could be done, and if it were
16701 done, it would be done with @code{column-of-graph}. Even more
16702 important, it is worth noting that few changes would have to be made
16703 anywhere else. The enhancement, if we ever wish to make it, is
16704 simple.
16705
16706 Now, finally, we come to our first actual graph printing function.
16707 This prints the body of a graph, not the labels for the vertical and
16708 horizontal axes, so we can call this @code{graph-body-print}.
16709
16710 @node graph-body-print, recursive-graph-body-print, Columns of a graph, Readying a Graph
16711 @section The @code{graph-body-print} Function
16712 @findex graph-body-print
16713
16714 After our preparation in the preceding section, the
16715 @code{graph-body-print} function is straightforward. The function
16716 will print column after column of asterisks and blanks, using the
16717 elements of a numbers' list to specify the number of asterisks in each
16718 column. This is a repetitive act, which means we can use a
16719 decrementing @code{while} loop or recursive function for the job. In
16720 this section, we will write the definition using a @code{while} loop.
16721
16722 The @code{column-of-graph} function requires the height of the graph
16723 as an argument, so we should determine and record that as a local variable.
16724
16725 This leads us to the following template for the @code{while} loop
16726 version of this function:
16727
16728 @smallexample
16729 @group
16730 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16731 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
16732 (let ((height @dots{}
16733 @dots{}))
16734 @end group
16735
16736 @group
16737 (while numbers-list
16738 @var{insert-columns-and-reposition-point}
16739 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))))
16740 @end group
16741 @end smallexample
16742
16743 @noindent
16744 We need to fill in the slots of the template.
16745
16746 Clearly, we can use the @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)} expression to
16747 determine the height of the graph.
16748
16749 The @code{while} loop will cycle through the @code{numbers-list} one
16750 element at a time. As it is shortened by the @code{(setq numbers-list
16751 (cdr numbers-list))} expression, the @sc{car} of each instance of the
16752 list is the value of the argument for @code{column-of-graph}.
16753
16754 At each cycle of the @code{while} loop, the @code{insert-rectangle}
16755 function inserts the list returned by @code{column-of-graph}. Since
16756 the @code{insert-rectangle} function moves point to the lower right of
16757 the inserted rectangle, we need to save the location of point at the
16758 time the rectangle is inserted, move back to that position after the
16759 rectangle is inserted, and then move horizontally to the next place
16760 from which @code{insert-rectangle} is called.
16761
16762 If the inserted columns are one character wide, as they will be if
16763 single blanks and asterisks are used, the repositioning command is
16764 simply @code{(forward-char 1)}; however, the width of a column may be
16765 greater than one. This means that the repositioning command should be
16766 written @code{(forward-char symbol-width)}. The @code{symbol-width}
16767 itself is the length of a @code{graph-blank} and can be found using
16768 the expression @code{(length graph-blank)}. The best place to bind
16769 the @code{symbol-width} variable to the value of the width of graph
16770 column is in the varlist of the @code{let} expression.
16771
16772 @need 1250
16773 These considerations lead to the following function definition:
16774
16775 @smallexample
16776 @group
16777 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16778 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
16779 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values."
16780
16781 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16782 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))
16783 from-position)
16784 @end group
16785
16786 @group
16787 (while numbers-list
16788 (setq from-position (point))
16789 (insert-rectangle
16790 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
16791 (goto-char from-position)
16792 (forward-char symbol-width)
16793 @end group
16794 @group
16795 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
16796 (sit-for 0)
16797 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
16798 @end group
16799 @group
16800 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
16801 (forward-line height)
16802 (insert "\n")
16803 ))
16804 @end group
16805 @end smallexample
16806
16807 @noindent
16808 The one unexpected expression in this function is the
16809 @w{@code{(sit-for 0)}} expression in the @code{while} loop. This
16810 expression makes the graph printing operation more interesting to
16811 watch than it would be otherwise. The expression causes Emacs to
16812 `sit' or do nothing for a zero length of time and then redraw the
16813 screen. Placed here, it causes Emacs to redraw the screen column by
16814 column. Without it, Emacs would not redraw the screen until the
16815 function exits.
16816
16817 We can test @code{graph-body-print} with a short list of numbers.
16818
16819 @enumerate
16820 @item
16821 Install @code{graph-symbol}, @code{graph-blank},
16822 @code{column-of-graph}, which are in
16823 @iftex
16824 @ref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph},
16825 @end iftex
16826 @ifinfo
16827 @ref{Columns of a graph},
16828 @end ifinfo
16829 and @code{graph-body-print}.
16830
16831 @need 800
16832 @item
16833 Copy the following expression:
16834
16835 @smallexample
16836 (graph-body-print '(1 2 3 4 6 4 3 5 7 6 5 2 3))
16837 @end smallexample
16838
16839 @item
16840 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
16841 want the graph to start.
16842
16843 @item
16844 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
16845
16846 @item
16847 Yank the @code{graph-body-print} expression into the minibuffer
16848 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
16849
16850 @item
16851 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the @code{graph-body-print} expression.
16852 @end enumerate
16853
16854 @need 800
16855 Emacs will print a graph like this:
16856
16857 @smallexample
16858 @group
16859 *
16860 * **
16861 * ****
16862 *** ****
16863 ********* *
16864 ************
16865 *************
16866 @end group
16867 @end smallexample
16868
16869 @node recursive-graph-body-print, Printed Axes, graph-body-print, Readying a Graph
16870 @section The @code{recursive-graph-body-print} Function
16871 @findex recursive-graph-body-print
16872
16873 The @code{graph-body-print} function may also be written recursively.
16874 The recursive solution is divided into two parts: an outside `wrapper'
16875 that uses a @code{let} expression to determine the values of several
16876 variables that need only be found once, such as the maximum height of
16877 the graph, and an inside function that is called recursively to print
16878 the graph.
16879
16880 @need 1250
16881 The `wrapper' is uncomplicated:
16882
16883 @smallexample
16884 @group
16885 (defun recursive-graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16886 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
16887 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values."
16888 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16889 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))
16890 from-position)
16891 (recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16892 numbers-list
16893 height
16894 symbol-width)))
16895 @end group
16896 @end smallexample
16897
16898 The recursive function is a little more difficult. It has four parts:
16899 the `do-again-test', the printing code, the recursive call, and the
16900 `next-step-expression'. The `do-again-test' is a @code{when}
16901 expression that determines whether the @code{numbers-list} contains
16902 any remaining elements; if it does, the function prints one column of
16903 the graph using the printing code and calls itself again. The
16904 function calls itself again according to the value produced by the
16905 `next-step-expression' which causes the call to act on a shorter
16906 version of the @code{numbers-list}.
16907
16908 @smallexample
16909 @group
16910 (defun recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16911 (numbers-list height symbol-width)
16912 "Print a bar graph.
16913 Used within recursive-graph-body-print function."
16914 @end group
16915
16916 @group
16917 (when numbers-list
16918 (setq from-position (point))
16919 (insert-rectangle
16920 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
16921 @end group
16922 @group
16923 (goto-char from-position)
16924 (forward-char symbol-width)
16925 (sit-for 0) ; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
16926 (recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16927 (cdr numbers-list) height symbol-width)))
16928 @end group
16929 @end smallexample
16930
16931 @need 1250
16932 After installation, this expression can be tested; here is a sample:
16933
16934 @smallexample
16935 (recursive-graph-body-print '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1))
16936 @end smallexample
16937
16938 @need 800
16939 Here is what @code{recursive-graph-body-print} produces:
16940
16941 @smallexample
16942 @group
16943 *
16944 ** *
16945 **** *
16946 **** ***
16947 * *********
16948 ************
16949 *************
16950 @end group
16951 @end smallexample
16952
16953 Either of these two functions, @code{graph-body-print} or
16954 @code{recursive-graph-body-print}, create the body of a graph.
16955
16956 @node Printed Axes, Line Graph Exercise, recursive-graph-body-print, Readying a Graph
16957 @section Need for Printed Axes
16958
16959 A graph needs printed axes, so you can orient yourself. For a do-once
16960 project, it may be reasonable to draw the axes by hand using Emacs'
16961 Picture mode; but a graph drawing function may be used more than once.
16962
16963 For this reason, I have written enhancements to the basic
16964 @code{print-graph-body} function that automatically print labels for
16965 the horizontal and vertical axes. Since the label printing functions
16966 do not contain much new material, I have placed their description in
16967 an appendix. @xref{Full Graph, , A Graph with Labelled Axes}.
16968
16969 @node Line Graph Exercise, , Printed Axes, Readying a Graph
16970 @section Exercise
16971
16972 Write a line graph version of the graph printing functions.
16973
16974 @node Emacs Initialization, Debugging, Readying a Graph, Top
16975 @chapter Your @file{.emacs} File
16976 @cindex @file{.emacs} file
16977 @cindex Customizing your @file{.emacs} file
16978 @cindex Initialization file
16979
16980 ``You don't have to like Emacs to like it'' -- this seemingly
16981 paradoxical statement is the secret of GNU Emacs. The plain, `out of
16982 the box' Emacs is a generic tool. Most people who use it, customize
16983 it to suit themselves.
16984
16985 GNU Emacs is mostly written in Emacs Lisp; this means that by writing
16986 expressions in Emacs Lisp you can change or extend Emacs.
16987
16988 @menu
16989 * Default Configuration::
16990 * Site-wide Init:: You can write site-wide init files.
16991 * defcustom:: Emacs will write code for you.
16992 * Beginning a .emacs File:: How to write a @code{.emacs file}.
16993 * Text and Auto-fill:: Automatically wrap lines.
16994 * Mail Aliases:: Use abbreviations for email addresses.
16995 * Indent Tabs Mode:: Don't use tabs with @TeX{}
16996 * Keybindings:: Create some personal keybindings.
16997 * Keymaps:: More about key binding.
16998 * Loading Files:: Load (i.e., evaluate) files automatically.
16999 * Autoload:: Make functions available.
17000 * Simple Extension:: Define a function; bind it to a key.
17001 * X11 Colors:: Colors in X.
17002 * Miscellaneous::
17003 * Mode Line:: How to customize your mode line.
17004 @end menu
17005
17006 @node Default Configuration, Site-wide Init, Emacs Initialization, Emacs Initialization
17007 @ifnottex
17008 @unnumberedsec Emacs' Default Configuration
17009 @end ifnottex
17010
17011 There are those who appreciate Emacs' default configuration. After
17012 all, Emacs starts you in C mode when you edit a C file, starts you in
17013 Fortran mode when you edit a Fortran file, and starts you in
17014 Fundamental mode when you edit an unadorned file. This all makes
17015 sense, if you do not know who is going to use Emacs. Who knows what a
17016 person hopes to do with an unadorned file? Fundamental mode is the
17017 right default for such a file, just as C mode is the right default for
17018 editing C code. (Enough programming languages have syntaxes
17019 that enable them to share or nearly share features, so C mode is
17020 now provided by CC mode, the `C Collection'.)
17021
17022 But when you do know who is going to use Emacs---you,
17023 yourself---then it makes sense to customize Emacs.
17024
17025 For example, I seldom want Fundamental mode when I edit an
17026 otherwise undistinguished file; I want Text mode. This is why I
17027 customize Emacs: so it suits me.
17028
17029 You can customize and extend Emacs by writing or adapting a
17030 @file{~/.emacs} file. This is your personal initialization file; its
17031 contents, written in Emacs Lisp, tell Emacs what to do.@footnote{You
17032 may also add @file{.el} to @file{~/.emacs} and call it a
17033 @file{~/.emacs.el} file. In the past, you were forbidden to type the
17034 extra keystrokes that the name @file{~/.emacs.el} requires, but now
17035 you may. The new format is consistent with the Emacs Lisp file
17036 naming conventions; the old format saves typing.}
17037
17038 A @file{~/.emacs} file contains Emacs Lisp code. You can write this
17039 code yourself; or you can use Emacs' @code{customize} feature to write
17040 the code for you. You can combine your own expressions and
17041 auto-written Customize expressions in your @file{.emacs} file.
17042
17043 (I myself prefer to write my own expressions, except for those,
17044 particularly fonts, that I find easier to manipulate using the
17045 @code{customize} command. I combine the two methods.)
17046
17047 Most of this chapter is about writing expressions yourself. It
17048 describes a simple @file{.emacs} file; for more information, see
17049 @ref{Init File, , The Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, and
17050 @ref{Init File, , The Init File, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
17051 Manual}.
17052
17053 @node Site-wide Init, defcustom, Default Configuration, Emacs Initialization
17054 @section Site-wide Initialization Files
17055
17056 @cindex @file{default.el} init file
17057 @cindex @file{site-init.el} init file
17058 @cindex @file{site-load.el} init file
17059 In addition to your personal initialization file, Emacs automatically
17060 loads various site-wide initialization files, if they exist. These
17061 have the same form as your @file{.emacs} file, but are loaded by
17062 everyone.
17063
17064 Two site-wide initialization files, @file{site-load.el} and
17065 @file{site-init.el}, are loaded into Emacs and then `dumped' if a
17066 `dumped' version of Emacs is created, as is most common. (Dumped
17067 copies of Emacs load more quickly. However, once a file is loaded and
17068 dumped, a change to it does not lead to a change in Emacs unless you
17069 load it yourself or re-dump Emacs. @xref{Building Emacs, , Building
17070 Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, and the
17071 @file{INSTALL} file.)
17072
17073 Three other site-wide initialization files are loaded automatically
17074 each time you start Emacs, if they exist. These are
17075 @file{site-start.el}, which is loaded @emph{before} your @file{.emacs}
17076 file, and @file{default.el}, and the terminal type file, which are both
17077 loaded @emph{after} your @file{.emacs} file.
17078
17079 Settings and definitions in your @file{.emacs} file will overwrite
17080 conflicting settings and definitions in a @file{site-start.el} file,
17081 if it exists; but the settings and definitions in a @file{default.el}
17082 or terminal type file will overwrite those in your @file{.emacs} file.
17083 (You can prevent interference from a terminal type file by setting
17084 @code{term-file-prefix} to @code{nil}. @xref{Simple Extension, , A
17085 Simple Extension}.)
17086
17087 @c Rewritten to avoid overfull hbox.
17088 The @file{INSTALL} file that comes in the distribution contains
17089 descriptions of the @file{site-init.el} and @file{site-load.el} files.
17090
17091 The @file{loadup.el}, @file{startup.el}, and @file{loaddefs.el} files
17092 control loading. These files are in the @file{lisp} directory of the
17093 Emacs distribution and are worth perusing.
17094
17095 The @file{loaddefs.el} file contains a good many suggestions as to
17096 what to put into your own @file{.emacs} file, or into a site-wide
17097 initialization file.
17098
17099 @node defcustom, Beginning a .emacs File, Site-wide Init, Emacs Initialization
17100 @section Specifying Variables using @code{defcustom}
17101 @findex defcustom
17102
17103 You can specify variables using @code{defcustom} so that you and
17104 others can then use Emacs' @code{customize} feature to set their
17105 values. (You cannot use @code{customize} to write function
17106 definitions; but you can write @code{defuns} in your @file{.emacs}
17107 file. Indeed, you can write any Lisp expression in your @file{.emacs}
17108 file.)
17109
17110 The @code{customize} feature depends on the @code{defcustom} special
17111 form. Although you can use @code{defvar} or @code{setq} for variables
17112 that users set, the @code{defcustom} special form is designed for the
17113 job.
17114
17115 You can use your knowledge of @code{defvar} for writing the
17116 first three arguments for @code{defcustom}. The first argument to
17117 @code{defcustom} is the name of the variable. The second argument is
17118 the variable's initial value, if any; and this value is set only if
17119 the value has not already been set. The third argument is the
17120 documentation.
17121
17122 The fourth and subsequent arguments to @code{defcustom} specify types
17123 and options; these are not featured in @code{defvar}. (These
17124 arguments are optional.)
17125
17126 Each of these arguments consists of a keyword followed by a value.
17127 Each keyword starts with the colon character @samp{:}.
17128
17129 @need 1250
17130 For example, the customizable user option variable
17131 @code{text-mode-hook} looks like this:
17132
17133 @smallexample
17134 @group
17135 (defcustom text-mode-hook nil
17136 "Normal hook run when entering Text mode and many related modes."
17137 :type 'hook
17138 :options '(turn-on-auto-fill flyspell-mode)
17139 :group 'data)
17140 @end group
17141 @end smallexample
17142
17143 @noindent
17144 The name of the variable is @code{text-mode-hook}; it has no default
17145 value; and its documentation string tells you what it does.
17146
17147 The @code{:type} keyword tells Emacs the kind of data to which
17148 @code{text-mode-hook} should be set and how to display the value in a
17149 Customization buffer.
17150
17151 The @code{:options} keyword specifies a suggested list of values for
17152 the variable. Usually, @code{:options} applies to a hook.
17153 The list is only a suggestion; it is not exclusive; a person who sets
17154 the variable may set it to other values; the list shown following the
17155 @code{:options} keyword is intended to offer convenient choices to a
17156 user.
17157
17158 Finally, the @code{:group} keyword tells the Emacs Customization
17159 command in which group the variable is located. This tells where to
17160 find it.
17161
17162 The @code{defcustom} function recognizes more than a dozen keywords.
17163 For more information, see @ref{Customization, , Writing Customization
17164 Definitions, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
17165
17166 Consider @code{text-mode-hook} as an example.
17167
17168 There are two ways to customize this variable. You can use the
17169 customization command or write the appropriate expressions yourself.
17170
17171 @need 800
17172 Using the customization command, you can type:
17173
17174 @smallexample
17175 M-x customize
17176 @end smallexample
17177
17178 @noindent
17179 and find that the group for editing files of data is called `data'.
17180 Enter that group. Text Mode Hook is the first member. You can click
17181 on its various options, such as @code{turn-on-auto-fill}, to set the
17182 values. After you click on the button to
17183
17184 @smallexample
17185 Save for Future Sessions
17186 @end smallexample
17187
17188 @noindent
17189 Emacs will write an expression into your @file{.emacs} file.
17190 It will look like this:
17191
17192 @smallexample
17193 @group
17194 (custom-set-variables
17195 ;; custom-set-variables was added by Custom.
17196 ;; If you edit it by hand, you could mess it up, so be careful.
17197 ;; Your init file should contain only one such instance.
17198 ;; If there is more than one, they won't work right.
17199 '(text-mode-hook (quote (turn-on-auto-fill text-mode-hook-identify))))
17200 @end group
17201 @end smallexample
17202
17203 @noindent
17204 (The @code{text-mode-hook-identify} function tells
17205 @code{toggle-text-mode-auto-fill} which buffers are in Text mode.
17206 It comes on automatically.)
17207
17208 The @code{custom-set-variables} function works somewhat differently
17209 than a @code{setq}. While I have never learned the differences, I
17210 modify the @code{custom-set-variables} expressions in my @file{.emacs}
17211 file by hand: I make the changes in what appears to me to be a
17212 reasonable manner and have not had any problems. Others prefer to use
17213 the Customization command and let Emacs do the work for them.
17214
17215 Another @code{custom-set-@dots{}} function is @code{custom-set-faces}.
17216 This function sets the various font faces. Over time, I have set a
17217 considerable number of faces. Some of the time, I re-set them using
17218 @code{customize}; other times, I simply edit the
17219 @code{custom-set-faces} expression in my @file{.emacs} file itself.
17220
17221 The second way to customize your @code{text-mode-hook} is to set it
17222 yourself in your @file{.emacs} file using code that has nothing to do
17223 with the @code{custom-set-@dots{}} functions.
17224
17225 @need 800
17226 When you do this, and later use @code{customize}, you will see a
17227 message that says
17228
17229 @smallexample
17230 CHANGED outside Customize; operating on it here may be unreliable.
17231 @end smallexample
17232
17233 @need 800
17234 This message is only a warning. If you click on the button to
17235
17236 @smallexample
17237 Save for Future Sessions
17238 @end smallexample
17239
17240 @noindent
17241 Emacs will write a @code{custom-set-@dots{}} expression near the end
17242 of your @file{.emacs} file that will be evaluated after your
17243 hand-written expression. It will, therefore, overrule your
17244 hand-written expression. No harm will be done. When you do this,
17245 however, be careful to remember which expression is active; if you
17246 forget, you may confuse yourself.
17247
17248 So long as you remember where the values are set, you will have no
17249 trouble. In any event, the values are always set in your
17250 initialization file, which is usually called @file{.emacs}.
17251
17252 I myself use @code{customize} for hardly anything. Mostly, I write
17253 expressions myself.
17254
17255 @findex defsubst
17256 @findex defconst
17257 Incidentally, to be more complete concerning defines: @code{defsubst}
17258 defines an inline function. The syntax is just like that of
17259 @code{defun}. @code{defconst} defines a symbol as a constant. The
17260 intent is that neither programs nor users should ever change a value
17261 set by @code{defconst}. (You can change it; the value set is a
17262 variable; but please do not.)
17263
17264 @node Beginning a .emacs File, Text and Auto-fill, defcustom, Emacs Initialization
17265 @section Beginning a @file{.emacs} File
17266 @cindex @file{.emacs} file, beginning of
17267
17268 When you start Emacs, it loads your @file{.emacs} file unless you tell
17269 it not to by specifying @samp{-q} on the command line. (The
17270 @code{emacs -q} command gives you a plain, out-of-the-box Emacs.)
17271
17272 A @file{.emacs} file contains Lisp expressions. Often, these are no
17273 more than expressions to set values; sometimes they are function
17274 definitions.
17275
17276 @xref{Init File, , The Init File @file{~/.emacs}, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17277 Manual}, for a short description of initialization files.
17278
17279 This chapter goes over some of the same ground, but is a walk among
17280 extracts from a complete, long-used @file{.emacs} file---my own.
17281
17282 The first part of the file consists of comments: reminders to myself.
17283 By now, of course, I remember these things, but when I started, I did
17284 not.
17285
17286 @need 1200
17287 @smallexample
17288 @group
17289 ;;;; Bob's .emacs file
17290 ; Robert J. Chassell
17291 ; 26 September 1985
17292 @end group
17293 @end smallexample
17294
17295 @noindent
17296 Look at that date! I started this file a long time ago. I have been
17297 adding to it ever since.
17298
17299 @smallexample
17300 @group
17301 ; Each section in this file is introduced by a
17302 ; line beginning with four semicolons; and each
17303 ; entry is introduced by a line beginning with
17304 ; three semicolons.
17305 @end group
17306 @end smallexample
17307
17308 @noindent
17309 This describes the usual conventions for comments in Emacs Lisp.
17310 Everything on a line that follows a semicolon is a comment. Two,
17311 three, and four semicolons are used as subsection and section markers.
17312 (@xref{Comments, ,, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for
17313 more about comments.)
17314
17315 @smallexample
17316 @group
17317 ;;;; The Help Key
17318 ; Control-h is the help key;
17319 ; after typing control-h, type a letter to
17320 ; indicate the subject about which you want help.
17321 ; For an explanation of the help facility,
17322 ; type control-h two times in a row.
17323 @end group
17324 @end smallexample
17325
17326 @noindent
17327 Just remember: type @kbd{C-h} two times for help.
17328
17329 @smallexample
17330 @group
17331 ; To find out about any mode, type control-h m
17332 ; while in that mode. For example, to find out
17333 ; about mail mode, enter mail mode and then type
17334 ; control-h m.
17335 @end group
17336 @end smallexample
17337
17338 @noindent
17339 `Mode help', as I call this, is very helpful. Usually, it tells you
17340 all you need to know.
17341
17342 Of course, you don't need to include comments like these in your
17343 @file{.emacs} file. I included them in mine because I kept forgetting
17344 about Mode help or the conventions for comments---but I was able to
17345 remember to look here to remind myself.
17346
17347 @node Text and Auto-fill, Mail Aliases, Beginning a .emacs File, Emacs Initialization
17348 @section Text and Auto Fill Mode
17349
17350 Now we come to the part that `turns on' Text mode and
17351 Auto Fill mode.
17352
17353 @smallexample
17354 @group
17355 ;;; Text mode and Auto Fill mode
17356 ;; The next two lines put Emacs into Text mode
17357 ;; and Auto Fill mode, and are for writers who
17358 ;; want to start writing prose rather than code.
17359 (setq-default major-mode 'text-mode)
17360 (add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)
17361 @end group
17362 @end smallexample
17363
17364 Here is the first part of this @file{.emacs} file that does something
17365 besides remind a forgetful human!
17366
17367 The first of the two lines in parentheses tells Emacs to turn on Text
17368 mode when you find a file, @emph{unless} that file should go into some
17369 other mode, such as C mode.
17370
17371 @cindex Per-buffer, local variables list
17372 @cindex Local variables list, per-buffer,
17373 @cindex Automatic mode selection
17374 @cindex Mode selection, automatic
17375 When Emacs reads a file, it looks at the extension to the file name,
17376 if any. (The extension is the part that comes after a @samp{.}.) If
17377 the file ends with a @samp{.c} or @samp{.h} extension then Emacs turns
17378 on C mode. Also, Emacs looks at first nonblank line of the file; if
17379 the line says @w{@samp{-*- C -*-}}, Emacs turns on C mode. Emacs
17380 possesses a list of extensions and specifications that it uses
17381 automatically. In addition, Emacs looks near the last page for a
17382 per-buffer, ``local variables list'', if any.
17383
17384 @ifinfo
17385 @xref{Choosing Modes, , How Major Modes are Chosen, emacs, The GNU
17386 Emacs Manual}.
17387
17388 @xref{File Variables, , Local Variables in Files, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17389 Manual}.
17390 @end ifinfo
17391 @iftex
17392 See sections ``How Major Modes are Chosen'' and ``Local Variables in
17393 Files'' in @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17394 @end iftex
17395
17396 Now, back to the @file{.emacs} file.
17397
17398 @need 800
17399 Here is the line again; how does it work?
17400
17401 @cindex Text Mode turned on
17402 @smallexample
17403 (setq major-mode 'text-mode)
17404 @end smallexample
17405
17406 @noindent
17407 This line is a short, but complete Emacs Lisp expression.
17408
17409 We are already familiar with @code{setq}. It sets the following variable,
17410 @code{major-mode}, to the subsequent value, which is @code{text-mode}.
17411 The single quote mark before @code{text-mode} tells Emacs to deal directly
17412 with the @code{text-mode} symbol, not with whatever it might stand for.
17413 @xref{set & setq, , Setting the Value of a Variable},
17414 for a reminder of how @code{setq} works.
17415 The main point is that there is no difference between the procedure you
17416 use to set a value in your @file{.emacs} file and the procedure you use
17417 anywhere else in Emacs.
17418
17419 @need 800
17420 Here is the next line:
17421
17422 @cindex Auto Fill mode turned on
17423 @findex add-hook
17424 @smallexample
17425 (add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)
17426 @end smallexample
17427
17428 @noindent
17429 In this line, the @code{add-hook} command adds
17430 @code{turn-on-auto-fill} to the variable.
17431
17432 @code{turn-on-auto-fill} is the name of a program, that, you guessed
17433 it!, turns on Auto Fill mode.
17434
17435 Every time Emacs turns on Text mode, Emacs runs the commands `hooked'
17436 onto Text mode. So every time Emacs turns on Text mode, Emacs also
17437 turns on Auto Fill mode.
17438
17439 In brief, the first line causes Emacs to enter Text mode when you edit a
17440 file, unless the file name extension, a first non-blank line, or local
17441 variables to tell Emacs otherwise.
17442
17443 Text mode among other actions, sets the syntax table to work
17444 conveniently for writers. In Text mode, Emacs considers an apostrophe
17445 as part of a word like a letter; but Emacs does not consider a period
17446 or a space as part of a word. Thus, @kbd{M-f} moves you over
17447 @samp{it's}. On the other hand, in C mode, @kbd{M-f} stops just after
17448 the @samp{t} of @samp{it's}.
17449
17450 The second line causes Emacs to turn on Auto Fill mode when it turns
17451 on Text mode. In Auto Fill mode, Emacs automatically breaks a line
17452 that is too wide and brings the excessively wide part of the line down
17453 to the next line. Emacs breaks lines between words, not within them.
17454
17455 When Auto Fill mode is turned off, lines continue to the right as you
17456 type them. Depending on how you set the value of
17457 @code{truncate-lines}, the words you type either disappear off the
17458 right side of the screen, or else are shown, in a rather ugly and
17459 unreadable manner, as a continuation line on the screen.
17460
17461 @need 1250
17462 In addition, in this part of my @file{.emacs} file, I tell the Emacs
17463 fill commands to insert two spaces after a colon:
17464
17465 @smallexample
17466 (setq colon-double-space t)
17467 @end smallexample
17468
17469 @node Mail Aliases, Indent Tabs Mode, Text and Auto-fill, Emacs Initialization
17470 @section Mail Aliases
17471
17472 Here is a @code{setq} that `turns on' mail aliases, along with more
17473 reminders.
17474
17475 @smallexample
17476 @group
17477 ;;; Mail mode
17478 ; To enter mail mode, type `C-x m'
17479 ; To enter RMAIL (for reading mail),
17480 ; type `M-x rmail'
17481 (setq mail-aliases t)
17482 @end group
17483 @end smallexample
17484
17485 @cindex Mail aliases
17486 @noindent
17487 This @code{setq} command sets the value of the variable
17488 @code{mail-aliases} to @code{t}. Since @code{t} means true, the line
17489 says, in effect, ``Yes, use mail aliases.''
17490
17491 Mail aliases are convenient short names for long email addresses or
17492 for lists of email addresses. The file where you keep your `aliases'
17493 is @file{~/.mailrc}. You write an alias like this:
17494
17495 @smallexample
17496 alias geo george@@foobar.wiz.edu
17497 @end smallexample
17498
17499 @noindent
17500 When you write a message to George, address it to @samp{geo}; the
17501 mailer will automatically expand @samp{geo} to the full address.
17502
17503 @node Indent Tabs Mode, Keybindings, Mail Aliases, Emacs Initialization
17504 @section Indent Tabs Mode
17505 @cindex Tabs, preventing
17506 @findex indent-tabs-mode
17507
17508 By default, Emacs inserts tabs in place of multiple spaces when it
17509 formats a region. (For example, you might indent many lines of text
17510 all at once with the @code{indent-region} command.) Tabs look fine on
17511 a terminal or with ordinary printing, but they produce badly indented
17512 output when you use @TeX{} or Texinfo since @TeX{} ignores tabs.
17513
17514 @need 1250
17515 The following turns off Indent Tabs mode:
17516
17517 @smallexample
17518 @group
17519 ;;; Prevent Extraneous Tabs
17520 (setq-default indent-tabs-mode nil)
17521 @end group
17522 @end smallexample
17523
17524 Note that this line uses @code{setq-default} rather than the
17525 @code{setq} command that we have seen before. The @code{setq-default}
17526 command sets values only in buffers that do not have their own local
17527 values for the variable.
17528
17529 @ifinfo
17530 @xref{Just Spaces, , Tabs vs. Spaces, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17531
17532 @xref{File Variables, , Local Variables in Files, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17533 Manual}.
17534 @end ifinfo
17535 @iftex
17536 See sections ``Tabs vs.@: Spaces'' and ``Local Variables in
17537 Files'' in @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17538 @end iftex
17539
17540 @need 1700
17541 @node Keybindings, Keymaps, Indent Tabs Mode, Emacs Initialization
17542 @section Some Keybindings
17543
17544 Now for some personal keybindings:
17545
17546 @smallexample
17547 @group
17548 ;;; Compare windows
17549 (global-set-key "\C-cw" 'compare-windows)
17550 @end group
17551 @end smallexample
17552
17553 @findex compare-windows
17554 @code{compare-windows} is a nifty command that compares the text in
17555 your current window with text in the next window. It makes the
17556 comparison by starting at point in each window, moving over text in
17557 each window as far as they match. I use this command all the time.
17558
17559 This also shows how to set a key globally, for all modes.
17560
17561 @cindex Setting a key globally
17562 @cindex Global set key
17563 @cindex Key setting globally
17564 @findex global-set-key
17565 The command is @code{global-set-key}. It is followed by the
17566 keybinding. In a @file{.emacs} file, the keybinding is written as
17567 shown: @code{\C-c} stands for `control-c', which means `press the
17568 control key and the @key{c} key at the same time'. The @code{w} means
17569 `press the @key{w} key'. The keybinding is surrounded by double
17570 quotation marks. In documentation, you would write this as
17571 @w{@kbd{C-c w}}. (If you were binding a @key{META} key, such as
17572 @kbd{M-c}, rather than a @key{CTRL} key, you would write
17573 @w{@code{\M-c}} in your @file{.emacs} file. @xref{Init Rebinding, ,
17574 Rebinding Keys in Your Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for
17575 details.)
17576
17577 The command invoked by the keys is @code{compare-windows}. Note that
17578 @code{compare-windows} is preceded by a single quote; otherwise, Emacs
17579 would first try to evaluate the symbol to determine its value.
17580
17581 These three things, the double quotation marks, the backslash before
17582 the @samp{C}, and the single quote mark are necessary parts of
17583 keybinding that I tend to forget. Fortunately, I have come to
17584 remember that I should look at my existing @file{.emacs} file, and
17585 adapt what is there.
17586
17587 As for the keybinding itself: @kbd{C-c w}. This combines the prefix
17588 key, @kbd{C-c}, with a single character, in this case, @kbd{w}. This
17589 set of keys, @kbd{C-c} followed by a single character, is strictly
17590 reserved for individuals' own use. (I call these `own' keys, since
17591 these are for my own use.) You should always be able to create such a
17592 keybinding for your own use without stomping on someone else's
17593 keybinding. If you ever write an extension to Emacs, please avoid
17594 taking any of these keys for public use. Create a key like @kbd{C-c
17595 C-w} instead. Otherwise, we will run out of `own' keys.
17596
17597 @need 1250
17598 Here is another keybinding, with a comment:
17599
17600 @smallexample
17601 @group
17602 ;;; Keybinding for `occur'
17603 ; I use occur a lot, so let's bind it to a key:
17604 (global-set-key "\C-co" 'occur)
17605 @end group
17606 @end smallexample
17607
17608 @findex occur
17609 The @code{occur} command shows all the lines in the current buffer
17610 that contain a match for a regular expression. Matching lines are
17611 shown in a buffer called @file{*Occur*}. That buffer serves as a menu
17612 to jump to occurrences.
17613
17614 @findex global-unset-key
17615 @cindex Unbinding key
17616 @cindex Key unbinding
17617 @need 1250
17618 Here is how to unbind a key, so it does not
17619 work:
17620
17621 @smallexample
17622 @group
17623 ;;; Unbind `C-x f'
17624 (global-unset-key "\C-xf")
17625 @end group
17626 @end smallexample
17627
17628 There is a reason for this unbinding: I found I inadvertently typed
17629 @w{@kbd{C-x f}} when I meant to type @kbd{C-x C-f}. Rather than find a
17630 file, as I intended, I accidentally set the width for filled text,
17631 almost always to a width I did not want. Since I hardly ever reset my
17632 default width, I simply unbound the key.
17633
17634 @findex list-buffers, @r{rebound}
17635 @findex buffer-menu, @r{bound to key}
17636 @need 1250
17637 The following rebinds an existing key:
17638
17639 @smallexample
17640 @group
17641 ;;; Rebind `C-x C-b' for `buffer-menu'
17642 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-b" 'buffer-menu)
17643 @end group
17644 @end smallexample
17645
17646 By default, @kbd{C-x C-b} runs the
17647 @code{list-buffers} command. This command lists
17648 your buffers in @emph{another} window. Since I
17649 almost always want to do something in that
17650 window, I prefer the @code{buffer-menu}
17651 command, which not only lists the buffers,
17652 but moves point into that window.
17653
17654 @node Keymaps, Loading Files, Keybindings, Emacs Initialization
17655 @section Keymaps
17656 @cindex Keymaps
17657 @cindex Rebinding keys
17658
17659 Emacs uses @dfn{keymaps} to record which keys call which commands.
17660 When you use @code{global-set-key} to set the keybinding for a single
17661 command in all parts of Emacs, you are specifying the keybinding in
17662 @code{current-global-map}.
17663
17664 Specific modes, such as C mode or Text mode, have their own keymaps;
17665 the mode-specific keymaps override the global map that is shared by
17666 all buffers.
17667
17668 The @code{global-set-key} function binds, or rebinds, the global
17669 keymap. For example, the following binds the key @kbd{C-x C-b} to the
17670 function @code{buffer-menu}:
17671
17672 @smallexample
17673 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-b" 'buffer-menu)
17674 @end smallexample
17675
17676 Mode-specific keymaps are bound using the @code{define-key} function,
17677 which takes a specific keymap as an argument, as well as the key and
17678 the command. For example, my @file{.emacs} file contains the
17679 following expression to bind the @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} command
17680 to @kbd{C-c C-c g}:
17681
17682 @smallexample
17683 @group
17684 (define-key texinfo-mode-map "\C-c\C-cg" 'texinfo-insert-@@group)
17685 @end group
17686 @end smallexample
17687
17688 @noindent
17689 The @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} function itself is a little extension
17690 to Texinfo mode that inserts @samp{@@group} into a Texinfo file. I
17691 use this command all the time and prefer to type the three strokes
17692 @kbd{C-c C-c g} rather than the six strokes @kbd{@@ g r o u p}.
17693 (@samp{@@group} and its matching @samp{@@end group} are commands that
17694 keep all enclosed text together on one page; many multi-line examples
17695 in this book are surrounded by @samp{@@group @dots{} @@end group}.)
17696
17697 @need 1250
17698 Here is the @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} function definition:
17699
17700 @smallexample
17701 @group
17702 (defun texinfo-insert-@@group ()
17703 "Insert the string @@group in a Texinfo buffer."
17704 (interactive)
17705 (beginning-of-line)
17706 (insert "@@group\n"))
17707 @end group
17708 @end smallexample
17709
17710 (Of course, I could have used Abbrev mode to save typing, rather than
17711 write a function to insert a word; but I prefer key strokes consistent
17712 with other Texinfo mode key bindings.)
17713
17714 You will see numerous @code{define-key} expressions in
17715 @file{loaddefs.el} as well as in the various mode libraries, such as
17716 @file{cc-mode.el} and @file{lisp-mode.el}.
17717
17718 @xref{Key Bindings, , Customizing Key Bindings, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17719 Manual}, and @ref{Keymaps, , Keymaps, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
17720 Reference Manual}, for more information about keymaps.
17721
17722 @node Loading Files, Autoload, Keymaps, Emacs Initialization
17723 @section Loading Files
17724 @cindex Loading files
17725 @c findex load
17726
17727 Many people in the GNU Emacs community have written extensions to
17728 Emacs. As time goes by, these extensions are often included in new
17729 releases. For example, the Calendar and Diary packages are now part
17730 of the standard GNU Emacs, as is Calc.
17731
17732 You can use a @code{load} command to evaluate a complete file and
17733 thereby install all the functions and variables in the file into Emacs.
17734 For example:
17735
17736 @c (auto-compression-mode t)
17737
17738 @smallexample
17739 (load "~/emacs/slowsplit")
17740 @end smallexample
17741
17742 This evaluates, i.e.@: loads, the @file{slowsplit.el} file or if it
17743 exists, the faster, byte compiled @file{slowsplit.elc} file from the
17744 @file{emacs} sub-directory of your home directory. The file contains
17745 the function @code{split-window-quietly}, which John Robinson wrote in
17746 1989.
17747
17748 The @code{split-window-quietly} function splits a window with the
17749 minimum of redisplay. I installed it in 1989 because it worked well
17750 with the slow 1200 baud terminals I was then using. Nowadays, I only
17751 occasionally come across such a slow connection, but I continue to use
17752 the function because I like the way it leaves the bottom half of a
17753 buffer in the lower of the new windows and the top half in the upper
17754 window.
17755
17756 @need 1250
17757 To replace the key binding for the default
17758 @code{split-window-vertically}, you must also unset that key and bind
17759 the keys to @code{split-window-quietly}, like this:
17760
17761 @smallexample
17762 @group
17763 (global-unset-key "\C-x2")
17764 (global-set-key "\C-x2" 'split-window-quietly)
17765 @end group
17766 @end smallexample
17767
17768 @vindex load-path
17769 If you load many extensions, as I do, then instead of specifying the
17770 exact location of the extension file, as shown above, you can specify
17771 that directory as part of Emacs' @code{load-path}. Then, when Emacs
17772 loads a file, it will search that directory as well as its default
17773 list of directories. (The default list is specified in @file{paths.h}
17774 when Emacs is built.)
17775
17776 @need 1250
17777 The following command adds your @file{~/emacs} directory to the
17778 existing load path:
17779
17780 @smallexample
17781 @group
17782 ;;; Emacs Load Path
17783 (setq load-path (cons "~/emacs" load-path))
17784 @end group
17785 @end smallexample
17786
17787 Incidentally, @code{load-library} is an interactive interface to the
17788 @code{load} function. The complete function looks like this:
17789
17790 @findex load-library
17791 @smallexample
17792 @group
17793 (defun load-library (library)
17794 "Load the library named LIBRARY.
17795 This is an interface to the function `load'."
17796 (interactive
17797 (list (completing-read "Load library: "
17798 (apply-partially 'locate-file-completion-table
17799 load-path
17800 (get-load-suffixes)))))
17801 (load library))
17802 @end group
17803 @end smallexample
17804
17805 The name of the function, @code{load-library}, comes from the use of
17806 `library' as a conventional synonym for `file'. The source for the
17807 @code{load-library} command is in the @file{files.el} library.
17808
17809 Another interactive command that does a slightly different job is
17810 @code{load-file}. @xref{Lisp Libraries, , Libraries of Lisp Code for
17811 Emacs, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for information on the
17812 distinction between @code{load-library} and this command.
17813
17814 @node Autoload, Simple Extension, Loading Files, Emacs Initialization
17815 @section Autoloading
17816 @findex autoload
17817
17818 Instead of installing a function by loading the file that contains it,
17819 or by evaluating the function definition, you can make the function
17820 available but not actually install it until it is first called. This
17821 is called @dfn{autoloading}.
17822
17823 When you execute an autoloaded function, Emacs automatically evaluates
17824 the file that contains the definition, and then calls the function.
17825
17826 Emacs starts quicker with autoloaded functions, since their libraries
17827 are not loaded right away; but you need to wait a moment when you
17828 first use such a function, while its containing file is evaluated.
17829
17830 Rarely used functions are frequently autoloaded. The
17831 @file{loaddefs.el} library contains hundreds of autoloaded functions,
17832 from @code{bookmark-set} to @code{wordstar-mode}. Of course, you may
17833 come to use a `rare' function frequently. When you do, you should
17834 load that function's file with a @code{load} expression in your
17835 @file{.emacs} file.
17836
17837 In my @file{.emacs} file, I load 14 libraries that contain functions
17838 that would otherwise be autoloaded. (Actually, it would have been
17839 better to include these files in my `dumped' Emacs, but I forgot.
17840 @xref{Building Emacs, , Building Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
17841 Reference Manual}, and the @file{INSTALL} file for more about
17842 dumping.)
17843
17844 You may also want to include autoloaded expressions in your @file{.emacs}
17845 file. @code{autoload} is a built-in function that takes up to five
17846 arguments, the final three of which are optional. The first argument
17847 is the name of the function to be autoloaded; the second is the name
17848 of the file to be loaded. The third argument is documentation for the
17849 function, and the fourth tells whether the function can be called
17850 interactively. The fifth argument tells what type of
17851 object---@code{autoload} can handle a keymap or macro as well as a
17852 function (the default is a function).
17853
17854 @need 800
17855 Here is a typical example:
17856
17857 @smallexample
17858 @group
17859 (autoload 'html-helper-mode
17860 "html-helper-mode" "Edit HTML documents" t)
17861 @end group
17862 @end smallexample
17863
17864 @noindent
17865 (@code{html-helper-mode} is an older alternative to @code{html-mode},
17866 which is a standard part of the distribution.)
17867
17868 @noindent
17869 This expression autoloads the @code{html-helper-mode} function. It
17870 takes it from the @file{html-helper-mode.el} file (or from the byte
17871 compiled version @file{html-helper-mode.elc}, if that exists.) The
17872 file must be located in a directory specified by @code{load-path}.
17873 The documentation says that this is a mode to help you edit documents
17874 written in the HyperText Markup Language. You can call this mode
17875 interactively by typing @kbd{M-x html-helper-mode}. (You need to
17876 duplicate the function's regular documentation in the autoload
17877 expression because the regular function is not yet loaded, so its
17878 documentation is not available.)
17879
17880 @xref{Autoload, , Autoload, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
17881 Manual}, for more information.
17882
17883 @node Simple Extension, X11 Colors, Autoload, Emacs Initialization
17884 @section A Simple Extension: @code{line-to-top-of-window}
17885 @findex line-to-top-of-window
17886 @cindex Simple extension in @file{.emacs} file
17887
17888 Here is a simple extension to Emacs that moves the line point is on to
17889 the top of the window. I use this all the time, to make text easier
17890 to read.
17891
17892 You can put the following code into a separate file and then load it
17893 from your @file{.emacs} file, or you can include it within your
17894 @file{.emacs} file.
17895
17896 @need 1250
17897 Here is the definition:
17898
17899 @smallexample
17900 @group
17901 ;;; Line to top of window;
17902 ;;; replace three keystroke sequence C-u 0 C-l
17903 (defun line-to-top-of-window ()
17904 "Move the line point is on to top of window."
17905 (interactive)
17906 (recenter 0))
17907 @end group
17908 @end smallexample
17909
17910 @need 1250
17911 Now for the keybinding.
17912
17913 Nowadays, function keys as well as mouse button events and
17914 non-@sc{ascii} characters are written within square brackets, without
17915 quotation marks. (In Emacs version 18 and before, you had to write
17916 different function key bindings for each different make of terminal.)
17917
17918 I bind @code{line-to-top-of-window} to my @key{F6} function key like
17919 this:
17920
17921 @smallexample
17922 (global-set-key [f6] 'line-to-top-of-window)
17923 @end smallexample
17924
17925 For more information, see @ref{Init Rebinding, , Rebinding Keys in
17926 Your Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17927
17928 @cindex Conditional 'twixt two versions of Emacs
17929 @cindex Version of Emacs, choosing
17930 @cindex Emacs version, choosing
17931 If you run two versions of GNU Emacs, such as versions 22 and 23, and
17932 use one @file{.emacs} file, you can select which code to evaluate with
17933 the following conditional:
17934
17935 @smallexample
17936 @group
17937 (cond
17938 ((= 22 emacs-major-version)
17939 ;; evaluate version 22 code
17940 ( @dots{} ))
17941 ((= 23 emacs-major-version)
17942 ;; evaluate version 23 code
17943 ( @dots{} )))
17944 @end group
17945 @end smallexample
17946
17947 For example, in contrast to version 20, more recent versions blink
17948 their cursors by default. I hate such blinking, as well as other
17949 features, so I placed the following in my @file{.emacs}
17950 file@footnote{When I start instances of Emacs that do not load my
17951 @file{.emacs} file or any site file, I also turn off blinking:
17952
17953 @smallexample
17954 emacs -q --no-site-file -eval '(blink-cursor-mode nil)'
17955
17956 @exdent Or nowadays, using an even more sophisticated set of options,
17957
17958 emacs -Q - D
17959 @end smallexample
17960 }:
17961
17962 @smallexample
17963 @group
17964 (when (>= emacs-major-version 21)
17965 (blink-cursor-mode 0)
17966 ;; Insert newline when you press `C-n' (next-line)
17967 ;; at the end of the buffer
17968 (setq next-line-add-newlines t)
17969 @end group
17970 @group
17971 ;; Turn on image viewing
17972 (auto-image-file-mode t)
17973 @end group
17974 @group
17975 ;; Turn on menu bar (this bar has text)
17976 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17977 (menu-bar-mode 1)
17978 @end group
17979 @group
17980 ;; Turn off tool bar (this bar has icons)
17981 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17982 (tool-bar-mode nil)
17983 @end group
17984 @group
17985 ;; Turn off tooltip mode for tool bar
17986 ;; (This mode causes icon explanations to pop up)
17987 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17988 (tooltip-mode nil)
17989 ;; If tooltips turned on, make tips appear promptly
17990 (setq tooltip-delay 0.1) ; default is 0.7 second
17991 )
17992 @end group
17993 @end smallexample
17994
17995 @node X11 Colors, Miscellaneous, Simple Extension, Emacs Initialization
17996 @section X11 Colors
17997
17998 You can specify colors when you use Emacs with the MIT X Windowing
17999 system.
18000
18001 I dislike the default colors and specify my own.
18002
18003 @need 1250
18004 Here are the expressions in my @file{.emacs}
18005 file that set values:
18006
18007 @smallexample
18008 @group
18009 ;; Set cursor color
18010 (set-cursor-color "white")
18011
18012 ;; Set mouse color
18013 (set-mouse-color "white")
18014
18015 ;; Set foreground and background
18016 (set-foreground-color "white")
18017 (set-background-color "darkblue")
18018 @end group
18019
18020 @group
18021 ;;; Set highlighting colors for isearch and drag
18022 (set-face-foreground 'highlight "white")
18023 (set-face-background 'highlight "blue")
18024 @end group
18025
18026 @group
18027 (set-face-foreground 'region "cyan")
18028 (set-face-background 'region "blue")
18029 @end group
18030
18031 @group
18032 (set-face-foreground 'secondary-selection "skyblue")
18033 (set-face-background 'secondary-selection "darkblue")
18034 @end group
18035
18036 @group
18037 ;; Set calendar highlighting colors
18038 (setq calendar-load-hook
18039 '(lambda ()
18040 (set-face-foreground 'diary-face "skyblue")
18041 (set-face-background 'holiday-face "slate blue")
18042 (set-face-foreground 'holiday-face "white")))
18043 @end group
18044 @end smallexample
18045
18046 The various shades of blue soothe my eye and prevent me from seeing
18047 the screen flicker.
18048
18049 Alternatively, I could have set my specifications in various X
18050 initialization files. For example, I could set the foreground,
18051 background, cursor, and pointer (i.e., mouse) colors in my
18052 @file{~/.Xresources} file like this:
18053
18054 @smallexample
18055 @group
18056 Emacs*foreground: white
18057 Emacs*background: darkblue
18058 Emacs*cursorColor: white
18059 Emacs*pointerColor: white
18060 @end group
18061 @end smallexample
18062
18063 In any event, since it is not part of Emacs, I set the root color of
18064 my X window in my @file{~/.xinitrc} file, like this@footnote{I also
18065 run more modern window managers, such as Enlightenment, Gnome, or KDE;
18066 in those cases, I often specify an image rather than a plain color.}:
18067
18068 @smallexample
18069 xsetroot -solid Navy -fg white &
18070 @end smallexample
18071
18072 @need 1700
18073 @node Miscellaneous, Mode Line, X11 Colors, Emacs Initialization
18074 @section Miscellaneous Settings for a @file{.emacs} File
18075
18076 @need 1250
18077 Here are a few miscellaneous settings:
18078 @sp 1
18079
18080 @itemize @minus
18081 @item
18082 Set the shape and color of the mouse cursor:
18083
18084 @smallexample
18085 @group
18086 ; Cursor shapes are defined in
18087 ; `/usr/include/X11/cursorfont.h';
18088 ; for example, the `target' cursor is number 128;
18089 ; the `top_left_arrow' cursor is number 132.
18090 @end group
18091
18092 @group
18093 (let ((mpointer (x-get-resource "*mpointer"
18094 "*emacs*mpointer")))
18095 ;; If you have not set your mouse pointer
18096 ;; then set it, otherwise leave as is:
18097 (if (eq mpointer nil)
18098 (setq mpointer "132")) ; top_left_arrow
18099 @end group
18100 @group
18101 (setq x-pointer-shape (string-to-int mpointer))
18102 (set-mouse-color "white"))
18103 @end group
18104 @end smallexample
18105
18106 @item
18107 Or you can set the values of a variety of features in an alist, like
18108 this:
18109
18110 @smallexample
18111 @group
18112 (setq-default
18113 default-frame-alist
18114 '((cursor-color . "white")
18115 (mouse-color . "white")
18116 (foreground-color . "white")
18117 (background-color . "DodgerBlue4")
18118 ;; (cursor-type . bar)
18119 (cursor-type . box)
18120 @end group
18121 @group
18122 (tool-bar-lines . 0)
18123 (menu-bar-lines . 1)
18124 (width . 80)
18125 (height . 58)
18126 (font .
18127 "-Misc-Fixed-Medium-R-Normal--20-200-75-75-C-100-ISO8859-1")
18128 ))
18129 @end group
18130 @end smallexample
18131
18132 @item
18133 Convert @kbd{@key{CTRL}-h} into @key{DEL} and @key{DEL}
18134 into @kbd{@key{CTRL}-h}.@*
18135 (Some older keyboards needed this, although I have not seen the
18136 problem recently.)
18137
18138 @smallexample
18139 @group
18140 ;; Translate `C-h' to <DEL>.
18141 ; (keyboard-translate ?\C-h ?\C-?)
18142
18143 ;; Translate <DEL> to `C-h'.
18144 (keyboard-translate ?\C-? ?\C-h)
18145 @end group
18146 @end smallexample
18147
18148 @item Turn off a blinking cursor!
18149
18150 @smallexample
18151 @group
18152 (if (fboundp 'blink-cursor-mode)
18153 (blink-cursor-mode -1))
18154 @end group
18155 @end smallexample
18156
18157 @noindent
18158 or start GNU Emacs with the command @code{emacs -nbc}.
18159
18160 @need 1250
18161 @item When using `grep'@*
18162 @samp{-i}@w{ } Ignore case distinctions@*
18163 @samp{-n}@w{ } Prefix each line of output with line number@*
18164 @samp{-H}@w{ } Print the filename for each match.@*
18165 @samp{-e}@w{ } Protect patterns beginning with a hyphen character, @samp{-}
18166
18167 @smallexample
18168 (setq grep-command "grep -i -nH -e ")
18169 @end smallexample
18170
18171 @ignore
18172 @c Evidently, no longer needed in GNU Emacs 22
18173
18174 item Automatically uncompress compressed files when visiting them
18175
18176 smallexample
18177 (load "uncompress")
18178 end smallexample
18179
18180 @end ignore
18181
18182 @item Find an existing buffer, even if it has a different name@*
18183 This avoids problems with symbolic links.
18184
18185 @smallexample
18186 (setq find-file-existing-other-name t)
18187 @end smallexample
18188
18189 @item Set your language environment and default input method
18190
18191 @smallexample
18192 @group
18193 (set-language-environment "latin-1")
18194 ;; Remember you can enable or disable multilingual text input
18195 ;; with the @code{toggle-input-method'} (@kbd{C-\}) command
18196 (setq default-input-method "latin-1-prefix")
18197 @end group
18198 @end smallexample
18199
18200 If you want to write with Chinese `GB' characters, set this instead:
18201
18202 @smallexample
18203 @group
18204 (set-language-environment "Chinese-GB")
18205 (setq default-input-method "chinese-tonepy")
18206 @end group
18207 @end smallexample
18208 @end itemize
18209
18210 @subsubheading Fixing Unpleasant Key Bindings
18211 @cindex Key bindings, fixing
18212 @cindex Bindings, key, fixing unpleasant
18213
18214 Some systems bind keys unpleasantly. Sometimes, for example, the
18215 @key{CTRL} key appears in an awkward spot rather than at the far left
18216 of the home row.
18217
18218 Usually, when people fix these sorts of keybindings, they do not
18219 change their @file{~/.emacs} file. Instead, they bind the proper keys
18220 on their consoles with the @code{loadkeys} or @code{install-keymap}
18221 commands in their boot script and then include @code{xmodmap} commands
18222 in their @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file for X Windows.
18223
18224 @need 1250
18225 @noindent
18226 For a boot script:
18227
18228 @smallexample
18229 @group
18230 loadkeys /usr/share/keymaps/i386/qwerty/emacs2.kmap.gz
18231 @exdent or
18232 install-keymap emacs2
18233 @end group
18234 @end smallexample
18235
18236 @need 1250
18237 @noindent
18238 For a @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file when the @key{Caps
18239 Lock} key is at the far left of the home row:
18240
18241 @smallexample
18242 @group
18243 # Bind the key labeled `Caps Lock' to `Control'
18244 # (Such a broken user interface suggests that keyboard manufacturers
18245 # think that computers are typewriters from 1885.)
18246
18247 xmodmap -e "clear Lock"
18248 xmodmap -e "add Control = Caps_Lock"
18249 @end group
18250 @end smallexample
18251
18252 @need 1250
18253 @noindent
18254 In a @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file, to convert an @key{ALT}
18255 key to a @key{META} key:
18256
18257 @smallexample
18258 @group
18259 # Some ill designed keyboards have a key labeled ALT and no Meta
18260 xmodmap -e "keysym Alt_L = Meta_L Alt_L"
18261 @end group
18262 @end smallexample
18263
18264 @need 1700
18265 @node Mode Line, , Miscellaneous, Emacs Initialization
18266 @section A Modified Mode Line
18267 @vindex mode-line-format
18268 @cindex Mode line format
18269
18270 Finally, a feature I really like: a modified mode line.
18271
18272 When I work over a network, I forget which machine I am using. Also,
18273 I tend to I lose track of where I am, and which line point is on.
18274
18275 So I reset my mode line to look like this:
18276
18277 @smallexample
18278 -:-- foo.texi rattlesnake:/home/bob/ Line 1 (Texinfo Fill) Top
18279 @end smallexample
18280
18281 I am visiting a file called @file{foo.texi}, on my machine
18282 @file{rattlesnake} in my @file{/home/bob} buffer. I am on line 1, in
18283 Texinfo mode, and am at the top of the buffer.
18284
18285 @need 1200
18286 My @file{.emacs} file has a section that looks like this:
18287
18288 @smallexample
18289 @group
18290 ;; Set a Mode Line that tells me which machine, which directory,
18291 ;; and which line I am on, plus the other customary information.
18292 (setq-default mode-line-format
18293 (quote
18294 (#("-" 0 1
18295 (help-echo
18296 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18297 mode-line-mule-info
18298 mode-line-modified
18299 mode-line-frame-identification
18300 " "
18301 @end group
18302 @group
18303 mode-line-buffer-identification
18304 " "
18305 (:eval (substring
18306 (system-name) 0 (string-match "\\..+" (system-name))))
18307 ":"
18308 default-directory
18309 #(" " 0 1
18310 (help-echo
18311 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18312 (line-number-mode " Line %l ")
18313 global-mode-string
18314 @end group
18315 @group
18316 #(" %[(" 0 6
18317 (help-echo
18318 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18319 (:eval (mode-line-mode-name))
18320 mode-line-process
18321 minor-mode-alist
18322 #("%n" 0 2 (help-echo "mouse-2: widen" local-map (keymap ...)))
18323 ")%] "
18324 (-3 . "%P")
18325 ;; "-%-"
18326 )))
18327 @end group
18328 @end smallexample
18329
18330 @noindent
18331 Here, I redefine the default mode line. Most of the parts are from
18332 the original; but I make a few changes. I set the @emph{default} mode
18333 line format so as to permit various modes, such as Info, to override
18334 it.
18335
18336 Many elements in the list are self-explanatory:
18337 @code{mode-line-modified} is a variable that tells whether the buffer
18338 has been modified, @code{mode-name} tells the name of the mode, and so
18339 on. However, the format looks complicated because of two features we
18340 have not discussed.
18341
18342 @cindex Properties, in mode line example
18343 The first string in the mode line is a dash or hyphen, @samp{-}. In
18344 the old days, it would have been specified simply as @code{"-"}. But
18345 nowadays, Emacs can add properties to a string, such as highlighting
18346 or, as in this case, a help feature. If you place your mouse cursor
18347 over the hyphen, some help information appears (By default, you must
18348 wait seven-tenths of a second before the information appears. You can
18349 change that timing by changing the value of @code{tooltip-delay}.)
18350
18351 @need 1000
18352 The new string format has a special syntax:
18353
18354 @smallexample
18355 #("-" 0 1 (help-echo "mouse-1: select window, ..."))
18356 @end smallexample
18357
18358 @noindent
18359 The @code{#(} begins a list. The first element of the list is the
18360 string itself, just one @samp{-}. The second and third
18361 elements specify the range over which the fourth element applies. A
18362 range starts @emph{after} a character, so a zero means the range
18363 starts just before the first character; a 1 means that the range ends
18364 just after the first character. The third element is the property for
18365 the range. It consists of a property list, a
18366 property name, in this case, @samp{help-echo}, followed by a value, in this
18367 case, a string. The second, third, and fourth elements of this new
18368 string format can be repeated.
18369
18370 @xref{Text Properties, , Text Properties, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
18371 Reference Manual}, and see @ref{Mode Line Format, , Mode Line Format,
18372 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more information.
18373
18374 @code{mode-line-buffer-identification}
18375 displays the current buffer name. It is a list
18376 beginning @code{(#("%12b" 0 4 @dots{}}.
18377 The @code{#(} begins the list.
18378
18379 The @samp{"%12b"} displays the current buffer name, using the
18380 @code{buffer-name} function with which we are familiar; the `12'
18381 specifies the maximum number of characters that will be displayed.
18382 When a name has fewer characters, whitespace is added to fill out to
18383 this number. (Buffer names can and often should be longer than 12
18384 characters; this length works well in a typical 80 column wide
18385 window.)
18386
18387 @code{:eval} says to evaluate the following form and use the result as
18388 a string to display. In this case, the expression displays the first
18389 component of the full system name. The end of the first component is
18390 a @samp{.} (`period'), so I use the @code{string-match} function to
18391 tell me the length of the first component. The substring from the
18392 zeroth character to that length is the name of the machine.
18393
18394 @need 1250
18395 This is the expression:
18396
18397 @smallexample
18398 @group
18399 (:eval (substring
18400 (system-name) 0 (string-match "\\..+" (system-name))))
18401 @end group
18402 @end smallexample
18403
18404 @samp{%[} and @samp{%]} cause a pair of square brackets
18405 to appear for each recursive editing level. @samp{%n} says `Narrow'
18406 when narrowing is in effect. @samp{%P} tells you the percentage of
18407 the buffer that is above the bottom of the window, or `Top', `Bottom',
18408 or `All'. (A lower case @samp{p} tell you the percentage above the
18409 @emph{top} of the window.) @samp{%-} inserts enough dashes to fill
18410 out the line.
18411
18412 Remember, ``You don't have to like Emacs to like it'' --- your own
18413 Emacs can have different colors, different commands, and different
18414 keys than a default Emacs.
18415
18416 On the other hand, if you want to bring up a plain `out of the box'
18417 Emacs, with no customization, type:
18418
18419 @smallexample
18420 emacs -q
18421 @end smallexample
18422
18423 @noindent
18424 This will start an Emacs that does @emph{not} load your
18425 @file{~/.emacs} initialization file. A plain, default Emacs. Nothing
18426 more.
18427
18428 @node Debugging, Conclusion, Emacs Initialization, Top
18429 @chapter Debugging
18430 @cindex debugging
18431
18432 GNU Emacs has two debuggers, @code{debug} and @code{edebug}. The
18433 first is built into the internals of Emacs and is always with you;
18434 the second requires that you instrument a function before you can use it.
18435
18436 Both debuggers are described extensively in @ref{Debugging, ,
18437 Debugging Lisp Programs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18438 In this chapter, I will walk through a short example of each.
18439
18440 @menu
18441 * debug:: How to use the built-in debugger.
18442 * debug-on-entry:: Start debugging when you call a function.
18443 * debug-on-quit:: Start debugging when you quit with @kbd{C-g}.
18444 * edebug:: How to use Edebug, a source level debugger.
18445 * Debugging Exercises::
18446 @end menu
18447
18448 @node debug, debug-on-entry, Debugging, Debugging
18449 @section @code{debug}
18450 @findex debug
18451
18452 Suppose you have written a function definition that is intended to
18453 return the sum of the numbers 1 through a given number. (This is the
18454 @code{triangle} function discussed earlier. @xref{Decrementing
18455 Example, , Example with Decrementing Counter}, for a discussion.)
18456 @c xref{Decrementing Loop,, Loop with a Decrementing Counter}, for a discussion.)
18457
18458 However, your function definition has a bug. You have mistyped
18459 @samp{1=} for @samp{1-}. Here is the broken definition:
18460
18461 @findex triangle-bugged
18462 @smallexample
18463 @group
18464 (defun triangle-bugged (number)
18465 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
18466 (let ((total 0))
18467 (while (> number 0)
18468 (setq total (+ total number))
18469 (setq number (1= number))) ; @r{Error here.}
18470 total))
18471 @end group
18472 @end smallexample
18473
18474 If you are reading this in Info, you can evaluate this definition in
18475 the normal fashion. You will see @code{triangle-bugged} appear in the
18476 echo area.
18477
18478 @need 1250
18479 Now evaluate the @code{triangle-bugged} function with an
18480 argument of 4:
18481
18482 @smallexample
18483 (triangle-bugged 4)
18484 @end smallexample
18485
18486 @noindent
18487 In a recent GNU Emacs, you will create and enter a @file{*Backtrace*}
18488 buffer that says:
18489
18490 @noindent
18491 @smallexample
18492 @group
18493 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18494 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18495 (1= number)
18496 (setq number (1= number))
18497 (while (> number 0) (setq total (+ total number))
18498 (setq number (1= number)))
18499 (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18500 (setq number ...)) total)
18501 triangle-bugged(4)
18502 @end group
18503 @group
18504 eval((triangle-bugged 4))
18505 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18506 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18507 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18508 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18509 @end group
18510 @end smallexample
18511
18512 @noindent
18513 (I have reformatted this example slightly; the debugger does not fold
18514 long lines. As usual, you can quit the debugger by typing @kbd{q} in
18515 the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
18516
18517 In practice, for a bug as simple as this, the `Lisp error' line will
18518 tell you what you need to know to correct the definition. The
18519 function @code{1=} is `void'.
18520
18521 @ignore
18522 @need 800
18523 In GNU Emacs 20 and before, you will see:
18524
18525 @smallexample
18526 Symbol's function definition is void:@: 1=
18527 @end smallexample
18528
18529 @noindent
18530 which has the same meaning as the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer line in
18531 version 21.
18532 @end ignore
18533
18534 However, suppose you are not quite certain what is going on?
18535 You can read the complete backtrace.
18536
18537 In this case, you need to run a recent GNU Emacs, which automatically
18538 starts the debugger that puts you in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer; or
18539 else, you need to start the debugger manually as described below.
18540
18541 Read the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer from the bottom up; it tells you
18542 what Emacs did that led to the error. Emacs made an interactive call
18543 to @kbd{C-x C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}), which led to the evaluation
18544 of the @code{triangle-bugged} expression. Each line above tells you
18545 what the Lisp interpreter evaluated next.
18546
18547 @need 1250
18548 The third line from the top of the buffer is
18549
18550 @smallexample
18551 (setq number (1= number))
18552 @end smallexample
18553
18554 @noindent
18555 Emacs tried to evaluate this expression; in order to do so, it tried
18556 to evaluate the inner expression shown on the second line from the
18557 top:
18558
18559 @smallexample
18560 (1= number)
18561 @end smallexample
18562
18563 @need 1250
18564 @noindent
18565 This is where the error occurred; as the top line says:
18566
18567 @smallexample
18568 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18569 @end smallexample
18570
18571 @noindent
18572 You can correct the mistake, re-evaluate the function definition, and
18573 then run your test again.
18574
18575 @node debug-on-entry, debug-on-quit, debug, Debugging
18576 @section @code{debug-on-entry}
18577 @findex debug-on-entry
18578
18579 A recent GNU Emacs starts the debugger automatically when your
18580 function has an error.
18581
18582 @ignore
18583 GNU Emacs version 20 and before did not; it simply
18584 presented you with an error message. You had to start the debugger
18585 manually.
18586 @end ignore
18587
18588 Incidentally, you can start the debugger manually for all versions of
18589 Emacs; the advantage is that the debugger runs even if you do not have
18590 a bug in your code. Sometimes your code will be free of bugs!
18591
18592 You can enter the debugger when you call the function by calling
18593 @code{debug-on-entry}.
18594
18595 @need 1250
18596 @noindent
18597 Type:
18598
18599 @smallexample
18600 M-x debug-on-entry RET triangle-bugged RET
18601 @end smallexample
18602
18603 @need 1250
18604 @noindent
18605 Now, evaluate the following:
18606
18607 @smallexample
18608 (triangle-bugged 5)
18609 @end smallexample
18610
18611 @noindent
18612 All versions of Emacs will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer and tell
18613 you that it is beginning to evaluate the @code{triangle-bugged}
18614 function:
18615
18616 @smallexample
18617 @group
18618 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18619 Debugger entered--entering a function:
18620 * triangle-bugged(5)
18621 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18622 @end group
18623 @group
18624 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18625 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18626 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18627 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18628 @end group
18629 @end smallexample
18630
18631 In the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer, type @kbd{d}. Emacs will evaluate
18632 the first expression in @code{triangle-bugged}; the buffer will look
18633 like this:
18634
18635 @smallexample
18636 @group
18637 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18638 Debugger entered--beginning evaluation of function call form:
18639 * (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18640 (setq number ...)) total)
18641 * triangle-bugged(5)
18642 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18643 @end group
18644 @group
18645 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18646 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18647 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18648 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18649 @end group
18650 @end smallexample
18651
18652 @noindent
18653 Now, type @kbd{d} again, eight times, slowly. Each time you type
18654 @kbd{d}, Emacs will evaluate another expression in the function
18655 definition.
18656
18657 @need 1750
18658 Eventually, the buffer will look like this:
18659
18660 @smallexample
18661 @group
18662 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18663 Debugger entered--beginning evaluation of function call form:
18664 * (setq number (1= number))
18665 * (while (> number 0) (setq total (+ total number))
18666 (setq number (1= number)))
18667 @group
18668 @end group
18669 * (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18670 (setq number ...)) total)
18671 * triangle-bugged(5)
18672 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18673 @group
18674 @end group
18675 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18676 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18677 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18678 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18679 @end group
18680 @end smallexample
18681
18682 @need 1500
18683 @noindent
18684 Finally, after you type @kbd{d} two more times, Emacs will reach the
18685 error, and the top two lines of the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer will look
18686 like this:
18687
18688 @smallexample
18689 @group
18690 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18691 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18692 * (1= number)
18693 @dots{}
18694 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18695 @end group
18696 @end smallexample
18697
18698 By typing @kbd{d}, you were able to step through the function.
18699
18700 You can quit a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer by typing @kbd{q} in it; this
18701 quits the trace, but does not cancel @code{debug-on-entry}.
18702
18703 @findex cancel-debug-on-entry
18704 To cancel the effect of @code{debug-on-entry}, call
18705 @code{cancel-debug-on-entry} and the name of the function, like this:
18706
18707 @smallexample
18708 M-x cancel-debug-on-entry RET triangle-bugged RET
18709 @end smallexample
18710
18711 @noindent
18712 (If you are reading this in Info, cancel @code{debug-on-entry} now.)
18713
18714 @node debug-on-quit, edebug, debug-on-entry, Debugging
18715 @section @code{debug-on-quit} and @code{(debug)}
18716
18717 In addition to setting @code{debug-on-error} or calling @code{debug-on-entry},
18718 there are two other ways to start @code{debug}.
18719
18720 @findex debug-on-quit
18721 You can start @code{debug} whenever you type @kbd{C-g}
18722 (@code{keyboard-quit}) by setting the variable @code{debug-on-quit} to
18723 @code{t}. This is useful for debugging infinite loops.
18724
18725 @need 1500
18726 @cindex @code{(debug)} in code
18727 Or, you can insert a line that says @code{(debug)} into your code
18728 where you want the debugger to start, like this:
18729
18730 @smallexample
18731 @group
18732 (defun triangle-bugged (number)
18733 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
18734 (let ((total 0))
18735 (while (> number 0)
18736 (setq total (+ total number))
18737 (debug) ; @r{Start debugger.}
18738 (setq number (1= number))) ; @r{Error here.}
18739 total))
18740 @end group
18741 @end smallexample
18742
18743 The @code{debug} function is described in detail in @ref{Debugger, ,
18744 The Lisp Debugger, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18745
18746 @node edebug, Debugging Exercises, debug-on-quit, Debugging
18747 @section The @code{edebug} Source Level Debugger
18748 @cindex Source level debugger
18749 @findex edebug
18750
18751 Edebug is a source level debugger. Edebug normally displays the
18752 source of the code you are debugging, with an arrow at the left that
18753 shows which line you are currently executing.
18754
18755 You can walk through the execution of a function, line by line, or run
18756 quickly until reaching a @dfn{breakpoint} where execution stops.
18757
18758 Edebug is described in @ref{edebug, , Edebug, elisp, The GNU Emacs
18759 Lisp Reference Manual}.
18760
18761 @need 1250
18762 Here is a bugged function definition for @code{triangle-recursively}.
18763 @xref{Recursive triangle function, , Recursion in place of a counter},
18764 for a review of it.
18765
18766 @smallexample
18767 @group
18768 (defun triangle-recursively-bugged (number)
18769 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
18770 Uses recursion."
18771 (if (= number 1)
18772 1
18773 (+ number
18774 (triangle-recursively-bugged
18775 (1= number))))) ; @r{Error here.}
18776 @end group
18777 @end smallexample
18778
18779 @noindent
18780 Normally, you would install this definition by positioning your cursor
18781 after the function's closing parenthesis and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}
18782 (@code{eval-last-sexp}) or else by positioning your cursor within the
18783 definition and typing @kbd{C-M-x} (@code{eval-defun}). (By default,
18784 the @code{eval-defun} command works only in Emacs Lisp mode or in Lisp
18785 Interaction mode.)
18786
18787 @need 1500
18788 However, to prepare this function definition for Edebug, you must
18789 first @dfn{instrument} the code using a different command. You can do
18790 this by positioning your cursor within or just after the definition
18791 and typing
18792
18793 @smallexample
18794 M-x edebug-defun RET
18795 @end smallexample
18796
18797 @noindent
18798 This will cause Emacs to load Edebug automatically if it is not
18799 already loaded, and properly instrument the function.
18800
18801 After instrumenting the function, place your cursor after the
18802 following expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}):
18803
18804 @smallexample
18805 (triangle-recursively-bugged 3)
18806 @end smallexample
18807
18808 @noindent
18809 You will be jumped back to the source for
18810 @code{triangle-recursively-bugged} and the cursor positioned at the
18811 beginning of the @code{if} line of the function. Also, you will see
18812 an arrowhead at the left hand side of that line. The arrowhead marks
18813 the line where the function is executing. (In the following examples,
18814 we show the arrowhead with @samp{=>}; in a windowing system, you may
18815 see the arrowhead as a solid triangle in the window `fringe'.)
18816
18817 @smallexample
18818 =>@point{}(if (= number 1)
18819 @end smallexample
18820
18821 @noindent
18822 @iftex
18823 In the example, the location of point is displayed with a star,
18824 @samp{@point{}} (in Info, it is displayed as @samp{-!-}).
18825 @end iftex
18826 @ifnottex
18827 In the example, the location of point is displayed as @samp{@point{}}
18828 (in a printed book, it is displayed with a five pointed star).
18829 @end ifnottex
18830
18831 If you now press @key{SPC}, point will move to the next expression to
18832 be executed; the line will look like this:
18833
18834 @smallexample
18835 =>(if @point{}(= number 1)
18836 @end smallexample
18837
18838 @noindent
18839 As you continue to press @key{SPC}, point will move from expression to
18840 expression. At the same time, whenever an expression returns a value,
18841 that value will be displayed in the echo area. For example, after you
18842 move point past @code{number}, you will see the following:
18843
18844 @smallexample
18845 Result: 3 (#o3, #x3, ?\C-c)
18846 @end smallexample
18847
18848 @noindent
18849 This means the value of @code{number} is 3, which is octal three,
18850 hexadecimal three, and @sc{ascii} `control-c' (the third letter of the
18851 alphabet, in case you need to know this information).
18852
18853 You can continue moving through the code until you reach the line with
18854 the error. Before evaluation, that line looks like this:
18855
18856 @smallexample
18857 => @point{}(1= number))))) ; @r{Error here.}
18858 @end smallexample
18859
18860 @need 1250
18861 @noindent
18862 When you press @key{SPC} once again, you will produce an error message
18863 that says:
18864
18865 @smallexample
18866 Symbol's function definition is void:@: 1=
18867 @end smallexample
18868
18869 @noindent
18870 This is the bug.
18871
18872 Press @kbd{q} to quit Edebug.
18873
18874 To remove instrumentation from a function definition, simply
18875 re-evaluate it with a command that does not instrument it.
18876 For example, you could place your cursor after the definition's
18877 closing parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
18878
18879 Edebug does a great deal more than walk with you through a function.
18880 You can set it so it races through on its own, stopping only at an
18881 error or at specified stopping points; you can cause it to display the
18882 changing values of various expressions; you can find out how many
18883 times a function is called, and more.
18884
18885 Edebug is described in @ref{edebug, , Edebug, elisp, The GNU Emacs
18886 Lisp Reference Manual}.
18887
18888 @need 1500
18889 @node Debugging Exercises, , edebug, Debugging
18890 @section Debugging Exercises
18891
18892 @itemize @bullet
18893 @item
18894 Install the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function and then cause it to
18895 enter the built-in debugger when you call it. Run the command on a
18896 region containing two words. You will need to press @kbd{d} a
18897 remarkable number of times. On your system, is a `hook' called after
18898 the command finishes? (For information on hooks, see @ref{Command
18899 Overview, , Command Loop Overview, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
18900 Manual}.)
18901
18902 @item
18903 Copy @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} into the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
18904 instrument the function for Edebug, and walk through its execution.
18905 The function does not need to have a bug, although you can introduce
18906 one if you wish. If the function lacks a bug, the walk-through
18907 completes without problems.
18908
18909 @item
18910 While running Edebug, type @kbd{?} to see a list of all the Edebug commands.
18911 (The @code{global-edebug-prefix} is usually @kbd{C-x X}, i.e.@:
18912 @kbd{@key{CTRL}-x} followed by an upper case @kbd{X}; use this prefix
18913 for commands made outside of the Edebug debugging buffer.)
18914
18915 @item
18916 In the Edebug debugging buffer, use the @kbd{p}
18917 (@code{edebug-bounce-point}) command to see where in the region the
18918 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} is working.
18919
18920 @item
18921 Move point to some spot further down the function and then type the
18922 @kbd{h} (@code{edebug-goto-here}) command to jump to that location.
18923
18924 @item
18925 Use the @kbd{t} (@code{edebug-trace-mode}) command to cause Edebug to
18926 walk through the function on its own; use an upper case @kbd{T} for
18927 @code{edebug-Trace-fast-mode}.
18928
18929 @item
18930 Set a breakpoint, then run Edebug in Trace mode until it reaches the
18931 stopping point.
18932 @end itemize
18933
18934 @node Conclusion, the-the, Debugging, Top
18935 @chapter Conclusion
18936
18937 We have now reached the end of this Introduction. You have now
18938 learned enough about programming in Emacs Lisp to set values, to write
18939 simple @file{.emacs} files for yourself and your friends, and write
18940 simple customizations and extensions to Emacs.
18941
18942 This is a place to stop. Or, if you wish, you can now go onward, and
18943 teach yourself.
18944
18945 You have learned some of the basic nuts and bolts of programming. But
18946 only some. There are a great many more brackets and hinges that are
18947 easy to use that we have not touched.
18948
18949 A path you can follow right now lies among the sources to GNU Emacs
18950 and in
18951 @ifnotinfo
18952 @cite{The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18953 @end ifnotinfo
18954 @ifinfo
18955 @ref{Top, , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual, elisp, The GNU
18956 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18957 @end ifinfo
18958
18959 The Emacs Lisp sources are an adventure. When you read the sources and
18960 come across a function or expression that is unfamiliar, you need to
18961 figure out or find out what it does.
18962
18963 Go to the Reference Manual. It is a thorough, complete, and fairly
18964 easy-to-read description of Emacs Lisp. It is written not only for
18965 experts, but for people who know what you know. (The @cite{Reference
18966 Manual} comes with the standard GNU Emacs distribution. Like this
18967 introduction, it comes as a Texinfo source file, so you can read it
18968 on-line and as a typeset, printed book.)
18969
18970 Go to the other on-line help that is part of GNU Emacs: the on-line
18971 documentation for all functions and variables, and @code{find-tag},
18972 the program that takes you to sources.
18973
18974 Here is an example of how I explore the sources. Because of its name,
18975 @file{simple.el} is the file I looked at first, a long time ago. As
18976 it happens some of the functions in @file{simple.el} are complicated,
18977 or at least look complicated at first sight. The @code{open-line}
18978 function, for example, looks complicated.
18979
18980 You may want to walk through this function slowly, as we did with the
18981 @code{forward-sentence} function. (@xref{forward-sentence, The
18982 @code{forward-sentence} function}.) Or you may want to skip that
18983 function and look at another, such as @code{split-line}. You don't
18984 need to read all the functions. According to
18985 @code{count-words-in-defun}, the @code{split-line} function contains
18986 102 words and symbols.
18987
18988 Even though it is short, @code{split-line} contains expressions
18989 we have not studied: @code{skip-chars-forward}, @code{indent-to},
18990 @code{current-column} and @code{insert-and-inherit}.
18991
18992 Consider the @code{skip-chars-forward} function. (It is part of the
18993 function definition for @code{back-to-indentation}, which is shown in
18994 @ref{Review, , Review}.)
18995
18996 In GNU Emacs, you can find out more about @code{skip-chars-forward} by
18997 typing @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}) and the name of the
18998 function. This gives you the function documentation.
18999
19000 You may be able to guess what is done by a well named function such as
19001 @code{indent-to}; or you can look it up, too. Incidentally, the
19002 @code{describe-function} function itself is in @file{help.el}; it is
19003 one of those long, but decipherable functions. You can look up
19004 @code{describe-function} using the @kbd{C-h f} command!
19005
19006 In this instance, since the code is Lisp, the @file{*Help*} buffer
19007 contains the name of the library containing the function's source.
19008 You can put point over the name of the library and press the RET key,
19009 which in this situation is bound to @code{help-follow}, and be taken
19010 directly to the source, in the same way as @kbd{M-.}
19011 (@code{find-tag}).
19012
19013 The definition for @code{describe-function} illustrates how to
19014 customize the @code{interactive} expression without using the standard
19015 character codes; and it shows how to create a temporary buffer.
19016
19017 (The @code{indent-to} function is written in C rather than Emacs Lisp;
19018 it is a `built-in' function. @code{help-follow} takes you to its
19019 source as does @code{find-tag}, when properly set up.)
19020
19021 You can look at a function's source using @code{find-tag}, which is
19022 bound to @kbd{M-.} Finally, you can find out what the Reference
19023 Manual has to say by visiting the manual in Info, and typing @kbd{i}
19024 (@code{Info-index}) and the name of the function, or by looking up the
19025 function in the index to a printed copy of the manual.
19026
19027 Similarly, you can find out what is meant by
19028 @code{insert-and-inherit}.
19029
19030 Other interesting source files include @file{paragraphs.el},
19031 @file{loaddefs.el}, and @file{loadup.el}. The @file{paragraphs.el}
19032 file includes short, easily understood functions as well as longer
19033 ones. The @file{loaddefs.el} file contains the many standard
19034 autoloads and many keymaps. I have never looked at it all; only at
19035 parts. @file{loadup.el} is the file that loads the standard parts of
19036 Emacs; it tells you a great deal about how Emacs is built.
19037 (@xref{Building Emacs, , Building Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
19038 Reference Manual}, for more about building.)
19039
19040 As I said, you have learned some nuts and bolts; however, and very
19041 importantly, we have hardly touched major aspects of programming; I
19042 have said nothing about how to sort information, except to use the
19043 predefined @code{sort} function; I have said nothing about how to store
19044 information, except to use variables and lists; I have said nothing
19045 about how to write programs that write programs. These are topics for
19046 another, and different kind of book, a different kind of learning.
19047
19048 What you have done is learn enough for much practical work with GNU
19049 Emacs. What you have done is get started. This is the end of a
19050 beginning.
19051
19052 @c ================ Appendix ================
19053
19054 @node the-the, Kill Ring, Conclusion, Top
19055 @appendix The @code{the-the} Function
19056 @findex the-the
19057 @cindex Duplicated words function
19058 @cindex Words, duplicated
19059
19060 Sometimes when you you write text, you duplicate words---as with ``you
19061 you'' near the beginning of this sentence. I find that most
19062 frequently, I duplicate ``the''; hence, I call the function for
19063 detecting duplicated words, @code{the-the}.
19064
19065 @need 1250
19066 As a first step, you could use the following regular expression to
19067 search for duplicates:
19068
19069 @smallexample
19070 \\(\\w+[ \t\n]+\\)\\1
19071 @end smallexample
19072
19073 @noindent
19074 This regexp matches one or more word-constituent characters followed
19075 by one or more spaces, tabs, or newlines. However, it does not detect
19076 duplicated words on different lines, since the ending of the first
19077 word, the end of the line, is different from the ending of the second
19078 word, a space. (For more information about regular expressions, see
19079 @ref{Regexp Search, , Regular Expression Searches}, as well as
19080 @ref{Regexps, , Syntax of Regular Expressions, emacs, The GNU Emacs
19081 Manual}, and @ref{Regular Expressions, , Regular Expressions, elisp,
19082 The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
19083
19084 You might try searching just for duplicated word-constituent
19085 characters but that does not work since the pattern detects doubles
19086 such as the two occurrences of `th' in `with the'.
19087
19088 Another possible regexp searches for word-constituent characters
19089 followed by non-word-constituent characters, reduplicated. Here,
19090 @w{@samp{\\w+}} matches one or more word-constituent characters and
19091 @w{@samp{\\W*}} matches zero or more non-word-constituent characters.
19092
19093 @smallexample
19094 \\(\\(\\w+\\)\\W*\\)\\1
19095 @end smallexample
19096
19097 @noindent
19098 Again, not useful.
19099
19100 Here is the pattern that I use. It is not perfect, but good enough.
19101 @w{@samp{\\b}} matches the empty string, provided it is at the beginning
19102 or end of a word; @w{@samp{[^@@ \n\t]+}} matches one or more occurrences of
19103 any characters that are @emph{not} an @@-sign, space, newline, or tab.
19104
19105 @smallexample
19106 \\b\\([^@@ \n\t]+\\)[ \n\t]+\\1\\b
19107 @end smallexample
19108
19109 One can write more complicated expressions, but I found that this
19110 expression is good enough, so I use it.
19111
19112 Here is the @code{the-the} function, as I include it in my
19113 @file{.emacs} file, along with a handy global key binding:
19114
19115 @smallexample
19116 @group
19117 (defun the-the ()
19118 "Search forward for for a duplicated word."
19119 (interactive)
19120 (message "Searching for for duplicated words ...")
19121 (push-mark)
19122 @end group
19123 @group
19124 ;; This regexp is not perfect
19125 ;; but is fairly good over all:
19126 (if (re-search-forward
19127 "\\b\\([^@@ \n\t]+\\)[ \n\t]+\\1\\b" nil 'move)
19128 (message "Found duplicated word.")
19129 (message "End of buffer")))
19130 @end group
19131
19132 @group
19133 ;; Bind `the-the' to C-c \
19134 (global-set-key "\C-c\\" 'the-the)
19135 @end group
19136 @end smallexample
19137
19138 @sp 1
19139 Here is test text:
19140
19141 @smallexample
19142 @group
19143 one two two three four five
19144 five six seven
19145 @end group
19146 @end smallexample
19147
19148 You can substitute the other regular expressions shown above in the
19149 function definition and try each of them on this list.
19150
19151 @node Kill Ring, Full Graph, the-the, Top
19152 @appendix Handling the Kill Ring
19153 @cindex Kill ring handling
19154 @cindex Handling the kill ring
19155 @cindex Ring, making a list like a
19156
19157 The kill ring is a list that is transformed into a ring by the
19158 workings of the @code{current-kill} function. The @code{yank} and
19159 @code{yank-pop} commands use the @code{current-kill} function.
19160
19161 This appendix describes the @code{current-kill} function as well as
19162 both the @code{yank} and the @code{yank-pop} commands, but first,
19163 consider the workings of the kill ring.
19164
19165 @menu
19166 * What the Kill Ring Does::
19167 * current-kill::
19168 * yank:: Paste a copy of a clipped element.
19169 * yank-pop:: Insert element pointed to.
19170 * ring file::
19171 @end menu
19172
19173 @node What the Kill Ring Does, current-kill, Kill Ring, Kill Ring
19174 @ifnottex
19175 @unnumberedsec What the Kill Ring Does
19176 @end ifnottex
19177
19178 @need 1250
19179 The kill ring has a default maximum length of sixty items; this number
19180 is too large for an explanation. Instead, set it to four. Please
19181 evaluate the following:
19182
19183 @smallexample
19184 @group
19185 (setq old-kill-ring-max kill-ring-max)
19186 (setq kill-ring-max 4)
19187 @end group
19188 @end smallexample
19189
19190 @noindent
19191 Then, please copy each line of the following indented example into the
19192 kill ring. You may kill each line with @kbd{C-k} or mark it and copy
19193 it with @kbd{M-w}.
19194
19195 @noindent
19196 (In a read-only buffer, such as the @file{*info*} buffer, the kill
19197 command, @kbd{C-k} (@code{kill-line}), will not remove the text,
19198 merely copy it to the kill ring. However, your machine may beep at
19199 you. Alternatively, for silence, you may copy the region of each line
19200 with the @kbd{M-w} (@code{kill-ring-save}) command. You must mark
19201 each line for this command to succeed, but it does not matter at which
19202 end you put point or mark.)
19203
19204 @need 1250
19205 @noindent
19206 Please invoke the calls in order, so that five elements attempt to
19207 fill the kill ring:
19208
19209 @smallexample
19210 @group
19211 first some text
19212 second piece of text
19213 third line
19214 fourth line of text
19215 fifth bit of text
19216 @end group
19217 @end smallexample
19218
19219 @need 1250
19220 @noindent
19221 Then find the value of @code{kill-ring} by evaluating
19222
19223 @smallexample
19224 kill-ring
19225 @end smallexample
19226
19227 @need 800
19228 @noindent
19229 It is:
19230
19231 @smallexample
19232 @group
19233 ("fifth bit of text" "fourth line of text"
19234 "third line" "second piece of text")
19235 @end group
19236 @end smallexample
19237
19238 @noindent
19239 The first element, @samp{first some text}, was dropped.
19240
19241 @need 1250
19242 To return to the old value for the length of the kill ring, evaluate:
19243
19244 @smallexample
19245 (setq kill-ring-max old-kill-ring-max)
19246 @end smallexample
19247
19248 @node current-kill, yank, What the Kill Ring Does, Kill Ring
19249 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19250 @appendixsec The @code{current-kill} Function
19251 @findex current-kill
19252
19253 The @code{current-kill} function changes the element in the kill ring
19254 to which @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points. (Also, the
19255 @code{kill-new} function sets @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to point
19256 to the latest element of the kill ring. The @code{kill-new}
19257 function is used directly or indirectly by @code{kill-append},
19258 @code{copy-region-as-kill}, @code{kill-ring-save}, @code{kill-line},
19259 and @code{kill-region}.)
19260
19261 @menu
19262 * Code for current-kill::
19263 * Understanding current-kill::
19264 @end menu
19265
19266 @node Code for current-kill, Understanding current-kill, current-kill, current-kill
19267 @ifnottex
19268 @unnumberedsubsec The code for @code{current-kill}
19269 @end ifnottex
19270
19271
19272 @need 1500
19273 The @code{current-kill} function is used by @code{yank} and by
19274 @code{yank-pop}. Here is the code for @code{current-kill}:
19275
19276 @smallexample
19277 @group
19278 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
19279 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill.
19280 If N is zero, `interprogram-paste-function' is set, and calling it
19281 returns a string, then that string is added to the front of the
19282 kill ring and returned as the latest kill.
19283 @end group
19284 @group
19285 If optional arg DO-NOT-MOVE is non-nil, then don't actually move the
19286 yanking point; just return the Nth kill forward."
19287 (let ((interprogram-paste (and (= n 0)
19288 interprogram-paste-function
19289 (funcall interprogram-paste-function))))
19290 @end group
19291 @group
19292 (if interprogram-paste
19293 (progn
19294 ;; Disable the interprogram cut function when we add the new
19295 ;; text to the kill ring, so Emacs doesn't try to own the
19296 ;; selection, with identical text.
19297 (let ((interprogram-cut-function nil))
19298 (kill-new interprogram-paste))
19299 interprogram-paste)
19300 @end group
19301 @group
19302 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
19303 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
19304 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19305 (length kill-ring))
19306 kill-ring)))
19307 (or do-not-move
19308 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
19309 (car ARGth-kill-element)))))
19310 @end group
19311 @end smallexample
19312
19313 Remember also that the @code{kill-new} function sets
19314 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to the latest element of the kill
19315 ring, which means that all the functions that call it set the value
19316 indirectly: @code{kill-append}, @code{copy-region-as-kill},
19317 @code{kill-ring-save}, @code{kill-line}, and @code{kill-region}.
19318
19319 @need 1500
19320 Here is the line in @code{kill-new}, which is explained in
19321 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.
19322
19323 @smallexample
19324 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
19325 @end smallexample
19326
19327 @node Understanding current-kill, , Code for current-kill, current-kill
19328 @ifnottex
19329 @unnumberedsubsec @code{current-kill} in Outline
19330 @end ifnottex
19331
19332 The @code{current-kill} function looks complex, but as usual, it can
19333 be understood by taking it apart piece by piece. First look at it in
19334 skeletal form:
19335
19336 @smallexample
19337 @group
19338 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
19339 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill."
19340 (let @var{varlist}
19341 @var{body}@dots{})
19342 @end group
19343 @end smallexample
19344
19345 This function takes two arguments, one of which is optional. It has a
19346 documentation string. It is @emph{not} interactive.
19347
19348 @menu
19349 * Body of current-kill::
19350 * Digression concerning error:: How to mislead humans, but not computers.
19351 * Determining the Element::
19352 @end menu
19353
19354 @node Body of current-kill, Digression concerning error, Understanding current-kill, Understanding current-kill
19355 @ifnottex
19356 @unnumberedsubsubsec The Body of @code{current-kill}
19357 @end ifnottex
19358
19359 The body of the function definition is a @code{let} expression, which
19360 itself has a body as well as a @var{varlist}.
19361
19362 The @code{let} expression declares a variable that will be only usable
19363 within the bounds of this function. This variable is called
19364 @code{interprogram-paste} and is for copying to another program. It
19365 is not for copying within this instance of GNU Emacs. Most window
19366 systems provide a facility for interprogram pasting. Sadly, that
19367 facility usually provides only for the last element. Most windowing
19368 systems have not adopted a ring of many possibilities, even though
19369 Emacs has provided it for decades.
19370
19371 The @code{if} expression has two parts, one if there exists
19372 @code{interprogram-paste} and one if not.
19373
19374 @need 2000
19375 Let us consider the `if not' or else-part of the @code{current-kill}
19376 function. (The then-part uses the @code{kill-new} function, which
19377 we have already described. @xref{kill-new function, , The
19378 @code{kill-new} function}.)
19379
19380 @smallexample
19381 @group
19382 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
19383 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
19384 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19385 (length kill-ring))
19386 kill-ring)))
19387 (or do-not-move
19388 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
19389 (car ARGth-kill-element))
19390 @end group
19391 @end smallexample
19392
19393 @noindent
19394 The code first checks whether the kill ring has content; otherwise it
19395 signals an error.
19396
19397 @need 1000
19398 Note that the @code{or} expression is very similar to testing length
19399 with an @code{if}:
19400
19401 @findex zerop
19402 @findex error
19403 @smallexample
19404 @group
19405 (if (zerop (length kill-ring)) ; @r{if-part}
19406 (error "Kill ring is empty")) ; @r{then-part}
19407 ;; No else-part
19408 @end group
19409 @end smallexample
19410
19411 @noindent
19412 If there is not anything in the kill ring, its length must be zero and
19413 an error message sent to the user: @samp{Kill ring is empty}. The
19414 @code{current-kill} function uses an @code{or} expression which is
19415 simpler. But an @code{if} expression reminds us what goes on.
19416
19417 This @code{if} expression uses the function @code{zerop} which returns
19418 true if the value it is testing is zero. When @code{zerop} tests
19419 true, the then-part of the @code{if} is evaluated. The then-part is a
19420 list starting with the function @code{error}, which is a function that
19421 is similar to the @code{message} function
19422 (@pxref{message, , The @code{message} Function}) in that
19423 it prints a one-line message in the echo area. However, in addition
19424 to printing a message, @code{error} also stops evaluation of the
19425 function within which it is embedded. This means that the rest of the
19426 function will not be evaluated if the length of the kill ring is zero.
19427
19428 Then the @code{current-kill} function selects the element to return.
19429 The selection depends on the number of places that @code{current-kill}
19430 rotates and on where @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points.
19431
19432 Next, either the optional @code{do-not-move} argument is true or the
19433 current value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is set to point to the
19434 list. Finally, another expression returns the first element of the
19435 list even if the @code{do-not-move} argument is true.
19436
19437 @node Digression concerning error, Determining the Element, Body of current-kill, Understanding current-kill
19438 @ifnottex
19439 @unnumberedsubsubsec Digression about the word `error'
19440 @end ifnottex
19441
19442 In my opinion, it is slightly misleading, at least to humans, to use
19443 the term `error' as the name of the @code{error} function. A better
19444 term would be `cancel'. Strictly speaking, of course, you cannot
19445 point to, much less rotate a pointer to a list that has no length, so
19446 from the point of view of the computer, the word `error' is correct.
19447 But a human expects to attempt this sort of thing, if only to find out
19448 whether the kill ring is full or empty. This is an act of
19449 exploration.
19450
19451 From the human point of view, the act of exploration and discovery is
19452 not necessarily an error, and therefore should not be labelled as one,
19453 even in the bowels of a computer. As it is, the code in Emacs implies
19454 that a human who is acting virtuously, by exploring his or her
19455 environment, is making an error. This is bad. Even though the computer
19456 takes the same steps as it does when there is an `error', a term such as
19457 `cancel' would have a clearer connotation.
19458
19459 @node Determining the Element, , Digression concerning error, Understanding current-kill
19460 @ifnottex
19461 @unnumberedsubsubsec Determining the Element
19462 @end ifnottex
19463
19464 Among other actions, the else-part of the @code{if} expression sets
19465 the value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to
19466 @code{ARGth-kill-element} when the kill ring has something in it and
19467 the value of @code{do-not-move} is @code{nil}.
19468
19469 @need 800
19470 The code looks like this:
19471
19472 @smallexample
19473 @group
19474 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19475 (length kill-ring))
19476 kill-ring)))
19477 @end group
19478 @end smallexample
19479
19480 This needs some examination. Unless it is not supposed to move the
19481 pointer, the @code{current-kill} function changes where
19482 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points.
19483 That is what the
19484 @w{@code{(setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))}}
19485 expression does. Also, clearly, @code{ARGth-kill-element} is being
19486 set to be equal to some @sc{cdr} of the kill ring, using the
19487 @code{nthcdr} function that is described in an earlier section.
19488 (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.) How does it do this?
19489
19490 As we have seen before (@pxref{nthcdr}), the @code{nthcdr} function
19491 works by repeatedly taking the @sc{cdr} of a list---it takes the
19492 @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} @dots{}
19493
19494 @need 800
19495 The two following expressions produce the same result:
19496
19497 @smallexample
19498 @group
19499 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer (cdr kill-ring))
19500
19501 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer (nthcdr 1 kill-ring))
19502 @end group
19503 @end smallexample
19504
19505 However, the @code{nthcdr} expression is more complicated. It uses
19506 the @code{mod} function to determine which @sc{cdr} to select.
19507
19508 (You will remember to look at inner functions first; indeed, we will
19509 have to go inside the @code{mod}.)
19510
19511 The @code{mod} function returns the value of its first argument modulo
19512 the second; that is to say, it returns the remainder after dividing
19513 the first argument by the second. The value returned has the same
19514 sign as the second argument.
19515
19516 @need 800
19517 Thus,
19518
19519 @smallexample
19520 @group
19521 (mod 12 4)
19522 @result{} 0 ;; @r{because there is no remainder}
19523 (mod 13 4)
19524 @result{} 1
19525 @end group
19526 @end smallexample
19527
19528 @need 1250
19529 In this case, the first argument is often smaller than the second.
19530 That is fine.
19531
19532 @smallexample
19533 @group
19534 (mod 0 4)
19535 @result{} 0
19536 (mod 1 4)
19537 @result{} 1
19538 @end group
19539 @end smallexample
19540
19541 We can guess what the @code{-} function does. It is like @code{+} but
19542 subtracts instead of adds; the @code{-} function subtracts its second
19543 argument from its first. Also, we already know what the @code{length}
19544 function does (@pxref{length}). It returns the length of a list.
19545
19546 And @code{n} is the name of the required argument to the
19547 @code{current-kill} function.
19548
19549 @need 1250
19550 So when the first argument to @code{nthcdr} is zero, the @code{nthcdr}
19551 expression returns the whole list, as you can see by evaluating the
19552 following:
19553
19554 @smallexample
19555 @group
19556 ;; kill-ring-yank-pointer @r{and} kill-ring @r{have a length of four}
19557 ;; @r{and} (mod (- 0 4) 4) @result{} 0
19558 (nthcdr (mod (- 0 4) 4)
19559 '("fourth line of text"
19560 "third line"
19561 "second piece of text"
19562 "first some text"))
19563 @end group
19564 @end smallexample
19565
19566 @need 1250
19567 When the first argument to the @code{current-kill} function is one,
19568 the @code{nthcdr} expression returns the list without its first
19569 element.
19570
19571 @smallexample
19572 @group
19573 (nthcdr (mod (- 1 4) 4)
19574 '("fourth line of text"
19575 "third line"
19576 "second piece of text"
19577 "first some text"))
19578 @end group
19579 @end smallexample
19580
19581 @cindex @samp{global variable} defined
19582 @cindex @samp{variable, global}, defined
19583 Incidentally, both @code{kill-ring} and @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}
19584 are @dfn{global variables}. That means that any expression in Emacs
19585 Lisp can access them. They are not like the local variables set by
19586 @code{let} or like the symbols in an argument list.
19587 Local variables can only be accessed
19588 within the @code{let} that defines them or the function that specifies
19589 them in an argument list (and within expressions called by them).
19590
19591 @ignore
19592 @c texi2dvi fails when the name of the section is within ifnottex ...
19593 (@xref{Prevent confusion, , @code{let} Prevents Confusion}, and
19594 @ref{defun, , The @code{defun} Special Form}.)
19595 @end ignore
19596
19597 @node yank, yank-pop, current-kill, Kill Ring
19598 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19599 @appendixsec @code{yank}
19600 @findex yank
19601
19602 After learning about @code{current-kill}, the code for the
19603 @code{yank} function is almost easy.
19604
19605 The @code{yank} function does not use the
19606 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable directly. It calls
19607 @code{insert-for-yank} which calls @code{current-kill} which sets the
19608 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
19609
19610 @need 1250
19611 The code looks like this:
19612
19613 @c in GNU Emacs 22
19614 @smallexample
19615 @group
19616 (defun yank (&optional arg)
19617 "Reinsert (\"paste\") the last stretch of killed text.
19618 More precisely, reinsert the stretch of killed text most recently
19619 killed OR yanked. Put point at end, and set mark at beginning.
19620 With just \\[universal-argument] as argument, same but put point at
19621 beginning (and mark at end). With argument N, reinsert the Nth most
19622 recently killed stretch of killed text.
19623
19624 When this command inserts killed text into the buffer, it honors
19625 `yank-excluded-properties' and `yank-handler' as described in the
19626 doc string for `insert-for-yank-1', which see.
19627
19628 See also the command \\[yank-pop]."
19629 @end group
19630 @group
19631 (interactive "*P")
19632 (setq yank-window-start (window-start))
19633 ;; If we don't get all the way thru, make last-command indicate that
19634 ;; for the following command.
19635 (setq this-command t)
19636 (push-mark (point))
19637 @end group
19638 @group
19639 (insert-for-yank (current-kill (cond
19640 ((listp arg) 0)
19641 ((eq arg '-) -2)
19642 (t (1- arg)))))
19643 (if (consp arg)
19644 ;; This is like exchange-point-and-mark,
19645 ;; but doesn't activate the mark.
19646 ;; It is cleaner to avoid activation, even though the command
19647 ;; loop would deactivate the mark because we inserted text.
19648 (goto-char (prog1 (mark t)
19649 (set-marker (mark-marker) (point) (current-buffer)))))
19650 @end group
19651 @group
19652 ;; If we do get all the way thru, make this-command indicate that.
19653 (if (eq this-command t)
19654 (setq this-command 'yank))
19655 nil)
19656 @end group
19657 @end smallexample
19658
19659 The key expression is @code{insert-for-yank}, which inserts the string
19660 returned by @code{current-kill}, but removes some text properties from
19661 it.
19662
19663 However, before getting to that expression, the function sets the value
19664 of @code{yank-window-start} to the position returned by the
19665 @code{(window-start)} expression, the position at which the display
19666 currently starts. The @code{yank} function also sets
19667 @code{this-command} and pushes the mark.
19668
19669 After it yanks the appropriate element, if the optional argument is a
19670 @sc{cons} rather than a number or nothing, it puts point at beginning
19671 of the yanked text and mark at its end.
19672
19673 (The @code{prog1} function is like @code{progn} but returns the value
19674 of its first argument rather than the value of its last argument. Its
19675 first argument is forced to return the buffer's mark as an integer.
19676 You can see the documentation for these functions by placing point
19677 over them in this buffer and then typing @kbd{C-h f}
19678 (@code{describe-function}) followed by a @kbd{RET}; the default is the
19679 function.)
19680
19681 The last part of the function tells what to do when it succeeds.
19682
19683 @node yank-pop, ring file, yank, Kill Ring
19684 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19685 @appendixsec @code{yank-pop}
19686 @findex yank-pop
19687
19688 After understanding @code{yank} and @code{current-kill}, you know how
19689 to approach the @code{yank-pop} function. Leaving out the
19690 documentation to save space, it looks like this:
19691
19692 @c GNU Emacs 22
19693 @smallexample
19694 @group
19695 (defun yank-pop (&optional arg)
19696 "@dots{}"
19697 (interactive "*p")
19698 (if (not (eq last-command 'yank))
19699 (error "Previous command was not a yank"))
19700 @end group
19701 @group
19702 (setq this-command 'yank)
19703 (unless arg (setq arg 1))
19704 (let ((inhibit-read-only t)
19705 (before (< (point) (mark t))))
19706 @end group
19707 @group
19708 (if before
19709 (funcall (or yank-undo-function 'delete-region) (point) (mark t))
19710 (funcall (or yank-undo-function 'delete-region) (mark t) (point)))
19711 (setq yank-undo-function nil)
19712 @end group
19713 @group
19714 (set-marker (mark-marker) (point) (current-buffer))
19715 (insert-for-yank (current-kill arg))
19716 ;; Set the window start back where it was in the yank command,
19717 ;; if possible.
19718 (set-window-start (selected-window) yank-window-start t)
19719 @end group
19720 @group
19721 (if before
19722 ;; This is like exchange-point-and-mark,
19723 ;; but doesn't activate the mark.
19724 ;; It is cleaner to avoid activation, even though the command
19725 ;; loop would deactivate the mark because we inserted text.
19726 (goto-char (prog1 (mark t)
19727 (set-marker (mark-marker)
19728 (point)
19729 (current-buffer))))))
19730 nil)
19731 @end group
19732 @end smallexample
19733
19734 The function is interactive with a small @samp{p} so the prefix
19735 argument is processed and passed to the function. The command can
19736 only be used after a previous yank; otherwise an error message is
19737 sent. This check uses the variable @code{last-command} which is set
19738 by @code{yank} and is discussed elsewhere.
19739 (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.)
19740
19741 The @code{let} clause sets the variable @code{before} to true or false
19742 depending whether point is before or after mark and then the region
19743 between point and mark is deleted. This is the region that was just
19744 inserted by the previous yank and it is this text that will be
19745 replaced.
19746
19747 @code{funcall} calls its first argument as a function, passing
19748 remaining arguments to it. The first argument is whatever the
19749 @code{or} expression returns. The two remaining arguments are the
19750 positions of point and mark set by the preceding @code{yank} command.
19751
19752 There is more, but that is the hardest part.
19753
19754 @node ring file, , yank-pop, Kill Ring
19755 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19756 @appendixsec The @file{ring.el} File
19757 @cindex @file{ring.el} file
19758
19759 Interestingly, GNU Emacs posses a file called @file{ring.el} that
19760 provides many of the features we just discussed. But functions such
19761 as @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} do not use this library, possibly
19762 because they were written earlier.
19763
19764 @node Full Graph, Free Software and Free Manuals, Kill Ring, Top
19765 @appendix A Graph with Labelled Axes
19766
19767 Printed axes help you understand a graph. They convey scale. In an
19768 earlier chapter (@pxref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph}), we
19769 wrote the code to print the body of a graph. Here we write the code
19770 for printing and labelling vertical and horizontal axes, along with the
19771 body itself.
19772
19773 @menu
19774 * Labelled Example::
19775 * print-graph Varlist:: @code{let} expression in @code{print-graph}.
19776 * print-Y-axis:: Print a label for the vertical axis.
19777 * print-X-axis:: Print a horizontal label.
19778 * Print Whole Graph:: The function to print a complete graph.
19779 @end menu
19780
19781 @node Labelled Example, print-graph Varlist, Full Graph, Full Graph
19782 @ifnottex
19783 @unnumberedsec Labelled Example Graph
19784 @end ifnottex
19785
19786 Since insertions fill a buffer to the right and below point, the new
19787 graph printing function should first print the Y or vertical axis,
19788 then the body of the graph, and finally the X or horizontal axis.
19789 This sequence lays out for us the contents of the function:
19790
19791 @enumerate
19792 @item
19793 Set up code.
19794
19795 @item
19796 Print Y axis.
19797
19798 @item
19799 Print body of graph.
19800
19801 @item
19802 Print X axis.
19803 @end enumerate
19804
19805 @need 800
19806 Here is an example of how a finished graph should look:
19807
19808 @smallexample
19809 @group
19810 10 -
19811 *
19812 * *
19813 * **
19814 * ***
19815 5 - * *******
19816 * *** *******
19817 *************
19818 ***************
19819 1 - ****************
19820 | | | |
19821 1 5 10 15
19822 @end group
19823 @end smallexample
19824
19825 @noindent
19826 In this graph, both the vertical and the horizontal axes are labelled
19827 with numbers. However, in some graphs, the horizontal axis is time
19828 and would be better labelled with months, like this:
19829
19830 @smallexample
19831 @group
19832 5 - *
19833 * ** *
19834 *******
19835 ********** **
19836 1 - **************
19837 | ^ |
19838 Jan June Jan
19839 @end group
19840 @end smallexample
19841
19842 Indeed, with a little thought, we can easily come up with a variety of
19843 vertical and horizontal labelling schemes. Our task could become
19844 complicated. But complications breed confusion. Rather than permit
19845 this, it is better choose a simple labelling scheme for our first
19846 effort, and to modify or replace it later.
19847
19848 @need 1200
19849 These considerations suggest the following outline for the
19850 @code{print-graph} function:
19851
19852 @smallexample
19853 @group
19854 (defun print-graph (numbers-list)
19855 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
19856 (let ((height @dots{}
19857 @dots{}))
19858 @end group
19859 @group
19860 (print-Y-axis height @dots{} )
19861 (graph-body-print numbers-list)
19862 (print-X-axis @dots{} )))
19863 @end group
19864 @end smallexample
19865
19866 We can work on each part of the @code{print-graph} function definition
19867 in turn.
19868
19869 @node print-graph Varlist, print-Y-axis, Labelled Example, Full Graph
19870 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19871 @appendixsec The @code{print-graph} Varlist
19872 @cindex @code{print-graph} varlist
19873
19874 In writing the @code{print-graph} function, the first task is to write
19875 the varlist in the @code{let} expression. (We will leave aside for the
19876 moment any thoughts about making the function interactive or about the
19877 contents of its documentation string.)
19878
19879 The varlist should set several values. Clearly, the top of the label
19880 for the vertical axis must be at least the height of the graph, which
19881 means that we must obtain this information here. Note that the
19882 @code{print-graph-body} function also requires this information. There
19883 is no reason to calculate the height of the graph in two different
19884 places, so we should change @code{print-graph-body} from the way we
19885 defined it earlier to take advantage of the calculation.
19886
19887 Similarly, both the function for printing the X axis labels and the
19888 @code{print-graph-body} function need to learn the value of the width of
19889 each symbol. We can perform the calculation here and change the
19890 definition for @code{print-graph-body} from the way we defined it in the
19891 previous chapter.
19892
19893 The length of the label for the horizontal axis must be at least as long
19894 as the graph. However, this information is used only in the function
19895 that prints the horizontal axis, so it does not need to be calculated here.
19896
19897 These thoughts lead us directly to the following form for the varlist
19898 in the @code{let} for @code{print-graph}:
19899
19900 @smallexample
19901 @group
19902 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list)) ; @r{First version.}
19903 (symbol-width (length graph-blank)))
19904 @end group
19905 @end smallexample
19906
19907 @noindent
19908 As we shall see, this expression is not quite right.
19909
19910 @need 2000
19911 @node print-Y-axis, print-X-axis, print-graph Varlist, Full Graph
19912 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19913 @appendixsec The @code{print-Y-axis} Function
19914 @cindex Axis, print vertical
19915 @cindex Y axis printing
19916 @cindex Vertical axis printing
19917 @cindex Print vertical axis
19918
19919 The job of the @code{print-Y-axis} function is to print a label for
19920 the vertical axis that looks like this:
19921
19922 @smallexample
19923 @group
19924 10 -
19925
19926
19927
19928
19929 5 -
19930
19931
19932
19933 1 -
19934 @end group
19935 @end smallexample
19936
19937 @noindent
19938 The function should be passed the height of the graph, and then should
19939 construct and insert the appropriate numbers and marks.
19940
19941 @menu
19942 * print-Y-axis in Detail::
19943 * Height of label:: What height for the Y axis?
19944 * Compute a Remainder:: How to compute the remainder of a division.
19945 * Y Axis Element:: Construct a line for the Y axis.
19946 * Y-axis-column:: Generate a list of Y axis labels.
19947 * print-Y-axis Penultimate:: A not quite final version.
19948 @end menu
19949
19950 @node print-Y-axis in Detail, Height of label, print-Y-axis, print-Y-axis
19951 @ifnottex
19952 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{print-Y-axis} Function in Detail
19953 @end ifnottex
19954
19955 It is easy enough to see in the figure what the Y axis label should
19956 look like; but to say in words, and then to write a function
19957 definition to do the job is another matter. It is not quite true to
19958 say that we want a number and a tic every five lines: there are only
19959 three lines between the @samp{1} and the @samp{5} (lines 2, 3, and 4),
19960 but four lines between the @samp{5} and the @samp{10} (lines 6, 7, 8,
19961 and 9). It is better to say that we want a number and a tic mark on
19962 the base line (number 1) and then that we want a number and a tic on
19963 the fifth line from the bottom and on every line that is a multiple of
19964 five.
19965
19966 @node Height of label, Compute a Remainder, print-Y-axis in Detail, print-Y-axis
19967 @ifnottex
19968 @unnumberedsubsec What height should the label be?
19969 @end ifnottex
19970
19971 The next issue is what height the label should be? Suppose the maximum
19972 height of tallest column of the graph is seven. Should the highest
19973 label on the Y axis be @samp{5 -}, and should the graph stick up above
19974 the label? Or should the highest label be @samp{7 -}, and mark the peak
19975 of the graph? Or should the highest label be @code{10 -}, which is a
19976 multiple of five, and be higher than the topmost value of the graph?
19977
19978 The latter form is preferred. Most graphs are drawn within rectangles
19979 whose sides are an integral number of steps long---5, 10, 15, and so
19980 on for a step distance of five. But as soon as we decide to use a
19981 step height for the vertical axis, we discover that the simple
19982 expression in the varlist for computing the height is wrong. The
19983 expression is @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)}. This returns the
19984 precise height, not the maximum height plus whatever is necessary to
19985 round up to the nearest multiple of five. A more complex expression
19986 is required.
19987
19988 As usual in cases like this, a complex problem becomes simpler if it is
19989 divided into several smaller problems.
19990
19991 First, consider the case when the highest value of the graph is an
19992 integral multiple of five---when it is 5, 10, 15, or some higher
19993 multiple of five. We can use this value as the Y axis height.
19994
19995 A fairly simply way to determine whether a number is a multiple of
19996 five is to divide it by five and see if the division results in a
19997 remainder. If there is no remainder, the number is a multiple of
19998 five. Thus, seven divided by five has a remainder of two, and seven
19999 is not an integral multiple of five. Put in slightly different
20000 language, more reminiscent of the classroom, five goes into seven
20001 once, with a remainder of two. However, five goes into ten twice,
20002 with no remainder: ten is an integral multiple of five.
20003
20004 @node Compute a Remainder, Y Axis Element, Height of label, print-Y-axis
20005 @appendixsubsec Side Trip: Compute a Remainder
20006
20007 @findex % @r{(remainder function)}
20008 @cindex Remainder function, @code{%}
20009 In Lisp, the function for computing a remainder is @code{%}. The
20010 function returns the remainder of its first argument divided by its
20011 second argument. As it happens, @code{%} is a function in Emacs Lisp
20012 that you cannot discover using @code{apropos}: you find nothing if you
20013 type @kbd{M-x apropos @key{RET} remainder @key{RET}}. The only way to
20014 learn of the existence of @code{%} is to read about it in a book such
20015 as this or in the Emacs Lisp sources.
20016
20017 You can try the @code{%} function by evaluating the following two
20018 expressions:
20019
20020 @smallexample
20021 @group
20022 (% 7 5)
20023
20024 (% 10 5)
20025 @end group
20026 @end smallexample
20027
20028 @noindent
20029 The first expression returns 2 and the second expression returns 0.
20030
20031 To test whether the returned value is zero or some other number, we
20032 can use the @code{zerop} function. This function returns @code{t} if
20033 its argument, which must be a number, is zero.
20034
20035 @smallexample
20036 @group
20037 (zerop (% 7 5))
20038 @result{} nil
20039
20040 (zerop (% 10 5))
20041 @result{} t
20042 @end group
20043 @end smallexample
20044
20045 Thus, the following expression will return @code{t} if the height
20046 of the graph is evenly divisible by five:
20047
20048 @smallexample
20049 (zerop (% height 5))
20050 @end smallexample
20051
20052 @noindent
20053 (The value of @code{height}, of course, can be found from @code{(apply
20054 'max numbers-list)}.)
20055
20056 On the other hand, if the value of @code{height} is not a multiple of
20057 five, we want to reset the value to the next higher multiple of five.
20058 This is straightforward arithmetic using functions with which we are
20059 already familiar. First, we divide the value of @code{height} by five
20060 to determine how many times five goes into the number. Thus, five
20061 goes into twelve twice. If we add one to this quotient and multiply by
20062 five, we will obtain the value of the next multiple of five that is
20063 larger than the height. Five goes into twelve twice. Add one to two,
20064 and multiply by five; the result is fifteen, which is the next multiple
20065 of five that is higher than twelve. The Lisp expression for this is:
20066
20067 @smallexample
20068 (* (1+ (/ height 5)) 5)
20069 @end smallexample
20070
20071 @noindent
20072 For example, if you evaluate the following, the result is 15:
20073
20074 @smallexample
20075 (* (1+ (/ 12 5)) 5)
20076 @end smallexample
20077
20078 All through this discussion, we have been using `five' as the value
20079 for spacing labels on the Y axis; but we may want to use some other
20080 value. For generality, we should replace `five' with a variable to
20081 which we can assign a value. The best name I can think of for this
20082 variable is @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}.
20083
20084 @need 1250
20085 Using this term, and an @code{if} expression, we produce the
20086 following:
20087
20088 @smallexample
20089 @group
20090 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20091 height
20092 ;; @r{else}
20093 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20094 Y-axis-label-spacing))
20095 @end group
20096 @end smallexample
20097
20098 @noindent
20099 This expression returns the value of @code{height} itself if the height
20100 is an even multiple of the value of the @code{Y-axis-label-spacing} or
20101 else it computes and returns a value of @code{height} that is equal to
20102 the next higher multiple of the value of the @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}.
20103
20104 We can now include this expression in the @code{let} expression of the
20105 @code{print-graph} function (after first setting the value of
20106 @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}):
20107 @vindex Y-axis-label-spacing
20108
20109 @smallexample
20110 @group
20111 (defvar Y-axis-label-spacing 5
20112 "Number of lines from one Y axis label to next.")
20113 @end group
20114
20115 @group
20116 @dots{}
20117 (let* ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
20118 (height-of-top-line
20119 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20120 height
20121 @end group
20122 @group
20123 ;; @r{else}
20124 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20125 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
20126 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))))
20127 @dots{}
20128 @end group
20129 @end smallexample
20130
20131 @noindent
20132 (Note use of the @code{let*} function: the initial value of height is
20133 computed once by the @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)} expression and
20134 then the resulting value of @code{height} is used to compute its
20135 final value. @xref{fwd-para let, , The @code{let*} expression}, for
20136 more about @code{let*}.)
20137
20138 @node Y Axis Element, Y-axis-column, Compute a Remainder, print-Y-axis
20139 @appendixsubsec Construct a Y Axis Element
20140
20141 When we print the vertical axis, we want to insert strings such as
20142 @w{@samp{5 -}} and @w{@samp{10 - }} every five lines.
20143 Moreover, we want the numbers and dashes to line up, so shorter
20144 numbers must be padded with leading spaces. If some of the strings
20145 use two digit numbers, the strings with single digit numbers must
20146 include a leading blank space before the number.
20147
20148 @findex number-to-string
20149 To figure out the length of the number, the @code{length} function is
20150 used. But the @code{length} function works only with a string, not with
20151 a number. So the number has to be converted from being a number to
20152 being a string. This is done with the @code{number-to-string} function.
20153 For example,
20154
20155 @smallexample
20156 @group
20157 (length (number-to-string 35))
20158 @result{} 2
20159
20160 (length (number-to-string 100))
20161 @result{} 3
20162 @end group
20163 @end smallexample
20164
20165 @noindent
20166 (@code{number-to-string} is also called @code{int-to-string}; you will
20167 see this alternative name in various sources.)
20168
20169 In addition, in each label, each number is followed by a string such
20170 as @w{@samp{ - }}, which we will call the @code{Y-axis-tic} marker.
20171 This variable is defined with @code{defvar}:
20172
20173 @vindex Y-axis-tic
20174 @smallexample
20175 @group
20176 (defvar Y-axis-tic " - "
20177 "String that follows number in a Y axis label.")
20178 @end group
20179 @end smallexample
20180
20181 The length of the Y label is the sum of the length of the Y axis tic
20182 mark and the length of the number of the top of the graph.
20183
20184 @smallexample
20185 (length (concat (number-to-string height) Y-axis-tic)))
20186 @end smallexample
20187
20188 This value will be calculated by the @code{print-graph} function in
20189 its varlist as @code{full-Y-label-width} and passed on. (Note that we
20190 did not think to include this in the varlist when we first proposed it.)
20191
20192 To make a complete vertical axis label, a tic mark is concatenated
20193 with a number; and the two together may be preceded by one or more
20194 spaces depending on how long the number is. The label consists of
20195 three parts: the (optional) leading spaces, the number, and the tic
20196 mark. The function is passed the value of the number for the specific
20197 row, and the value of the width of the top line, which is calculated
20198 (just once) by @code{print-graph}.
20199
20200 @smallexample
20201 @group
20202 (defun Y-axis-element (number full-Y-label-width)
20203 "Construct a NUMBERed label element.
20204 A numbered element looks like this ` 5 - ',
20205 and is padded as needed so all line up with
20206 the element for the largest number."
20207 @end group
20208 @group
20209 (let* ((leading-spaces
20210 (- full-Y-label-width
20211 (length
20212 (concat (number-to-string number)
20213 Y-axis-tic)))))
20214 @end group
20215 @group
20216 (concat
20217 (make-string leading-spaces ? )
20218 (number-to-string number)
20219 Y-axis-tic)))
20220 @end group
20221 @end smallexample
20222
20223 The @code{Y-axis-element} function concatenates together the leading
20224 spaces, if any; the number, as a string; and the tic mark.
20225
20226 To figure out how many leading spaces the label will need, the
20227 function subtracts the actual length of the label---the length of the
20228 number plus the length of the tic mark---from the desired label width.
20229
20230 @findex make-string
20231 Blank spaces are inserted using the @code{make-string} function. This
20232 function takes two arguments: the first tells it how long the string
20233 will be and the second is a symbol for the character to insert, in a
20234 special format. The format is a question mark followed by a blank
20235 space, like this, @samp{? }. @xref{Character Type, , Character Type,
20236 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a description of the
20237 syntax for characters. (Of course, you might want to replace the
20238 blank space by some other character @dots{} You know what to do.)
20239
20240 The @code{number-to-string} function is used in the concatenation
20241 expression, to convert the number to a string that is concatenated
20242 with the leading spaces and the tic mark.
20243
20244 @node Y-axis-column, print-Y-axis Penultimate, Y Axis Element, print-Y-axis
20245 @appendixsubsec Create a Y Axis Column
20246
20247 The preceding functions provide all the tools needed to construct a
20248 function that generates a list of numbered and blank strings to insert
20249 as the label for the vertical axis:
20250
20251 @findex Y-axis-column
20252 @smallexample
20253 @group
20254 (defun Y-axis-column (height width-of-label)
20255 "Construct list of Y axis labels and blank strings.
20256 For HEIGHT of line above base and WIDTH-OF-LABEL."
20257 (let (Y-axis)
20258 @group
20259 @end group
20260 (while (> height 1)
20261 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20262 ;; @r{Insert label.}
20263 (setq Y-axis
20264 (cons
20265 (Y-axis-element height width-of-label)
20266 Y-axis))
20267 @group
20268 @end group
20269 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
20270 (setq Y-axis
20271 (cons
20272 (make-string width-of-label ? )
20273 Y-axis)))
20274 (setq height (1- height)))
20275 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
20276 (setq Y-axis
20277 (cons (Y-axis-element 1 width-of-label) Y-axis))
20278 (nreverse Y-axis)))
20279 @end group
20280 @end smallexample
20281
20282 In this function, we start with the value of @code{height} and
20283 repetitively subtract one from its value. After each subtraction, we
20284 test to see whether the value is an integral multiple of the
20285 @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}. If it is, we construct a numbered label
20286 using the @code{Y-axis-element} function; if not, we construct a
20287 blank label using the @code{make-string} function. The base line
20288 consists of the number one followed by a tic mark.
20289
20290 @need 2000
20291 @node print-Y-axis Penultimate, , Y-axis-column, print-Y-axis
20292 @appendixsubsec The Not Quite Final Version of @code{print-Y-axis}
20293
20294 The list constructed by the @code{Y-axis-column} function is passed to
20295 the @code{print-Y-axis} function, which inserts the list as a column.
20296
20297 @findex print-Y-axis
20298 @smallexample
20299 @group
20300 (defun print-Y-axis (height full-Y-label-width)
20301 "Insert Y axis using HEIGHT and FULL-Y-LABEL-WIDTH.
20302 Height must be the maximum height of the graph.
20303 Full width is the width of the highest label element."
20304 ;; Value of height and full-Y-label-width
20305 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
20306 @end group
20307 @group
20308 (let ((start (point)))
20309 (insert-rectangle
20310 (Y-axis-column height full-Y-label-width))
20311 ;; @r{Place point ready for inserting graph.}
20312 (goto-char start)
20313 ;; @r{Move point forward by value of} full-Y-label-width
20314 (forward-char full-Y-label-width)))
20315 @end group
20316 @end smallexample
20317
20318 The @code{print-Y-axis} uses the @code{insert-rectangle} function to
20319 insert the Y axis labels created by the @code{Y-axis-column} function.
20320 In addition, it places point at the correct position for printing the body of
20321 the graph.
20322
20323 You can test @code{print-Y-axis}:
20324
20325 @enumerate
20326 @item
20327 Install
20328
20329 @smallexample
20330 @group
20331 Y-axis-label-spacing
20332 Y-axis-tic
20333 Y-axis-element
20334 Y-axis-column
20335 print-Y-axis
20336 @end group
20337 @end smallexample
20338
20339 @item
20340 Copy the following expression:
20341
20342 @smallexample
20343 (print-Y-axis 12 5)
20344 @end smallexample
20345
20346 @item
20347 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20348 want the axis labels to start.
20349
20350 @item
20351 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20352
20353 @item
20354 Yank the @code{graph-body-print} expression into the minibuffer
20355 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20356
20357 @item
20358 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20359 @end enumerate
20360
20361 Emacs will print labels vertically, the top one being @w{@samp{10 -@w{
20362 }}}. (The @code{print-graph} function will pass the value of
20363 @code{height-of-top-line}, which in this case will end up as 15,
20364 thereby getting rid of what might appear as a bug.)
20365
20366 @need 2000
20367 @node print-X-axis, Print Whole Graph, print-Y-axis, Full Graph
20368 @appendixsec The @code{print-X-axis} Function
20369 @cindex Axis, print horizontal
20370 @cindex X axis printing
20371 @cindex Print horizontal axis
20372 @cindex Horizontal axis printing
20373
20374 X axis labels are much like Y axis labels, except that the ticks are on a
20375 line above the numbers. Labels should look like this:
20376
20377 @smallexample
20378 @group
20379 | | | |
20380 1 5 10 15
20381 @end group
20382 @end smallexample
20383
20384 The first tic is under the first column of the graph and is preceded by
20385 several blank spaces. These spaces provide room in rows above for the Y
20386 axis labels. The second, third, fourth, and subsequent ticks are all
20387 spaced equally, according to the value of @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20388
20389 The second row of the X axis consists of numbers, preceded by several
20390 blank spaces and also separated according to the value of the variable
20391 @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20392
20393 The value of the variable @code{X-axis-label-spacing} should itself be
20394 measured in units of @code{symbol-width}, since you may want to change
20395 the width of the symbols that you are using to print the body of the
20396 graph without changing the ways the graph is labelled.
20397
20398 @menu
20399 * Similarities differences:: Much like @code{print-Y-axis}, but not exactly.
20400 * X Axis Tic Marks:: Create tic marks for the horizontal axis.
20401 @end menu
20402
20403 @node Similarities differences, X Axis Tic Marks, print-X-axis, print-X-axis
20404 @ifnottex
20405 @unnumberedsubsec Similarities and differences
20406 @end ifnottex
20407
20408 The @code{print-X-axis} function is constructed in more or less the
20409 same fashion as the @code{print-Y-axis} function except that it has
20410 two lines: the line of tic marks and the numbers. We will write a
20411 separate function to print each line and then combine them within the
20412 @code{print-X-axis} function.
20413
20414 This is a three step process:
20415
20416 @enumerate
20417 @item
20418 Write a function to print the X axis tic marks, @code{print-X-axis-tic-line}.
20419
20420 @item
20421 Write a function to print the X numbers, @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20422
20423 @item
20424 Write a function to print both lines, the @code{print-X-axis} function,
20425 using @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and
20426 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20427 @end enumerate
20428
20429 @node X Axis Tic Marks, , Similarities differences, print-X-axis
20430 @appendixsubsec X Axis Tic Marks
20431
20432 The first function should print the X axis tic marks. We must specify
20433 the tic marks themselves and their spacing:
20434
20435 @smallexample
20436 @group
20437 (defvar X-axis-label-spacing
20438 (if (boundp 'graph-blank)
20439 (* 5 (length graph-blank)) 5)
20440 "Number of units from one X axis label to next.")
20441 @end group
20442 @end smallexample
20443
20444 @noindent
20445 (Note that the value of @code{graph-blank} is set by another
20446 @code{defvar}. The @code{boundp} predicate checks whether it has
20447 already been set; @code{boundp} returns @code{nil} if it has not. If
20448 @code{graph-blank} were unbound and we did not use this conditional
20449 construction, in a recent GNU Emacs, we would enter the debugger and
20450 see an error message saying @samp{@w{Debugger entered--Lisp error:}
20451 @w{(void-variable graph-blank)}}.)
20452
20453 @need 1200
20454 Here is the @code{defvar} for @code{X-axis-tic-symbol}:
20455
20456 @smallexample
20457 @group
20458 (defvar X-axis-tic-symbol "|"
20459 "String to insert to point to a column in X axis.")
20460 @end group
20461 @end smallexample
20462
20463 @need 1250
20464 The goal is to make a line that looks like this:
20465
20466 @smallexample
20467 | | | |
20468 @end smallexample
20469
20470 The first tic is indented so that it is under the first column, which is
20471 indented to provide space for the Y axis labels.
20472
20473 A tic element consists of the blank spaces that stretch from one tic to
20474 the next plus a tic symbol. The number of blanks is determined by the
20475 width of the tic symbol and the @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20476
20477 @need 1250
20478 The code looks like this:
20479
20480 @smallexample
20481 @group
20482 ;;; X-axis-tic-element
20483 @dots{}
20484 (concat
20485 (make-string
20486 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
20487 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20488 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
20489 ? )
20490 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
20491 X-axis-tic-symbol)
20492 @dots{}
20493 @end group
20494 @end smallexample
20495
20496 Next, we determine how many blanks are needed to indent the first tic
20497 mark to the first column of the graph. This uses the value of
20498 @code{full-Y-label-width} passed it by the @code{print-graph} function.
20499
20500 @need 1250
20501 The code to make @code{X-axis-leading-spaces}
20502 looks like this:
20503
20504 @smallexample
20505 @group
20506 ;; X-axis-leading-spaces
20507 @dots{}
20508 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? )
20509 @dots{}
20510 @end group
20511 @end smallexample
20512
20513 We also need to determine the length of the horizontal axis, which is
20514 the length of the numbers list, and the number of ticks in the horizontal
20515 axis:
20516
20517 @smallexample
20518 @group
20519 ;; X-length
20520 @dots{}
20521 (length numbers-list)
20522 @end group
20523
20524 @group
20525 ;; tic-width
20526 @dots{}
20527 (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20528 @end group
20529
20530 @group
20531 ;; number-of-X-ticks
20532 (if (zerop (% (X-length tic-width)))
20533 (/ (X-length tic-width))
20534 (1+ (/ (X-length tic-width))))
20535 @end group
20536 @end smallexample
20537
20538 @need 1250
20539 All this leads us directly to the function for printing the X axis tic line:
20540
20541 @findex print-X-axis-tic-line
20542 @smallexample
20543 @group
20544 (defun print-X-axis-tic-line
20545 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces X-axis-tic-element)
20546 "Print ticks for X axis."
20547 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
20548 (insert X-axis-tic-symbol) ; @r{Under first column.}
20549 @end group
20550 @group
20551 ;; @r{Insert second tic in the right spot.}
20552 (insert (concat
20553 (make-string
20554 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20555 ;; @r{Insert white space up to second tic symbol.}
20556 (* 2 (length X-axis-tic-symbol)))
20557 ? )
20558 X-axis-tic-symbol))
20559 @end group
20560 @group
20561 ;; @r{Insert remaining ticks.}
20562 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
20563 (insert X-axis-tic-element)
20564 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics))))
20565 @end group
20566 @end smallexample
20567
20568 The line of numbers is equally straightforward:
20569
20570 @need 1250
20571 First, we create a numbered element with blank spaces before each number:
20572
20573 @findex X-axis-element
20574 @smallexample
20575 @group
20576 (defun X-axis-element (number)
20577 "Construct a numbered X axis element."
20578 (let ((leading-spaces
20579 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20580 (length (number-to-string number)))))
20581 (concat (make-string leading-spaces ? )
20582 (number-to-string number))))
20583 @end group
20584 @end smallexample
20585
20586 Next, we create the function to print the numbered line, starting with
20587 the number ``1'' under the first column:
20588
20589 @findex print-X-axis-numbered-line
20590 @smallexample
20591 @group
20592 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
20593 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces)
20594 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
20595 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing))
20596 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
20597 (insert "1")
20598 @end group
20599 @group
20600 (insert (concat
20601 (make-string
20602 ;; @r{Insert white space up to next number.}
20603 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing) 2)
20604 ? )
20605 (number-to-string number)))
20606 @end group
20607 @group
20608 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
20609 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
20610 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
20611 (insert (X-axis-element number))
20612 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
20613 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
20614 @end group
20615 @end smallexample
20616
20617 Finally, we need to write the @code{print-X-axis} that uses
20618 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and
20619 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20620
20621 The function must determine the local values of the variables used by both
20622 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}, and
20623 then it must call them. Also, it must print the carriage return that
20624 separates the two lines.
20625
20626 The function consists of a varlist that specifies five local variables,
20627 and calls to each of the two line printing functions:
20628
20629 @findex print-X-axis
20630 @smallexample
20631 @group
20632 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list)
20633 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST."
20634 (let* ((leading-spaces
20635 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
20636 @end group
20637 @group
20638 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
20639 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
20640 (X-length (length numbers-list))
20641 @end group
20642 @group
20643 (X-tic
20644 (concat
20645 (make-string
20646 @end group
20647 @group
20648 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
20649 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20650 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
20651 ? )
20652 @end group
20653 @group
20654 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
20655 X-axis-tic-symbol))
20656 @end group
20657 @group
20658 (tic-number
20659 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
20660 (/ X-length tic-width)
20661 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
20662 @end group
20663 @group
20664 (print-X-axis-tic-line tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
20665 (insert "\n")
20666 (print-X-axis-numbered-line tic-number leading-spaces)))
20667 @end group
20668 @end smallexample
20669
20670 @need 1250
20671 You can test @code{print-X-axis}:
20672
20673 @enumerate
20674 @item
20675 Install @code{X-axis-tic-symbol}, @code{X-axis-label-spacing},
20676 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line}, as well as @code{X-axis-element},
20677 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}, and @code{print-X-axis}.
20678
20679 @item
20680 Copy the following expression:
20681
20682 @smallexample
20683 @group
20684 (progn
20685 (let ((full-Y-label-width 5)
20686 (symbol-width 1))
20687 (print-X-axis
20688 '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16))))
20689 @end group
20690 @end smallexample
20691
20692 @item
20693 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20694 want the axis labels to start.
20695
20696 @item
20697 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20698
20699 @item
20700 Yank the test expression into the minibuffer
20701 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20702
20703 @item
20704 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20705 @end enumerate
20706
20707 @need 1250
20708 Emacs will print the horizontal axis like this:
20709 @sp 1
20710
20711 @smallexample
20712 @group
20713 | | | | |
20714 1 5 10 15 20
20715 @end group
20716 @end smallexample
20717
20718 @node Print Whole Graph, , print-X-axis, Full Graph
20719 @appendixsec Printing the Whole Graph
20720 @cindex Printing the whole graph
20721 @cindex Whole graph printing
20722 @cindex Graph, printing all
20723
20724 Now we are nearly ready to print the whole graph.
20725
20726 The function to print the graph with the proper labels follows the
20727 outline we created earlier (@pxref{Full Graph, , A Graph with Labelled
20728 Axes}), but with additions.
20729
20730 @need 1250
20731 Here is the outline:
20732
20733 @smallexample
20734 @group
20735 (defun print-graph (numbers-list)
20736 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
20737 (let ((height @dots{}
20738 @dots{}))
20739 @end group
20740 @group
20741 (print-Y-axis height @dots{} )
20742 (graph-body-print numbers-list)
20743 (print-X-axis @dots{} )))
20744 @end group
20745 @end smallexample
20746
20747 @menu
20748 * The final version:: A few changes.
20749 * Test print-graph:: Run a short test.
20750 * Graphing words in defuns:: Executing the final code.
20751 * lambda:: How to write an anonymous function.
20752 * mapcar:: Apply a function to elements of a list.
20753 * Another Bug:: Yet another bug @dots{} most insidious.
20754 * Final printed graph:: The graph itself!
20755 @end menu
20756
20757 @node The final version, Test print-graph, Print Whole Graph, Print Whole Graph
20758 @ifnottex
20759 @unnumberedsubsec Changes for the Final Version
20760 @end ifnottex
20761
20762 The final version is different from what we planned in two ways:
20763 first, it contains additional values calculated once in the varlist;
20764 second, it carries an option to specify the labels' increment per row.
20765 This latter feature turns out to be essential; otherwise, a graph may
20766 have more rows than fit on a display or on a sheet of paper.
20767
20768 @need 1500
20769 This new feature requires a change to the @code{Y-axis-column}
20770 function, to add @code{vertical-step} to it. The function looks like
20771 this:
20772
20773 @findex Y-axis-column @r{Final version.}
20774 @smallexample
20775 @group
20776 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20777 (defun Y-axis-column
20778 (height width-of-label &optional vertical-step)
20779 "Construct list of labels for Y axis.
20780 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
20781 WIDTH-OF-LABEL is maximum width of label.
20782 VERTICAL-STEP, an option, is a positive integer
20783 that specifies how much a Y axis label increments
20784 for each line. For example, a step of 5 means
20785 that each line is five units of the graph."
20786 @end group
20787 @group
20788 (let (Y-axis
20789 (number-per-line (or vertical-step 1)))
20790 (while (> height 1)
20791 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20792 @end group
20793 @group
20794 ;; @r{Insert label.}
20795 (setq Y-axis
20796 (cons
20797 (Y-axis-element
20798 (* height number-per-line)
20799 width-of-label)
20800 Y-axis))
20801 @end group
20802 @group
20803 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
20804 (setq Y-axis
20805 (cons
20806 (make-string width-of-label ? )
20807 Y-axis)))
20808 (setq height (1- height)))
20809 @end group
20810 @group
20811 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
20812 (setq Y-axis (cons (Y-axis-element
20813 (or vertical-step 1)
20814 width-of-label)
20815 Y-axis))
20816 (nreverse Y-axis)))
20817 @end group
20818 @end smallexample
20819
20820 The values for the maximum height of graph and the width of a symbol
20821 are computed by @code{print-graph} in its @code{let} expression; so
20822 @code{graph-body-print} must be changed to accept them.
20823
20824 @findex graph-body-print @r{Final version.}
20825 @smallexample
20826 @group
20827 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20828 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list height symbol-width)
20829 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
20830 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
20831 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
20832 SYMBOL-WIDTH is number of each column."
20833 @end group
20834 @group
20835 (let (from-position)
20836 (while numbers-list
20837 (setq from-position (point))
20838 (insert-rectangle
20839 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
20840 (goto-char from-position)
20841 (forward-char symbol-width)
20842 @end group
20843 @group
20844 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
20845 (sit-for 0)
20846 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
20847 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
20848 (forward-line height)
20849 (insert "\n")))
20850 @end group
20851 @end smallexample
20852
20853 @need 1250
20854 Finally, the code for the @code{print-graph} function:
20855
20856 @findex print-graph @r{Final version.}
20857 @smallexample
20858 @group
20859 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20860 (defun print-graph
20861 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step)
20862 "Print labelled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
20863 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
20864 @end group
20865
20866 @group
20867 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
20868 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
20869 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
20870 each row is five units."
20871 @end group
20872 @group
20873 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
20874 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
20875 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
20876 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
20877 @end group
20878 @group
20879 (height-of-top-line
20880 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20881 height
20882 ;; @r{else}
20883 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20884 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
20885 @end group
20886 @group
20887 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
20888 (full-Y-label-width
20889 (length
20890 @end group
20891 @group
20892 (concat
20893 (number-to-string
20894 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
20895 Y-axis-tic))))
20896 @end group
20897
20898 @group
20899 (print-Y-axis
20900 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
20901 @end group
20902 @group
20903 (graph-body-print
20904 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
20905 (print-X-axis numbers-list)))
20906 @end group
20907 @end smallexample
20908
20909 @node Test print-graph, Graphing words in defuns, The final version, Print Whole Graph
20910 @appendixsubsec Testing @code{print-graph}
20911
20912 @need 1250
20913 We can test the @code{print-graph} function with a short list of numbers:
20914
20915 @enumerate
20916 @item
20917 Install the final versions of @code{Y-axis-column},
20918 @code{graph-body-print}, and @code{print-graph} (in addition to the
20919 rest of the code.)
20920
20921 @item
20922 Copy the following expression:
20923
20924 @smallexample
20925 (print-graph '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1))
20926 @end smallexample
20927
20928 @item
20929 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20930 want the axis labels to start.
20931
20932 @item
20933 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20934
20935 @item
20936 Yank the test expression into the minibuffer
20937 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20938
20939 @item
20940 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20941 @end enumerate
20942
20943 @need 1250
20944 Emacs will print a graph that looks like this:
20945
20946 @smallexample
20947 @group
20948 10 -
20949
20950
20951 *
20952 ** *
20953 5 - **** *
20954 **** ***
20955 * *********
20956 ************
20957 1 - *************
20958
20959 | | | |
20960 1 5 10 15
20961 @end group
20962 @end smallexample
20963
20964 @need 1200
20965 On the other hand, if you pass @code{print-graph} a
20966 @code{vertical-step} value of 2, by evaluating this expression:
20967
20968 @smallexample
20969 (print-graph '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1) 2)
20970 @end smallexample
20971
20972 @need 1250
20973 @noindent
20974 The graph looks like this:
20975
20976 @smallexample
20977 @group
20978 20 -
20979
20980
20981 *
20982 ** *
20983 10 - **** *
20984 **** ***
20985 * *********
20986 ************
20987 2 - *************
20988
20989 | | | |
20990 1 5 10 15
20991 @end group
20992 @end smallexample
20993
20994 @noindent
20995 (A question: is the `2' on the bottom of the vertical axis a bug or a
20996 feature? If you think it is a bug, and should be a `1' instead, (or
20997 even a `0'), you can modify the sources.)
20998
20999 @node Graphing words in defuns, lambda, Test print-graph, Print Whole Graph
21000 @appendixsubsec Graphing Numbers of Words and Symbols
21001
21002 Now for the graph for which all this code was written: a graph that
21003 shows how many function definitions contain fewer than 10 words and
21004 symbols, how many contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how
21005 many contain between 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
21006
21007 This is a multi-step process. First make sure you have loaded all the
21008 requisite code.
21009
21010 @need 1500
21011 It is a good idea to reset the value of @code{top-of-ranges} in case
21012 you have set it to some different value. You can evaluate the
21013 following:
21014
21015 @smallexample
21016 @group
21017 (setq top-of-ranges
21018 '(10 20 30 40 50
21019 60 70 80 90 100
21020 110 120 130 140 150
21021 160 170 180 190 200
21022 210 220 230 240 250
21023 260 270 280 290 300)
21024 @end group
21025 @end smallexample
21026
21027 @noindent
21028 Next create a list of the number of words and symbols in each range.
21029
21030 @need 1500
21031 @noindent
21032 Evaluate the following:
21033
21034 @smallexample
21035 @group
21036 (setq list-for-graph
21037 (defuns-per-range
21038 (sort
21039 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
21040 (directory-files "/usr/local/emacs/lisp"
21041 t ".+el$"))
21042 '<)
21043 top-of-ranges))
21044 @end group
21045 @end smallexample
21046
21047 @noindent
21048 On my old machine, this took about an hour. It looked though 303 Lisp
21049 files in my copy of Emacs version 19.23. After all that computing,
21050 the @code{list-for-graph} had this value:
21051
21052 @smallexample
21053 @group
21054 (537 1027 955 785 594 483 349 292 224 199 166 120 116 99
21055 90 80 67 48 52 45 41 33 28 26 25 20 12 28 11 13 220)
21056 @end group
21057 @end smallexample
21058
21059 @noindent
21060 This means that my copy of Emacs had 537 function definitions with
21061 fewer than 10 words or symbols in them, 1,027 function definitions
21062 with 10 to 19 words or symbols in them, 955 function definitions with
21063 20 to 29 words or symbols in them, and so on.
21064
21065 Clearly, just by looking at this list we can see that most function
21066 definitions contain ten to thirty words and symbols.
21067
21068 Now for printing. We do @emph{not} want to print a graph that is
21069 1,030 lines high @dots{} Instead, we should print a graph that is
21070 fewer than twenty-five lines high. A graph that height can be
21071 displayed on almost any monitor, and easily printed on a sheet of paper.
21072
21073 This means that each value in @code{list-for-graph} must be reduced to
21074 one-fiftieth its present value.
21075
21076 Here is a short function to do just that, using two functions we have
21077 not yet seen, @code{mapcar} and @code{lambda}.
21078
21079 @smallexample
21080 @group
21081 (defun one-fiftieth (full-range)
21082 "Return list, each number one-fiftieth of previous."
21083 (mapcar '(lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21084 @end group
21085 @end smallexample
21086
21087 @node lambda, mapcar, Graphing words in defuns, Print Whole Graph
21088 @appendixsubsec A @code{lambda} Expression: Useful Anonymity
21089 @cindex Anonymous function
21090 @findex lambda
21091
21092 @code{lambda} is the symbol for an anonymous function, a function
21093 without a name. Every time you use an anonymous function, you need to
21094 include its whole body.
21095
21096 @need 1250
21097 @noindent
21098 Thus,
21099
21100 @smallexample
21101 (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50))
21102 @end smallexample
21103
21104 @noindent
21105 is a function definition that says `return the value resulting from
21106 dividing whatever is passed to me as @code{arg} by 50'.
21107
21108 @need 1200
21109 Earlier, for example, we had a function @code{multiply-by-seven}; it
21110 multiplied its argument by 7. This function is similar, except it
21111 divides its argument by 50; and, it has no name. The anonymous
21112 equivalent of @code{multiply-by-seven} is:
21113
21114 @smallexample
21115 (lambda (number) (* 7 number))
21116 @end smallexample
21117
21118 @noindent
21119 (@xref{defun, , The @code{defun} Special Form}.)
21120
21121 @need 1250
21122 @noindent
21123 If we want to multiply 3 by 7, we can write:
21124
21125 @c !!! Clear print-postscript-figures if the computer formatting this
21126 @c document is too small and cannot handle all the diagrams and figures.
21127 @c clear print-postscript-figures
21128 @c set print-postscript-figures
21129 @c lambda example diagram #1
21130 @ifnottex
21131 @smallexample
21132 @group
21133 (multiply-by-seven 3)
21134 \_______________/ ^
21135 | |
21136 function argument
21137 @end group
21138 @end smallexample
21139 @end ifnottex
21140 @ifset print-postscript-figures
21141 @sp 1
21142 @tex
21143 @center @image{lambda-1}
21144 %%%% old method of including an image
21145 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
21146 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/lambda-1.eps}}
21147 % \catcode`\@=0 %
21148 @end tex
21149 @sp 1
21150 @end ifset
21151 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
21152 @iftex
21153 @smallexample
21154 @group
21155 (multiply-by-seven 3)
21156 \_______________/ ^
21157 | |
21158 function argument
21159 @end group
21160 @end smallexample
21161 @end iftex
21162 @end ifclear
21163
21164 @noindent
21165 This expression returns 21.
21166
21167 @need 1250
21168 @noindent
21169 Similarly, we can write:
21170
21171 @c lambda example diagram #2
21172 @ifnottex
21173 @smallexample
21174 @group
21175 ((lambda (number) (* 7 number)) 3)
21176 \____________________________/ ^
21177 | |
21178 anonymous function argument
21179 @end group
21180 @end smallexample
21181 @end ifnottex
21182 @ifset print-postscript-figures
21183 @sp 1
21184 @tex
21185 @center @image{lambda-2}
21186 %%%% old method of including an image
21187 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
21188 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/lambda-2.eps}}
21189 % \catcode`\@=0 %
21190 @end tex
21191 @sp 1
21192 @end ifset
21193 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
21194 @iftex
21195 @smallexample
21196 @group
21197 ((lambda (number) (* 7 number)) 3)
21198 \____________________________/ ^
21199 | |
21200 anonymous function argument
21201 @end group
21202 @end smallexample
21203 @end iftex
21204 @end ifclear
21205
21206 @need 1250
21207 @noindent
21208 If we want to divide 100 by 50, we can write:
21209
21210 @c lambda example diagram #3
21211 @ifnottex
21212 @smallexample
21213 @group
21214 ((lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) 100)
21215 \______________________/ \_/
21216 | |
21217 anonymous function argument
21218 @end group
21219 @end smallexample
21220 @end ifnottex
21221 @ifset print-postscript-figures
21222 @sp 1
21223 @tex
21224 @center @image{lambda-3}
21225 %%%% old method of including an image
21226 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
21227 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/lambda-3.eps}}
21228 % \catcode`\@=0 %
21229 @end tex
21230 @sp 1
21231 @end ifset
21232 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
21233 @iftex
21234 @smallexample
21235 @group
21236 ((lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) 100)
21237 \______________________/ \_/
21238 | |
21239 anonymous function argument
21240 @end group
21241 @end smallexample
21242 @end iftex
21243 @end ifclear
21244
21245 @noindent
21246 This expression returns 2. The 100 is passed to the function, which
21247 divides that number by 50.
21248
21249 @xref{Lambda Expressions, , Lambda Expressions, elisp, The GNU Emacs
21250 Lisp Reference Manual}, for more about @code{lambda}. Lisp and lambda
21251 expressions derive from the Lambda Calculus.
21252
21253 @node mapcar, Another Bug, lambda, Print Whole Graph
21254 @appendixsubsec The @code{mapcar} Function
21255 @findex mapcar
21256
21257 @code{mapcar} is a function that calls its first argument with each
21258 element of its second argument, in turn. The second argument must be
21259 a sequence.
21260
21261 The @samp{map} part of the name comes from the mathematical phrase,
21262 `mapping over a domain', meaning to apply a function to each of the
21263 elements in a domain. The mathematical phrase is based on the
21264 metaphor of a surveyor walking, one step at a time, over an area he is
21265 mapping. And @samp{car}, of course, comes from the Lisp notion of the
21266 first of a list.
21267
21268 @need 1250
21269 @noindent
21270 For example,
21271
21272 @smallexample
21273 @group
21274 (mapcar '1+ '(2 4 6))
21275 @result{} (3 5 7)
21276 @end group
21277 @end smallexample
21278
21279 @noindent
21280 The function @code{1+} which adds one to its argument, is executed on
21281 @emph{each} element of the list, and a new list is returned.
21282
21283 Contrast this with @code{apply}, which applies its first argument to
21284 all the remaining.
21285 (@xref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph}, for a explanation of
21286 @code{apply}.)
21287
21288 @need 1250
21289 In the definition of @code{one-fiftieth}, the first argument is the
21290 anonymous function:
21291
21292 @smallexample
21293 (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50))
21294 @end smallexample
21295
21296 @noindent
21297 and the second argument is @code{full-range}, which will be bound to
21298 @code{list-for-graph}.
21299
21300 @need 1250
21301 The whole expression looks like this:
21302
21303 @smallexample
21304 (mapcar '(lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21305 @end smallexample
21306
21307 @xref{Mapping Functions, , Mapping Functions, elisp, The GNU Emacs
21308 Lisp Reference Manual}, for more about @code{mapcar}.
21309
21310 Using the @code{one-fiftieth} function, we can generate a list in
21311 which each element is one-fiftieth the size of the corresponding
21312 element in @code{list-for-graph}.
21313
21314 @smallexample
21315 @group
21316 (setq fiftieth-list-for-graph
21317 (one-fiftieth list-for-graph))
21318 @end group
21319 @end smallexample
21320
21321 @need 1250
21322 The resulting list looks like this:
21323
21324 @smallexample
21325 @group
21326 (10 20 19 15 11 9 6 5 4 3 3 2 2
21327 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4)
21328 @end group
21329 @end smallexample
21330
21331 @noindent
21332 This, we are almost ready to print! (We also notice the loss of
21333 information: many of the higher ranges are 0, meaning that fewer than
21334 50 defuns had that many words or symbols---but not necessarily meaning
21335 that none had that many words or symbols.)
21336
21337 @node Another Bug, Final printed graph, mapcar, Print Whole Graph
21338 @appendixsubsec Another Bug @dots{} Most Insidious
21339 @cindex Bug, most insidious type
21340 @cindex Insidious type of bug
21341
21342 I said `almost ready to print'! Of course, there is a bug in the
21343 @code{print-graph} function @dots{} It has a @code{vertical-step}
21344 option, but not a @code{horizontal-step} option. The
21345 @code{top-of-range} scale goes from 10 to 300 by tens. But the
21346 @code{print-graph} function will print only by ones.
21347
21348 This is a classic example of what some consider the most insidious
21349 type of bug, the bug of omission. This is not the kind of bug you can
21350 find by studying the code, for it is not in the code; it is an omitted
21351 feature. Your best actions are to try your program early and often;
21352 and try to arrange, as much as you can, to write code that is easy to
21353 understand and easy to change. Try to be aware, whenever you can,
21354 that whatever you have written, @emph{will} be rewritten, if not soon,
21355 eventually. A hard maxim to follow.
21356
21357 It is the @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line} function that needs the
21358 work; and then the @code{print-X-axis} and the @code{print-graph}
21359 functions need to be adapted. Not much needs to be done; there is one
21360 nicety: the numbers ought to line up under the tic marks. This takes
21361 a little thought.
21362
21363 @need 1250
21364 Here is the corrected @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}:
21365
21366 @smallexample
21367 @group
21368 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
21369 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces
21370 &optional horizontal-step)
21371 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
21372 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing)
21373 (horizontal-step (or horizontal-step 1)))
21374 @end group
21375 @group
21376 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21377 ;; @r{Delete extra leading spaces.}
21378 (delete-char
21379 (- (1-
21380 (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))))
21381 (insert (concat
21382 (make-string
21383 @end group
21384 @group
21385 ;; @r{Insert white space.}
21386 (- (* symbol-width
21387 X-axis-label-spacing)
21388 (1-
21389 (length
21390 (number-to-string horizontal-step)))
21391 2)
21392 ? )
21393 (number-to-string
21394 (* number horizontal-step))))
21395 @end group
21396 @group
21397 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
21398 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21399 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21400 (insert (X-axis-element
21401 (* number horizontal-step)))
21402 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21403 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
21404 @end group
21405 @end smallexample
21406
21407 @need 1500
21408 If you are reading this in Info, you can see the new versions of
21409 @code{print-X-axis} @code{print-graph} and evaluate them. If you are
21410 reading this in a printed book, you can see the changed lines here
21411 (the full text is too much to print).
21412
21413 @iftex
21414 @smallexample
21415 @group
21416 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21417 @dots{}
21418 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21419 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step))
21420 @end group
21421 @end smallexample
21422
21423 @smallexample
21424 @group
21425 (defun print-graph
21426 (numbers-list
21427 &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21428 @dots{}
21429 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step))
21430 @end group
21431 @end smallexample
21432 @end iftex
21433
21434 @ifnottex
21435 @smallexample
21436 @group
21437 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21438 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST.
21439 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21440 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21441 each column."
21442 @end group
21443 @group
21444 ;; Value of symbol-width and full-Y-label-width
21445 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
21446 (let* ((leading-spaces
21447 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
21448 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
21449 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
21450 (X-length (length numbers-list))
21451 @end group
21452 @group
21453 (X-tic
21454 (concat
21455 (make-string
21456 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
21457 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21458 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
21459 ? )
21460 @end group
21461 @group
21462 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
21463 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21464 (tic-number
21465 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
21466 (/ X-length tic-width)
21467 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
21468 @end group
21469
21470 @group
21471 (print-X-axis-tic-line
21472 tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
21473 (insert "\n")
21474 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21475 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step)))
21476 @end group
21477 @end smallexample
21478
21479 @smallexample
21480 @group
21481 (defun print-graph
21482 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21483 "Print labelled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21484 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21485 @end group
21486
21487 @group
21488 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21489 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
21490 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
21491 each row is five units.
21492 @end group
21493
21494 @group
21495 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21496 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21497 each column."
21498 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
21499 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
21500 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
21501 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
21502 @end group
21503 @group
21504 (height-of-top-line
21505 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21506 height
21507 ;; @r{else}
21508 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21509 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
21510 @end group
21511 @group
21512 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
21513 (full-Y-label-width
21514 (length
21515 (concat
21516 (number-to-string
21517 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
21518 Y-axis-tic))))
21519 @end group
21520 @group
21521 (print-Y-axis
21522 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
21523 (graph-body-print
21524 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
21525 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step)))
21526 @end group
21527 @end smallexample
21528 @end ifnottex
21529
21530 @c qqq
21531 @ignore
21532 Graphing Definitions Re-listed
21533
21534 @need 1250
21535 Here are all the graphing definitions in their final form:
21536
21537 @smallexample
21538 @group
21539 (defvar top-of-ranges
21540 '(10 20 30 40 50
21541 60 70 80 90 100
21542 110 120 130 140 150
21543 160 170 180 190 200
21544 210 220 230 240 250)
21545 "List specifying ranges for `defuns-per-range'.")
21546 @end group
21547
21548 @group
21549 (defvar graph-symbol "*"
21550 "String used as symbol in graph, usually an asterisk.")
21551 @end group
21552
21553 @group
21554 (defvar graph-blank " "
21555 "String used as blank in graph, usually a blank space.
21556 graph-blank must be the same number of columns wide
21557 as graph-symbol.")
21558 @end group
21559
21560 @group
21561 (defvar Y-axis-tic " - "
21562 "String that follows number in a Y axis label.")
21563 @end group
21564
21565 @group
21566 (defvar Y-axis-label-spacing 5
21567 "Number of lines from one Y axis label to next.")
21568 @end group
21569
21570 @group
21571 (defvar X-axis-tic-symbol "|"
21572 "String to insert to point to a column in X axis.")
21573 @end group
21574
21575 @group
21576 (defvar X-axis-label-spacing
21577 (if (boundp 'graph-blank)
21578 (* 5 (length graph-blank)) 5)
21579 "Number of units from one X axis label to next.")
21580 @end group
21581 @end smallexample
21582
21583 @smallexample
21584 @group
21585 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
21586 "Return the number of words and symbols in a defun."
21587 (beginning-of-defun)
21588 (let ((count 0)
21589 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
21590 @end group
21591
21592 @group
21593 (while
21594 (and (< (point) end)
21595 (re-search-forward
21596 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
21597 end t))
21598 (setq count (1+ count)))
21599 count))
21600 @end group
21601 @end smallexample
21602
21603 @smallexample
21604 @group
21605 (defun lengths-list-file (filename)
21606 "Return list of definitions' lengths within FILE.
21607 The returned list is a list of numbers.
21608 Each number is the number of words or
21609 symbols in one function definition."
21610 @end group
21611
21612 @group
21613 (message "Working on `%s' ... " filename)
21614 (save-excursion
21615 (let ((buffer (find-file-noselect filename))
21616 (lengths-list))
21617 (set-buffer buffer)
21618 (setq buffer-read-only t)
21619 (widen)
21620 (goto-char (point-min))
21621 @end group
21622
21623 @group
21624 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
21625 (setq lengths-list
21626 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
21627 (kill-buffer buffer)
21628 lengths-list)))
21629 @end group
21630 @end smallexample
21631
21632 @smallexample
21633 @group
21634 (defun lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
21635 "Return list of lengths of defuns in LIST-OF-FILES."
21636 (let (lengths-list)
21637 ;;; @r{true-or-false-test}
21638 (while list-of-files
21639 (setq lengths-list
21640 (append
21641 lengths-list
21642 @end group
21643 @group
21644 ;;; @r{Generate a lengths' list.}
21645 (lengths-list-file
21646 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))))
21647 ;;; @r{Make files' list shorter.}
21648 (setq list-of-files (cdr list-of-files)))
21649 ;;; @r{Return final value of lengths' list.}
21650 lengths-list))
21651 @end group
21652 @end smallexample
21653
21654 @smallexample
21655 @group
21656 (defun defuns-per-range (sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
21657 "SORTED-LENGTHS defuns in each TOP-OF-RANGES range."
21658 (let ((top-of-range (car top-of-ranges))
21659 (number-within-range 0)
21660 defuns-per-range-list)
21661 @end group
21662
21663 @group
21664 ;; @r{Outer loop.}
21665 (while top-of-ranges
21666
21667 ;; @r{Inner loop.}
21668 (while (and
21669 ;; @r{Need number for numeric test.}
21670 (car sorted-lengths)
21671 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
21672
21673 ;; @r{Count number of definitions within current range.}
21674 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
21675 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
21676 @end group
21677
21678 @group
21679 ;; @r{Exit inner loop but remain within outer loop.}
21680
21681 (setq defuns-per-range-list
21682 (cons number-within-range defuns-per-range-list))
21683 (setq number-within-range 0) ; @r{Reset count to zero.}
21684
21685 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
21686 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges))
21687 ;; @r{Specify next top of range value.}
21688 (setq top-of-range (car top-of-ranges)))
21689 @end group
21690
21691 @group
21692 ;; @r{Exit outer loop and count the number of defuns larger than}
21693 ;; @r{ the largest top-of-range value.}
21694 (setq defuns-per-range-list
21695 (cons
21696 (length sorted-lengths)
21697 defuns-per-range-list))
21698
21699 ;; @r{Return a list of the number of definitions within each range,}
21700 ;; @r{ smallest to largest.}
21701 (nreverse defuns-per-range-list)))
21702 @end group
21703 @end smallexample
21704
21705 @smallexample
21706 @group
21707 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
21708 "Return list of MAX-GRAPH-HEIGHT strings;
21709 ACTUAL-HEIGHT are graph-symbols.
21710 The graph-symbols are contiguous entries at the end
21711 of the list.
21712 The list will be inserted as one column of a graph.
21713 The strings are either graph-blank or graph-symbol."
21714 @end group
21715
21716 @group
21717 (let ((insert-list nil)
21718 (number-of-top-blanks
21719 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
21720
21721 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-symbols}.}
21722 (while (> actual-height 0)
21723 (setq insert-list (cons graph-symbol insert-list))
21724 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
21725 @end group
21726
21727 @group
21728 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-blanks}.}
21729 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
21730 (setq insert-list (cons graph-blank insert-list))
21731 (setq number-of-top-blanks
21732 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
21733
21734 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
21735 insert-list))
21736 @end group
21737 @end smallexample
21738
21739 @smallexample
21740 @group
21741 (defun Y-axis-element (number full-Y-label-width)
21742 "Construct a NUMBERed label element.
21743 A numbered element looks like this ` 5 - ',
21744 and is padded as needed so all line up with
21745 the element for the largest number."
21746 @end group
21747 @group
21748 (let* ((leading-spaces
21749 (- full-Y-label-width
21750 (length
21751 (concat (number-to-string number)
21752 Y-axis-tic)))))
21753 @end group
21754 @group
21755 (concat
21756 (make-string leading-spaces ? )
21757 (number-to-string number)
21758 Y-axis-tic)))
21759 @end group
21760 @end smallexample
21761
21762 @smallexample
21763 @group
21764 (defun print-Y-axis
21765 (height full-Y-label-width &optional vertical-step)
21766 "Insert Y axis by HEIGHT and FULL-Y-LABEL-WIDTH.
21767 Height must be the maximum height of the graph.
21768 Full width is the width of the highest label element.
21769 Optionally, print according to VERTICAL-STEP."
21770 @end group
21771 @group
21772 ;; Value of height and full-Y-label-width
21773 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
21774 (let ((start (point)))
21775 (insert-rectangle
21776 (Y-axis-column height full-Y-label-width vertical-step))
21777 @end group
21778 @group
21779 ;; @r{Place point ready for inserting graph.}
21780 (goto-char start)
21781 ;; @r{Move point forward by value of} full-Y-label-width
21782 (forward-char full-Y-label-width)))
21783 @end group
21784 @end smallexample
21785
21786 @smallexample
21787 @group
21788 (defun print-X-axis-tic-line
21789 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces X-axis-tic-element)
21790 "Print ticks for X axis."
21791 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21792 (insert X-axis-tic-symbol) ; @r{Under first column.}
21793 @end group
21794 @group
21795 ;; @r{Insert second tic in the right spot.}
21796 (insert (concat
21797 (make-string
21798 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21799 ;; @r{Insert white space up to second tic symbol.}
21800 (* 2 (length X-axis-tic-symbol)))
21801 ? )
21802 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21803 @end group
21804 @group
21805 ;; @r{Insert remaining ticks.}
21806 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21807 (insert X-axis-tic-element)
21808 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics))))
21809 @end group
21810 @end smallexample
21811
21812 @smallexample
21813 @group
21814 (defun X-axis-element (number)
21815 "Construct a numbered X axis element."
21816 (let ((leading-spaces
21817 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21818 (length (number-to-string number)))))
21819 (concat (make-string leading-spaces ? )
21820 (number-to-string number))))
21821 @end group
21822 @end smallexample
21823
21824 @smallexample
21825 @group
21826 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list height symbol-width)
21827 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21828 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21829 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
21830 SYMBOL-WIDTH is number of each column."
21831 @end group
21832 @group
21833 (let (from-position)
21834 (while numbers-list
21835 (setq from-position (point))
21836 (insert-rectangle
21837 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
21838 (goto-char from-position)
21839 (forward-char symbol-width)
21840 @end group
21841 @group
21842 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
21843 (sit-for 0)
21844 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
21845 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
21846 (forward-line height)
21847 (insert "\n")))
21848 @end group
21849 @end smallexample
21850
21851 @smallexample
21852 @group
21853 (defun Y-axis-column
21854 (height width-of-label &optional vertical-step)
21855 "Construct list of labels for Y axis.
21856 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
21857 WIDTH-OF-LABEL is maximum width of label.
21858 @end group
21859 @group
21860 VERTICAL-STEP, an option, is a positive integer
21861 that specifies how much a Y axis label increments
21862 for each line. For example, a step of 5 means
21863 that each line is five units of the graph."
21864 (let (Y-axis
21865 (number-per-line (or vertical-step 1)))
21866 @end group
21867 @group
21868 (while (> height 1)
21869 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21870 ;; @r{Insert label.}
21871 (setq Y-axis
21872 (cons
21873 (Y-axis-element
21874 (* height number-per-line)
21875 width-of-label)
21876 Y-axis))
21877 @end group
21878 @group
21879 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
21880 (setq Y-axis
21881 (cons
21882 (make-string width-of-label ? )
21883 Y-axis)))
21884 (setq height (1- height)))
21885 @end group
21886 @group
21887 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
21888 (setq Y-axis (cons (Y-axis-element
21889 (or vertical-step 1)
21890 width-of-label)
21891 Y-axis))
21892 (nreverse Y-axis)))
21893 @end group
21894 @end smallexample
21895
21896 @smallexample
21897 @group
21898 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
21899 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces
21900 &optional horizontal-step)
21901 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
21902 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing)
21903 (horizontal-step (or horizontal-step 1)))
21904 @end group
21905 @group
21906 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21907 ;; line up number
21908 (delete-char (- (1- (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))))
21909 (insert (concat
21910 (make-string
21911 ;; @r{Insert white space up to next number.}
21912 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21913 (1- (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))
21914 2)
21915 ? )
21916 (number-to-string (* number horizontal-step))))
21917 @end group
21918 @group
21919 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
21920 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21921 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21922 (insert (X-axis-element (* number horizontal-step)))
21923 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21924 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
21925 @end group
21926 @end smallexample
21927
21928 @smallexample
21929 @group
21930 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21931 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST.
21932 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21933 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21934 each column."
21935 @end group
21936 @group
21937 ;; Value of symbol-width and full-Y-label-width
21938 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
21939 (let* ((leading-spaces
21940 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
21941 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
21942 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
21943 (X-length (length numbers-list))
21944 @end group
21945 @group
21946 (X-tic
21947 (concat
21948 (make-string
21949 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
21950 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21951 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
21952 ? )
21953 @end group
21954 @group
21955 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
21956 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21957 (tic-number
21958 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
21959 (/ X-length tic-width)
21960 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
21961 @end group
21962
21963 @group
21964 (print-X-axis-tic-line
21965 tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
21966 (insert "\n")
21967 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21968 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step)))
21969 @end group
21970 @end smallexample
21971
21972 @smallexample
21973 @group
21974 (defun one-fiftieth (full-range)
21975 "Return list, each number of which is 1/50th previous."
21976 (mapcar '(lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21977 @end group
21978 @end smallexample
21979
21980 @smallexample
21981 @group
21982 (defun print-graph
21983 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21984 "Print labelled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21985 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21986 @end group
21987
21988 @group
21989 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21990 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
21991 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
21992 each row is five units.
21993 @end group
21994
21995 @group
21996 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21997 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21998 each column."
21999 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
22000 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
22001 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
22002 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
22003 @end group
22004 @group
22005 (height-of-top-line
22006 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
22007 height
22008 ;; @r{else}
22009 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
22010 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
22011 @end group
22012 @group
22013 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
22014 (full-Y-label-width
22015 (length
22016 (concat
22017 (number-to-string
22018 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
22019 Y-axis-tic))))
22020 @end group
22021 @group
22022
22023 (print-Y-axis
22024 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
22025 (graph-body-print
22026 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
22027 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step)))
22028 @end group
22029 @end smallexample
22030 @c qqq
22031 @end ignore
22032
22033 @page
22034 @node Final printed graph, , Another Bug, Print Whole Graph
22035 @appendixsubsec The Printed Graph
22036
22037 When made and installed, you can call the @code{print-graph} command
22038 like this:
22039 @sp 1
22040
22041 @smallexample
22042 @group
22043 (print-graph fiftieth-list-for-graph 50 10)
22044 @end group
22045 @end smallexample
22046 @sp 1
22047
22048 @noindent
22049 Here is the graph:
22050 @sp 2
22051
22052 @smallexample
22053 @group
22054 1000 - *
22055 **
22056 **
22057 **
22058 **
22059 750 - ***
22060 ***
22061 ***
22062 ***
22063 ****
22064 500 - *****
22065 ******
22066 ******
22067 ******
22068 *******
22069 250 - ********
22070 ********* *
22071 *********** *
22072 ************* *
22073 50 - ***************** * *
22074 | | | | | | | |
22075 10 50 100 150 200 250 300 350
22076 @end group
22077 @end smallexample
22078
22079 @sp 2
22080
22081 @noindent
22082 The largest group of functions contain 10 -- 19 words and symbols each.
22083
22084 @node Free Software and Free Manuals, GNU Free Documentation License, Full Graph, Top
22085 @appendix Free Software and Free Manuals
22086
22087 @strong{by Richard M. Stallman}
22088 @sp 1
22089
22090 The biggest deficiency in free operating systems is not in the
22091 software---it is the lack of good free manuals that we can include in
22092 these systems. Many of our most important programs do not come with
22093 full manuals. Documentation is an essential part of any software
22094 package; when an important free software package does not come with a
22095 free manual, that is a major gap. We have many such gaps today.
22096
22097 Once upon a time, many years ago, I thought I would learn Perl. I got
22098 a copy of a free manual, but I found it hard to read. When I asked
22099 Perl users about alternatives, they told me that there were better
22100 introductory manuals---but those were not free.
22101
22102 Why was this? The authors of the good manuals had written them for
22103 O'Reilly Associates, which published them with restrictive terms---no
22104 copying, no modification, source files not available---which exclude
22105 them from the free software community.
22106
22107 That wasn't the first time this sort of thing has happened, and (to
22108 our community's great loss) it was far from the last. Proprietary
22109 manual publishers have enticed a great many authors to restrict their
22110 manuals since then. Many times I have heard a GNU user eagerly tell me
22111 about a manual that he is writing, with which he expects to help the
22112 GNU project---and then had my hopes dashed, as he proceeded to explain
22113 that he had signed a contract with a publisher that would restrict it
22114 so that we cannot use it.
22115
22116 Given that writing good English is a rare skill among programmers, we
22117 can ill afford to lose manuals this way.
22118
22119 Free documentation, like free software, is a matter of freedom, not
22120 price. The problem with these manuals was not that O'Reilly Associates
22121 charged a price for printed copies---that in itself is fine. The Free
22122 Software Foundation @uref{http://shop.fsf.org, sells printed copies} of
22123 free @uref{http://www.gnu.org/doc/doc.html, GNU manuals}, too.
22124 But GNU manuals are available in source code form, while these manuals
22125 are available only on paper. GNU manuals come with permission to copy
22126 and modify; the Perl manuals do not. These restrictions are the
22127 problems.
22128
22129 The criterion for a free manual is pretty much the same as for free
22130 software: it is a matter of giving all users certain
22131 freedoms. Redistribution (including commercial redistribution) must be
22132 permitted, so that the manual can accompany every copy of the program,
22133 on-line or on paper. Permission for modification is crucial too.
22134
22135 As a general rule, I don't believe that it is essential for people to
22136 have permission to modify all sorts of articles and books. The issues
22137 for writings are not necessarily the same as those for software. For
22138 example, I don't think you or I are obliged to give permission to
22139 modify articles like this one, which describe our actions and our
22140 views.
22141
22142 But there is a particular reason why the freedom to modify is crucial
22143 for documentation for free software. When people exercise their right
22144 to modify the software, and add or change its features, if they are
22145 conscientious they will change the manual too---so they can provide
22146 accurate and usable documentation with the modified program. A manual
22147 which forbids programmers to be conscientious and finish the job, or
22148 more precisely requires them to write a new manual from scratch if
22149 they change the program, does not fill our community's needs.
22150
22151 While a blanket prohibition on modification is unacceptable, some
22152 kinds of limits on the method of modification pose no problem. For
22153 example, requirements to preserve the original author's copyright
22154 notice, the distribution terms, or the list of authors, are ok. It is
22155 also no problem to require modified versions to include notice that
22156 they were modified, even to have entire sections that may not be
22157 deleted or changed, as long as these sections deal with nontechnical
22158 topics. (Some GNU manuals have them.)
22159
22160 These kinds of restrictions are not a problem because, as a practical
22161 matter, they don't stop the conscientious programmer from adapting the
22162 manual to fit the modified program. In other words, they don't block
22163 the free software community from making full use of the manual.
22164
22165 However, it must be possible to modify all the technical content of
22166 the manual, and then distribute the result in all the usual media,
22167 through all the usual channels; otherwise, the restrictions do block
22168 the community, the manual is not free, and so we need another manual.
22169
22170 Unfortunately, it is often hard to find someone to write another
22171 manual when a proprietary manual exists. The obstacle is that many
22172 users think that a proprietary manual is good enough---so they don't
22173 see the need to write a free manual. They do not see that the free
22174 operating system has a gap that needs filling.
22175
22176 Why do users think that proprietary manuals are good enough? Some have
22177 not considered the issue. I hope this article will do something to
22178 change that.
22179
22180 Other users consider proprietary manuals acceptable for the same
22181 reason so many people consider proprietary software acceptable: they
22182 judge in purely practical terms, not using freedom as a
22183 criterion. These people are entitled to their opinions, but since
22184 those opinions spring from values which do not include freedom, they
22185 are no guide for those of us who do value freedom.
22186
22187 Please spread the word about this issue. We continue to lose manuals
22188 to proprietary publishing. If we spread the word that proprietary
22189 manuals are not sufficient, perhaps the next person who wants to help
22190 GNU by writing documentation will realize, before it is too late, that
22191 he must above all make it free.
22192
22193 We can also encourage commercial publishers to sell free, copylefted
22194 manuals instead of proprietary ones. One way you can help this is to
22195 check the distribution terms of a manual before you buy it, and prefer
22196 copylefted manuals to non-copylefted ones.
22197
22198 @sp 2
22199 @noindent
22200 Note: The Free Software Foundation maintains a page on its Web site
22201 that lists free books available from other publishers:@*
22202 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/doc/other-free-books.html}
22203
22204 @node GNU Free Documentation License, Index, Free Software and Free Manuals, Top
22205 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
22206
22207 @cindex FDL, GNU Free Documentation License
22208 @include doclicense.texi
22209
22210 @node Index, About the Author, GNU Free Documentation License, Top
22211 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
22212 @unnumbered Index
22213
22214 @ignore
22215 MENU ENTRY: NODE NAME.
22216 @end ignore
22217
22218 @printindex cp
22219
22220 @iftex
22221 @c Place biographical information on right-hand (verso) page
22222
22223 @tex
22224 \par\vfill\supereject
22225 \ifodd\pageno
22226 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
22227 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
22228 %\page\hbox{}\page
22229 \else
22230 % \par\vfill\supereject
22231 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
22232 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
22233 %\page\hbox{}%\page
22234 %\page\hbox{}%\page
22235 \fi
22236 @end tex
22237
22238 @c page
22239 @w{ }
22240
22241 @c ================ Biographical information ================
22242
22243 @w{ }
22244 @sp 8
22245 @center About the Author
22246 @sp 1
22247 @end iftex
22248
22249 @ifnottex
22250 @node About the Author, , Index, Top
22251 @unnumbered About the Author
22252 @end ifnottex
22253
22254 @quotation
22255 Robert J. Chassell has worked with GNU Emacs since 1985. He writes
22256 and edits, teaches Emacs and Emacs Lisp, and speaks throughout the
22257 world on software freedom. Chassell was a founding Director and
22258 Treasurer of the Free Software Foundation, Inc. He is co-author of
22259 the @cite{Texinfo} manual, and has edited more than a dozen other
22260 books. He graduated from Cambridge University, in England. He has an
22261 abiding interest in social and economic history and flies his own
22262 airplane.
22263 @end quotation
22264
22265 @c @page
22266 @c @w{ }
22267 @c
22268 @c @c Prevent page number on blank verso, so eject it first.
22269 @c @tex
22270 @c \par\vfill\supereject
22271 @c @end tex
22272
22273 @c @iftex
22274 @c @headings off
22275 @c @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thistitle
22276 @c @oddheading @| @| @thispage
22277 @c @end iftex
22278
22279 @bye
22280